Simocode Manual 2007 PDF

System Manual Edition 03/2007
Totally
I n t e gr a t e d
sirius
Automation
MOTOR MANAGEMENT
SIMOCODE pro
Safety Guidelines
Table of Contents
Important Notes
System Description 1
Short Instructions for
Configuring a Reversing Starter 2
SIMOCODE pro Motor Protection 3
Motor Control 4
Monitoring Functions 5
Outputs 6
Inputs 7
System Manual
Analog Value Recording 8
3UF50 Compatibility Mode 9
Standard Functions 10
Logic Modules 11
Communication 12
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces 13
Commissioning and Servicing 14
Alarm, Faults and System
Messages 15
Tables A
Data Formats and Data Records B
Dimension Drawings C
Technical Data D
Example Circuits E
Safety and Commissioning Infor-
mation for EEx Areas F
Index
List of Abbreviations
Glossary
Order Number: 3UF7970-0AA00-0 To
Edition 03/2007
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Safety Information
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
Danger
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
Warning
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Notice
indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into account.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The device/system may only be set up and used in conjunction with this documentation. Commissioning and
operation of a device/system may only be performed out by qualified personnel. Within the context of the safety
notes in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, ground
and label devices, systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards.
Prescribed Usage
Note the following:
Warning
This device may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description and only in
connection with devices and components from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommended
by Siemens. Correct, relaible operation of the product requires proper transport, storage, positioning and assembly
as well as careful operation and maintenance.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described.
Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this
publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions.
Siemens AG Order No.: 3UF7970-0AA00-0 Copyright © Siemens AG

Automation and Drives Edition 03/2007 Technical data subject to change
Postfach 48 48
D-90437 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Table Of Contents
1 System Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

1.2 Simplifying SIMOCODE pro Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.3 Application Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.4 Check List for Selecting a Device Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.5 Overview of Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1.5.1 Protection functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1.5.2 Monitoring functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1.5.3 Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1.5.4 Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
1.5.5 Standard Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
1.5.6 Additional Signal Processing with Freely-Programmable Logic Modules. . 1-15
1.5.7 Operating, Service and Diagnostic Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
1.6 Overview of System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
1.7 Description of System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
1.7.1 Basic units (BU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
1.7.2 Operator Panel (OP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
1.7.3 Operator Panel with Display (OPD) for SIMOCODE pro V . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
1.7.4 Current Measuring Modules (IM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-67
1.7.5 Current/Voltage Measuring Modules (UM) for the
SIMOCODE pro Device Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-68
1.7.6 Decoupling Module (DCM) for Current/Voltage Measuring Modules . . . . 1-70
1.7.7 Expansion Modules for the SIMOCODE pro V Device Series . . . . . . . . 1-71
1.7.8 Configuration Information for Using an Operator Panel with Display
and/or a Decoupling Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-76
1.7.9 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-78
1.7.10 Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-80
1.8 Structural Configuration of SIMOCODE pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-82
1.8.1 Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-82
1.9 Overview of Function Blocks (Alphabetical) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-85
2 Short Instructions for Configuring a Reversing Starter . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1 Introduction and Objective of the Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

2.2 Reversing Starter with Motor Feeder and Local Control Station . . . . . . . 2-3
2.3 Parameterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.4 Extending the Reversing Starter with a Control Station via PROFIBUS DP 2-10
3 Motor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . 3-2

3.2 Overload Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . 3-5
3.3 Unbalance Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . 3-13
3.4 Stalled Rotor Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . 3-14
3.5 Thermistor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . 3-15
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB631 6050-22 DS 02 i
Table Of Contents
4 Motor Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1 Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. . 4-2

4.1.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. . 4-2
4.1.2 Operating Modes and Operating Mode Selectors . . . . . . .. .. .. .. . 4-5
4.1.3 Releases and Enabled Control Command . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. . 4-7
4.1.4 Control Station Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. . 4-9
4.2 Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. . 4-10
4.2.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. . 4-10
4.2.2 General Settings and Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. . 4-15
4.2.3 "Overload Relay" Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. . 4-19
4.2.4 "Direct Starter" Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. . 4-20
4.2.5 "Reversing Starter" Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. . 4-22
4.2.6 "Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB)" Control Function . . .. .. .. .. . 4-25
4.2.7 "Star-delta Starter" Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. . 4-27
4.2.8 "Star-Delta Reversing Starter" Control Function . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. . 4-30
4.2.9 "Dahlander" Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. . 4-34
4.2.10 "Dahlander Reversing Starter" Control Function. . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. . 4-37
4.2.11 "Pole-Changing Starter" Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. . 4-41
4.2.12 "Pole-Changing Reversing Starter" Control Function . . . . . .. .. .. .. . 4-44
4.2.13 "Solenoid Valve" Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. . 4-48
4.2.14 "Positioner" Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. . 4-50
4.2.15 "Soft Starter" Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. . 4-55
4.2.16 "Soft Starter with Reversing Contactor" Control Function . . .. .. .. .. . 4-57
4.3 Active Control Stations, Contactor & Lamp Controls and
Status Information for the Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
5 Monitoring Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1 Earth-Fault Monitoring . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 5-2

5.1.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 5-2
5.1.2 Internal Earth-fault Monitoring . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 5-3
5.1.3 External Earth-fault Monitoring (with Summation Current Transformer) . . 5-4
5.2 Current Limit Monitoring . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 5-5
5.2.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 5-5
5.2.2 I> (Upper Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 5-6
5.2.3 I< (Lower Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 5-7
5.3 Voltage Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 5-8
5.4 Cos Phi Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 5-10
5.5 Active Power Monitoring . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 5-12
5.6 Monitoring 0/4-20 mA. . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 5-14
5.7 Operation Monitoring . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 5-17
5.7.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 5-17
5.7.2 Motor Operating Hours Monitoring. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 5-18
5.7.3 Motor Stop Time Monitoring . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 5-18
5.7.4 Monitoring the Number of Starts . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 5-19
5.8 Analog Temperature Monitoring. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 5-21
5.9 Hysteresis for Monitoring Functions .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 5-23
SIMOCODE pro
ii GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Table Of Contents
6 Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

6.2 Basic Unit Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6.3 Operator Panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6.4 Digital Module Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
6.5 Analog Module Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6.6 Cyclic Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6.7 Acyclic Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
7 Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . 7-2

7.2 Basic Unit Inputs . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . 7-4
7.3 Operator Panel Buttons . . . . .. .. .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . 7-6
7.4 Digital Module Inputs . . . . . .. .. .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . 7-9
7.5 Temperature Module Inputs . .. .. .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . 7-11
7.6 Analog Module Inputs . . . . .. .. .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . 7-13
7.7 Cyclic Receive . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . 7-15
7.8 Acyclic Receive. . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . 7-16
8 Analog Value Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
9 3UF50 Compatibility Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
10 Standard Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
10.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . 10-2

10.2 Test/Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . 10-3
10.3 Test Position Feedback (TPF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . 10-7
10.4 External Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . 10-9
10.5 Operational Protection OFF (OPO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . 10-11
10.5.1 Response for Positioner Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . 10-11
10.5.2 Response to other Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . 10-13
10.6 Power Failure Monitoring (UVO). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . 10-14
10.7 Emergency Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . 10-16
10.8 Watchdog (Bus Monitoring, PLC/PCS Monitoring) . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . 10-17
10.9 Timestamping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . 10-19
11 Logic Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
11.1 Introduction . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 11-2

11.2 Truth Table for 3I/1O . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 11-3
11.5 Counters. . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 11-8
11.6 Timer . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 11-10
11.7 Signal Conditioner . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 11-15
11.8 Non-Volatile Elements .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 11-18
11.9 Flashing . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 11-21
11.10 Flickering . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 11-22
11.11 Limit Monitor . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 11-23
11.12 Calculators (Calculation Modules) . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 11-27
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 iii
Table Of Contents
12 Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
12.1 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

12.2 Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
12.3 Telegram Description and Data Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
12.3.1 Cyclic Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
12.3.2 Diagnosis Data and Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
12.3.3 Configuration of the Slave Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
12.4 Integration of SIMOCODE pro in the DP Master Systems . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
12.4.1 Slave Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
12.4.2 Preparing the Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
12.4.3 Integration of SIMOCODE pro as a DPV1 Slave via GSD
in the Configuration Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
12.4.4 Integration of SIMOCODE pro as SIMATIC PDM Object
(DPV-1 Slave via GSD) in STEP7-HW Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
12.4.5 Integration of SIMOCODE pro as S7 Slave via OM SIMOCODE pro . . . . 12-18
12.5 Evaluating Diagnosis Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19
12.5.1 SIMOCODE pro Integrated with GSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19
12.5.2 Integration of SIMOCODE pro in SIMATIC S7 with OM SIMOCODE ES . 12-20
12.6 Data Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22
12.7 Parameterization via PROFIBUS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23
12.7.1 SIMOCODE ES Professional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23
12.7.2 SIMATIC PDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23
12.7.3 Parameter Data During Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-24
12.8 Timestamping/Time Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-24
13 Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
13.1 General Information about Mounting and Wiring . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . 13-2

13.2 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . 13-3
13.2.1 Basic Units, Expansion Modules and Decoupling Module . . . . . .. .. . 13-3
13.2.2 Current Measuring Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . 13-4
13.2.3 Current/Voltage Measuring Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . 13-5
13.2.4 Operator Panel and Operator Panel with Display. . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . 13-6
13.2.5 Exchanging a 3UF52 Operator Panel for a 3UF720 Operator Panel .. .. . 13-8
13.3 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . 13-10
13.3.1 Basic Units, Expansion Modules and Decoupling Module . . . . . .. .. . 13-10
13.3.2 Current Measuring Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . 13-23
13.3.3 Current/Voltage Measuring Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . 13-24
13.3.4 Current Measuring with an External Current Transformer
(Interposing Transformer). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-26
13.4 System Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-29
13.4.1 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-29
13.4.2 System Interfaces on Basic Units, Expansion Modules,
Decoupling Module, Current Measuring Modules and
Current/Voltage Measuring Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-32
13.4.3 System Interfaces on the Operator Panel and the Operator Panel
with Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-35
13.5 PROFIBUS DP to a 9-Pole SUB-D Socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-39
13.6 Installation Guidelines for the PROFIBUS DP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-40
SIMOCODE pro
iv GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Table Of Contents
14 Commissioning and Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
14.1 General Information about Commissioning and Service .. .. . . .. .. . 14-2

14.2 Commissioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. .. . 14-3
14.2.1 Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. .. . 14-3
14.2.2 Setting the PROFIBUS DP Address . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. .. . 14-4
14.2.3 Diagnosis via LED Display . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. .. . 14-5
14.3 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. .. . 14-6
14.3.1 Preventive Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. .. . 14-6
14.3.2 Securing and Saving Parameters . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. .. . 14-7
14.3.3 Replacing SIMOCODE pro Components . . .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. .. . 14-9
14.3.4 Resetting the Factory Settings. . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. .. . 14-12
14.4 Error Buffer / Error Protocol Read-Out . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. .. . 14-13
15 Alarm, Fault and System Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
A Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
A.1 Active Control Stations, Contactor/Lamp Controls and Status Information

for the Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
A.2 Abbreviations and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
A.3 Socket Assignment Table - Digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
A.4 Socket Assignment Table - Analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
A.5 Detailed Events of the Slave Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14
B Data Formats and Data Records. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
B.1 Handling Data Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . B-3

B.1.1 Writing/Reading Data Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . B-3
B.1.2 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . B-4
B.1.3 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . B-4
B.2 Data Record 0/1 - S7 System Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . B-5
B.3 Data Record 63 - Analog Value Recording . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . B-7
B.4 Data Record 67 - Process Image of the Outputs . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . B-7
B.5 Data Record 69 - Process Image of the Inputs . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . B-8
B.6 Data Record 72 - Error Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . B-9
B.7 Data Record 92 - Device Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . B-10
B.8 Data Record 94 - Measured Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . B-16
B.9 Data Record 95 - Service Data / Statistical Data . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . B-17
B.10 Data Record 130 - Basic Device Parameters 1 . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . B-18
B.11 Data Record 131 - Basic Device Parameter 2 (Plug) . . . .. .. . . .. .. . B-23
B.12 Data Record 132 - Extended Device Parameter 1 . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . B-27
B.13 Data Record 133 - Extended Device Parameter 2 (Plug) .. .. . . .. .. . B-33
B.14 Data Record 139 - Marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . B-36
B.15 Data Record 160 - Communication Parameters . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . B-37
B.16 Data Record 165 - Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . B-37
B.17 Data Record 202 - Acyclic Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . B-38
B.18 Data Record 203 - Acyclic Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . B-39
B.19 Data Record 224 - Password Protection . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . B-40
B.20 Assignment of Cyclic Receive and Send Data
for Predefined Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-41
B.20.1 Overload Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-41
B.20.2 Direct Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-42
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 v
Table Of Contents
B.20.3 Reversing Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . B-43

B.20.4 Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) . .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . B-44
B.20.5 Star-Delta Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . B-45
B.20.6 Star-Delta Reversing Starter . . . . . . . .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . B-46
B.20.7 Dahlander . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . B-47
B.20.8 Dahlander Reversing Starter . . . . . . . .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . B-48
B.20.9 Pole-Changing Starter . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . B-49
B.20.10 Pole-Changing Reversing Starter . . . . .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . B-50
B.20.11 Solenoid Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . B-51
B.20.12 Positioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . B-52
B.20.13 Soft Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . B-53
B.20.14 Soft Starter with Reversing Contactor . .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . B-54
C Dimension Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
C.1 3UF70 Basic Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . C-2

C.1.1 SIMOCODE pro C 3UF7000 Basic Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . C-2
C.1.2 SIMOCODE pro V 3UF7010 Basic Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . C-2
C.2 3UF710 Current Measuring Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . C-3
C.2.1 Current Measuring Module (Through-Hole Converter)
3UF7100, 0.3 A to 3 A, 3UF7101, 2.4 A to 25 A . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. . C-3
3UF7102, 10 A to 100 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. . C-4
3UF7103, 20 A to 200 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. . C-5
C.2.4 Current Measuring Module (Bus Connection)
3UF7103, 20 A to 200 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. . C-6
3UF7104, 63 A to 630 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. . C-7
C.3 Current/Voltage Measuring Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. . C-8
C.3.1 Current/Voltage Measuring Module (Through-Hole Converter)
3UF7110, 0.3 A to 3 A, 3UF7111, 2.4 A to 25 A . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. . C-8
3UF7112, 10 A to 100 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. . C-9
3UF7113-1AA, 20 A to 200 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10
C.3.4 Current/Voltage Measuring Module (Bus Connection)
3UF7113-1BA, 20 A to 200 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11
3UF7114, 63 A to 630 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-12
C.4 3UF7200 and 3UF7210 Operator Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13
C.4.1 3UF7200 Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13
C.4.2 3UF7200 Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13
C.5 Expansion Modules / Decoupling Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-14
C.6 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-15
C.6.1 Door Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-15
C.6.2 Operator Panel Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-15
SIMOCODE pro
vi GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Table Of Contents
D Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
D.1 Common Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. . D-2

D.2 Technical Data of the Basic Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. . D-3
D.3 Technical Data of the Current Measuring Modules or
Current/Voltage Measuring Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . D-5
D.4 Technical Data of the Decoupling Module . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . D-7
D.5 Technical Data of the Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . D-8
D.5.1 Technical Data of the Digital Modules . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . D-8
D.5.2 Technical Data of the Analog Module . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . D-9
D.5.3 Technical Data of the Earth-Fault Module . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . D-10
D.5.4 Technical Data of the Temperature Module . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . D-10
D.6 Technical Data of the Operator Panels . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . D-12
D.6.1 Technical Data of the Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . D-12
D.6.2 Technical Data of the Operator Panel with Display . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . D-12
D.7 Short-Circuit Protection with Fuses for Motor Feeders
for Short-Circuit Currents up to 50 kA and 690 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-14
D.8 Typical Response Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-15
D.8.1 SIMOCODE pro C device series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-15
D.8.2 SIMOCODE pro V 1) device range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-15
E Example Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
E.1 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . E-2

E.2 "Overload Relay" Example Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . E-3
E.2.1 "Overload Relay" Circuit Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . E-4
E.2.2 "Overload Relay" Function Circuit Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . E-5
E.3 "Direct Starter" Example Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . E-6
E.3.1 "Direct Starter" Circuit Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . E-6
E.3.2 "Direct Starter" Function Circuit Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . E-7
E.4 "Reversing Starter" Example Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . E-8
E.4.1 "Reversing Starter" Circuit Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . E-8
E.4.2 "Reversing Starter" Function Circuit Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . E-9
E.5 "Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) 3VL" Example Circuit . . . . . . .. . E-10
E.5.1 "Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) 3VL" Circuit Diagram . . . . . . .. . E-10
E.5.2 "Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) 3VL" Function Circuit Diagram .. . E-11
E.6 "Star-Delta Starter" Example Circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . E-12
E.6.1 "Star-Delta Starter" Circuit Diagram (Current Measuring in Delta) . . . .. . E-12
E.6.2 "Star-Delta Starter" Function Circuit Diagram
(Current Measuring in Delta). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-13
E.6.3 "Star-Delta Starter" Circuit Diagram
(Current Measuring in Incoming Cable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-14
E.6.4 "Star-Delta Starter" Function Circuit Diagram
(Current Measuring in Incoming Cable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . E-15
E.7 "Star-Delta Reversing Starter" Example Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . E-16
E.7.1 "Star-Delta Reversing Starter" Circuit Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . E-16
E.7.2 "Star-Delta Reversing Starter" Function Circuit Diagram . . . . . . . . .. . E-17
E.8 "Dahlander" Circuit Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . E-18
E.8.1 "Dahlander" Circuit Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . E-18
E.8.2 "Dahlander" Function Circuit Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . E-19
E.9 "Dahlander Reversing Starter" Example Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . E-20
E.9.1 "Dahlander Reversing Starter" Circuit Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . E-20
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 vii
Table Of Contents
E.9.2 "Dahlander Reversing Starter" Function Circuit Diagram . . . . . . .. .. . E-21

E.10 "Pole-Changing Starter" Example Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . E-23
E.10.1 "Pole-Changing Starter" Circuit Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . E-24
E.10.2 "Pole-Changing Starter" Function Circuit Diagram . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . E-25
E.11 "Pole-Changing Reversing Starter" Example Circuit . . . . . . . . . .. .. . E-26
E.11.1 "Pole-Changing Reversing Starter" Circuit Diagram. . . . . . . . . . .. .. . E-26
E.11.2 "Pole-Changing Reversing Starter" Function Circuit Diagram . . . . .. .. . E-27
E.12 "Solenoid Valve" Example Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . E-29
E.12.1 "Solenoid Valve" Circuit Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . E-30
E.12.2 "Solenoid Valve" Function Circuit Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . E-31
E.13 "Positioner" Example Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . E-32
E.13.1 "Positioner 1" Circuit Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . E-32
E.13.2 "Positioner 1" Function Circuit Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . E-33
E.14 "Soft Starter" Example Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . E-42
E.14.1 "Soft Starter" Circuit Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . E-42
E.14.2 "Soft Starter" Function Circuit Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . E-44
E.15 "Soft Starter with Reversing Contactor" Example Circuit . . . . . . .. .. . E-45
E.15.1 "Soft Starter with Reversing Contactor" Circuit Diagram . . . . . . .. .. . E-46
E.15.2 "Soft Starter with Reversing Contactor" Function Circuit Diagram .. .. . E-48
E.16 Safety-Oriented Tripping with Emergency STOP . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . E-49
E.16.1 Direct Starter, Category 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . E-50
E.16.2 Direct Starter, Category 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . E-52
E.16.3 Reversing Starter, Category 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . E-54
E.16.4 Reversing Starter, Category 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . E-56
E.16.5 Star-Delta Starter, Category 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . E-58
E.16.6 Pole-Changing Starter, Category 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . E-60
E.16.7 Pole-Changing Starter, Category 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . E-62
E.16.8 Dahlander, Category 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . E-64
F Safety and Commissioning Information for EEx Areas . . . . . . . . . . F-1
F.1 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-2

F.2 Set-up and Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3
F.2.1 Setting the Rated Motor Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3
F.2.2 SIMOCODE pro with thermistor input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-5
F.2.3 Sensor Circuit Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-6
F.2.4 Short-Circuit Protection according to IEC 60947-4-1,
Type of Coordination 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . F-6
F.2.5 Cable Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . F-7
F.2.6 Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . F-7
F.2.7 Further Safety Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . F-9
F.2.8 Ambient conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . F-9
F.3 Maintenance and Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . F-9
F.4 Warranty. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . F-9
SIMOCODE pro
viii GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Table Of Contents
F.5 Further Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-10
Index
Glossary
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 ix
Table Of Contents
SIMOCODE pro
x GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Important Information
Purpose of this manual

The SIMOCODE pro system manual describes in detail the motor
management system and its functions. It contains information about
configuring, commissioning, service and maintenance. The user is
introduced to the system quickly and practically using a typical reversing
starter application as an example.
In addition to providing assistance for troubleshooting and fault elimination,
this manual also contains information of special importance to service and
maintenance personnel.
To assist in configuration, this manual also contains circuit diagrams,
dimension drawings and technical data of system components.
Required basic knowledge

To understand this manual you will require basic knowledge of low-voltage
controls and distribution, digital circuit engineering and automation
technology.
Topics
This manual consists of instructional chapters for reference purposes. The
following table lists the most relevant topics. Topics with a gray background
correspond largely with the contents of the "SIMOCODE ES"
parameterization and service software:
Topic Target group

System Description Configurators, planners
Short Instructions for Configuring a Configurators, planners, technicians,
Reversing Starter commissioners
Motor Protection Configurators, commissioners
Motor Control Configurators, PLC programmers
Monitoring Functions Configurators, programmers,
commissioners, service personnel
Outputs Configurators, planners, programmers
Inputs Configurators, planners, programmers
Analog Value Recording Configurators, programmers,
commissioners, service personnel
3UF50 Compatibility Mode Configurators, PLC programmers
Standard Functions Configurators, programmers
Logic Modules Configurators, programmers
Communication Configurators, PLC programmers
Mounting, Wiring and Interfaces Mechanics, electricians, maintenance and
service personnel
Commissioning and Servicing Commissioners, electricians, maintenance
and service personnel
Alarm, Faults and System Messages Commissioners, maintenance and service
personnel, configurators, PLC
programmers
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 xi
Scope of Application
This manual is applicable to the listed SIMOCODE pro system components.
It contains a description of the components applicable at the time of printing
the document. We reserve the right to include updated information about
new components or new versions of components in a product information.
Further documentation
• Please read the operating instructions of the respective components.
• In addition to this system manual, the manual of the deployed DP master will
also be required.
Definitions
• When "SIMOCODE pro" is referred to, both the "SIMOCODE pro C" and the
"SIMOCODE pro V" series are meant.
SIMOCODE pro response tables

Specific responses (Disabled, Signalling, Warning, Tripping) can be
parameterized for various SIMOCODE pro functions. These are always
displayed in tabular form:
• "X" = Applicable
• "-" = Not applicable
• Preset values are underlined.
Response Function 1 Function 2 Function 3

Switch off - X X
Warning X X -
Signalling X X -
Deactivated X X X
Delay 0 - 25.5 s - -
Short description of the responses:

• Switch off: The contactor controls QE* are switched off. An error message is
generated which is available as diagnosis via PROFIBUS DP. The error
message and the device-internal signal remain on until the appropriate
amount of time has elapsed or the cause of the error has been eliminated and
acknowledged.
• Warning: In addition to the device-internal signal, a warning signal is
generated that is available as diagnosis via PROFIBUS DP.
• Signalling: Only a device-internal signal is generated, which can be further
processed as required.
• Deactivated: The appropriate function is switched off, no signals are
generated.
A delay time can also be set for specific responses.
SIMOCODE pro
xii GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Correction sheet
A correction sheet is included at the end of this manual. Please use it to
enter suggestions for improvements, additions and corrections and send it
back to us. This will help us to improve the next edition.
Disclaimer
The products described here have been developed to carry out safety
oriented functions as part of a complete plant or machine. In general, a
complete safety system consists of sensors, evaluation units, signalling
devices and methods for safe switching off. The manufacturer is responsible
for ensuring safe functioning of the complete plant or machine.
Siemens AG, its subsidiaries and associated companies (herein referred to
as "Siemens") are not in a position to guarantee every characteristic of a
complete plant or machine not designed by Siemens.
Siemens also denies all responsibility for any recommendations that are
made or implied in the following description. No new guarantee, warranty or
liability above those standard to Siemens can be derived from the following
description.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 xiii
SIMOCODE pro
xiv GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
System Description 1
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find an introduction and general information about
the SIMOCODE pro system including e.g.
• Characteristics of both the SIMOCODE pro C and the SIMOCODE pro V
device series
• Simplification of SIMOCODE pro circuits
• Overview of functions
• An overview of system components.
Target groups
This chapter is intended for the following target groups:
• Planners and configurators
• People who are now using SIMOCODE DP but wish to use SIMOCODE pro
as a replacement or additional system in the future
• Optional for commissioners, maintenance and service personnel as additional
information "about SIMOCODE pro"
• System integrators / process technology.
Necessary knowledge
You will require the following knowledge:
• Basic knowledge about load feeders
• Basic knowledge about motor protection
• Basic knowledge of control engineering
• Basic knowledge of industrial bus technology.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 1-1
System Description
1.1 Introduction
Description
SIMOCODE pro (SIRIUS Motor Management and Control Devices) is a
system of motor management and control devices with a PROFIBUS DP
interface. SIMOCODE pro is a further development of the SIMOCODE DP
system.
SIMOCODE pro is a flexible, modular motor management system

combining all functions necessary for a motor feeder. Only the switching
and short-circuit protection mechanisms of the main circuit (contactors,
circuit breakers, fuses) are additionally needed. SIMOCODE pro replaces
large sections of the control circuit and also automatically implements all
necessary interlockings. It provides a considerable amount of operating-,
service and diagnostic data, thus increasing the outward transparency of
the motor feeder. It completely integrates the motor feeder into a main
automation system, via PROFIBUS DP.
Device series
SIMOCODE pro can be subdivided into two device series:
• SIMOCODE pro C - a compact system for direct and reversing starters
and
• SIMOCODE pro V - a variable system, which also offers numerous additional
functions in addition to all of the SIMOCODE pro C functions.
Additional control programs are integrated in SIMOCODE pro V for star-delta
starters, Dahlanders, pole-changing starters, soft starters - each also in
combination with reversal of the direction of rotation, as well as valves and
positioners. SIMOCODE pro V is also particularly versatile. Its functionality can
be extended, if required, for example
– the number and type of binary inputs and outputs can be increased in stages
and adapted
– a current/voltage measuring module can be used for additional voltage
measurement and for monitoring power-related measured values (power
management)
– a temperature module enables the evaluation of several analog temperature
sensors
– An earth-fault detection system can be integrated together with a summation
current transformer
– an analog module extends the system by additional analog inputs and
outputs, for example, for fill-level or flow-rate monitoring.
SIMOCODE pro C is upwards-compatible with SIMOCODE pro V. This
means both ranges can be used simultaneously in your plant according to
requirements.
SIMOCODE pro
1-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
System Description
Independent operation
SIMOCODE pro C and pro V protect and control the motor feeder
independently of the automation system. Even if the automation system
(PLC) fails, or if communication is disrupted, the motor feeder remains fully
protected and controllable. SIMOCODE pro can be used without being
connected to PROFIBUS DP. This can easily be connected later, if required.
Typical configuration
The following schematic shows a typical SIMOCODE pro C and
SIMOCODE pro V hardware configuration:
SIMOCODE pro C
Basic unit (BU1)
Current measuring
module (IM)
Operator panel (OP)
UF-01129
SIMOCODE pro V Basic unit (BU2)
Digital module (DM)

Current/voltage Analog module (AM)
measuring module (UM)
Operator panel (OP)

UF-01130
Additional optional expansions are possible
Fig. 1-1: Typical SIMOCODE pro hardware configurations
System components: See Chapter 1.7 "Description of System Components".
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 1-3
System Description
1.2 Simplifying SIMOCODE pro Configuration

Conventional configuration without SIMOCODE pro
Individual components are used for the entire control, monitoring and signal
pre-processing. The following components are to be used and the following
wiring is to be carried out:
• Insertion and wiring of overload relays, thermistor evaluation devices, current
transformers and analog/digital converters
• Wiring of the control circuit
• Connection of start/stop control devices
• The contactor must be brought into locking mode via the auxiliary switches
• Wiring of the interlocks.
The following figure illustrates the conventional configuration of a direct

starter:
3/N/PE ~ 50/60 Hz 400/230 V1L1

L1 -F4
L2
L3
N Automation level / I/O module
PE
Manual/automatic
-Q1
Feedback Control
-F2- commands
Thermistor
1 3 5
-Q1 open
Overload
Current
ON/OFF
Q1
OFF
ON
-F3
2 4 6 -X1
1 3 5 -K11
- K1
2 4 6 Manual Auto
-X2
1 3 5
- F2 Local stop
S1 PLC
2 4 6
Start/stop
Local start
2 -K12
4 A - 20 mA S2 -K1
PE UV W
-K11 -K12
M ϑ 1 -K1 -K1 -F2 -F3 -Q1 D
3~ 2
-X3 -F3 A
Thermistor 1 N
-K1 Switchgear
evaluation
1N
Fig. 1-2: Conventional configuration of a motor feeder (direct starter)
SIMOCODE pro
1-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
System Description
Configuration with SIMOCODE pro

Only SIMOCODE pro is used for the entire control, monitoring and signal
pre-processing.
This has the following advantages:
• Additional overload relays, thermistor evaluation devices, current
transformers and analog/digital converters are not necessary
• The wiring of the control circuit (interlocking) is simplified
• The start and stop switches are wired directly to the inputs of the basic unit
• The contactor coil is activated via the output of the basic unit. An auxiliary
contact for locking is not required.
The following figure illustrates configuration with SIMOCODE pro:
3/N/PE ~ 50/60 Hz 400/230 V

L1 PROFIBUS DP
L2
L3 L+
N
PE
L1/L+
1 3 5
Q1 F11 Control station
Local control station [LC]
2 4 6 S0 S1
Current measuring A2 A1 IN1 IN2 24 V

module (IM)
Basic unit (BU)
T1 T2 OUT 1 1
K1
1 3 5
- K1 N/L–
2 4 6
PE U V W
T1
M Thermistor
J
3~ T2
Fig. 1-3: Configuration of a load feeder (direct starter) with SIMOCODE pro
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 1-5
System Description
1.3 Application Example

Description
The fill level of a liquid container is being monitored. A pump keeps the
liquid level (reference value) almost constant by pumping more liquid into
the container. The fill level (actual value) is measured by the fill-level
indicator and outputted as an analog signal. When the fill level sinks below a
specific level, the pump is switched on by SIMOCODE pro. Liquid is
pumped in until the reference value is reattained. The pump is then
switched off.
Controlling the pump

The pump can be controlled as follows:
• Locally: local control station [LC] for manual switching on and off (by visual
contact)
• LC in the switchgear cabinet door: Control station operator panel [OP] for
switching on and off manually
• At automation level: Control station PLC/PCS [DP] for remote-controlled
switching on and off (automatic operation) via PROFIBUS DP
• Via SIMOCODE pro: Via local mode fill level monitoring and/or limit value
monitoring.
Schematic
PLC/PCS Control station

3/N/PE ~ 50/60 Hz 400/230 V PLC/PCS [DP]
L1 PROFIBUS DP
L2
L3
N Fill-level indicator
PE
L+
L1/L+ L–
1 3 5
Q1 F11 Control station
Local control station [LC]
2 4 6 S0 S1
Liquid container
Current measuring A2 A1 IN1 IN2 24 V In+ In– Control station

module (IM) Analog module(AM) Operator panel
Basic unit (BU 2)
System Connecting cable
interface
T1 T2 OUT 1 1 Out+ Out–
Display
1 3 5 K1
- K1 N/L– Motor current
2 4 6 (unit: % of Is)
Pump
PE Optional:
U V W
laptop with
T1
M Thermistor SIMOCODE ES
3~ ϑ
T2
Fig. 1-4: Schematic of a typical application example
SIMOCODE pro
1-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
System Description
Recording, displaying and evaluating measured values

The following measured values are required for monitoring the process:
• The pump motor current, which is measured by the current measuring
module
• The analog value of the fill-level indicator, which is measured by the analog
module.
The measured values are evaluated directly by SIMOCODE pro and/or
transferred via PROFIBUS DP to the PLC/PCS.
Any measured value can be outputted via the analog module, e.g. the
effective motor current on a connected pointer instrument.
Optionally, a laptop, for example, can be connected to the operator panel
with the SIMOCODE ES software so that further process data can be locally
evaluated.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 1-7
System Description
1.4 Check List for Selecting a Device Series

The following check list should help you decide upon the optimum device
series for your requirements:
SIMOCODE
Requirements pro C pro V Footnote

(BU1) (BU2)
Standard motor feeders (4 inputs, 3 outputs)

1)
with control functions for direct starters, ✓ ✓
reversing starters, intelligent overload relays
Monitoring of stalled rotor, unbalance, phase
1)
failure ✓ ✓
Current measuring, current limit monitoring,

1)
overload protection ✓ ✓
Earth-fault monitoring via the current

1)
measuring module (internal) ✓ ✓
Thermistor motor protection with PTC (binary)

✓ ✓
Motor feeder with control function:

1)
Star-delta starters, Dahlanders, pole-changing — ✓
starters, soft starters – each also possible in
combination with reversal of the direction of
rotation –, solenoid valves, positioners
Measuring, processing and outputting analog
2)
values e.g. flow rate, fill level, etc. — ✓
(if necessary via an analog module)
Current measurement and voltage
3)
measurement — ✓
Voltage monitoring for undervoltage

— ✓ 3)
Power management, implementing power

3)
considerations (power, cos phi), power — ✓
monitoring
More than 4 binary inputs required (maximum
2)
12) — ✓
Table 1-1: Check list for selecting a device series
1) Via current measuring module

2) With expansion modules
3) Via current/voltage measuring modules
SIMOCODE pro
1-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
System Description
SIMOCODE
Requirements pro C pro V Footnote

(BU1) (BU2)
More than 3 relay outputs required (maximum

2)
7) — ✓
Earth-fault monitoring with external

2)
summation current transformer via the earth- — ✓
fault module
Binary inputs for 110 - 240 V AC/DC
2)
(max. 8) — ✓
Bistable relay outputs (max. 4)

2)
— ✓
Analog temperature monitoring with NTC,

2)
PT100, PT1000 and KTY 83/84 sensor types — ✓
Table 1-1: Check list for selecting a device series (Cont.)
1) Via current measuring module

2) With expansion modules
3) Via current/voltage measuring modules
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 1-9
System Description
1.5 Overview of Functions

1.5.1 Protection functions
Detailed description: See Chapter 3 "Motor Protection".
Electronic overload protection

The basic unit has several protection mechanisms for current-dependent
motor protection:
• Overload protection
• Phase unbalance
• Phase Failure.
Stalled rotor
See Chapter 3 "Motor Protection".
Thermistor protection
The basic units (BU1 and BU2) enable connection of thermistor sensors
(binary PTC) for monitoring motor temperature.
1.5.2 Monitoring functions
Detailed description: See Chapter 5 "Monitoring Functions".
Earth-fault monitoring
Basic units have
• Internal earth-fault monitoring:
For motors with a 3-cable connection, the basic unit calculates a possible
fault current/earth-fault current from the total current via a current measuring
module or a current/voltage measuring module. Internal earth-fault
monitoring is only possible for motors with a 3-phase connection in networks
that are either grounded directly or grounded with low impedance.
• External earth-fault monitoring by SIMOCODE pro V 1) 5):
In the case of networks that are grounded with a higher impedance, it may be
necessary to set up the earth-fault monitoring for smaller earth-fault currents
using a summation current transformer instead of carrying out internal earth-
fault monitoring via a current measuring module or a current/voltage
measuring module. A maximum of one earth-fault module can be used to
create an additional input on basic unit 2 to connect a 3UL22 summation
current transformer. Rated fault currents of 0.3 A/ 0.5 A/ 1 A can be evaluated
with the summation current transformer.
Monitoring current limits

Current limit monitoring facilitates process monitoring. Thus, impending
irregularities in the system can be detected in good time: Exceeding of a
current limit that is still below the overload limit can, for example, indicate a
dirty filter on a pump, or an increasingly sluggish motor bearing. Dropping
below a current limit can be the first sign of a worn-out drive motor belt.
SIMOCODE pro
1-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
System Description
Voltage monitoring 2)
SIMOCODE pro V allows voltage monitoring of a three-phase current
network or a one-phase network for undervoltage or further availability:
• Monitoring for undervoltage:
Two-phase monitoring for freely-selectable limits. The SIMOCODE pro V
response can be freely parameterized upon reaching a particular pre-warning
or trip level.
• Monitoring for further availability:
Even when the motor is switched off, SIMOCODE pro can display the further
availability of the feeder by measuring the voltage directly at the circuit
breaker or fuses.
Temperature monitoring 1) 3)
The SIMOCODE pro V temperature module allows analog temperature
monitoring of, for example, the motor windings or the bearings of up to 3
sensor measuring circuits.
SIMOCODE pro V supports two-phase monitoring of overtemperature for
freely-selectable limits. The SIMOCODE pro response can be freely
parameterized and delayed upon reaching a pre-warning or trip level.
Temperature monitoring takes into account the highest temperature of all
the sensor measuring circuits in use.
Active power monitoring 2)

The active power curve of a motor reflects its actual load. Excess load
results in increased wear of the motor and, thus, may lead to premature
motor failure. Insufficient active power can, for example, be a sign of non-
load motor operation.
SIMOCODE pro V allows two-phase active power monitoring for freely-
selectable upper and lower limits. The SIMOCODE pro V response can be
freely parameterized and delayed upon reaching a pre-warning or trip level.
Cos phi monitoring 2)

The power factor fluctuates more than either the motor current or the active
power does, particularly in the low-end performance area of a motor.
Therefore, power factor monitoring is particularly suitable for distinguishing
between non-load operation and faults, e.g. a broken drive belt or drive
shaft.
SIMOCODE pro V enables two-phase monitoring of cos phi undershooting
for freely-selectable limits. The SIMOCODE pro V response can be freely
parameterized and delayed upon reaching a pre-warning or trip level.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 1-11
System Description
Monitoring operating hours, motor stop time and number of starts

In order to avoid plant downtimes due to failed motors that were either
running too long (wear) or stopped for too long, both SIMOCODE pro C and
SIMOCODE pro V can monitor operating hours and motor stop times.
For example, if an adjustable limit value is exceeded, a signal indicating that
the relevant motor requires maintenance or replacement can be generated.
After replacing the motor, the operating hours and motor stop times can be
reset.
In order to avoid excessive thermal strain and premature aging on a motor,
the number of motor starts in a selected time frame can be limited. The
limited number of possible starts can be indicated by pre-warnings.
Monitoring additional process variables via the analog module 1) 4)

SIMOCODE pro V allows measuring and monitoring of any other process
variables via the analog module.
For example, the fill level can be monitored to protect a pump against dry
operation, or a differential pressure transducer can be used to monitor the
degree of pollution in a filter. If the fill level undershoots a specified level,
the pump can be switched off and, if a specific differential pressure value is
exceeded, the filter is to be cleaned.
SIMOCODE pro V supports two-phase monitoring of the corresponding
process variables for freely-selectable upper and lower limits. The
SIMOCODE pro V response can be freely parameterized and delayed upon
reaching a pre-warning or trip level.
Phase sequence identification 2)

SIMOCODE pro allows the direction of rotation of a motor to be determined
by identification of the phase sequence. If the direction of rotation is wrong,
a signal can be generated or the motor switched off.
Monitoring any measured values using unrestricted limit monitors 1)

SIMOCODE pro can monitor every measured value in the system for
undershooting or overshooting a set threshold value by means of
unrestricted limit monitors.
See Chapter 11.11 "Limit Monitor".
1) When using basic unit 2

2) When using basic unit 2 with current/voltage measuring module
3) Additional temperature module required
4) Additional analog module required
5) Additional earth-fault module and summation current transformer required.
SIMOCODE pro
1-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
System Description
1.5.3 Control Functions
Depending on the device series, the following parameterizable control

functions are available:
SIMOCODE
Control function pro C pro V

(BU1) (BU2)
1)
Overload relay ✓ ✓
1)
Direct starter ✓ ✓
1)
Reversing starter ✓ ✓
1)
Circuit breaker (MCCB) ✓ ✓
Star-delta starters, — ✓
combinable with reversal of the direction of
rotation
Dahlanders, — ✓
rotation
Pole-changing starters — ✓
rotation
Solenoid valve — ✓
Positioner — ✓
Soft starters, — ✓
rotation
Table 1-2: Control functions
1) Due to additional requirements (e.g. power measuring), it may be necessary

to select the BU2 device version.
All the necessary protection functions and interlocks are already available
and can be flexibly adapted and expanded.
For a detailed description of the individual control functions:

See Chapter 4 "Motor Control".
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 1-13
System Description
1.5.4 Communication
PROFIBUS DP
SIMOCODE pro has an integrated PROFIBUS DP interface (SUB-D socket or
terminal connection on the basic units).
SIMOCODE pro supports, for example, the following services:
SIMOCODE
Service pro C (BU1) pro V (BU2)
Baud rates up to 12 MBit/s ✓ ✓

Automatic baud rate recognition ✓ ✓
Cyclic services (DPV0) and ✓ ✓
acyclic services (DPV1)
Operation as DPV1 slave downstream from the ✓ ✓
Y link
Alarms according to DPV1 ✓ ✓
Time synchronization via PROFIBUS DP — ✓
3UF50 Compatibility mode — ✓
Table 1-3: PROFIBUS DP services
Detailed description: See Chapter 12 "Communication".
1.5.5 Standard Functions
Standard functions are predefined functions that can be easily activated,

e.g. time-staggered restart of the drives after a power failure.
SIMOCODE pro has the following standard functions:
SIMOCODE
Standard function pro C (BU1) pro V (BU2)
Number Number
Test 2 2
Reset 3 3
Test position feedback (TPF) 1 1
External fault 4 6
Operational protection OFF (OPO) — 1
Power failure monitoring (UVO) — 1
Emergency start 1 1
Watchdog (PLC/PCS Monitoring) 1 1
Timestamping — 1
Table 1-4: Standard functions
Detailed description: See Chapter 10 "Standard Functions".
SIMOCODE pro
1-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
System Description
1.5.6 Additional Signal Processing with Freely-Programmable Logic Modules
If you need any other additional functions for your application, you can use
the freely-programmable logic modules. These can be used, for example, to
implement logical functions, time relay functions and counter functions.
Furthermore, limit monitors can monitor any value in SIMOCODE pro for
undershooting or overshooting of a freely selected limit.
Depending on the device series, the system offers several, freely-
parameterizable logic modules:
SIMOCODE
Logic module pro C (BU1) pro V (BU2)
Number Number
Truth tables 3 inputs / 1 output 3 6

Truth tables 2 inputs / 1 output — 2
Truth tables 5 inputs / 2 outputs — 1
Timer 2 4
Counter 2 4
Signal conditionings 2 4
Non-volatile elements 2 4
Flashing 3 3
Flickering 3 3
Limit monitor — 4
Calculation module (calculator) 1) — 2
Table 1-5: Freely-programmable logic modules
1) Only for basic unit 2 from product version *E03*
Detailed description: See Chapter 11 "Logic Modules".
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 1-15
System Description
1.5.7 Operating, Service and Diagnostic Data
SIMOCODE pro supplies a large amount of detailed operating, service and

diagnostic data:
Operating data
• Motor switching state (ON, OFF, LEFT, RIGHT, SLOW, QUICK), derived from
the current flow in the main circuit; thus, feedback via auxiliary contacts of
circuit breakers and contactors is not necessary
• Current in phases 1, 2 and 3 and maximum current in % of set current
• Voltage in phases 1, 2 and 3 in V 2)
• Active power in W 2)
• Apparent power in VA 2)
• Power factor in % 2)
• Phase unbalance in %
• Phase sequence 2)
• Temperature in the sensor measuring circuits 1, 2 and 3, and maximum
temperature in K 1) 4)
• Actual analog signal values 1) 5)
• Time to trip in s
• Heating motor model in %
• Remaining cooling down period of the motor in s, etc.
It is possible to adapt the units via the device-internal conversion of
individual measured values with the help of the logic modules (calculators)
provided by SIMOCODE pro V. For example: the temperature recorded by
SIMOCODE can be calculated in either °F or °C and be transmitted to the
automation system via PROFIBUS.
Service data
Among other things, SIMOCODE pro provides the following for the
maintenance of relevant data:
• Number of motor operating hours, also resettable
• Motor stop times, also resettable
• Number of motor starts, also resettable
• Number of permissible starts remaining
• Number of overload trippings, also resettable
• Feeder power consumption in kWh, also resettable3)
• Internal feeder comments stored in the device, e.g. information regarding
maintenance events, etc.
SIMOCODE pro
1-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
System Description
Diagnostic Data
• Numerous detailed early warning and fault signals, also for further processing
in the device or in the control system
• Internal device error protocolling with timestamp
• Value of the last trip current
• Feedback faults (e.g. no current flow in the main circuit after switch-on
command), etc.
1) When using basic unit 2

2) When using basic unit 2 with current/voltage measuring module
3) When using basic unit 2 (from product version *E03*) with current/voltage measuring
module
4) Additional temperature module required
5) Additional analog module required
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 1-17
System Description
1.6 Overview of System Components

Devices
SIMOCODE
Connectable pro C pro V Application

system components (BU1) (BU2)
Operator panel (OP) Installation in the

switchgear cabinet
door. Additional
control station and
display. With system
interface for
connecting a PC
Operator panel with display (OPD) Installation in the
— switchgear cabinet
door. Additional
control station and
display. With system
interface for
connecting a PC
Current measuring modules (IM) Current measuring
0.3 A - 3 A with through-hole
2.4 A - 25 A technology. Basic unit
Current measuring modules (IM) can be snapped on
10 A - 100 A
Current measuring modules (IM) Current measuring

20 A - 200 A with through-hole
technology or bus
connection system
Current measuring modules (IM) Current measuring via
63 A - 630 A bus connection
system
Current/voltage measuring modules Mounting only

(UM) 1) — possible next to the
0.3 A - 3 A basic unit, otherwise
2.4 A - 25 A like current measuring
modules, also:
- Voltage
measurement
- Power measurement
- Cos phi
measurement
- Phase sequence
Table 1-6: System components, devices
SIMOCODE pro
1-18 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
System Description
SIMOCODE
Connectable pro C pro V Application

system components (BU1) (BU2)
Current/voltage measuring modules Mounting only

(UM) 1) — possible next to the
10 A - 100 A basic unit, otherwise
like current measuring
Current/voltage measuring modules modules, also:
(UM) 1) — - Voltage
20 A - 200 A measurement
- Power measurement
- Cos phi
Current/voltage measuring modules measurement
(UM) 1) — - Phase sequence
63 A - 630 A
Decoupling module (DCM) For connection in

— series upstream from
a current/voltage
measuring module at
the system interface
when used in
ungrounded networks
Digital modules (DM)
24 V DC monostable — Additional binary
110 V - 240 V AC/DC monostable inputs and outputs.
24 V DC bistable Max. 2 DM possible
110 V - 240 V AC/DC bistable
Analog module (AM) Additional inputting,
— outputting and
monitoring of analog
values
Max. 1 AM possible.
Earth-fault module (EM) For connecting a
— 3UL22 external
summation current
transformer for earth-
fault monitoring.
Max. 1 EM possible.
Temperature module (TM) For temperature
— monitoring via
additional sensors
(PT100, PT1000,
KTY83/KTY84, NTC).
Max. 1 TM possible.
Table 1-6: System components, devices (Cont.)
1) Depending on the type of network (main voltage) in ungrounded networks,

combinable with decoupling module (DCM)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 1-19
System Description
For a detailed description of the system components: See Chapter 1.7

"Description of System Components".
Dimension drawings: See Chapter C "Dimension Drawings".
Installation instructions: See Chapter 13 "Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces".
Accessories
SIMOCODE basic unit
Connectable pro C (BU1) pro V (BU2) Application

system components
Connecting cable in various For connecting

lengths, ranging from 0.025 m up system components
to 2.5 m via system interfaces
System interface cover For covering unused
system interfaces
Memory module Saving device

parameters. If a
device is replaced,
parameter transfer
without PC
Addressing plug Configuring the
PROFIBUS DP
address without a PC
PC cable Connecting
SIMOCODE pro to
a PC
Door adapter Only for leading out
the system interface,
e.g. from a switchgear
cabinet
Adapter for operator panel Enables the use of the
smaller 3UF720
operator panel in the
front panel cut-out of
the 3UF52 operator
panel or the 3UF721
operator panel with
display.
Table 1-7: System components, accessories
SIMOCODE pro
1-20 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
System Description
Software
For parameterization, control, diagnostics and testing
SIMOCODE basic unit
Software components pro C (BU1) pro V (BU2) Application
SIMOCODE ES Smart Access via the system

interface on the
device
SIMOCODE ES Professional Access via the system
with Object Manager interface on the
OM SIMOCODE pro device and
PROFIBUS DP
SIMOCODE ES Graphic 1) Graphical
parameterization per
"Drag&Drop"
Table 1-8: System components, software
1) Optional software package for SIMOCODE ES Smart or

SIMOCODE ES Professional
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 1-21
System Description
1.7 Description of System Components

1.7.1 Basic units (BU)
The basic units are the fundamental components of the SIMOCODE pro
system. Basic units are always necessary when using SIMOCODE pro. They
have a standard enclosure width of 45 mm and are equipped with
detachable terminals:
Basic unit 1 (BU1) Basic unit 2 (BU2)

SIMOCODE pro C device series SIMOCODE pro V device series
Fig. 1-5: Basic units
Basic unit 1 (BU1)

Basic unit 1 is the basic component of the SIMOCODE pro C device series
and is used in combination with a current measuring module and optional
operator panels. Die following motor control functions are supported:
• Overload relay
• Direct starters and reversing starters
• Circuit breaker control.
Basic unit 2 (BU2)

Basic unit 2 is the basic component of the SIMOCODE pro V device series
and is used in combination with a current measuring module or current/
voltage measuring module and optional operator panels.
The following motor control functions are supported:
• Overload relay
• Direct and reversing starters
• Star-delta starter, also with reversal of the direction of rotation
• Two speeds, motors with separate windings (pole-changing starters), also
with reversal of the direction of rotation
• 2 speeds, motors with separate Dahlander windings, also with reversal of the
direction of rotation
• Positioner control
• Solenoid valve control
SIMOCODE pro
1-22 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
System Description
• Circuit breaker (MCCB) control

• Soft starter control, also with reversal of the direction of rotation
In contrast to basic unit 1, basic unit 2 offers the following expansion
options:
• Increased device functionality via various expansion modules according to
need
• Implementation of a current/voltage measuring module in place of a current
measuring module
• Additional inputs and outputs, as required.
• Use of an operator panel with display in place of a standard operator panel
LEDs for device diagnosis (device, bus, gen. fault):

These LEDs on the front of the device are used for device and fault
diagnosis, and indicate the basic status
• Of the device itself via the device LED
• About PROFIBUS communication via the bus LED
• About any motor feeder faults via the gen. fault LED
For more information see Chapter 14.2.3 "Diagnosis via LED Display".
Test/Reset button:
Enables the device to be reset after tripping or after a fault has occurred and
makes it possible to test the device/motor feeder with or without tripping
the contactor control. If a memory module or addressing plug is plugged in,
the PROFIBUS address can be parameterized or adopted via the Test/Reset
button.
For more information see Chapter 10 "Standard Functions", Chapter 14.2.2

"Setting the PROFIBUS DP Address" and Chapter 14.3.2 "Securing and
Saving Parameters".
Input supply
See Chapter 13 "Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces".
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 1-23
System Description
1.7.2 Operator Panel (OP)
The operator panel is often integrated into the front panels of motor control
centers, thus, enabling the motor feeder to be controlled from the
switchgear cabinet.
It can be used with both the SIMOCODE pro C and the SIMOCODE pro V
device series. It contains all the basic device status LEDs and the
TEST/RESET button, and facilitates access to the system interface outside
the switchgear cabinet.
The following are available:
• 5 buttons, of which 4 are freely-parameterizable
• 10 LEDs, of which 7 are freely-parameterizable
The following figure shows an operator panel:
Operator panel Device series

SIMOCODE pro C
SIMOCODE pro V
Fig. 1-6: Operator panel
The operator panel can be connected to the basic unit or an expansion

module via the rear system interface. Voltage is supplied by the basic unit.
A PC, the memory module or the addressing plug can be connected to
SIMOCODE ES using the PC cable via the front system interface (with a
cover for IP54).
SIMOCODE pro
1-24 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
System Description
Labeling strips:
Labeling strips are enclosed for designating buttons 1 to 4 and the yellow
LEDs 1 to 3:
• Buttons 1 to 4:
6 pre-assigned and 1 individually inscribable labeling strips
• LEDs 1 to 3:
1 individually inscribable labeling strip.
ZU AUF
STOP
CLOSE OPEN
AUF ZU
OPEN CLOSE
0
0
0 Button 1 Button 2 Button 3 Button 4
I 0 TEST/
RESET
DEVICE BUS GEN. FAULT
LED 1 LED 2 LED 3
Fig. 1-7: Labeling strips for operator panel buttons and LEDs
Note:
Labeling software for customized labeling of the SIMOCODE pro operator
panel control buttons and LEDs is available at
www.siemens.com/simocode. For printing purposes, three different types
of pre-cut, transparent labeling strips can be ordered as accessories.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 1-25
System Description
Unused labeling strips can be stored on the back of the operator panel:
Labeling strips
Storage clips
Fig. 1-8: Storage clips for labeling strips
Memory module "park position":
The memory module can be protected from unauthorized use by "parking" it

on the rear of the operator panel inside the switchgear cabinet.
In this case, the storage clips for the labeling strips cannot be used.
Memory module in the "park position"
Fig. 1-9: Memory module "park position"
SIMOCODE pro
1-26 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
System Description
1.7.3 Operator Panel with Display (OPD) for SIMOCODE pro V
Apart from the standard operator panel (OP), an optional operator panel with
display (OPD) is also available for SIMOCODE pro V. This operator panel can
display current measured values, operating data, diagnostic data or status
information of the motor feeder on the switchgear cabinet. The operator
panel can only be used with a basic unit 2 (SIMOCODE pro V) from product
version *E03*. It contains all the basic device status LEDs and facilitates
access to the system interface outside the switchgear cabinet. The motor
can be controlled via the buttons on the operator panel. Current measured
values, status information, fault messages or the device-internal error
protocol are simultaneously shown on the display.
Notice:
The operator panel can only be used with a basic unit 2 (SIMOCODE pro V)
from product version *E03*.
The following are available:

• 4 freely parameterizable buttons for controlling the motor feeder
• 4 buttons for display menu navigation, 2 of these are softkeys with various
functions (e.g. Test/Reset)
• 1 graphic display
• 7 LEDs, 4 of which are freely-parameterizable (4 green LEDs integrated in the
motor control, primarily for feedback regarding the switching state, e.g. ON,
OFF, LEFT, RIGHT, etc.)
The following figure shows an operator panel with display:
Operator panel with display Device series

SIMOCODE pro V
Fig. 1-10: Operator panel with display
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 1-27
System Description
The operator panel with display can be connected directly to the basic unit 2
or an expansion module via the rear system interface. Voltage is supplied by
the basic unit. A PC, the memory module or the addressing plug can be
connected to SIMOCODE ES using the PC cable via the front system
interface (with a cover for IP54).
Caution
The operator module with display may not be removed or plugged in during
operation!
Note
When using an operator panel with display, the type and number of
expansion modules that can be connected to a basic device must be
limited! See Chapter 1.7.8.
Labeling strips:
Labeling strips for labeling buttons 1 to 4 are included:
• 6 pre-assigned and 1 individually inscribable labeling strips
Button 1
Button 2
Button 3
Button 4
ZU
CLOSE
AUF AUF
OPEN
I OPEN
0 ZU
STOP
0 0 0 CLOSE
Fig. 1-11: Labeling strips for the buttons of the operator panel with display
SIMOCODE pro
1-28 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
System Description
Note:
Labeling software for customized labeling of the SIMOCODE pro operator
panel control buttons and LEDs is available at
www.siemens.com/simocode.
For printing purposes, three different types of pre-cut, transparent labeling
strips can be ordered as accessories.
Unused labeling strips can be stored on the back of the operator panel with
display:
Labeling strips
Storage clips
Fig. 1-12: Storage clips for labeling strips
Memory module "park position":
The memory module can be "parked" on the front of the operator panel with
display beneath the system interface:
Fig. 1-13: Memory module "park position"
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 1-29
System Description
Displays of the operator panel with display

The display shows current measured values, operating data and diagnostic
data as well as the status information of the motor feeder in plain text or
with the aid of symbols.
IL1 2.80 A
IL2 2.16 A
IL3 2.00 A 4
8.00A/5/T Menu
1 23
Fig. 1-14: Displays
1
Shows the set current Is / nominal motor current in A.
The corresponding set current ls1 or ls2 is always shown for motors with
two speeds, independent of whether the current speed is slow or fast,
e.g. 2.35 A.
For motors with two speeds, the left-hand softkey can be used when the
motor is stopped to alternate between both set currents. When running, the
set current for the active motor speed is always displayed.
2
Shows the set class interval of the overload protection,
e.g.: 10 = Class 10 (class = tripping class)
3
Indicates that temperature monitoring is taking place, e.g. the temperature
monitoring of the motor via thermistors or analog temperature sensors
(Pt100, Pt1000, KTY, NTC). T = Temperature monitoring taking place.
4
The main display enables customized depiction of different measured
values when running. This is the standard display at the topmost menu
level. Predefined profiles in the display settings can be selected for this
purpose. When the "Menu" softkey is pressed, the submenus of the main
display can be navigated (see "Read and adapt main display").
SIMOCODE pro
1-30 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
System Description
Operational controls of the operator module with display
1 2 3
Fig. 1-15: Operational controls of the operator module with display
1
Four freely-parameterizable control buttons.
These control buttons are used to control the motor with integrated status
LEDs for any status feedback. The functions can be user-defined. Labeling
can be either as desired or via the labeling strips incldued in the scope of
supply (see also Chapter 7.3 "Operator Panel Buttons" and/or
Chapter 6.3 "Operator Panel LEDs")
2
Two softkeys.
These softkeys can have different functions, depending upon the menu
depicted (e.g. Open Menu, Leave Menu, Test/Reset). The currently assigned
functions are shown on the lower left or right edge of the display.
3
Two arrow keys (up and down).
These arrows keys can be used for menu navigation or for changing the display
settings, e.g. contrast adjustment or selection of the main display profile.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 1-31
System Description
Menu of the operator panel with display and menu navigation

Navigation is possible by means of the arrow buttons and softkey. Each
menu item may have one or more submenus. The menu structure and
display are, in part, directly dependent upon device parameterization (e.g.
selected control function) and hardware configuration (e.g. type and number
of expansion modules used).
Main display The "Main display" is the default SIMOCODE pro display. It displays
the current measured values, which can be selected via predefined
profiles according to user requirements (see also "Read and adapt
main display")
Measured value display The "Measured value display" gives an overview of all values
measured by SIMOCODE pro.
For example, all phase currents, phase voltages, power-related
measured values or temperatures. For detailed information: See
"Display of measured values in the measured value indicator".
Status display The "Status display" shows all higher-level status information, i.e. all
status information relevant to protection and controlling of the
motor.
For detailed information: See: "Motor protection and motor control
status".
Statistics/Maintenance The "Statistics/Maintenance" menu item gives an overview of all

SIMOCODE pro information relevant to maintenance.
For detailed information: See: "Display of statistical and
maintenance-relevant information on the Statistics/Maintenance
display"
Table 1-9: Operator panel with display: menu and menu navigation
SIMOCODE pro
1-32 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
System Description
Communication The "Communication" menu item displays all important information

concerning PROFIBUS communication.
For detailed information: See: "Status display for PROFIBUS
communication"
Device I/Os The "Device I/Os" menu item gives a complete overview of the
current status of all inputs and outputs of the basic device as well
as any connected expansion modules.
For detailed information: See: "Display of the current status of all
device I/Os"
Display Settings All settings relevant to the operator panel with display can be
carried out via "Display Settings". In addtion to selecting the
language and adjusting the contrast or lighting, it is also possible to
select the profiles here which are relevant for adjusting the main
display.
For detailed information: See: "Adapt display settings"
Commands The "Commands" menu item contains all commands relating to

SIMOCODE pro e.g. for testing the feeder, resetting after tripping
and/or adopting the parameters in the memory module or
SIMOCODE pro.
For detailed information: See: "Resetting, testing and
parameterizing via commands"
Status Information The "Status Information" menu item gives an overview of all
pending status information.
For detailed information: See: "Display of all pending status
information"
Table 1-9: Operator panel with display: menu and menu navigation (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 1-33
System Description
Warnings The "Warnings" menu item gives an overview of all pending

warnings.
For detailed information: See: "Display of all pending status
information"
Faults The "Faults" menu item gives an overview of all pending faults.
For detailed information: See: "Display of all pending faults"
Fault memory The "Fault Memory" menu item displays the SIMOCODE pro device-
internal fault memory.
For detailed information: See: "Reading out the device-internal error
buffer"
Identification In the "Identification" menu item you will find detailed information
about SIMOCODE pro hardware components (basic unit, operator
panel with display) respectively labeling.
For detailed information: See: "Identification of the motor feeder
and the SIMOCODE pro components"
About SIMOCODE The "About SIMOCODE" menu item displays further information
about SIMOCODE pro.
Table 1-9: Operator panel with display: menu and menu navigation (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
1-34 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
System Description
Read and adapt main display

To enable users speedy viewing of the measured values typically shown on
their switchgear, various profiles are deposited in the operator panel with
display that enable user-specific adaption of the standard measured values
displayed in the SIMOCODE pro operation indicator. The profile can be
selected in "Display settings" -> "Profile" (see Chapter "Adapt display
settings" on page 1-57).
If available, the effective set current, the set class interval for the overload
protection and the use of temperature monitoring with the help of
thermistors or analog temperature sensors are displayed in the lower left of
the main display.
Navigation in the submenus of the main display is via the right-hand softkey.
For motors with two speeds it is possible to switch between the indication
of the two set currents using the left-hand softkey.
IL1, IL2, IL3 [A] (example) Displays the currents in all three phases in amperes
Note:
Only possible if a current measuring module or current/voltage
measuring module is being used.
IL1, IL2, IL 3 [%] (example) Displays the currents in all three phases in % of set current
Note:
Imax [A] (example) Displays the maximum current of all three phases in amperes
Note:
Table 1-10: Read and adapt main display
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 1-35
System Description
Imax [%] (example) Displays the maximum current of all three phases in % of set
current
Note:
Imax, Cos (example) Displays the maximum current of all three phases in amperes and
the power factor
Note:
Only possible if a current/voltage measuring module is being used.
Imax, UL1, Cos, S (example) Displays the maximum current of all three phases in amperes, the
phase voltage UL1 in V, the power factor and the apparent power
in kVA
Note:
Imax, UL1, Cos, P (example) Displays the maximum current of all three phases in amperes, the
phase voltage UL1 in V, the power factor and the active power
in kW
Note:
[mA] In1/Output (example) Displays the current value at Input 1 of the analog module and at
the output of the analog module in mA
Note:
Only possible if a analog module is being used.
Table 1-10: Read and adapt main display (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
1-36 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
System Description
[mA] In2/Output ((example) Displays the current value at Input 2 of the analog module and at
the output of the analog module in mA
Note:
Only possible if an analog module is being used.
[mA] Inputs (example) Diplays the current value at both inputs of the analog module
in mA
Note:
max. Temp. °C (example) Displays the maximum temperature of all used sensor measuring
circuits of the temperature module in °C
Note:
Only possible if a temperature module is being used.
Temperatures °C (example) Displays the individual temperatures of all used sensor measuring
circuits of the temperature module in °C
Note:
Max. Temp. °F (example) Displays the maximum temperature of all used sensor measuring
circuits of the temperature module in °F
Note:
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 1-37
System Description
Temperatures °F (example) Displays the individual temperatures of all used sensor measuring
circuits of the temperature module in °F
Note:
UL1, UL2, UL3 (example) Displays all phase voltages in V

Note:
Imax, UL1, Cos (example) Displays the maximum current of all three phases in amperes, the
phase voltage UL1 in V, and the power factor absolute
Note:
Imax, UL1 °C (example) Displays the maximum current of all three phases in amperes, the
phase voltage UL1 in V, and the maximum temperature of all used
sensor measuring circuits of the temperature module in °C
Note:
Only possible if a current/voltage measuring module and
temperature module are being used.
Imax, UL1 °F (example) Displays the maximum current of all three phases in amperes, the
phase voltage UL1 in V, and the maximum temperature of all used
sensor measuring circuits of the temperature module in °F
Note:
Only possible if a current/voltage measuring module and
temperature module are being used.
SIMOCODE pro
1-38 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
System Description
Calculator 1 (example) Displays the calculated result that the function block Calculator 1
provides, unitless in the range of 0 to 65535
Note:
Enables, for example, the depiction on the switchgear display of a
2-byte value sent directly from the automation system, i.e. the
unitless depiction of all 2-byte values available in SIMOCODE pro
Calculator 2 (example) Displays the calculated result that the function block Calculator 2
provides, unitless in the range of 0 to 65535
Note:
Enables, for example, the depiction on the switchgear display of a
2-byte or 4-byte value sent directly from the automation system, i.e.
the unitless depiction of all 2 or 4-byte values available in
SIMOCODE pro
Note
If measured values are not depicted on the main display for a sustained
period of time, a profile has been selected in the display settings that is no
longer supported, due, for example, to a changed system expansion or
changed hardware configuration. The profile must be reselected.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 1-39
System Description
Display of measured values in the measured value indicator

The "Measured value" menu item displays all current SIMOCODE pro
measured values.
Depending upon the type of expansion modules used, all or only some of
the values listed here will be available.
Here are the most important menus:
I max (example) Displays the maximum current of all three phases, switchable
between amperes or % of ls
Note:
IL1, IL2, IL3 (example) Displays the maximum current of all three phases, switchable
between amperes or % of ls
Note:
Phase Unbalance (example) Displays current phase unbalance in %.
Note:
UL1, UL2, UL3 (example) Displays all phase voltages in V

Note:
Only possible if a current/voltage measuring module is being used
Table 1-11: Display of measured values in the measured value indicator
SIMOCODE pro
1-40 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
System Description
Cos phi, P, S (example) Displays the power factor (0...100% or absolute, switchable via the
right-hand softkey), the active power in kW and the apparent power
in kVA
Note:
Analog Input 1, Displays the current values at both inputs and the current value at
Analog Input 2, the output of the analog module, switchable between mA or %
Analog Output (example)
Note:
max. Temperature (example) Displays the maximum temperature of all used sensor measuring
circuits of the temperature module in °C (switchable to °F)
Note:
Only possible if a temperature module is being used
T1, T2, T3 (example) Displays the maximum temperature of all used sensormeasuring
circuits of the temperature module in °C (or switchable to °F)
Note:
Only possible if a temperature module is being used
Heating Motor Model (example) Displays the current heating of the internal motor model in %
Table 1-11: Display of measured values in the measured value indicator (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 1-41
System Description
Time to Trip Displays the estimated time to trip
Cooling Down Period (example) Displays the cooling down period remaining before the motor can
be switched on again after an overload trip
Last Trip Current (example) Displays the strength of the current that was measured at the
moment of the overload trip, switchable between A or % of ls
Table 1-11: Display of measured values in the measured value indicator (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
1-42 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
System Description
Motor protection and motor control status

The status display shows all higher-level status information, i.e. all status
information relevant to the protection and controlling of the motor. The type
of status information depicted is, therefore, in part directly dependent upon
the parameterized control function and the hardware configuration of
SIMOCODE pro, and may vary.
General
General Fault, General Warning
Current Flowing, Device ok
Bus ok, PLC/PCS in Run
Control: The display of the status information can vary according to the control function.
ON<<, ON<, OFF, ON>, ON>>,

Start Active
Table 1-12: Motor protection and motor control status
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 1-43
System Description
Interlocking Time Active,

Change-Over Pause Active
OPO, Remote, TPF
FC, FO, TC, TO Only for "positioner" control functions,

can vary according to the actual postioner function
Postioner runs in Close direction Only for "positioner" control functions

Positioner runs in Open direction
Non-Maintained Command Mode
Table 1-12: Motor protection and motor control status (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
1-44 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
System Description
Protection
Cooling Down Period Active,

Pause Time Active,
Emergency Start Executed
Other
Device Test Active
Phase Sequence 1-2-3,

Note:
Phase Sequence 3-2-1
Table 1-12: Motor protection and motor control status (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 1-45
System Description
Display of statistical and maintenance-relevant information on the Statistics/

Maintenance display
The "Statistics/Maintenance" menu item gives an overview of all
SIMOCODE pro information that is primarily relevant to maintenance. The
statuses of the timer and counter, etc. are displayed, as well as operating
hours, motor stop times and the number of starts.
General
Number of Overload Trips
Motor Operating Hours
Motor Operating Hours > Displays exceedance of the stipulated limit for monitoring operating
hours
Number of Starts - Actual Value

(example)
Table 1-13: Display of statistical and maintenance-relevant information in the Statistics/Maintenance

display
SIMOCODE pro
1-46 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
System Description
Permissible Starts - Actual Value

(example)
One More Start Only, No Start
Motor Stop Time (example)
Motor Stop Time > Displays exceedance of the stipullated limit for monitoring motor
stop time
Consumed Energy (example)

Note:

display (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 1-47
System Description
Number of Parameterizations (ex.)
Operating Hours BU (example)
Timer
Timer 1 (2, 3, 4) Actual Value

(example)
Timer 1 (2, 3, 4) Output

display (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
1-48 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
System Description
Counter 1 (2, 3, 4) Actual

Value(example)
Counter 1 (2, 3, 4) Output

display (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 1-49
System Description
Status display for PROFIBUS communication

The "Communication" menu item displays all important information
concerning PROFIBUS communication. In addition to the current PROFIBUS
device address, the baud rate or PROFIBUS-relevant settings concerning
process alarms and diagnostic alarms for the automation system are also
displayed.
PROFIBUS Address (example)
Bus o.k.
Bus Monitoring
PLC/PCS in Run
PLC/PCS Monitoring
Bus/PLC Fault Reset
Table 1-14: Status display for PROFIBUS communication
SIMOCODE pro
1-50 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
System Description
Starting Parameter Lock
Timestamping Active
Compatibility Mode
Compatibility Mode 1
3UF50 Mode
3UF50 Operating Mode

DPV0, DPV1
Table 1-14: Status display for PROFIBUS communication (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 1-51
System Description
3UF50 Basic Type
Diagnosis Device Fault Displays the diagnosis information sent by SIMOCODE pro to a
Diagnosis Status Info higher-level automation system via PROFIBUS
Diagnosis Warning Displays the diagnosis information sent by SIMOCODE pro to a

Diagnosis Fault higher-level automation system via PROFIBUS
Table 1-14: Status display for PROFIBUS communication (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
1-52 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
System Description
Display of the current status of all device I/Os

"Device I/Os" gives a complete overview of the current status of all inputs
and outputs of the basic device as well as any connected expansion
modules (exception: earth-fault module).
The type of status information displayed is, therefore, directly dependent
upon the SIMOCODE pro hardware configuration.
Basic Unit
Inputs 1 (2, 3, 4)
Outputs 1 (2, 3)
PTC High Resistance / Not Present
PTC ok, PTC Short Circuit
Table 1-15: Display of the current status of all device I/Os
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 1-53
System Description
Current Measuring
I L1, I L2, I L3
Note:
Voltage Measurement
U L1, U L2, U L3
Note:
Digital Module 1, Digital Module 2
Inputs 1 (2, 3, 4)
Note:
Only possible if a digital module is being used
Outputs 1 (2)
Monostable Outputs
Bistable Outputs
Table 1-15: Display of the current status of all device I/Os (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
1-54 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
System Description
Analog Module
Input 1, Input 2 (example)

Note:
Output (example)
Open Circuit
Temperature Module
Max. Temperature (example)

Note:
T1, T2, T3 (example)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 1-55
System Description
Sensor Type
Pt100
Pt1000
NTC
KTY83
KTY85
Sensor Fault
Sensor Out Of Range
SIMOCODE pro
1-56 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
System Description
Adapt display settings

All settings relevant to the operator panel with display can be carried out via
the display settings. In addtion to selecting the language and adjusting the
contrast or lighting, it is also possible to select the profiles here which are
relevant for adjusting the main display. The display settings can be
completely reset to the factory settings via the corresponding menu item.
Languages
Example: English
German
French
Polish
Spanish
Portuguese
Italian
Finnish
Contrast
Example: 0%
5%
10 %
15 %
20 %
25 %
30 %
35 %
40 %
45 %
50 %
55 %
60 %
65 %
70 %
75 %
80 %
85 %
90 %
95 %
100 %
Illumination
Example: Stipulates how long the background illumination remains on after a

button has been pushed on the operator panel with display, i.e. it
enables the illumination to be switched off permanently:
OFF
3_s
10_s
1_min
5_min
Table 1-16: Displays the current status of all device I/Os
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 1-57
System Description
Profiles
See Section Enables selection of the display profiles for the main display.
"Menu of the operator panel If a defined profile is no longer supported by SIMOCODE pro, for
with display and menu example, due to a changed hardware configuration, the start display
navigation" Main Display is shown instead of the default main display.
• IL1, IL2, IL3 [A]

• Imax [A]
• IL1, IL2, IL3 [%]
• Imax [%]
• Imax, Cos
• Imax, UL1, Cos, S
• Imax, UL1, Cos, P
• [mA] In1/Output
• [mA] In2/Output
• [mA] Inputs
• max. Temp. °C
• Temperatures °C
• max. Temp. °F
• Temperatures °F
• UL1, UL2, UL3
• Imax, UL1, Cos
• Imax, UL1, °C (max. Temp.)
• Imax, UL1, °F (max. Temp.)
• Calculator 1
• Calculator 2
Warnings
Determines whether, in the case of a pending general warning, the

display should switch over to the menu item "Warnings" so that
details are displayed (not switched on as standard)
Do Not Display
Display
Faults
Determines whether, in the case of a pending general fault, the

display should switch over to the menu item "Faults" so that details
are displayed (switched on as standard, higher priority than
pending warnings)
Do Not Display
Display
Table 1-16: Displays the current status of all device I/Os (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
1-58 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
System Description
Return to Main Display
Determines whether and when to return from the current menu to

the main display.
• Manual
• 3_s
• 10_s
• 1_min
• 5_min
Factory Settings
Enables resetting the display settings (not to the factory settings

of SIMOCODE pro!)
Table 1-16: Displays the current status of all device I/Os (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 1-59
System Description
Resetting, testing and parameterizing via commands

The "Commands" menu item contains all commands relating to
SIMOCODE pro e.g. for testing the feeder, resetting after tripping and/or
adopting parameters into the memory module or into SIMOCODE pro. By
safeguarding the device-internal parameterization against external access,
e.g. via a password stipulated in SIMOCODE pro, individual commands and/
or even the entire "Commands" menu item can be blocked.
Test/Reset Only if Test/Reset has not been blocked
Adopt address Only if the Test/Reset button has not been blocked and a password
has not been stipulated.
Program Only if Test/Reset has not been blocked
Clear Always possible
Reading in Only if the Test/Reset button has not been blocked and a password
has not been stipulated.
Restart Only if Test/Reset has not been blocked
Factory settings Only if Test/Reset has not been blocked
Table 1-17: Resetting, testing and parameterizing via commands
SIMOCODE pro
1-60 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
System Description
Display of all pending status information

This menu item gives an overview of all pending status information. A
detailed description of pending status information can be found in
Chapter 15 "Alarm, Fault and System Events".
Fig. 1-16: Display of all pending status information (examples)
Display of all pending warnings

This menu item gives an overview of all pending warnings. In the case of a
newly pending general warning, it is possible to switch to this menu item via
the display settings so that the exact cause of the general warning can be
displayed. A detailed description of pending warnings can be found in
Fig. 1-17: Display of all pending warnings (examples)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 1-61
System Description
Display of all pending faults

This menu item gives an overview of all pending faults. In the case of a
newly pending general fault, it is possible to switch to this menu item via
the display settings so that the exact cause of the general fault can be
displayed. A detailed description of pending faultss can be found in
h
Fig. 1-18: Display of all pending faults
Reading out the device-internal error buffer

The "Errror Buffer" menu item enables access to the SIMOCODE pro device-
internal error buffer. The time and cause of the last 21 faults are displayed
here. See also Chapter 14.4 "Error Buffer / Error Protocol Read-Out". A
detailed description of the faults can be found in Chapter 15 "Alarm, Fault
and System Events".
Fig. 1-19: Reading out the device-internal error buffer (examples)
SIMOCODE pro
1-62 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
System Description
Identification of the motor feeder and the SIMOCODE pro components

In the "Identification" menu item you will find detailed information about
SIMOCODE pro hardware components, e.g. hardware and firmware
statuses. Furthermore, this dialog enables the identification of the motor
feeder via a plant identifier stored in SIMOCODE pro, as well as a request
for the location designation and display of the device-internal comment.
Marking
Plant Identifier
Location Designation
Date
Comment
Table 1-18: Identification of the motor feeder and the SIMOCODE pro components
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 1-63
System Description
Basic Unit
MLFB (order number) (example)
Short Code
Manufacturer
Device Family (example)
Device Subfamily (example)
Table 1-18: Identification of the motor feeder and the SIMOCODE pro components (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
1-64 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
System Description
Device Class (example)
System
Identification Number (example)
HW Version
FW Version (example)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 1-65
System Description
Timestamp (example)
Display
MFLB (order number)
HW Version
FW Version
SIMOCODE pro
1-66 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
System Description
1.7.4 Current Measuring Modules (IM)
Current measuring modules are used together with the basic units of the
SIMOCODE pro C and SIMOCODE pro V device series.
The current measuring module must be selected according to the set
current to be monitored (rated operating current of the motor). The current
measuring modules cover current ranges between 0.3 A and 630 A, with
interposing transformers up to 820 A.
The following figure shows the various current measuring modules:
Current measuring modules Device series

SIMOCODE pro C
SIMOCODE pro V
0.3 A - 3 A 10 A - 100 A
2.4 A - 25 A
20 A - 200 A 63 A - 630 A
Fig. 1-20: Current measuring modules
The current measuring module is connected to the basic unit via a

connecting cable, which also supplies the power. Current measuring
modules up to 100 A are suitable for standard rail mounting or can be fixed
directly to the mounting plate using additional push-in lugs. Basic units can
be snapped directly onto the current measuring modules. The current
measuring modules up to 200 A can also be mounted on the standard
mounting rail or, optionally, they can be fixed directly to the mounting plate
with the screw attachments that are integrated in the enclosure. The current
measuring module up to 630 A can only be mounted using the integrated
screw attachments.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 1-67
System Description
1.7.5 Current/Voltage Measuring Modules (UM) for the SIMOCODE pro V

Device Series
The SIMOCODE pro V device allows use of a current/voltage measuring

module instead of a current measuring module. In addition to measuring the
motor current, current/voltage measuring modules also enable
• Monitoring of voltages up to 690 V
• Calculation and monitoring of power and cos phi
• Monitoring of thephase sequence.
The following figure shows the various current/voltage measuringmodules:
Current/voltage measuring modules Device series

Monitoring voltages up to 690 V SIMOCODE pro V
0.3 A - 3 A 10 A - 100 A
2.4 A - 25 A
20 A - 200 A 63 A - 630 A
Fig. 1-21: Current/voltage measuring modules
The current/voltage measuring module is connected to the basic device via

a connecting cable, which also supplies electric power. Current/voltage
measuring modules up to 100 A are suitable for standard rail mounting or
can be fixed directly to the mounting plate using additional push-in lugs. The
current/voltage measuring modules up to 200 A can also be mounted on the
standard mounting rail or, optionally, they can be fixed directly to the
mounting plate with the screw attachments that are integrated in the
enclosure. The current/voltage measuring module up to 630 A can only be
mounted using the integrated screw attachments. Basic units can only be
mounted separately next to current/voltage measuring modules.
SIMOCODE pro
1-68 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
System Description
For calculating or monitoring performance variables, current/voltage

measuring modules have additional, detachable terminals that can be fed
with all three phase voltages of the main circuit.
Note
Utilization of a current/voltage measuring module requires a basic unit 2,
product version *E02* (from 04/2005) or later.
Note
When using current/voltage measuring modules in ungrounded networks
and/or when using insulation monitors for earth-fault / fault current
detection, each current/voltage measuring module should have an
decoupling module (DCM) connected upstream in series at the system
interface.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 1-69
System Description
1.7.6 Decoupling Module (DCM) for Current/Voltage Measuring Modules
When measuring voltage and power with SIMOCODE pro in ungrounded

networks, each current/voltage measuring module must have a decoupling
module connected upstream in series.
If using the 3UF710 current measuring module in these networks, it is
imperative that an additional decoupling module is not used.
• 1 Decoupling module for switching in series upstream from a current/voltage
measuringmodule at the system interface
Decoupling module Device series

SIMOCODE pro V
Fig. 1-22: Decoupling module
Note
When using a decoupling module, the type and number of expansion
modules that can be connected to a basic device must be limited! See
Chapter 1.7.8 "Configuration Information for Using an Operator Panel with
Display and/or a Decoupling Module".
SIMOCODE pro
1-70 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
System Description
1.7.7 Expansion Modules for the SIMOCODE pro V Device Series
Expansion modules are intended as optional additions for the

SIMOCODE pro V device series. The following expansion modules are
available:
• Digital modules (DM)
• Analog module (AM)
• Earth-fault module (EM)
• Temperature module (TM).
All expansion modules have the same design with an enclosure width of
22.5 mm. They are equipped with 2 system interfaces (incoming/outgoing),
and removable terminals.
The following figure shows an expansion module:
Expansion module Device series

SIMOCODE pro V
Fig. 1-23: Expansion module
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 1-71
System Description
Digital module (DM)

Digital modules allow the type and number of binary inputs and relay
outputs on basic unit 2 to be further increased, if required.
The following digital modules are available for basic unit 2:
Inputs Supply Outputs
4 inputs 24 V DC, external 2 monostable relay outputs
4 inputs 110 - 240 V AC/DC, external 2 monostable relay outputs
4 inputs 24 V DC, external 2 bistable relay outputs
4 inputs 110 - 240 V AC/DC, external 2 bistable relay outputs
Table 1-19: Versions of digital modules
A maximum of 2 digital modules can be connected to basic unit 2.

Thus, 4 additional binary inputs and 2 additional binary outputs are available.
In this way, all versions can be combined with each other. SIMOCODE pro V
can thus be extended to a maximum of 12 binary inputs and 7 relay outputs.
In the case of the monostable version, the relay outputs open after
switching off/failure/interruption of the supply voltage. With the bistable
version, the switching state of the relay outputs remains intact even after
switching off/failure/interruption of the supply voltage.
If required, you can set a delay for the digital module inputs (see
Chapter 7.4 "Digital Module Inputs").
Supplying the inputs: See Chapter 13.3 "Wiring".
Note
If two digital modules are being used, the digital module connected the
closest to the basic unit via the system interface will be identified as Digital
Module 1. The digital module that follows behind will be identified as Digital
Module 2. If one digital module is connected to the front side and another to
the lower system interface of the basic unit, the digital module on the front
system interface of the basic unit will always be identified as Digital
Module 1.
SIMOCODE pro
1-72 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
System Description
Analog module (AM)

By means of the analog module, basic unit 2 can be optionally expanded by
analog inputs and outputs (0/4 mA to 20 mA). As a result, it is possible to
measure and monitor any process variable that can be mapped on to a
0/4 mA - 20-mA signal.
Typical applications would be, for example, fill-level monitoring for
protecting pumps from dry operation, or the monitoring of pollution in a
filter using a differential pressure transducer. The automation system has
free access to the measured process variables. The analog output can, for
example, be used for the visualization of any process variables on a pointer
instrument. The automation system can also freely access the output via
PROFIBUS.
• 1 analog module can be connected to BU2
• 2 analog inputs (passive) for detecting signals from 0/4 mA - 20 mA.
Both inputs are set to either 0 - 20 mA or 4 mA - 20 mA
• 1 output for outputting a 0/4 mA - 20 mA signal.
Attention
The inputs of the analog module are passive inputs that have to be supplied
by an external, isolated current source (e.g. isolating transducer). If the
output of the analog module is not being utilized, it can be used as current
source for an input.
Note
The use of an analog module requires basic unit 2, product version *E02*
(from 04/2005) or later.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 1-73
System Description
Earth-fault module (EM)

For networks grounded with a higher impedance it may be necessary to set
up the earth-fault monitoring for smaller earth-fault currents using a 3UL22
summation current transformer, instead of carrying out earth-fault
monitoring via a current measuring module or current/voltage measuring
module. Rated fault currents of 0.3 A, 0.5 A, and 1 A can be evaluated with
the summation current transformer.
In addition to the internal earth-fault monitoring supported by both device
series, SIMOCODE pro V can thus be expanded by a more precise,
additional external earth-fault monitoring system.
The earth-fault module adds an additional input for connecting a summation
current transformer to basic unit 2.
• 1 Earth-fault module connectable to BU2.
Note
The use of an earth-fault module requires basic unit 2, product version
*E02* (from 04/2005) or later.
SIMOCODE pro
1-74 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
System Description
Temperature module (TM)

The temperature module allows expansion of the SIMOCODE pro V device
series with an analog temperature monitoring system. In addition to the
thermistor monitoring of the basic units, up to 3 analog sensor measuring
circuits (in two or three-wire systems) can be connected, the temperatures
in the 3 sensor measuring circuits can be measured, and the highest
temperature in all sensor measuring circuits can be determined. The
measured temperatures can be fully integrated into the process, and they
can be further monitored and also made available for a higher-level
automation system via PROFIBUS.
This makes it possible, for example, to implement analog temperature
monitoring of the motor windings, bearings, the coolant temperature and
the gearoil temperature.
SIMOCODE pro V supports various sensor types (NTC,
KTY83/84, PT100 and PT1000) for use in hard, fluid or gaseous media.
Notice
The same sensor type must be used in all sensor measuring circuits.
• 1 Temperature module connectable to BU2

• 3 Sensor measuring circuits in 2 or 3-wire systems
Note
The use of a temperature module requires basic unit 2, product version
*E02* (from 04/2005) or later.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 1-75
System Description
1.7.8 Configuration Information for Using an Operator Panel with Display

and/or a Decoupling Module
If a Decoupling Module and/or an Operator Panel with Display is to be used

in the SIMOCODE pro system, the following configuration information
regarding the type and number of expansion modules must be observed.
The following table shows the maximum expansion with expansion modules
for the various combinations:
Using an operator panel with display

Only Operator panel with display:
Digital module Digital module Analog Temperature Earth-fault
module module module
Max. 4 expansion modules applicable
Table 1-20: Maximum expansion with expansion modules when using an operator panel with display
Operator panel with display and current/voltage measuring module with basic
unit 2 (110 V - 240 V AC/DC):
Max. 3 expansion modules applicable, or
X X
Table 1-21: Maximum expansion with expansion modules when using an operator panel with display
and current/voltage measuring with basic unit 2 (110 V - 240 V AC/DC):
Using a decoupling module (voltage measurement in isolated networks)

Basic unit 2 (24 V DC):
X 1) X 1) X X X
Table 1-22: Maximum expansion with expansion modules when using a decoupling module (voltage
measurement in isolated networks) and basic unit 2 (24 V DC)
Basic unit 2 (110 V - 240 V AC/DC):

X X X X
1) 1)
X X X X
X X X
X X X
measurement in isolated networks) and basic unit 2 (110 V - 240 V AC/DC)
1) No bistabile relay outputs and maximally 5 of 7 relay outputs at the same

time (> 3 s) active
SIMOCODE pro
1-76 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
System Description
Using a decoupling module (voltage measurement in isolated networks) in

connection with an operator panel with display
Basic unit 2 (24 V DC):
X X X X
X X X X
measurement in isolated networks) in connection with an operator panel with display
and basic unit 2 (24 V DC)
Basic unit 2 (110 V - 240 V AC/DC):

X 2) X X X
X X
X 1) X 1) X 3)
X X X
measurement in isolated networks) in connection with an operator panel with display
and basic unit 2 (110 V - 240 V AC/DC)

time (> 3 s) active
time (> 3 s) active
3) Analog module output not used
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 1-77
System Description
1.7.9 Accessories
The following figure shows accessories that are independent of the device
series:
PC cable Addressing plug Device series

SIMOCODE pro C
SIMOCODE pro V
System interface Door adapter Adapter for operator panel

cover
Memory module
Connecting cable
Fig. 1-24: Accessories
PC cable
For device parameterization, for connecting a PC to the system interface of
a basic unit via theserial interface of the PC.
Memory module
For plugging onto the system interface and fast reading in or out of the
entire SIMOCODE pro parameterization, e.g. if a device is replaced (see
Chapter 14.3.3 "Replacing SIMOCODE pro Components").
Addressing plug
For the hardware-related allocation of the PROFIBUS DP address to
SIMOCODE pro without a PC/programming device via the system interface.
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address with an addressing plug:
See Chapter 14.2.2 "Setting the PROFIBUS DP Address".
Connecting cable
In various designs and lengths. These are required to connect the basic unit
to its current measuring module and, if applicable, to its expansion modules
or the operator panel. The total length of all connecting cables must not
exceed 3 m per system!
SIMOCODE pro
1-78 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
System Description
Door adapter
To faciliate access (e.g. front panel) to the system interface of a system
(SIMOCODE pro), thus ensuring fast parameterization.
System interface cover

To protect and/or seal the system interfaces against soiling. In normal
operation, unused system interfaces must be closed.
Adapter for operator panel

Enables the use of the SIMOCODE pro 3UF720 operator panel in a front
panel cut-out in which a SIMOCODE DP 3UF52 operator panel (IP54 degree
of protection) was previously used, e.g. after a system change. Can also be
used when replacing a 3UF721 operator panel with display with a 3UF720
standard operator panel.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 1-79
System Description
1.7.10 Software
SIMOCODE pro offers various software tools for thorough, time-saving

parameterization, configuration and diagnostics:
SIMOCODE ES
SIMOCODE ES is the standard parameterization software for
SIMOCODE pro, and is runnable on a PC/programming device under
Windows 2000 or Windows XP.
It is available in two versions:
• SIMOCODE ES Smart, for direct connection of the PC/programming device
(serial interface) to SIMOCODE pro with a PC cable via the system interface
on the device (point to point)
• SIMOCODE ES Professional, for connecting one or more devices via
PROFIBUS DP and/or with a PC cable via the system interface on the device.
You will find a demo and latest updates on the Internet at
http://www.siemens.com/simocode -> Support -> Tools & Downloads.
SIMOCODE ES Graphic is an optional software package for
SIMOCODE ES Smart or SIMOCODE ES Professional. It extends the user
interface by a graphics editor and, as a result, allows very ergonomic and
user-friendly parameterization per "Drag & Drop".
“Drag & Drop”. Inputs and outputs of function blocks can be graphically
linked and the parameters set. The device parameterization can be
graphically documented.
See also Chapter 1.9 "Overview of Function Blocks (Alphabetical)".
Note
Prerequisite for the installation of SIMOCODE ES Graphic is an installed
version of SIMOCODE ES Smart 2004 + Service Pack 1 or
SIMOCODE ES Professional + Service Pack 1 on the PC/programming
device.
Note
SIMOCODE ES is subject to continual maintenance and improvement.
Current Service Packs and Hotfixes can be downloaded at
http://www.siemens.com/simocode -> Support -> Tools & Downloads.
Object Manager OM SIMOCODE pro

Part of SIMOCODE ES Professional. When SIMOCODE ES Professional and
the OM SIMOCODE pro are installed on a PC/programming device,
SIMOCODE ES Professional can be called up directly from Step7 HW
configuration. This enables simple and thorough SIMATIC-S7 configuration.
SIMOCODE pro
1-80 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
System Description
SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 library

The SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 library is used to simply and conveniently
connect SIMOCODE pro to the SIMATIC PCS 7 process control system.
The SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 library contains
• the diagnostic and driver blocks that correspond to the diagnostic and driver
concept of SIMATIC PCS 7
• The elements (symbols and faceplate) necessary for operating and
monitoring.
Note
The PCS 7 library is subject to continual maintenance and improvement.
Current Service Packs and Hotfixes can be downloaded at
www.siemens.com/simocode -> Support -> Tools & Downloads
Notice
Observe the respective system versions!
GSD File
For integration into SIMATIC S7 or any DP standard mastersystem
(automation system). The latest version can be found on the internet at
http://www.siemens.com/profibus-gsd.
Further information about the integration of DP slaves can be found in the
automation system documentation.
Win SIMOCODE DP Converter

This is a software tool for converting "old" Win SIMOCODE DP parameter
files (3UF5 device series) into SIMOCODE ES parameter files for
SIMOCODE pro.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 1-81
System Description
1.8 Structural Configuration of SIMOCODE pro

1.8.1 Function Blocks
See also Chapter 1.9 "Overview of Function Blocks (Alphabetical)".
Properties
Function blocks are deposited in the SIMOCODE pro system, e.g., for the
administration of various control stations, for the configured control
function, or for motor protection. Every function block has a name and may
be equipped with inputs and outputs. The inputs and outputs are used for
the internal connection of the various funcion blocks and, thus, the setup of
a device-internal logic instead of an externally wired logic in the control
circuit.
The following table shows the possible input and output types of the
internal function blocks of SIMOCODE pro:
Input Symbol Example

Plugs Function blocks in the basic unit may have binary
(binary) plugs. These are connected via software to binary
sockets. They are relevant for parameterization, e.g.
with SIMOCODE ES.
Plugs Function blocks in the basic unit may have analog
(analog) plugs. These are connected via software to analog
sockets. They are relevant for parameterization, e.g.
with SIMOCODE ES. Example: 2-byte word for cyclic
send data.
Screw Screw terminals are outside, e.g. function block
terminals "BU - Input". Control devices and auxiliary switches
arenormally connected there.
Control data From the DP master to SIMOCODE pro,
from DP e.g. function block "Cyclic Control".
PROFIBUS DP
Output
Sockets Function blocks in the basic devices may have binary
(binary) sockets. These are assigned via software to binary
plugs.
They are relevant for parameterization e.g. with
SIMOCODE ES.
Sockets Function blocks in the basic devices may have analog
(analog) sockets. Sockets are assigned via software to analog
plugs.
They are relevant for parameterization, e.g. with
SIMOCODE ES.
Example: 2-byte word max. current I_max.
Screw Screw terminals are outside, e.g. function block
terminals "BU - Output". Contactors, for example, are
connected there.
Table 1-26: Input and output types of the internal function blocks of SIMOCODE pro
SIMOCODE pro
1-82 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
System Description
Output Symbol Example

Send data to From SIMOCODE pro to the DP-Master,
PROFIBUS DP DP e.g. function block "Cyclic Send Data".
Binary terminal Internal binary signals (binary sockets) that are not
block assigned to a function block (fault, status, other),
e.g. "Status - Device o.k." (in the graphics editor).
Analog terminal Internal analog signals (analog sockets) that are not
block assigned to a function block, e.g. "Phase Unbalance"
(in the graphics editor).
Table 1-26: Input and output types of the internal function blocks of SIMOCODE pro (Cont.)
Schematic of principle structural configuration

The following function block diagram shows the principal configuration of
SIMOCODE pro with its external inputs and outputs and internally stored
function blocks:
SIMOCODE pro (external) SIMOCODE pro (internal)

Inputs Outputs
(terminals) Sockets Plugs Sockets Plugs (terminals)
BU Inputs Function block A BU Outputs
1 1
IN1 Standard function OUT1
2 2
IN2 Function block C OUT2
3 3
IN3 OUT3
4 4
IN4
Standard function
Cyclic Function block B Cyclic

control Send
Bit 0.0 Bit 0.0
To DP
Control function
From DP Bit 0.1 Bit 0.1 Master
Master Function block D
DP Bit 0.2 Bit 0.2 DP
Logic function
PROFIBUS DP PROFIBUS DP
Fig. 1-25: Principal configuration of SIMOCODE pro
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 1-83
System Description
Connecting plugs with sockets
Note
The plugs and sockets of the function blocks have not already been
connected at the factory with the binary inputs and the relay outputs of the
basic unit.
Internal wiring (connection of plugs and sockets) is determined by the
selected application. 1)
Note
If external wiring has already been carried out, but SIMOCODE pro has not
yet been parameterized:
If you now press a button, the contactors will not be activated! 1)
1) If you select and load a preset application (e.g. the reversing starter) in
SIMOCODE ES, all links and interlocks for the reversing starter arecreated in
the basic unit.
SIMOCODE pro
1-84 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
System Description
1.9 Overview of Function Blocks (Alphabetical)

Analog Value Recording (Record)
Fig. 1-26: Analog value recording
See Chapter 8.
AM Output
Fig. 1-27: AM output
See Chapter 6.5.
AM Inputs
Fig. 1-28: AM inputs
See Chapter 7.6.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 1-85
System Description
Acyclic Send Byte 0 (1)
Fig. 1-29: Acyclic Send
See Chapter 6.7.
Acyclic Receive Byte 0 (1, 2/3)
Fig. 1-30: Acyclic Receive
See Chapter 7.8.
OP-LED
Fig. 1-31: OP-LED
See Chapter 6.3.
SIMOCODE pro
1-86 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
System Description
OP Buttons
Fig. 1-32: OP buttons
See: Chapter 7.3
Operation Monitoring
Fig. 1-33: Operation monitoring
See Chapter Chapter 5.7.
Flashing 1 (2, 3)
Fig. 1-34: Flashing 1
See Chapter 11.9.
OPO
Fig. 1-35: OPO
See Chapter 10.5.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 1-87
System Description
Calculator (Calculation Module) 1
Fig. 1-36: Calculator (calculation module) 1
See Chapter 11.12
Calculator (Calculation Module) 2
Fig. 1-37: Calculator (calculation module) 2
See Chapter 11.12.
DM1(2) Outputs
Fig. 1-38: DM1(2) outputs
See Chapter 6.4.
SIMOCODE pro
1-88 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
System Description
DM1(2) Inputs
Fig. 1-39: DM1(2) inputs
See Chapter 7.4.
Extended Protection
Fig. 1-40: Extended protection
See Chapter 3.1.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 1-89
System Description
Extended Control
Fig. 1-41: Extended control
See Chapter 4.1.2.
External Fault 1 (and 2, 3, 4, 5, 6)
Fig. 1-42: External fault 1
See Chapter 10.4.
Flickering 1 (2, 3)
Fig. 1-43: Flickering 1
See Chapter 11.10.
SIMOCODE pro
1-90 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
System Description
BU Outputs
Fig. 1-44: BU outputs
See Chapter 6.2.
BU Inputs
Fig. 1-45: BU inputs
See Chapter 7.2.
Limit Monitor 1 (2, 3, 4)
Fig. 1-46: Limit Monitor 1
See Chapter 11.11.
Emergency Start
Fig. 1-47: Emergency Start
See Chapter 10.7.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 1-91
System Description
Non-Volatile Element 1 (2, 3, 4)
Fig. 1-48: Non-volatile element 1
See Chapter 11.8.
TPF
Fig. 1-49: TPF
See Chapter 10.3.
Protection/Control
Fig. 1-50: Protection/control
See Chapter 4.1.2.
SIMOCODE pro
1-92 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
System Description
Signal Conditioner 1 (and 2, 3, 4)
Fig. 1-51: Signal conditioner 1
See Chapter 11.7.
Control Stations
Fig. 1-52: Control stations
See Chapter 4.1.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 1-93
System Description
Current Limits
Fig. 1-53: Current limits
See Chapter 5.2.
Test 1 (2) and Reset 1 (2, 3)
Fig. 1-54: Test 1, Reset 1
See Chapter 10.2.
Thermistor
Fig. 1-55: Thermistor
See Chapter 3.5.
SIMOCODE pro
1-94 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
System Description
Timer 1 (and 2, 3, 4)
Fig. 1-56: Timer 1
See Chapter 11.6.
TM Inputs
Fig. 1-57: TM inputs
See Chapter 7.2.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 1-95
System Description
Monitoring 0/4 - 20 mA
Fig. 1-58: Monitoring 0/4 - 20 mA
Cos phi Monitoring
Fig. 1-59: Cos phi monitoring
SIMOCODE pro
1-96 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
System Description
Earth-Fault Monitoring
Fig. 1-60: Earth-fault monitoring
See Chapter 5.1.
Power Monitoring
Fig. 1-61: Power monitoring
Voltage Monitoring
Fig. 1-62: Voltage monitoring
See Chapter 5.3.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 1-97
System Description
Temperature Monitoring
Fig. 1-63: Temperature monitoring
See Chapter 5.8.
UVO
Fig. 1-64: UVO
See Chapter 10.6.
Truth Table TT 1 3I/1O (TT 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 3I/1O)
Fig. 1-65: Truth table 1 3I/1O
See Chapter 11.2.
SIMOCODE pro
1-98 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
System Description
Truth Table TT 7 2I/1O (TT 8 2I/1O)
Fig. 1-66: Truth table TT 7 2I/1O
See Chapter 11.3.
Truth Table TT 9 5I/2O
Fig. 1-67: Truth table TT 9 5I/2O
See Chapter 11.4.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 1-99
System Description
Watchdog
Fig. 1-68: Watchdog
See Chapter 10.8.
Counter 1 (2, 3, 4)
Fig. 1-69: Counter 1
See Chapter 11.5.
Timestamping
Fig. 1-70: Timestamping
See Chapter 10.9.
SIMOCODE pro
1-100 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
System Description
Cyclic Send Byte 0 (1, 2/9)
Fig. 1-71: Cyclic Send
See Chapter 6.6.
Cyclic Receive Byte 0 (1, 2/3)
Fig. 1-72: Cyclic Receive
See Chapter 7.7.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 1-101
System Description
SIMOCODE pro
1-102 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Short Instructions for Configuring
a Reversing Starter 2
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find short instructions for configuring a reversing
starter, with the aid of a practical example. The majority of the parameters
have been appropriately preset at the factory for most applications.
You only need to set a few parameters.
Target groups
This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:
• Planners
• Configurators
• Technicians
• Electricians
• Commissioners.
Necessary knowledge
• Basic SIMOCODE pro knowledge (see Chapter 1 "System Description")
• Basic knowledge of SIMOCODE ES parameterization software.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 2-1
Short Instructions for Configuring a Reversing Starter
2.1 Introduction and Objective of the Example

Introduction
The following simple example of a reversing starter demonstrates step-by-
step how to commission SIMOCODE pro. In this context, the reversing
starter will be equipped with
• Initially, a local control station - Local Control
• Followed by a second control station with PROFIBUS DP.
SIMOCODE ES software is used for parameterization.

The PC/programming device is connected to the Basic Unit via PC cable.
Objective of the example

This example is intended to
1. Show you how to implement a standard switching operation with a reversing
starter using
SIMOCODE pro in just a few steps
2. Help you modify this example for your respective application
3. Help you implement other applications easily.
Fundamental steps
The two fundamental SIMOCODE pro steps are always:
• Implementation of external wiring (for control and feedback of main current
switching devices and control and signaling devices)
• Implementation/activation of internal SIMOCODE pro functions (function
blocks), with control and evaluation of the SIMOCODE pro inputs/outputs
(internal SIMOCODE pro wiring).
Prerequisites
• Load feeder/motor is present
• PLC/PCS control with PROFIBUS DP interface is present
• The main circuit of the reversing circuit, including the current measuring
module, has already been wired. In this case, the 3 cables leading to the
motor must be led through the through-hole openings of the current
measuring module.
• PC/programming device is present
• SIMOCODE ES software is installed
• The Basic Unit has the basic factory settings. You can find out how to
implement the basic factory settings in .
SIMOCODE pro
2-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
2.2 Reversing Starter with Motor Feeder and Local Control

Station
Necessary components
The following table lists the components required for
this example:
Item Ordering data Order number
1 Basic Unit SIMOCODE pro C, 3UF7000-1AU00-0

(SIMOCODE pro V also possible) (3UF7010-1AU00-0)
2 Current Measuring Module 0.3 A up to 3 A 3UF7000-1AU00-0
3 Connecting cable for connecting the Basic Unit to 3UF793.-1AA00-0

the Current Measuring Module, depending on
length
4 "SIMOCODE ES Smart" software for parameterization 3ZS1 312-1CC10-0YA0

via the system interface or
"SIMOCODE ES Professional" software 3ZS1 312-2CC10-0YA0
for parameterization via the PROFIBUS DP and
system interface, including STEP-7 Object Manager
possible
5 PC cable for connecting the Basic Unit to a PC/ 3UF7940-0AU00-0

programming device
6 PROFIBUS DP cable
Table 2-1: Components required for this example
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 2-3
Reversing starter circuitry with SIMOCODE pro

The following schematic shows the circuitry of the main circuit and the
control circuit:
Main circuit Control circuit
3/N/PE ~ 50/60 Hz 400/230 V

L1
L2
L3
N
PE
L1/L+
1 3 5
Q1 F11
2 4 6 S0 S1 S2
3 through-hole
Current Measuring A2 A1 IN1 IN2 IN3 24 V
openings
Module (IM) Basic Unit (BU)
System System
Connecting cable
interface interface
OUT1 OUT2 1
1 3 5 K1 K2
1 3 5 N/L–
- K1 - K2
2 4 6 2 4 6
PE U V W
Motor, motor rated current e.g. 3 A
M J CLASS 10
3~
Optional: Thermistor
Fig. 2-1: Wiring of the main circuit and the control circuit with SIMOCODE pro
SIMOCODE pro
2-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Circuit diagram of a reversing starter control circuit

The following schematic shows the circuit diagram of the control circuit with
a Local Control Station for the commands
• LEFT
• OFF
• RIGHT.
Displays, events, etc., have not been taken into account.
Standard reversing starter Reversing starter with SIMOCODE pro
L1/L+ L1/L+
Necessary interlocks F11

S1
and connections
S0 S1 S2
A2 A1 IN1 IN2 IN3 24 V

S0 K1 S2 K2
Basic Unit (BU)
K2 K1
OUT1 OUT2 1
K1 K2 K1 K2
N/L– N/L–
S0: "LEFT" button K1: Contactor clockwise rotation

S1: "OFF" button K2: Contactor counterclockwise rotation
S2: "RIGHT" button
Fig. 2-2: Circuit diagram of a reversing starter control circuit
The necessary interlocks and connections are carried out in the Basic Unit
via software.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 2-5
2.3 Parameterization
The basics of parameterization
After the external wiring has been carried out (contactor coils connected,
current measuring module integrated in the main circuit), SIMOCODE pro is
then parameterized.
For this you need to know the following points:
Point Description
1 Function blocks are stored internally in the SIMOCODE pro system, e.g. for
control stations, control functions and motor protection.
2 Function blocks have names.
3 Function blocks may have set values, e.g. the type of control function and the
set current for overload protection.
4 Function blocks are equipped with plugs and sockets. These, in turn, are
clearly designated.
5 To achieve the desired functionality, proceed as follows:
• Connect the function blocks by connecting specific plugs to specific
sockets (i.e "plug the plugs into the sockets")
• If required, set values in the function blocks, e.g. the set current, type of
control function.
6 The inputs of the function blocks in the Basic Unit are designated as plugs
and labeled accordingly:
7 The outputs of the function blocks in the Basic Unit are designated as
sockets and labelled accordingly:
8 The plugs and sockets of the device inputs and outputs are not connected as
factory defaults. If you press a button now, the contactors will not be
activated.
Table 2-2: Schematic of the various SIMOCODE pro function blocks
SIMOCODE pro
2-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
General procedure for parameterizing a reversing starter

Parameterization means:
1. Setting values
2. Connecting function blocks
Where this example is concerned, this means:
• Select the control function "Reversing Starter". This establishes all the
interlockings and connections for the reversing starter in the Basic Unit.
• Determine the set current Is for the motor protection. In this case, the set
current corresponds to the motor rated current, i.e. 3 A.
• The "BU Outputs" function block must be connected to the sockets of the
"Protection/Control" function block via the software, i.e.
– "BU Output 1" plug to "Contactor Control QE1" socket (right)
– "BU Output 2" plug to "Contactor Control QE2" socket (left).
• The plugs on the "Protection/Control" function block must be connected via
software to the sockets on the "BU Inputs" function block, i.e.
– Control station plug - Local Control [LC] ON< to "BU Input 1" socket
– Control station plug - Local Control [LC] OFF to "BU Input 2" socket
– Control station plug - Local Control [LC] ON> to "BU Input 3"socket.
SIMOCODE pro
• Connect • Select reversing starter • Connect

digital inputs • Determine Is relay outputs
"BU Inputs" "BU Outputs"
Protection/Control QE1 1 Right
1 ON<
QE2 2
2 Off
3 ON> Is = 3 A
Left
Control station - Local Control [LC] Contactorcontrols
Fig. 2-3: Schematic of a parameterization example
The assignment of the contactor controls QE depends on the parameterized

control function. See Chapter 4.3 "Active Control Stations, Contactor &
Lamp Controls and Status Information for the Control Functions".
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 2-7
Concrete procedure for parameterization with SIMOCODE ES
Proceed as follows:
Step Description
1 Start SIMOCODE ES on your PC/programming device.

2 Select the control function "Reversing Starter" as application. When you
select this application, a range of presettings will be automatically carried out
that you will have to check later.
3 In the "Device Configuration" menu item, select SIMOCODE pro C or
SIMOCODE pro V. Deactivate the operator panel if this is not available.
4 Open the dialog Device Parameters > Motor Protection > Overload/
Unbalance/Stalled Rotor. Set the set current Is1 to 3 A.
5 Open the dialog Further Function Blocks > Outputs > Basic Unit and check
the following settings:
• BU Output 1 > Contactor Control QE1
• BU Output 2 > Contactor Control QE2
The relay outputs are connected "BU Outputs"

Protection/Control
to the contactor controls. QE1 1
QE2 2
Note
By choosing a preset application (Step 2), other presettings might be made
when assigning the BU outputs to the contactor controls.
6 Open the dialog Device Parameters> Motor Control > Control Stations
and check the following settings:
• Local Control [LC] ON<: BU Input 1
• Local Control [LC] OFF: BU Input 2
• Local Control [LC] ON>: BU Input 3
"BU Inputs" The control station "Local Control"
Protection/Control is now connected with the binary
1 ON< inputs of the Basic Unit.
2 OFF
3 ON>
Check whether the releases for "ON" and "OFF" for operating mode "Local2"
are set.
7 Parameterization is complete. Save the parameter file on your PC/
programming device using Device > Save.
Table 2-3: Parameterization with SIMOCODE ES
SIMOCODE pro
2-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Transferring parameters to the Basic Unit and commissioning

After creating the parameter file, you can transfer it to SIMOCODE pro and
commission the reversing starter.
Proceed as follows:
Step Description
1 Switch on the voltage supply of the Basic Unit.

2 Connect the serial interface of the PC/programming device and the system
interface of the Basic Unit using the PC cable.
3 Observe the status LED on the Basic Unit. The "Device" LED should light up
green. SIMOCODE pro can be started up.
4 Transfer the parameter file to the Basic Unit via the menu, e.g. using Target
System > Download to Device. Select the RS232 interface with which
SIMOCODE pro is connected to the PC via the PC cable.
5 After transferring the data to the Basic Unit, you will receive the message
"Download to device successfully accomplished".
Table 2-4: Transferring the parameters to the Basic Unit and commissioning
Attention
Switching between "RIGHT" and "LEFT" is only possible via "OFF" after the
preset, 5-second interlocking time has expired.
Configuration with local control station completed

Configuration with SIMOCODE pro is now completed. You now have a
functional reversing starter with a local control station.
If the wiring and parameterization are correct, the contactors for clockwise
and counterclockwise rotation will be activated when the corresponding
buttons are pushed.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 2-9
2.4 Extending the Reversing Starter with a Control Station

via PROFIBUS DP
In this section
In this section you will find out how the previously configured example can
be extended by one control station via PROFIBUS DP. You can switch
between the Local Control control stations (local) and PLC/ PCS (remote).
Thus, SIMOCODE pro can be controlled via the Local Control buttons, as
well as via PLC/ PCS.
The necessary connections are preset as factory defaults in
SIMOCODE pro. Therefore, you only have to set the PROFIBUS DP address
for SIMOCODE pro so that it can be recognized correctly as a DP slave on
the PROFIBUS DP.
Prerequisites
The following prerequisites must be fulfilled:
• The motor is switched off
• The supply voltage for the Basic Unit is switched on. The “Device” LED lights
up green
• You have connected the Basic Unit to the PROFIBUS DP. The PROFIBUS DP
interface is on the front side (9-pole SUB-D- socket)
• You have integrated SIMOCODE pro into your automatization system.
Further information about the integration of DP slaves can be found in the
automation system documentation.
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address

First, set the PROFIBUS DP address of the Basic Unit.
The following options are available:
• Via the addressing plug
• Via SIMOCODE ES.
SIMOCODE pro
2-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via SIMOCODE ES

Proceed as follows:
Step Description
1 Plug the PC cable into the system interface.

2 Start SIMOCODE ES.
3 Open the menu Device > Open Online
4 Select RS232 and the corresponding COM interface.
Confirm with OK.
5 Open the dialog Device Parameters> Bus Parameters
6 Select the DP address.
7 Save the data in the Basic Unit with Target System > Download to Device.
The address is set. Confirm the change of address.
Table 2-5: Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via SIMOCODE ES
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via the addressing plug

Proceed as follows:
Step Description
1 Set the desired valid address on the DIP switch.

The switches are numbered.
For example, address 21: Put switches "16"+"4"+"12" in the "ON position".
2 If necessary, remove the PC cable from the system interface.
3 Plug the addressing plug into the system interface.
The "Device" LED lights up yellow.
4 Press the Test/Reset button briefly. The set address is accepted. The
"Device" LED blinks yellow for approx. 3 seconds.
5 Remove the addressing plug from the system interface.
Table 2-6: Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via the addressing plug
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 2-11
Additional, internal components of the Basic Unit

The Local Control [LC] control station is already wired, the external
components are connected and the necessary internal connections have
been made.
The following additional internal components, which have already been
connected as factory defaults and do not have to be parameterized, are now
required:
• PROFIBUS DP bit 0.0, bit 0.1 and bit 0.2 for the commands "LEFT", "OFF" and
"RIGHT"
• PROFIBUS DP bit 0.5 for switching between the control stations Local
Control [LC] (local) and PLC/PCS [DP] (remote)
– Bit 0.5 = 0: Control Station Local Control [LC] active
– Bit 0.5=1: PLC/ PCS [DP] control station active.
The PLC/PCS [DP] control station and the change-over (plug S1) have
already been connected as factory default with the bits (sockets) of the
PROFIBUS DP Cyclic Send Data. The assignment can be found in
SIMOCODE ES under Device Parameters > Motor Control > Control
Stations.
SIMOCODE pro
"BU Inputs" Control Stations "BU Outputs"

1
1 QE1 Right
LEFT
2
2 QE2
OFF
3
RIGHT Left
Cyclic Cyclic
PROFIBUS DP Receive Bit 0.0 Status - Send
Bit 0.0
LEFT ON<
Bit 0.1 Bit 0.1
DP
OFF OFF DP
Bit 0.2 Bit 0.2
RIGHT ON>
Bit 0.5w
S1
Fig. 2-4: Schematic of Basic Unit internal components for this example
Not all pre-assigned cyclic send data is shown.

The assignment can be found in SIMOCODE ES under Further Function
Modules > Outputs > Cyclic Send Data.
Configuration with PLC/PCS [DP] control station is complete

The configuration with SIMOCODE pro is now complete. You now have a
reversing starter with an additional control station via PROFIBUS DP.
The contactors for clockwise and counterclockwise rotation are controlled
by setting the corresponding bits.
SIMOCODE pro
2-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Motor Protection 3
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information about Motor Protection.
Motor Protection includes
• Overload Protection
• Unbalance Protection
• Stalled Rotor Protection
• Thermistor Protection.
Motor Protection operates alongside Motor Control "at a higher level in the
background". All Motor Protection parameters are explained here. They can
be active or not, according to the control function selected.
Target groups
This chapter is aimed at the following target groups:
• Configurators
• Commissioners.
Necessary knowledge
• Good knowledge of SIMOCODE pro
• The principle of connecting plugs to sockets
• Knowledge of electrical drive engineering.
Navigation in SIMOCODE ES
You will find the dialogs in SIMOCODE ES under
Device Parameters > Motor Protection.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 3-1
Motor Protection
3.1 Introduction
Description
The motor protection functions "Overload Protection", "Unbalance
Protection",
"Stalled Rotor Protection" and "Thermistor Protection" are described in
Chapters 3.2 to 3.4
Schematic
The following schematic diagram shows the "Ext. Protection" function block
("Overload Protection", "Unbalance Protection" and "Stalled Rotor Protection")
with optional parameter settings and events.
SIMOCODE pro
3-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Motor Protection
Protection/Control
Overload Protection
QE1
Set Current Is1 QE2
Tripping
QE3
Is1 Transformation Ratio -
Active 1) QE4
QE5
Counter 1)

Denominator 1)
Set Current Is2

Current from
Active 1)
Current Event/Warning/Fault:
Measuring
Module Is2 Transformation Ratio - - Overload
Counter 1) - Overload + Phase Failure
- Overload Operation
Denominator 1) - Cooling Down Period Active
- Pause Time Active
Class 5,10, to 40
Response at Pre-warning Level See

Table 3-1
- Time to Trip (analog)

Extended parameters: - Thermal motor model (analog)
Reset (manual, auto) - Remaining Cool. Down Per. (analog)

- Last Trip Current (analog)
Type of Load (3-ph., 1-ph.)
Pause Time
Cooling Down Period
Response at Trip Level See

Table 3-1
Unbalance Protection
Unbalance Protection Level See - Unbalance

Table 3-1
Stalled Rotor Protection
Stalled Rotor Protection Level See - Stalled Rotor

Table 3-1
Fig. 3-1: "Ext. Protection" function block (Overload Protection, Unbalance Protection and
Stalled Rotor Protection)
1) Adjustable transformation ratio when using interposing current transformers

with SIMOCODE pro V for Basic Unit 2 from product version *E03*
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 3-3
Motor Protection
Adjustable responses "Overload Protection", "Unbalance Protection" and "Stalled

Rotor Protection"
Response At Pre- At Trip "Unbalance" "Stalled Rotor

warning Level Level Level Protection"
Level
Deactivated X X X X
Signaling X X X X
Warning X X X X
Tripping - X X X
Delay 0-25.5 s (0.5 s) - 0-25.5 s (0.5 s) 0-25.5 s (0.5 s)
Table 3-1: Responses for "Overload Protection", "Unbalance Protection" and "Stalled Rotor Protection"
See also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter "Important

Information".
Notice
Deactivate the Unbalance Protection in SIMOCODE ES when the Type of
Load is set for 1-phase!
SIMOCODE pro
3-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Motor Protection
3.2 Overload Protection

Description
SIMOCODE pro protects three-phase and AC motors in compliance with
IEC 60947-4-1. The tripping class can be set to 8 different settings, ranging
from Class 5 to Class 40. Thus, the tripping time can be adapted precisely to
the power-up behavior of the motor, improving performance. Additionally,
the "Thermal Motor Model" and the time to overload tripping are calculated
and can be placed at the disposal of the control system. After an overload
trip, the remaining Cooling Down Period is displayed. The Overload Trip
Motor Current is saved in the case of an overload trip.
Depending on the control function, the Set Current ls is separately
parameterizable for one or two speeds (Is1 and Is2).
The Motor Rated Current is usually set with the Set Current Is1. This value
can be found on the type plate of the motor. It is the basis for calculating the
overload trip characteristic curve.
Set Current Is2 is only necessary for motors with 2 speeds so that
adequate overload protection for the higher speed is also ensured.
Generally, ls2 should be set higher than ls1.
Set Current ls1
Range: depends upon the selected Current Measuring Module or

Current/Voltage Measuring Module.
Set Current Is1: 0.3 A up to 3A
2.4 A up to 25 A
10 A up to 100 A
20 A up to 200 A
63 A up to 630 A
Is1 Transformation Ratio - Active

When using an interposing transformer, or if there is multiple looping of the
main current cables through the Current Measuring Module or the Current/
Voltage Measuring Module, you can enter the Transformation Ratio of the
interposing transformer.
Activate the checkbox if you wish to use this option.
The parameterized Set Current thus continues to correspond to the actual
Nominal Motor Current and does not have to be converted.
The Transformation Ratio is calculated from the ratio between Nominal
Motor Current [A] and Measuring Current [A] or any multiple of this ratio.
Note
This parameter is only available when using Basic Unit 2 from product
version *E03*.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 3-5
Motor Protection
Is1 Transformation Ratio - Counter

Enter the Transformation Ratio of the interposing transformer (primary)
here, with the "Is1 Transformation Ratio - Active" checkbox activated.
Range: 0 - 8191,875.
Is1 Transformation Ratio - Denominator

Enter the Transformation Ratio of the interposing transformer (secondary)
Range: 0 - 15.
Set Current Is2
Range: Depends on the selected Current Measuring Module or Current/

Voltage Measuring Module.
Set Current Is2 0.3 A up to 3A
2.4 A up to 25 A
10 A up to 100 A
20 A up to 200 A
63 A up to 630 A
Ie2 Transformation Ratio - Active

When using an interposing transformer, or if there is multiple looping of the
main current cables through the Current Measuring Module or the Current/
Voltage Measuring Module, you can enter the Transformation Ratio of the
interposing transformer.
Activate the checkbox if you wish to use this option.
The parameterized Set Current thus continues to correspond to the actual
Nominal Motor Current and does not have to be converted.
The Transformation Ratio is calculated from the ratio between Nominal
Motor Current [A] and Measuring Current [A] or any multiple of this ratio.
Note
This parameter is only available when using Basic Unit 2 from product
version *E03*.
Ie2 Transformation Ratio - Counter

Enter the transformation ratio of the interposing transformer (primary) here,
with the "Is2 Transformation Ratio - Active" checkbox activated.
Range: 0 - 8191.875.
Is2 Transformation Ratio - Denominator

Enter the Transformation Ratio of the interposing transformer (secondary)
Range: 0 - 15.
SIMOCODE pro
3-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Motor Protection
Note:
In the case of motors with two speeds, the same or different Transformation
Ratios can be set for each speed, depending upon whether the same or two
different interposing transformers is/are used for each speed.
Application examples
Example 1:
Motor Rated Current: 700 A.
A 3UF18 68-3G current transformer (205 to 820 A) is used as interposing
transformer (transformation ratio 820 : 1), the secondary side is carried out
via a Current Measuring Module 0.3 up to 3 A: Transformation Ratio for as =
820: 1; ls = 700 A
Settings:
• Set Current Is1: 700 A
• Is1 Transformation Ratio - Counter 820
• Is1 Transformation Ratio - Denominator: 1
Example 2:
Motor Rated Current: 225 A.
A 3UF18 68-3G current transformer (205 to 820 A) is used as interposing
transformer (Transformation Ratio 820 : 1), the secondary side is carried out
twice via a Current Measuring Module 0.3 up to 3 A: Transformation Ratio
for ls = 820 : 2; ls = 225 A
Settings:
• Set Current Is1: 225 A
• Is1 Transformation Ratio - Counter: 820
• Is1 Transformation Ratio - Denominator: 2.
Example 3:
The motor rating is carried out twice via a Current Measuring Module 0.3 up
to 3 A for a motor with rated motor current 0.25 A: Transformation Ratio for
ls = 1: 2; Is = 0.25 A
Settings:
• Set Current Is1: 0.25 A
• Is1 Transformation Ratio - Counter: 1
• Is1 Transformation Ratio - Denominator: 2
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 3-7
Motor Protection
Class
The class (tripping class) indicates the maximum tripping time within which
SIMOCODE pro must trip cold at 7.2 times the Set Current Is (motor
protection according to IEC 60947). Please take into account that with start-
ups > "Class 10", the admissible AC3 current of the contactor may have to
be reduced (derating), i.e. a larger contactor selected.
The following figure shows Tripping Classes 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35 and 40
for 3-pole symmetrical loads:
1.15
Fig. 3-2: Tripping Classes for 3-pole symmetrical loads
SIMOCODE pro
3-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Motor Protection
The following figure shows Tripping Classes 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35 and 40
for 2-pole loads:
0,85
Fig. 3-3: Tripping Classes for 2-pole loads
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 3-9
Motor Protection
Response to Overload
In the case of overload, the SIMOCODE pro response can be additionally
adjusted here:
For further information: See "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in
Chapter "Important Information" and the "Responses" table in
Chapter 3.1 "Introduction".
Attention
With motors for EEx e applications, the response must remain set to
"Tripping"!
Cooling Down Period

The Cooling Down Period is the amount of time that must elapse before an
overload trip can be reset. This is usually five minutes. The Thermal Memory
(Motor Model) (see below) is deleted after the Cooling Down Period expires.
SIMOCODE pro supply voltage failures during this time extend the specified
time accordingly.
Range:
Cooling Down 60 to 6553.5 seconds
Period: Default: 300 s
Thermal Motor Model (Thermal Memory)

At a Motor Rated Current (Is) of 100%, the "Thermal Motor Model" value is
87% (1/1.15 x 100%) in a steady state and 100% at the moment of overload
tripping.
Pause Time
The Pause Time is the specified time for the cooling response of the motor
when switched off under normal operating conditions (not in the case of an
overload trip!). After this interval, the Thermal Memory in SIMOCODE pro is
deleted and a new cold start is possible. This makes frequent start-ups
possible within a short period of time.
SIMOCODE pro
3-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Motor Protection
The following schematic shows the Cooling Off Response with and without
Pause Time:
Motor
ON
OFF
t
Thermal Memory (Motor Model)
Without Pause Time
100 % Trip Level
Overload Trip
With Pause Time
100 % Trip Level
No Overload Trip
Pause Time t
Thermal Memory will be deleted after the Pause Time
elapses
Fig. 3-4: Cooling Down Response with and without Pause Time
Attention
Both the motor and the switching devices must be dimensioned specifically
for this load!
Pause Time: 0 to 6553.5 seconds
Type of Load
You can select whether SIMOCODE pro is to protect a 1-phase or a 3-phase
load.
For a "1-phase" Type of Load, proceed as follows:
• The Internal Earth-fault Monitoring and the Unbalance Protection must be
deactivated
• Only one of the two cables is to be fed through any through-hole opening in
the Current Measuring Module.
Phase Failure Monitoring is deactivated automatically.
Type of Load: 1-phase, 3-phase
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 3-11
Motor Protection
Pre-alarm Delay
The "Delay" parameter (default: 0.5 s) determines the amount of time that
the Pre-warning Level (1.15 x Is) must be constantly exceeded before
SIMOCODE pro executes the desired response. Otherwise there will be no
reaction.
In the case of phase failure or > 50 % unbalance, this pre-warning will
already be issued at approx. 0.85 x Is.
Reset
If the "Reset" parameter is set to "Auto", the "Overload", "Overload +
Unbalance" and "Thermistor" faults will be acknowledged automatically
• When the Cooling Down Period has expired
• When the thermistor value has dropped back down to the specified resetting
value.
If the "Reset" parameter is set to "Manual", the faults must be acknowledged

by a reset signal:
• "Reset" button on the Basic Unit
• "Reset" button on the operator panel.
• Standard functions "Reset".
For this, the "Reset - Input" (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding
sockets, e.g. using Reset via the bus.
Reset: Manual, Auto
Warning
The "Auto-Reset" mode must not be used for applications where an
unexpected motor restart may cause personal injury or damage to property.
SIMOCODE pro
3-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Motor Protection
3.3 Unbalance Protection

Description
The extent of phase unbalance can be monitored and transmitted to the
control system. A definable and delayable response can be tripped when an
adjustable limit has been overshot. If phase unbalance is greater than 50%,
a reduction in the tripping time according to the overload characteristic
curve takes place automatically, as the heat development in motors
increases under asymmetrical conditions.
Level
The level of unbalance to which SIMOCODE pro should react when overshot
is set here.
Level: 0 to 100%
Default: 40%
Response
Here you can choose the response of SIMOCODE pro in case of Phase
Unbalance:
See "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter "Important
Information" and the "Responses" table in Chapter 3.1 "Introduction".
Delay
The unbalance level must be exceeded for the period of the set delay time
before SIMOCODE pro executes the desired response. Otherwise there will
be no reaction.
Setting range: 0 - 25.5 s (default: 0.5 s).
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 3-13
Motor Protection
3.4 Stalled Rotor Protection

Description
After the motor current exceeds an adjustable Stalled Rotor Level (Current
Limit), a definable and delayable response can be parameterized in
SIMOCODE pro. For example, the motor can quickly be set to trip,
independent of the Overload Protection. The Stalled Rotor Protection is only
active after the parameterized Class Time has elapsed (e.g. for Class 10
after 10 seconds), and prevents unnecessarily high thermal and mechanical
loads, as well as premature aging of the motor.
Level
Upon exceeding the Stalled Rotor Level, SIMOCODE pro reacts according to
the selected response.
Range:
Level: 0 to 1020% of ls
Response
Here you can determine the response when the Stalled Rotor Level is
exceeded:
See "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter "Important
Information" and the "Responses" table in Chapter 3.1 "Introduction".
Delay
The "Delay" parameter determines the amount of time that the Stalled Rotor
Level must be constantly exceeded before SIMOCODE pro executes the
desired response. Otherwise there will be no reaction.
Setting range: 0 - 25.5 s (default: 0.5 s).
SIMOCODE pro
3-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Motor Protection
3.5 Thermistor Protection

Description
Thermistor Protection is based on a direct temperature measurement in the
motor via binary PTC thermistors which can be connected to either Basic
Unit 1 (BU1) or Basic Unit 2 (BU2).
Thermistor Protection is used for:
• Motors with high switching frequencies
• Converter operation
• Intermittent and/or braking operation
• Restricted air supply
• Speeds below the rated speed.
In this case, the sensors are mounted in the winding slot or bearings of the
motor.
Schematic and characteristic curve

The resistance of the thermistors increases very rapidly (erratically) when
the Limit Temperature is reached.
R QE1
Thermistor
QE2
Tripping
QE3
υ
QE4
Response at Trip Level See QE5

T1
Table 3-2
Thermistor
Input Event
BU - Thermistor Trip Level
T2 Response to Sensor Fault See - Thermistor Short Circuit
Table 3-2
- Thermistor Open Circuit
Fig. 3-5: Thermistor (Thermistor Protection) Function Block
Response
• Overtemperature:
Here you can select the SIMOCODE pro response if the temperature exceeds
the trip level.
Attention
For motors for EEx e applications, the response must be set to "Tripping"!
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 3-15
Motor Protection
• Sensor Fault (Sensor Circuit Fault):

Here you can select the SIMOCODE pro response in the case of a short
circuit or an open circuit in the thermistor sensor cable.
Response Trip Level Sensor Fault

Deactivated - X
Signaling X X
Warning X X
Tripping X X
Table 3-2: "Thermistor Protection, Binary" response

Information".
SIMOCODE pro
3-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Motor Control 4
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information on
• Control stations which you can select and enable according to need. The
following related topics are explained:
– How Control Stations, operating modes and Releases work together,
– How Ccontrol commands, e.g. "ON", "OFF", are switched through to the
control function.
• Control functions you can select according to need. The following related
topics are explained:
– How control commands, e.g. "ON", "OFF", are switched through from
the Control Stations to the Contactor Controls/Relay Outputs
– Which parameters apply depending on the control function chosen.
Target groups
• Configurators
• PLC programmers.
Necessary knowledge
• Electrical drive engineering
• Motor protection.
Device parameter > Motor Control.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 4-1
Motor Control
4.1 Control Stations

4.1.1 Description
Control stations are places from which control commands can be given to
the motor. The "Control Stations" function block is used for administration,
switching and prioritization of these different Control Stations. With this,
SIMOCODE pro allows the parallel administration of up to four different
Control Stations. Dependent on the specified control function, up to 5
different control commands can be transmitted from every Control Station
to SIMOCODE pro.
• Local, in the direct vicinity of the motor. Control commands are issued via
pushbutton.
• PLC/PCS, switching commands are issued by the automation system
(remote).
• PC, control commands are issued via an Operator Control Station or via
PROFIBUS DPV1 with the SIMOCODE ES software.
• Operator Panel, control commands are issued via the buttons of the
Operator Panel in the switchgear cabinet door.
Control commands can be, e.g:
– Motor ON (ON>), Motor OFF (OFF) for a direct starter
– Motor LEFT (ON<), Motor OFF (OFF), Motor RIGHT (ON>) for a reversing
starter
– Motor SLOW (ON>), Motor FAST (ON>>), Motor OFF (OFF) for a Dahlander
circuit.
The plugs of the "Control Stations" function block must be connected to
arbitrary sockets (e.g. binary inputs on the Basic Unit, control bits from
PROFIBUS DP, etc.) for the control commands to take effect.
Up to 5 different control commands can be sent from each Control Station.
Up to 5 plugs (plug ON<<, ON<, OFF, ON>, ON>>) are available on the
function block per Control Station. The number of active plugs depends on
the chosen control function. With a direct starter, for example, only the
plugs "ON>" and "OFF" are active.
SIMOCODE pro
4-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Motor Control
Control Stations
• Control Station - Local Control
In this case, the control devices are usually in the direct vicinity of the motor
and are wired to the inputs of SIMOCODE pro. The plugs of the "Control
Stations" function block must be connected to arbitrary sockets (normally the
function blocks for the Basic Units or the Digital Module Inputs, Basic Unit
Inputs, DM Inputs) for the control commands to take effect.
Notice
The OFF command "LC OFF" is 0-active. This ensures that SIMOCODE pro
switches off the motor safely e.g. if a wire break occurs in the supply cable.
The precondition is that the control station is active.
Pushbutton BU Inputs
Local Control
ON << Station [LC] Releases
1
IN1 ON < ON
2
IN2 OFF
IN3 3 OFF
ON >
4
IN4
ON >>
PLC/PCS [DP]
ON << Releases
O
Fig. 4-1: Control Station - Local Control
• Control Station - PLC/PCS

This Control Station is primarily intended for control commands from the
automation system (PLC/PCS) via the cyclic control telegram of
PROFIBUS DP.
The plugs of the "Control Stations" function block must be connected to
arbitrary sockets, normally the function blocks for the cyclic PROFIBUS DP
bits (cyclic control) for the control commands to take effect.
ON >>
Cycl. Receive PLC/PCS [DP]

ON << Releases
Bit 0.0
PLC ON < ON
OFF
DP Number: 16 OFF
ON >
ON >>
Bit 1.7
PC [DPV1]
ON << Releases
Fig. 4-2: Control Station - PLC/PCS
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631,631 6050-22 DS 02 4-3
Motor Control
• Control Station - PC
This Control Station is primarily intended for switching commands on an
arbitrary PC which, along with the automation system, is used as a second
master on the PROFIBUS DP. The control commands are sent via the
Acyclic Receive telegram from PROFIBUS DPV1.
Note
If the SIMOCODE ES Professional/SIMATIC PDM PC software is connected to
SIMOCODE pro via PROFIBUS DP, its control commands automatically take
effect via the PC[DPV1] Control Station. In this case connection is not required!
Acycl. Receive
PC [DPV1]
Bit 0.0 ON << Releases
PC
ON < ON
OFF
DP Number: 16
OFF
ON >
Bit 1.7 ON >>
Op. Panel [OP]

<>/<<>> R l
Fig. 4-3: Control Station - PC
• Control Station - Operator Panel

This Control Station is primarily intended for control commands issued via the
buttons of the 3UF72 Operator Panel which is, e.g., mounted in a switchgear
cabinet door. The plugs of the "Control Stations" function block must be
connected to arbitrary sockets (normally with the function block for the
buttons of the Operator Panel - OP Buttons) for the control commands to take
effect.
Notice
Since the Operator Panel only has four buttons for controlling the motor
feeder, one button must be used as a speed switch button for control
functions with two rotational speeds and two directions of rotation.
For this purpose, the button must be assigned to the internal control
command "[OP]<>/ <<>>".
Notice
If the SIMOCODE ES PC software on a programming device is connected to
SIMOCODE pro via the system interface, the control commands
automatically take effect via the Control Station Operator Panel (OP) and
must also be enabled here as applicable.
SIMOCODE pro
4-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Motor Control
OP Buttons Op. Panel [OP]

<>/<<>> Releases
O p e rato r ON < ON
P an e l
OFF
OFF
ON >
ON >>
Fig. 4-4: Control Station - Operator Panel
4.1.2 Operating Modes and Operating Mode Selectors
Operating modes
You can use the Control Stations either individually or in combination. There
are four different operating modes you can switch between:
• Local 1
• Local 2
• Local 3
• Remote/Automatic: In this operating mode, the communication must be
carried out via PLC.
Not all Control Stations are usually connected. If more than one Control
Station (e.g local and PLC/PCS) is connected, it makes sense and is also
mandatory to operate the Control Stations selectively. Four operating
modes are provided for this purpose which can be selected via two control
signals (mode selectors). For each individual Control Station in every
operating mode, it can be stipulated if "ON commands" and/or "OFF
commands" are to be used. The operating modes are so controlled that only
one operating mode is active at any one time.
Example: There are three operating modes in a system:
Operating Mode Description

Key-operated Switch Only local control entries are admissible!
Operation, e.g. Local 1 All other Control Stations are locked.
Manual Operation, Only operator panel control commands and local control
e.g. Local 3 commands can be issued.
Remote Operation, Only PLC/PCS control commands are permitted; locally, only
e.g. Remote/Automatic OFF commands are permitted.
Table 4-1: Operating modes
The Key-operated Switch must be read in via an input to select these

operating modes. The Remote Switching Operation should be controlled via
the bus. The Key-operated Switching operation has priority over all other
operating modes.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631,631 6050-22 DS 02 4-5
Motor Control
Operating Mode Selectors

The S1/S2 Mode Selectors are used to switch between the operating
modes "Local 1", "Local 2", "Local 3" and "Remote/Automatic". The S1 and S2
plugs must be connected to arbitrary sockets (e.g. device inputs, control
bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.) for this.
The following table shows the operating modes, depending on the signal
status of the S1 and S2 mode selectors:
Operating Mode
Remote/
Input Local 1 Local 2 Local 3
Automatic
S1 0 0 1 1
S2 0 1 0 1
Table 4-2: Operating modes depending on S1 and S2
The different operating modes for enabling the Control Stations can be used
to specify the switch authorizations for the individual Control Stations
• Local Control Station [LC]
• PLC/PCS [DP]
• PC [DPV1]
• Operator Panel (OP).
Only the following are active:

• The operating mode set by the plugs S1 and S2 of the "Control Stations"
function block
• And the releases selected there.
Example for a dynamic operating mode in relationship to time:
S1 0 1 1 1 0
S2 0 1 0 1 0
Key-operated Remote operation Manual operation Remote operation Key-operated

Switch Switch
Local 1 Remote Local 3 Remote Local 1
0 Time t
Fig. 4-5: Example - operating modes
SIMOCODE pro
4-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Motor Control
4.1.3 Releases and Enabled Control Command
Releases
Releases for the control commands "ON" and "OFF", which must be
activated, are assigned to each operating mode or every single Control
Station. This means that depending on the operating mode, it can be
specified for each Control Station whether the motor may only be switched
on, off or both on and off. The corresponding checkbox is activated in the
"Control Stations" dialog in SIMOCODE ES.
Releases and enabled control command schematic
The following schematic shows the "Control Stations" function block and the
operating modes:
Control Stations
Operating Mode Selector

S1
0 0 1 1 Activation of releases for
S2
0 1 0 1 control commands "ON" and
Local1 Local2 Local3 Remote "OFF" in SIMOCODE ES
Local Control
ON <<
Station [LC] Releases
ON < ON Enabled
OFF
OFF Disabled
ON >
ON >>
PLC/PCS [DP]
ON << Releases
ON < ON
OFF To the control function
OFF "Protection/Control"
ON >
ON <<
ON >> Enabled ON <
control
command OFF
PC [DPV1]
ON << Releases ON >
ON < ON ON >>
OFF
OFF
ON >
ON >>
Op. Panel[OP]
<>/<<>> Releases
ON < ON
OFF
OFF
ON >
ON >>
Fig. 4-6: "Control Stations" function block"
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631,631 6050-22 DS 02 4-7
Motor Control
Example for operator enable

The following diagram shows an example of operator enable for the "Local 2"
operating mode, "Dahlander Reversing Starter" control function:
Control commands "ON" (ON<<, ON<, ON>, ON>>)"

enabled
Control command "OFF" enabled
To the control function

"Protection/Control"
Fig. 4-7: Example for operator enable
In the example, the motor can only be switched on and off in the "Local 2"
operating mode via the buttons (local) connected to the inputs of the Basic
Unit and the Digital Module.
SIMOCODE pro
4-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Motor Control
4.1.4 Control Station Settings
Control Stations Description

LC Activates the Control Station via an arbitrary signal
ON << (arbitrary sockets , but usually device inputs).
The "OFF" plug is 0-active on the Control Station [LC].
ON <
OFF
ON >
ON >>
PLC/PCS [DP] Activates the Control Station via an arbitrary signal

ON << (arbitrary sockets , but usually control bits from
PROFIBUS DP)
ON <
OFF
ON >
ON >>
PC [DPV1] Activates the Control Station via an arbitrary signal

ON << (arbitrary sockets , but usually control bits from
PROFIBUS DPV1)
ON <
OFF
ON >
ON >>
Operator Panel [OP] Activates the Control Station via an arbitrary signal
<>/<<>> (arbitrary sockets , but usually Operator Panel
buttons)
ON <
OFF
ON >
ON >>
Operating Mode Selectors For switching between the 4 operating modes Local 1,
S1 Local 2, Local 3 and remote with arbitrary signals
(arbitrary sockets , e.g. device inputs, control bits
S1 from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Table 4-3: Control Station settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631,631 6050-22 DS 02 4-9
Motor Control
4.2 Control Functions

4.2.1 Description
Control functions (e.g. direct starters, reversing starters) are used for
controlling load feeders.
They have the following important features:
• Monitoring the switch-on/switch-off sequence
• Monitoring the ON/OFF status
For monitoring these statuses, SIMOCODE pro uses the auxiliary control
input "Feedback ON", which is usually derived directly from the current flow
in the main circuit via the current measuring modules.
All necessary interlocks and connections for the corresponding applications
are already implemented in the control functions.
Control functions contain:
• Plugs for
– control commands (ON <<, ON <, OFF, ON >, ON >>) that are usually
connected with the "Enabled Control Command" sockets.
• Auxiliary control inputs (plug ), e.g. Feedback ON
• Sockets for
– Contactor controls QE1 to QE5.
– Displays (lamp controls) QL, QLS.
– Statuses, e.g. "Status - ON <<, Status - ON >>".
– Faults, e.g. "Trip - Feedback (F) ON",
"Trip - Antivalence".
• Settings, e.g. Interlocking Time, Non-maintained Command Mode ON/OFF,
etc.
• A logic component with all necessary interlockings and connections for the
control function
• Like control functions, the motor protection with its parameters and signals is
active "at a higher level in the background". Motor protection and thermistor
protection are independent functions that switch off the motor when
activated via the control functions. For a more detailed description, see
Chapter 3 "Motor Protection".
SIMOCODE pro
4-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Motor Control
Control function schematic

The following schematic shows the general representation of the control
function ("Protection/Control", "Extended Control" and "Extended Protection"
function blocks):
Plugs of the control commands are usually

connected with the "Enabled Control
Command" sockets
Control Commands Contactor Controls
Control Stations
ON << ON << Protection/Control QE1
ON < ON < QE2

Control Function
OFF OFF QE3
Motor Protection **)
ON > ON > QE4
ON >> ON >> QE5
Enabled Displays (Lamp

Settings:
controlcommand Control)
QLE <<
•Control Commands (ON <<)
•Auxiliary Control Inputs QLE < (ON <)
QLA
Aux. Control Inputs *) (OFF)
FB ON QLE >
(ON >)
FC QLE >>
(ON >>)
FO QLS (Fault)
TC Status Information
*) Abbreviations ON << e.g. for PROFIBUS DP
FB ON Feedback ON TO
ON <
FC Feedback CLOSED
OFF
FO Feedback OPEN
ON >
TC Torque CLOSED
TO Torque OPEN ON >>
**) See also Chapter 3 "Motor Pos. OPEN

Protection" Pos. CLOSED
Fig. 4-8: General representation of the control function ("Protection/Control" function block)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631,631 6050-22 DS 02 4-11
Motor Control
General representation of the control function ("Extended Control" function block)
Extended Control Status - Start Active

Status - Interlocking Time Active
Settings: FB CLOSED
•Timings FB OPEN
•Operating Mode
TQ CLOSED
•Star-delta
TQ OPEN
Trip - Execution ON command

Trip - Execution OFF command
Trip - FB ON
Trip - FB OFF
Status - Change-over Pause Active

Trip - Stalled Positioner
Trip - Double 0
Trip - Double 1
Trip - End Position

Trip - Antivalence
Fig. 4-9: General representation of the control function ("Extended Control" function block)
Contactor controls:
The QE contactor controls are switched dependent on the incoming control

commands and taking the specified control function into consideration
including all corresponding interlocks, feedbacks, corresponding parameters
and the higher-level motor protection. In general, the QE contactor controls
are directly connected to the outputs of the Basic Unit or the Digital
Modules and switch the connected contactors using relays. The number of
usable QE contactor controls is directly dependent on the specified control
function.
Lamp controls and status information:

The feeder status feedback is signaled via the status information or the
QL lamp controls. They are all directly dependent on the status of the
auxiliary control input "FB ON". The number of usable lamp controls and
status information is directly dependent on the specified control function.
Feeder status feedback:
• Status information, e.g. "Status ON<": These are transmitted, for example, via
PROFIBUS DP to the automations system and signal the status of the feeder
there.
• Displays (lamp control) "Display - QLE<": These can, for example, activate a
signal lamp or a pushbutton lamp.
SIMOCODE pro
4-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Motor Control
Note
If the motor is running in test operation, the QLE.../QLA lamp outputs show a
different response (e.g. flashing).
• In addition to the status signals, the "QL..." lamp controls additionally

indicate the following:
– Unacknowledged fault (lamp output general fault QLS is flashing)
– Saving Change-over Command (QLE Lamp Outputs are flickering)
– Lamp test: all QL outputs are activated for approx. 2 s.
• Additional (advance) status information:
– Start active: If "Motor" is selected as the consumer load, this signal is
present during the start process of the motor for the duration of the
specified class time. (e.g. 10 s for Class 10) Exceptions are the
"Overload Relay" and "Solenoid Valve" control functions.
– Interlocking time active: For control functions with a change in the
direction of rotation, the signal remains present until the specified
interlocking time has elapsed.
– Change-over pause active: For the "Dahlander", "Pole-changing Starter"
and "Star-delta" control functions the signal is present until the specified
time has elapsed.
• additional (advanced) status information for the "Positioner or Solenoid Valve"
control function:
– Feedback CLOSED (FC)
– Feedback OPEN (FO)
– Torque CLOSED (TC)
– Torque OPEN (TO).
These feedback signals specify the present status of the corresponding limit
switch and/or torque switch. The amount of usable status information is
directly dependent on the selected control function.
• Additional (advanced) fault signals for the "Positioner or Solenoid Valve"
control function:
– Stalled Positioner: The Torque Switch has been activated before the
corresponding Limit Switch. The Positioner may have stalled.
– Double 0: Both Torque Switches have been activated
– Double 1: Both Limit Switches have been activated
– End position: Positioner has left the End Position without receiving a
control command
– Antivalence: The Change-over Contacts of the End Position Switch do
not issue an antivalence signal (only for the "Positioner 5" control
function).
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631,631 6050-22 DS 02 4-13
Motor Control
Extent and application

Depending on the device series, the system provides the following control
functions:
SIMOCODE
Control function pro C (BU 1) pro V (BU 2)
Overload Relay ✓ ✓
Direct Starter ✓ ✓
Reversing Starter ✓ ✓
Circuit Breaker ✓ ✓
Star-delta Starter — ✓
Star-delta Reversing Starter — ✓
Dahlander — ✓
Dahlander Reversing Starter — ✓
Pole-changing Starter — ✓
Pole-changing Reversing Starter — ✓
Solenoid Valve — ✓
Positioner 1 to Positioner 5 — ✓
Soft Starter — ✓
Soft Starter with Reversing Contactor — ✓
Table 4-4: Control functions
SIMOCODE pro
4-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Motor Control
4.2.2 General Settings and Definitions
Application selection
Selection of the control functions to be carried out by SIMOCODE pro:
Fig. 4-10: Application selection
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631,631 6050-22 DS 02 4-15
Motor Control
Parameters
Parameters Description
ON <<, ON <, OFF, Are usually connected with the "Enabled Control Command"
ON >, ON >> sockets of the "Control Station" function block. From there, the
control commands come from the different control stations. The
number of active inputs depends on the control function chosen.
For example, with a direct starter, only the inputs "ON>" and "OFF"
are active.
Default: Connected
FB ON Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON" (connection with arbitrary

socket , usually with "Status - Motor Current Flowing" socket) as
factory default. An auxiliary contact from the contactor is not
required for signaling. Depending on the control function chosen,
this state is signaled by the QLE1 to QLE5 displays and by the
"Status - ON <<, - ON <, - ON >, - ON >>" signals. "No Current
Flowing" means: the motor is switched off. An auxiliary contact
from the contactor is not required for signaling. This state is
signaled by the QLA display and the "Status - OFF" signal
Default: Status - Motor Current Flowing
FC, FO, TC, TO Auxiliary Control Inputs for the "Positioner" and "Solenoid Valve"
control function that are normally connected with the inputs of the
Basic Unit or the Digital Module are used to query the present
status of the Torque Switch and the Limit Switches that are wired
to the Inputs.
Non-maintained • Deactivated:
command mode The control command on the corresponding input of the Control
Stations "ON <, ON <<, ON >,ON >>" is saved. It can only be
revoked by an "OFF" control command from the corresponding
Control Station. The auxiliary contact for locking the contactor is
no longer necessary. Motor feeders are usually operated in
locking mode. Locking is preset.
• Activated:
Depending on the control function chosen, the Non-maintained
Command Mode affects the plugs of all Control Stations "ON <,
ON <<, ON >, ON >>".A control command is only effective as
long as there is a "High Signal".
Saving Change- • Deactivated:

over Command Commands for switching from one direction of rotation/rotational
speed to the other are implemented without a previous "OFF" and
after the Interlocking Time/Change-over Pause has elapsed. This
setting is usually used and is preset.
• Activated:
Commands for switching from one direction of rotation/rotational
speed to the other are implemented without a previous "OFF" and
after the Interlocking Time/Change-over Pause has elapsed.
If the selected direction/speed cannot be executed immediately
due to a parameterized Interlocking Time/Change-over Pause, the
selection is signalized by flickering QLE displays. Your selection
can be cancelled at any time with "OFF".
Table 4-5: General settings and definitions
SIMOCODE pro
4-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Motor Control
Type of Consumer You can choose between

Load • Motor
• Resistive Load (e.g. heating):
Because generally no overcurrent flows in a resistive load during
switching, the "Start Active" status is not signaled. In this case,
the start-up override does not occur for the "Signaling", "Warning"
and "Tripping" functions.
Feedback Time SIMOCODE pro monitors the status of the feeder (ON or OFF) via
FB ON.
If the status of FB ON changes - without a corresponding switching
command - the Trip feedback (FB) switches off the feeder.
Default: 0.5 s.
The feedback time can be used to suppress such "feedback faults"
for a defined period of time, e.g. in the case of network
switches.When the motor is switched off,
SIMOCODE pro continuously controls if FB ON = 0. If the current
flows longer than the set feedback time without the "ON" control
command being issued, fault message "Trip - Feedback (FB) ON" is
issued. The contactor controls can only be connected after the fault
has been rectified.
When the motor is switched on, SIMOCODE pro continuously
controls if FB ON = 1. If the current flows longer than the set
Feedback Time without the "OFF" control command being issued, a
fault message "Trip - Feedback (FB) OFF" is issued. The contactor
controls are deactivated.
Execution Time SIMOCODE pro monitors switching on/switching off. Switching on/
switching off must be completed within this time period.
Default: 1.0 s.
After the "ON" control command is issued, SIMOCODE pro must be
able to detect current in the main circuit within the execution time.
Otherwise, the fault message "Trip - Execution ON Command" will
be issued. SIMOCODE pro deactivates the contactor controls.
After the "OFF" control command is issued, SIMOCODE pro must
not be able to detect any current in the main circuit after the
execution time has elapsed. Otherwise, the fault message "Trip -
Execution STOP command" will be issued. The contactor controls
can only be connected after the fault has been rectified.
Interlocking Time SIMOCODE pro prevents, e.g. in the case of reversing starters,
both contactors from switching on at the same time. Switching
from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed via the
Interlocking Time.
Default: 0 s.
Change-over Pause In the "Dahlander" and "Pole-changing Starter" control functions,

switching from the fast speed to the slow one can be delayed with
the time configured.
In the "Star-Delta" control function, the Change-over Pause time
extends the time between switching off the star contactor and
switching on the delta contactor by the time configured.
Default: 0.00 s.
Table 4-5: General settings and definitions (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631,631 6050-22 DS 02 4-17
Motor Control
Max. Star Time For the "Star-delta Starter" or the "Star-delta Reversing Starter"
control function:
Time-dependent switching from star to delta.
Max. star time: 0 - 255 s (default: 20 s)
Current Measuring For the "Star-delta Starter" or the "Star-delta Reversing Starter"
Module Installed control function:
The Set Current and the switching levels for star-delta switching
depend on the mounting place of the Current Measuring Module.
• Delta: Set Current Is is reduced to In x 1/ 3
• In supply cable: Set Current
Table 4-5: General settings and definitions (Cont.)
QE
Switch ON ON Tripping
1
OFF OFF
0
Voltage failure,
FB ON e.g. pulsating current conditions
OFF
0
Az Rz Az Rz
Az: Execution Time

Rz: Feedback Time
Fig. 4-11: Execution Time (Az) and Feedback Time (Rz) in relation to FB ON
Faults
The contactor controls are deactivated.
The following is also issued:
• A flashing signal on the QLS lamp control
• A flashing signal on the "GEN. FAULT" LED
• The "Status - General Fault" signal
• The corresponding signaling bit of the fault.
SIMOCODE pro
4-18 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Motor Control
4.2.3 "Overload Relay" Control Function

Description
With this control function, SIMOCODE pro functions like a solid-state
overload relay. Control commands (e.g. ON, OFF) cannot be issued to the
load. The Control Stations, as well as the inputs of the control function (e.g.
ON >, OFF), do not have any function in the case of overload relays.
When applying the control voltage, SIMOCODE pro automatically closes the
QE3 contactor control; it remains active until it is deactivated by the fault
signal of a protection or monitoring system.
The QE3 contactor control must be connected to an arbitrary relay output
that switches off the contactor coil of the motor contactor in case of
overload.
Schematic
Protection/Control ContactorControls
QE3
Overload Relay
Motor Protection
Displays
Auxiliary Control Inputs
Type of
FB ON* Consumer Load QLS
(Fault)
*Feedback ON
Fig. 4-12: Schematic of the "Overload Relay" control function, "Protection/Control" function block
Settings
You will find detailed information about the settings in
Chapter 4.2.2 "General Settings and Definitions".
Overload relay Description
socket , usually with "Status - Motor Current Flowing" socket) as
factory default.
Load • Motor
• Resistive load (see Chapter 4.2.2 "General Settings and
Definitions")
Table 4-6: Overload relay settings
Notice
In the case of overload, the QE3 output is set (=1) and is only reset when
the overload is tripped (=0).
This output closes when the overload function is parameterized.
Note
Monitoring of the number of starts is not possible for this control function.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631,631 6050-22 DS 02 4-19
Motor Control
4.2.4 "Direct Starter" Control Function
Description
SIMOCODE pro can switch a motor on and off with this control function.
Control commands
• Start with "ON >" activates the QE1 internal contactor control.
• Stop with "OFF" deactivates the QE1 internal contactor control.
The control commands can be issued to SIMOCODE pro from
arbitrary control stations (see also the description of "Control Stations").
Thus, the inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets,
preferably to the "Enabled Control Command" sockets.
Every fault signal causes the QE1 contactor control to be deactivated.
Schematic
Control Commands Protection/Control Contactor Controls

QE1 ON
Direct Starter
Motor Protection
OFF
Non-Maintained
ON > Command Mode
Displays (lamps)
Type of
Consumer Load QLA (OFF)
Feedback Time QLE >
(ON)
Auxiliary Control Inputs Execution Time
FB ON*
QLS
(Trip )
Status
OFF
ON >
*Feedback ON
Fig. 4-13: Schematic of the "Direct Starter" control function, "Protection/Control" function block
SIMOCODE pro
4-20 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Motor Control
Settings
Direct Starter Description
OFF OFF control command (connection with arbitrary socket ,

usually with "Enabled Control Command - OFF" socket)
ON > ON control command (connection with arbitrary socket ,

usually with "Enabled Control Command - ON >" socket)

socket , usually with "Status - Motor Current Flowing" socket)
Non-maintained • Deactivated
Command Mode • Activated

Load • Motor
Definitions")
Feedback Time Range 0 - 25.5 seconds (0.5 s)
Execution Time Range 0 - 6553.5 seconds (1.0 s)

Table 4-7: Direct starter settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631,631 6050-22 DS 02 4-21
Motor Control
4.2.5 "Reversing Starter" Control Function
Description
With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can control the direction of
rotation of the motor (forwards and backwards).
Control commands
• Start with "ON >" activates the QE1 contactor control (clockwise, i.e.
forwards)
• Start with "ON <" activates the QE2 contactor control (counter-clockwise, i.e.
backwards)
• Stop with "OFF" deactivates the QE1 and QE2 internal contactor controls.
The control commands can be issued to SIMOCODE pro from
arbitrary control stations (see also the description of "Control Stations").
Thus, the inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets,
preferably to the "Enabled Control Command" sockets.
Every fault signal causes the QE1 and QE2 contactor controls to be
deactivated.
Switching the direction of rotation

It is possible to switch the direction of rotation if the signal
"Status - ON>" or "Status - ON<" is no longer issued (motor was switched
off) AND after the Interlocking Time has expired:
• Via the OFF control command.
• Directly, when the "Saving Change-over Command" is activated.
SIMOCODE pro prevents both contactors from switching on at the same

time. Switching from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed
via the interlocking time.
SIMOCODE pro
4-22 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Motor Control
Schematic

QE1 RIGHT
Reversing Starter
ON < QE2
Motor Protection LEFT
OFF Non-Maintained
Command Mode
ON > Saving
Change over Displays
Command QLE < (ON <)
Type of
Consumer Load QLA (OFF)
Feedback Time QLE >
(ON >)
FB ON* Interlocking Time
QLS
(Trip)
Status
ON <
OFF
ON >
*Feedback ON Interlocking Time

Extended Control
Active
Fig. 4-14: Schematic of the "Reversing Starter" control function, "Protection/Control" function block
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631,631 6050-22 DS 02 4-23
Motor Control
Settings
Reversing Starter Description
ON < ON < control command, counter-clockwise

(connection with arbitrary socket ,
usually with "Enabled Control Command - ON <" socket)
OFF OFF control command

ON > ON > control command, clockwise

FB ON Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON"

usually with "Status - Motor Current Flowing" socket)
Saving Change- • Deactivated

over Command • Activated

Load • Motor
Definitions")
Interlocking Time Range 0 - 255 seconds (0 s)

Table 4-8: Reversing Starter settings
SIMOCODE pro
4-24 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Motor Control
4.2.6 "Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB)" Control Function
Description
SIMOCODE pro can ideally switch circuit breakers (e.g. 3WL, 3VL) ON and
OFF with this control function. The circuit breakers are connected to
PROFIBUS DP via SIMOCODE pro.
Control commands
• Start with "ON >" activates the QE1 contactor control for a pulse of 400 ms.
• Stop with "OFF" activates the QE3 contactor control for a pulse of 400 ms.
• With "Reset", the QE3 contactor control is activated for a pulse of 400 ms
when the circuit breaker is tripped (alarm switch = ON).
The pulse of a control command is always fully executed before the
"Counter Pulse" is set.
The control commands can be issued to SIMOCODE pro from arbitrary
Control Stations (see also the description of "Control Stations"). Thus, the
inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably
to the "Enabled Control Command" sockets.
Making internal assignments

You have to make the following assignments:
1) Assign the QE1 contactor control to the relay output that is connected to the
"ON Connection" of the motor drive of the circuit breaker.
2) Assign the QE3 contactor control to the relay output that is connected to the
"OFF Connection" of the motor drive of the circuit breaker.
3) Assign the SIMOCODE pro input which is connected to the Auxiliary Switch
(AS) of the circuit breaker to the Auxiliary Control Input "Feedback ON".
4) Assign the SIMOCODE pro input which is connected to the alarm switch (AS)
of the circuit breaker to the input (socket) of the "External Fault 1" standard
function.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631,631 6050-22 DS 02 4-25
Motor Control
Schematic

QE1 400 ms ON
MCCB
QE3 400 ms OFF
Motor Protection
OFF
Non-Maintained
ON > Command Mode
Displays
Type of
Consumer Load
QLA (OFF)
Feedback Time QLE >
(ON)
FB ON*
Auxiliary Switch (AS) QLS
(Trip)
Status
OFF
ON >
*Feedback ON
Fig. 4-15: Schematic of the "Circuit Breaker" control function, "Protection/Control" function block
Settings
Circuit Breaker Description

ON > ON control command (connection with arbitrary socket ,

FB ON Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON" (Connection always with

socket , (input), which the Auxiliary Switch of the Circuit Breaker
is connected to).
Load • Motor
Definitions")
Feedback Time A repeated ON pulse is only output by the QE1 Control Contactor
once the set Feedback Time has elapsed. Therefore, the Feedback
Time should be greater than the Motor Running Time of the motor
drive of the circuit breaker. Range 0 - 25.5 seconds (0.5 s)
Table 4-9: Circuit breaker settings
SIMOCODE pro
4-26 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Motor Control
4.2.7 "Star-delta Starter" Control Function
Description
Star-delta starting is used to limit the starting current and to avoid
overloading the network. In this control function, SIMOCODE pro initially
starts the motor with a star-switched stator winding and then switches it to
delta.
Control commands
• Start with "ON" first activates the QE1 contactor control (star contactor) and
then immediately activates the QE3 contactor control (network contactor)
• Stop with "OFF" deactivates the QE1, QE2 and QE3 contactor controls.
control stations (see also the description of "Control Stations"). Thus, the
to the "Enabled Control Command" sockets. Every fault signal causes the
QE1, QE2 and QE3 contactor controls to be deactivated.
Switching from star to delta

For this, SIMOCODE pro first deactivates the QE1 contactor control before
connecting the QE2 contactor control (delta contactor).
SIMOCODE pro switches from star to delta:
• Current-dependent with decreasing current below the threshold (I < 90% Is).
• Time-dependent to the time set in the parameter "Maximum Star Time" when
the current in the star operation does not sink below this threshold.
Safety information
Notice
It is recommended to wire the QE Contactor Controls to the Relay Outputs
of the Basic Unit.
Notice
If you use internal earth-fault detection for star-delta circuits, this can lead to
false trippings. During delta operation, the summation current is non-zero
due to harmonics.
Notice
If the Current Measuring Module is switched to delta (normal case),
a current which is 1/√ 3 times smaller must be set for the star-delta starter
control function.
Example: In = 100 A Is = In x 1/√ 3
Is = 100 A x 1/√ 3 = 57.7 A
Current to be set Is = 57.7 A
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631,631 6050-22 DS 02 4-27
Motor Control
Change-over Pause
The switching time from star to delta can be extended by the change-over
pause.
Reason: For motors with a high ratio between starting current and rated
current, the mains voltage plus motor EMF might lead to a very high delta
starting current if the Change-over Pause is too short. The motor EMF
decreases if the pause is longer.
Schematic

QE1
Star Contactor
Star-delta Starter
QE2
MotorProtection Delta Contactor
OFF
QE3
Non-maintained Network Contactor
ON > CommandMode
Displays
Type of
ConsumerLoad QLA (OFF)
FeedbackTime QLE >
(ON)
FB ON*
QLS
Change-over Pause (Trip)
Status
Max. Star Time
Transformer
mounted OFF
ON >
*Feedback ON Change-over Pause

Extended Control Active
Fig. 4-16: Schematic of the "Star-delta Starter" control function, "Protection/Control" function block
SIMOCODE pro
4-28 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Motor Control
Settings
Star-delta Starter Description
OFF OFF control command, (connection with arbitrary socket ,

ON > ON control command, (connection with arbitrary socket ,

FB ON Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON", (connection with arbitrary


Load • Motor
Definitions")
Execution Time Range 0 - 6553.5 seconds (1 s)
Change-over Pause Range 0 - 655.3 seconds (10-ms increments) (0.00 s)
Max. Star Time Time-dependent switching from star to delta.

Range 0 - 255 seconds (20 s)
Current Measuring The Set Current and the switching levels for star-delta switching
Module Installed1) depend on the mounting place of the Current Measuring Module.
• in Delta: Set Current Is is reduced to In x 1/√3 (default)
• In Incoming cable: Set Current Is = In (Rated Current of the
motor)
Table 4-10: Star-delta Starter settings
1) Notice
If a current/voltage measuring module is in use, the transformer must be
connected to the supply cable!
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631,631 6050-22 DS 02 4-29
Motor Control
4.2.8 "Star-Delta Reversing Starter" Control Function
Description
With this control function, a motor can be started in both directions of
rotation in star-delta operation.
Control commands
• Clockwise rotation: start with "ON >" first activates the QE1 (Star Contactor)
Contactor Control and then immediately activates the QE3 Contactor Control
(Network Contactor, clockwise rotation)
• Counter-clockwise rotation: Start with "ON <" first activates the QE1
Contactor Control (Star Contactor) and then immediately activates the QE4
Contactor Control (Line Contactor, left)
• Stop with "OFF" deactivates the QE1, QE2, QE3 and QE4Contactor Controls.
control stations (see also the description of "Control Stations"). Thus, the
Every fault signal causes the QE1, QE2, QE3 and QE4 contactor activations
to be deactivated.
Switching from star to delta

For this, SIMOCODE pro first deactivates the QE1 contactor control before
connecting the QE2 contactor control (delta contactor).
SIMOCODE pro switches from star to delta:
• Current-dependent, for decreasing current below the threshold (I < 90% Is).
• Time-dependent to the time set in the parameter "Maximum Star Time" when
the current in the star operation does not sink below this threshold.

It is possible to switch the direction of rotation if the signal
"Status - ON>" or "Status - ON<" is no longer issued (motor was switched
off) AND after the interlocking time has expired:
time.
Switching from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed via the
"Interlocking Time".
Start-up is always in star mode.
SIMOCODE pro
4-30 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Motor Control
Safety information
Note
It is recommended to wire the QE1 and QE2 Contactor Controls to the
Relay Outputs of the Basic Unit. You need at least 1 Digital Module for this
control function.
Notice
If you use internal earth-fault detection for star-delta circuits, this can lead to
false trippings. During delta operation, the summation current is non-zero
due to harmonics.
Notice
If the Current Measuring Module is switched to delta (normal case), a
current which is 1/ 3 smaller than normal must be set for the star-delta
starter control function.
Example: In = 100 A Is = In x 1/ 3
Is = 100 A x 1/ 3 = 57.7 A
Current to be set Is = 57.7 A
Change-over Pause
The switching time from star to delta can be extended by the Change-over
Pause.
Reason: For motors with a high ratio between Starting Current and Rated
Current, the mains voltage plus motor EMF might lead to a very high Delta
Starting Current if the Change-over Pause is too short. The motor EMF
decreases if the pause is longer.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631,631 6050-22 DS 02 4-31
Motor Control
Schematic

QE1
Star-delta Star Contactor
ON < Reversing Starter QE2
Delta Contactor
OFF Motor Protection
Non-maintained QE3
RIGHT - Network Contactor
ON > Command mode
QE4
Saving Change-over LEFT - Network Contactor
Command Displays
Type of QLE <
Consumer Load (ON <)
QLA (OFF)
Feedback Time
Auxiliary Control Inputs Execution Time QLE >
(ON >)
FB ON*
Interlocking Time QLS
(Trip)
Change-over Pause
Status
Max. Star Time ON <
Transformer OFF
mounted
ON >
Change-over Pause
*Feedback ON Extended Control
Active
Interlocking Time
Active
Fig. 4-17: Schematic of the "Star-delta Reversing Starter" control function, "Protection/Control"
function block
SIMOCODE pro
4-32 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Motor Control
Settings
Star-Delta Description
Reversing Starter

ON > ON> control command (connection with arbitrary socket ,

ON < ON< control command (connection with arbitrary socket ,

FB ON Auxiliary Control Input "Feedback ON" (connection with arbitrary



Load • Motor
Definitions")
Execution Time Range 0 - 6553.5 seconds (1 s)
Change-over Pause Range 0 - 655.3 seconds (10 ms steps) (0 s)
Max. Star Time Time-dependent switching from star to delta.

Range 0 - 255 seconds (20 s)
Current Measuring The Set Current and the switching levels for star-delta switching
Module Installed 1) depend on the mounting place of the Current Measuring Module.
• in delta: Set Current Is is reduced to In x 1/√ 3
• In supply cable: Set Current Is = In (Rated Current of the motor)
Table 4-11: Star-delta Reversing Starter settings
1) Notice
If a Current/Voltage Measuring Module is in use, the transformer must be
connected to the supply cable!
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631,631 6050-22 DS 02 4-33
Motor Control
4.2.9 "Dahlander" Control Function
Description
With this function, SIMOCODE pro can control motors with only one stator
winding at two speeds (fast and slow). SIMOCODE pro wires the stator
winding via the contactors so that there is a high pole number at low speed
and a low pole number at high speed.
Control commands
• SLOW: Start with "ON >" first activates the QE2 Contactor Control (slow).
• FAST: start with "ON>>" first activates the QE3 Contactor Control (Star
Contactor, fast) and then immediately activates the QE1 Contactor Control
(Network Contactor, fast).
• STOP with "OFF" deactivates the QE1, QE2 and QE3 Contactor Controls.
Every fault signal causes the QE1, QE2 and QE3 Contactor Controls to be
deactivated.
Switching the speed

The speed can be switched once the "Feedback ON" signal has expired
(motor is switched off) AND when changing from "FAST" => "SLOW" after
the Change-over Pause has expired:
• Directly when the "Saving Change-over Command" is activated.
SIMOCODE pro prevents the contactors for the "FAST" speed from being
switched on at the same time as the contactor for the "SLOW" speed.
Change-over Pause
The "Change-over Pause" parameter can be used to delay switching from
"FAST" to "SLOW" to give the motor enough time to run down.
SIMOCODE pro
4-34 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Motor Control
Notice
Two Set Currents are to be set for this control function:
• Is1 for the slower speed
• Is2 for the faster speed.
Depending on the current range, the current can be directly measured at
both speeds with a single current converter. Otherwise you will need two
external current converters according to the corresponding speed (e.g.
3UF18 with a 1 A secondary transformer rated current), whose secondary
cables must lead through the Current Measuring Module with the range 0.3
- 3 A. The Is1/Is2 Set Currents must be converted according to the
secondary currents of the external transformers. For further information see
Chapter 3.2 "Overload Protection".
Schematic

QE1
FAST
Dahlander
QE2
MotorProtection SLOW
OFF
Non-maintained QE3 FAST - Star Contactor
ON > Command Mode
ON >> Saving Change-over

Command Displays
Type of
Consumer Load
QLA (OFF)
Feedback Time
Auxiliary Control Inputs QLE >
Execution Time (ON >)
FB ON* QLE >>
(ON >>)
Change-over Pause QLS
(Trip)
Status
OFF
ON >
ON >>
*Feedback ON
Change-overPause
ExtendedControl
Active
Fig. 4-18: Schematic of the "Dahlander" control function, "Protection/Control" function block
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631,631 6050-22 DS 02 4-35
Motor Control
Settings
Dahlander Description

ON > ON control command > (slow)

ON >> ON >> control command (fast)

usually with "Enabled Control Command - ON >>" socket)



Load • Motor
Definitions")

Table 4-12: Dahlander settings
SIMOCODE pro
4-36 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Motor Control
4.2.10 "Dahlander Reversing Starter" Control Function
Description
This control function can be used to change the direction of rotation of a
motor at both speeds.
Control commands
• RIGHT - SLOW: Start with "ON >" activates the QE2 Contactor Control (right-
slow)
• RIGHT - FAST: Start with "ON >>" first activates the QE3 Contactor Control
(Fast-star Contactor) and then immediately activates the QE1 Contactor
Control (right-fast)
• LEFT - SLOW: Start with "ON <" activates the QE4 Contactor Control
(left-slow)
• LEFT - FAST: Start with "ON <<" first activates the QE3 Contactor Control
(fast-Star Contactor) and then immediately activates the QE5 Contactor
Control (left-fast)
• STOP with "OFF" deactivates the Contactor Controls.
It does not matter in what order the control commands are given.
Every fault signal causes the contactor activations to be deactivated.

The direction of rotation can be switched once the "Status - ON >" or "Status
- ON <" signal has expired (motor is switched off) AND the interlocking time
has expired:
via the "Interlocking Time".
Switching the speed

SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631,631 6050-22 DS 02 4-37
Motor Control
Change-over Pause
Safety information
Note
You need at least one Digital Module for this control function. This control
function cannot be implemented with bistable relay outputs.
Notice
- 3 A. The Is1/Is2 set currents must be converted according to the
secondary currents of the external transformers. For further information,
see Chapter 3.2 "Overload Protection".
SIMOCODE pro
4-38 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Motor Control
Schematic

ON << QE1
Dahlander RIGHT - FAST
RIGHT - SLOW
Motor Protection
OFF
Non-maintained QE3
FAST - Star Contactor
ON > Command Mode
QE4 LEFT - SLOW
Command
QE5 LEFT - FAST
Type of Consumer
Load Displays
FeedbackTime QLE <<
(ON <<)
Auxiliary Control Inputs Execution Time QLE <
FB ON* (ON <)
Interlocking Time
QLA (OFF)
Change-over Pause
QLE >
(ON >)
QLE >>
(ON >>)
QLS
(Trip)
Status
ON <<
ON <
OFF
ON >
*Feedback ON ON >>
Change-over Pause
Extended Control
Active
Interlocking Time
Active
Fig. 4-19: Schematic of the "Dahlander Reversing Starter" control function, "Protection/Control"
function block
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631,631 6050-22 DS 02 4-39
Motor Control
Settings
Dahlander Description
Reversing Starter
ON << ON << control command (left, fast) (connection with arbitrary

socket , usually with "Enabled Control Command - ON <<"
socket)
ON < ON < control command (left, slow) (connection with arbitrary

socket , usually with "Enabled Control Command - ON <"
socket)

ON > ON > control command (right, slow) (connection with arbitrary

socket , usually with "Enabled Control Command - ON >"
socket)
ON >> ON >> control command (right, slow) (connection with arbitrary

socket , usually with "Enabled Control Command - ON >>"
socket)
FB On Auxiliary Control Input "Feedback ON" (connection with arbitrary



Load • Motor
Definitions")

Table 4-13: Dahlander Reversing Starter control function
SIMOCODE pro
4-40 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Motor Control
4.2.11 "Pole-Changing Starter" Control Function
Description
With this function, SIMOCODE pro can control motors with two stator
winding at two speeds (fast and slow).
Control commands
• SLOW: Start with "ON >" activates the QE2 Contactor Control (slow).
• FAST: Start with "ON >>" activates the QE2 Contactor Control (fast).
Switching the speed

Change-over Pause
Notice
- 3 A. The Is1/Is2 Set Currents must be converted according to the
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631,631 6050-22 DS 02 4-41
Motor Control
Schematic

QE1
FAST
Pole-changing Starter
Motor Protection QE2
SLOW
OFF
Non-maintained
ON > Command Mode
Saving Change-over
ON >>
Command Displays
Type of
Consumer Load
QLA (OFF)
Feedback Time
Auxiliary Control Inputs QLE >
Execution Time (ON >)
FB ON* QLE >>
(ON >>)
Change-over Pause QLS
(Trip)
Status
OFF
ON >
*Feedback ON ON >>
Change-over Pause
Extended Control
Active
Fig. 4-20: Schematic of the "Pole-changing Starter" control function, "Protection/Control" function
block
Settings
Chapter 4.2.2 "General Settings and Definitions"
Pole-changing Description
Starter

ON > ON control command > (slow) (connection with arbitrary

socket , usually with "Enabled Control Command - ON >"
socket)
ON >> ON >> control command (fast)(connection with arbitrary

socket , usually with "Enabled Control Command - ON >>"
socket)
FB ON Auxiliary Control Input "Feedback ON" (connection with arbitrary

Table 4-14: Pole-changing Starter settings
SIMOCODE pro
4-42 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Motor Control
Starter


Load • Motor
Definitions")

Table 4-14: Pole-changing Starter settings (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631,631 6050-22 DS 02 4-43
Motor Control
4.2.12 "Pole-Changing Reversing Starter" Control Function
Description
This control function can be used to change the direction of rotation of a
motor at both speeds.
Control commands
• RIGHT - SLOW: Start with ON > activates the QE2 Contactor Control
(right-slow)
• RIGHT - FAST: Start with ON >> activates the QE1 Contactor Control
(right-fast)
• LEFT - SLOW: Start with ON < activates the QE4 Contactor Control (left-slow)
• LEFT - FAST: Start with ON << activates the QE5 Contactor Control (left-fast)
• STOP with OFF deactivates the Contactor Controls.
Control Stations. Thus, the inputs (plugs) must be connected to the
corresponding sockets, preferably to the "Enabled Control Command"
sockets.

- ON <" signal has expired (motor is switched off) AND the Interlocking Time
has expired:
time.Switching from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed via
the "Interlocking Time".
Switching the speed

SIMOCODE pro
4-44 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Motor Control
Change-over Pause
SIMOCODE pro prevents the contactors for "FAST" and "SLOW" from being
switched on simultaneously. The "Change-over Pause" can be used to delay
switching from "FAST" to "SLOW" to give the motor enough time to run
down.
Safety information
Note
At least one additional Digital Module is required for this control function.
Notice
- 3 A. The Is1/Is2 set currents must be converted according to the
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631,631 6050-22 DS 02 4-45
Motor Control
Schematic

ON << QE1
Pole-changing RIGHT - FAST
Motor Protection RIGHT - SLOW
OFF
Non-maintained
ON > Command Mode
QE4 LEFT - SLOW
Command
QE5 LEFT - FAST
Type of
Consumer Load Displays
Feedback Time QLE <<
(ON <<)
Execution Time QLE <
FB ON* (ON <)
Interlocking Time
QLA (OFF)
Change-over Pause
QLE >
(ON >)
QLE >>
(ON >>)
QLS
(Trip)
Status
ON <<
ON <
OFF
ON >
ON >>
Change-over Pause Active
*Feedback ON
Extended Control
Interlocking Time Active
Fig. 4-21: Schematic of the "Pole-Changing Reversing Starter" Control Function,

"Protection/Control" function block
SIMOCODE pro
4-46 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Motor Control
Settings
Reversing Starter
ON << ON << control command (left, fast)

usually with "Enabled Control Command - ON <<" socket)
ON < ON < control command (left, slow)


ON > ON > control command (right, slow)

ON >> ON >> control command (right, slow)

usually with "Enabled Control Command - ON >>" socket)
FB ON Auxiliary Control Input "Feedback ON"



Load • Motor
Definitions")

Table 4-15: Settings for Pole-changing Reversing Starters
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631,631 6050-22 DS 02 4-47
Motor Control
4.2.13 "Solenoid Valve" Control Function
Description
With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can activate a solenoid valve.
The Solenoid Valve is brought into the corresponding end position using the
control commands "OPEN" and "CLOSED". SIMOCODE pro must be
informed via corresponding limit switches (OPEN, CLOSED) when the end
position has been reached.
Control commands
• OPEN: Start with "ON >" activates the QE1 Contactor Control.
• CLOSED: START with "OFF" deactivates the QE1 Contactor Control.
Every fault signal causes the QE1 Contactor Control to be deactivated and
puts the Solenoid Valve into the "CLOSED" position.
Safety information
Notice
The motor protection functions are not active. A Current Measuring Module
is not necessary.
Notice
If both End Position Switches respond at the same time (FO=1 and FC=1),
the Solenoid Valve is immediately switched OFF via the fault message "Trip -
Double 1" (= "CLOSED")
If the End Position Feedback is different to the control command, the
Solenoid Valve is immediately switched OFF via the fault message "Trip -
End Position" (= "CLOSED")
SIMOCODE pro
4-48 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Motor Control
Schematic

QE1 OPEN
Solenoid Valve
OFF
Non-maintained
ON > Command Mode
Displays
QLA (CLOSE)
QLE >
(OPEN)
Auxiliary Control Inputs* Execution Time
FB ON
QLS
(Trip)
FC
Status
FO
* Abbreviations
OFF
FC Feedback CLOSED
ON >
FO Feedback OPEN
FC
Extended Control
FO
Fig. 4-22: Schematic of the "Solenoid Valve" control function, "Protection/Control" function block
Settings
Solenoid Valve Description
OFF OFF control command (CLOSE)

ON > ON control command (OPEN)

Execution Time Time required to reach End Position.

Range 0 - 6553.5 seconds (default: 1.0 s)
Table 4-16: Solenoid Valve control function settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631,631 6050-22 DS 02 4-49
Motor Control
4.2.14 "Positioner" Control Function
Description
SIMOCODE pro can control positioners/actuators with this control function.
The Positioner is moved into the corresponding End Position with the
"OPEN" and "CLOSED" control commands and is deactivated via its Limit
Switch (1-active) or Torque Switch (0-active).
The response of the Limit/Torque Switch must be passed to SIMOCODE pro
via its inputs.
Control Commands
• OPEN: Start with "ON >" activates the QE1 Contactor Control until "End
Position OPEN" is reached (Feedback OPEN)
• CLOSE: Start with "ON <" activates the QE2 Contactor Control until "End
Position CLOSED" is reached (Feedback CLOSED)
The drive remains in the present position.
Function schematic
Torque Switch
TO TC
Motor shaft with springs

at the beginning and end
OPEN CLOSED FC
FO Limit Switch
Positioner
Gear
OPEN CLOSED
Fig. 4-23: Function schematic of the Torque and Limit Switches when controlling Positioners
SIMOCODE pro
4-50 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Motor Control
Switching the direction of travel

The direction of travel can be switched once the "Feedback - ON" signal has
expired (motor is switched off) AND the Interlocking Time has expired:
time. Switching from one direction of travel to the other can be delayed
via the "Interlocking Time".
Notice
The corresponding Torque Switch must not respond before the associated
Limit Switch when the Torque Switch TO (OPEN) and/or TC (CLOSED) is
connected. In this case, the Positioner is switched off immediately with the
fault message "Trip - Blocked Positioner".
If both Limit Switches respond at the same time (FO=1 and FC=1), the
Positioner is immediately switched off via the fault message
"Trip - Double 1".
If both Torque Switches respond at the same time (TO=0 and TC=0), the
Positioner is switched off immediately with the fault message
"Trip - Double 0".
If the End Position Feedback does not correspond to the control command,
the Positioner is switched off with the fault message "Trip - End Position
Fault".
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631,631 6050-22 DS 02 4-51
Motor Control
Schematic

QE1 OPEN
Positioner
ON < QE2
Motor Protection CLOSE
OFF
Non-maintained
ON > Command mode
Displays
QLE < CLOSED
Type of
Consumer Load QLA STOP
Feedback Time
QLE >
OPEN
Auxiliary Control Inputs* Execution Time
FB ON
Interlocking Time
QLS
* Abbreviations FC (Trip)
FO Status
FB ON Feedback ON ON <
TC CLOSED
FC Feedback CLOSED
OFF STOP
FO Feedback OPEN TO
TC Torque CLOSED ON >
OPEN
TO Torque OPEN
Positioner Runs
in CLOSE Direction
Positioner Runs
FC In OPEN Direction
Extended Control
FO
TC
TO
Interlocking Time Active
Fig. 4-24: Schematic of the "Positioner" control function, "Protection/Control" function block
SIMOCODE pro
4-52 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Motor Control
Types of positioner control

The following table shows the five types of positioner control:
Type
CLOSE OPEN
Tripping
TC FC FO TO
Torque Limit Limit Torque
CLOSED CLOSED OPEN OPEN
Positioner 1 — X X —
After reaching the End Position FO
(OPEN) or FC (CLOSED).
Positioner 2 X X X X
(OPEN) or FC (CLOSED) AND
response of the associated Torque
Switch TO (OPEN) or TC (CLOSED)
Positioner 3 X X X —
After reaching the end position FO
(OPEN). After reaching the End
Position 'CLOSED', the respective
Torque Switch TC must also respond
after the Limit Switch FC has
responded.
Positioner 4 — X X X
(OPEN). After reaching the End
Position FO (OPEN), the respective
Torque Switch TO must also
respond after the Limit Switch FO
has responded.
Positioner 5 Antivalent Active Antivalent Active
After reaching the End Position or
the torque. The actuator is monitored
by either the Limit Switches or by
the Torque Switches. The switches
are implemented as change-over
contacts and are checked for
antivalence. In the case of Non-
antivalent Feedback (e.g. FC=0 and
TC=0), SIMOCODE pro recognizes a
wire break and deactivates the
Positioner with the fault message
"Trip - Antivalence"
Table 4-17: Types of Positioner Control
Notice
The signals of the Torque Switches and the Limit Switches must be wired to
the inputs of the basic units. Torque Switches must be 0-active, whereas
the Limit Switches must be 1-active.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631,631 6050-22 DS 02 4-53
Motor Control
Settings
Positioner Description
ON < ON < control command (CLOSED)

OFF Control command STOP

ON > ON > Control Command (OPEN)


FC Auxiliary Control Input "Feedback CLOSED"

usually with the socket of an input to which the Limit Switch is
connected)
FO Auxiliary Control Input "Feedback OPEN"

usually with the socket of an input to which the Limit Switch is
connected)
TC Auxiliary control input "TORQUE CLOSED"

usually with the socket of an input to which the Torque Switch is
connected)
TO Auxiliary Control Input "Torque OPEN"

usually with the socket of an input to which the Torque Switch is
connected)

Load • Motor
Definitions")
Execution Time Time until the End Position is reached.

Range 0 - 6553.5 seconds (1.0 s)

Table 4-18: Control function Positioner Settings
SIMOCODE pro
4-54 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Motor Control
4.2.15 "Soft Starter" Control Function
Description
With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can activate the 3RW soft
starter. The 3RW soft starters are connected to PROFIBUS DP via
SIMOCODE pro.
Control commands
• Start with "ON >" activates the QE1 and QE4 Contactor Controls
• Stop with "OFF" first deactivates the QE4 Contactor Control. When the signal
"Feedback ON" has expired, the QE1 Contactor Control is deactivated 3 s later
in order to facilitate a smooth run down via the soft starter.
• With "Reset", the QE3 Contactor Control is activated for 20 ms and sends the
soft starter an acknowledgement signal via a parameterizable relay output.

1) Assign the QE1 Contactor Control to the Relay Output which controls the coil
of the line contactor.
2) Assign the QE4 Contactor Control to an arbitrary Relay Output from which
the "ON Input" of the soft starter should be controlled.
3) Assign the QE3 Contactor Control to the Relay Output that supplies the 20-
ms acknowledgment signal to the soft starter.
4) Assign the "ON >" and "OFF" control commands to the enabled control
commands.
5) Assign the SIMOCODE pro input to which the "Trip" signal output of the soft
starter is connected to the input (socket) of the standard function "External
Fault 1".
6) The "Start-up End" signal of the soft starter can also be wired to one of the
outputs and processed by SIMOCODE pro.
Notice
In order to avoid disconnections due to faults, the "Execution Time"
parameter in SIMOCODE pro must be set at least to the Smooth Running
Down Time of the soft starters.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631,631 6050-22 DS 02 4-55
Motor Control
Schematic

QE1
Network Contactor
Soft Starter
Motor Protection
OFF
Non-maintained QE3 20 ms
Command Mode
ON >
QE4
ON
Type of Displays
Consumer Load
QLA (OFF)
Feedback Time QLE >
(ON >)
FB ON*
QLS
(Trip)
Status
OFF
ON >
*Feedback ON
Fig. 4-25: Schematic of "Soft Starter" control function, "Protection/Control" function block
Settings
Soft Starter Description

ON > ON control command
Load • Motor
Definitions")
Execution Time At least > Smooth Running Down Time.
Table 4-19: Soft Starter settings
SIMOCODE pro
4-56 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Motor Control
4.2.16 "Soft Starter with Reversing Contactor" Control Function
Description
With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can activate the 3RW soft starter
including an additional reversing contactor. Thus, the 3RW soft starters are
connected to the PROFIBUS DP via SIMOCODE pro. With this control
function, SIMOCODE pro can also control the direction of rotation of the
motor (forwards and backwards).
Control commands
• Start with "ON >" activates the QE1 and QE4 Contactor Controls (clockwise,
i.e. forwards)
• Start with "ON <" activates the QE2 and QE4 Contactor Controls (counter-
clockwise, i.e. backwards)
• Stop with "OFF" first deactivates the QE4 Contactor Control. When the
"Feedback ON" signal is no longer issued, the QE1 / QE2 Contactor Control is
deactivated 3 s later in order to facilitate a smooth run down via the soft
starter.
• With "Reset", the QE3 Contactor Control is activated for 20 ms and sends the
soft starter an acknowledgement signal via a parameterizable relay output.

- ON <" signal has expired (motor is switched off) AND the Interlocking Time
has expired:
via the Interlocking Time.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631,631 6050-22 DS 02 4-57
Motor Control

of the line contactor (right).
of the line contactor (left).
3) Assign the QE4 Contactor Control to an arbitrary Relay Output from which
the "ON input" of the soft starter should be controlled.
4) Assign the QE3 Contactor Control to the Relay Output that supplies the 20
ms acknowledgment signal to the soft starter.
5) Assign the "ON >", "ON <" and "OFF" control commands to the enabled
control commands.
6) Assign the SIMOCODE pro input to which the "Fault" signal output of the soft
starter is connected to the input (socket) of the standard function "External
Fault 1".
7) The "Start-up End" signal of the soft starter can also be wired to one of the
outputs and processed by SIMOCODE pro.
Note
An additional Digital Module may be necessary for this control function.
Schematic

QE1 RIGHT
Soft Starter with
ON < Reversing Contactor QE2
Motor Protection LEFT
OFF
Non-maintained QE3 20 ms
Command
ON >
Saving Change-over QE4
Command
ON
Displays
Type of
Consumer Load QLE < (ON <)
Feedback Time QLA (OFF)
Feedback Execution Time QLE >
(ON >)
FB ON* Interlocking Time
QLS
(Trip)
Status
ON <
OFF
ON >
*Feedback ON Interlocking Time
Extended Control
Active
Fig. 4-26: Schematic of the "Soft Starter with Reversing Contactor" control function, "Protection/
Control" function block
SIMOCODE pro
4-58 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Motor Control
Settings
Soft Starter with Description

Reversing
Contactor
ON < ON < control command, counter-clockwise


ON > ON > control command, clockwise




Load • Motor
Definitions")
Execution Time Execution Time > Smooth Running Down Time.


Table 4-20: Soft Starter with Reversing Contactor settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631,631 6050-22 DS 02 4-59
4.3
4-60
Lamp control
QLE<< QLE< QLA QLE> QLE>>
Specification/ Control station Contactor control
(ON<<) (ON<) (OFF) (ON>) (ON>>)
Motor Control
Control function
Status signal
ON<< ON< OFF ON> ON>> QE1 QE2 QE3 QE4 QE5 ON<< ON< OFF ON> ON>>
Overload 1),2) - - - - - - - Active - - - - - - -
Direct starter 1),2) - - OFF ON - ON - - - - - OFF ON -
Reversing starter 1),2) - Left OFF Right - Right Left - - - Left OFF Right -
Circuit breaker 1),2) - - OFF ON - ON - OFF - - - - OFF ON -
functions
impulse impulse
Star-delta - - OFF ON - Star Delta Network - - - - OFF ON -
starter 2) contactor contactor contactor
Star-delta starter Left OFF Right - Star Delta Right Left - Left OFF Right -
with reversal of the direction contactor contactor network network
of rotation 2) contactor contactor
Dahlander 2) - - OFF Slow Fast Fast Slow Fast - - - - OFF Slow Fast
star
contactor
Dahlander Left Left OFF Right Right Right Right Fast Left Left Left Left OFF Right Right
with reversal of the direction fast slow slow fast fast slow star slow fast fast slow slow fast
of rotation 2) contactor
Pole-changing switch 2) - - OFF Slow Fast Fast Slow - - - - - OFF Slow Fast
Pole-changing switch Left Left OFF Right Right Right Right - Left Left Left Left OFF Right Right
with reversing the direction fast slow slow fast fast slow slow fast fast slow slow fast
of rotation 2)
Valve 2) - - Closed Open - Open - - - - - - Closed Open -
Positioner 1 2) - Closed Stop Open - Open Closed - - - - Closed Stop Open -
Soft starter 2) - - OFF ON - ON - Reset ON - - - OFF ON -
network command
contactor
Soft starter with reversing - Left OFF Right - Right Left Reset ON - - Left OFF Right -
and Status Information for the Control Functions
contactor 2) network- network- command

contactor contactor
Active Control Stations, Contactor & Lamp Controls
1) Basic unit 1, SIMOCODE pro C
Table 4-21: Active Control Stations, Contactor/Lamp Controls and Status Information for control
2) Basic unit 2, SIMOCODE pro V
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02

SIMOCODE pro
Monitoring Functions 5
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information about the monitoring functions
• Earth-fault Monitoring
• Monitoring Current Limits
• Voltage Monitoring
• Cos phi Monitoring
• Active Power Monitoring
• Monitoring 0/4 A - 20 mA
• Operation Monitoring
• Analog Temperature Monitoring.
As is the case with motor protection and motor control, the monitoring
functions work “in the background”. All monitoring function parameters are
explained.
Target groups
• Configurators
• Programmers
• Commissioners
• Service personnel.
Necessary knowledge
• SIMOCODE pro
• Motor protection, motor control
Device parameters > Monitoring functions.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 5-1
Monitoring Functions
5.1 Earth-Fault Monitoring

5.1.1 Description
SIMOCODE pro measures and monitors all three phase currents. By

evaluating the summation current of the three current values, the motor
feeder can be monitored for a possible fault current or earth fault.
Internal Earth-fault Monitoring via Current Measuring Modules or Current/
Voltage Measuring Modules is only possible for motors with a 3-phase
connection in networks that are either grounded directly or with low
impedance.
Activate Earth-fault Monitoring via parameterization. It covers two different
operating conditions.
• The normal operating condition up to 2 x Is. The effective Operating Current
must be smaller than twice the Set Current Is. Fault Currents of > 30% of the
Set Current Is will be detected.
• Start-up or Overload Operation from 2 x Is. The effective Operating Current is
more than twice the Set Current Is. Fault Currents of> 15% of the effective
Motor Current will be detected.
Note
If you use internal Earth-fault Monitoring for star-delta circuits, false tripping
may occur. During delta operation, the Summation Current is non-zero due
to harmonics.
External Earth-fault Monitoring via a Summation Current Transformer and

an Earth-fault Module is normally used for networks that are grounded with
high impedance.
Rated Fault Currents of 0.3 A / 0.5 A / 1 A are evaluated by the 3UL22
Summation Current Transformer. The Response Delay of the Summation
Current Transformer is 300 ms - 500 ms. This response delay can be further
delayed by parameterizing SIMOCODE pro accordingly.
A definable and delayable response can be parameterized when an earth
fault is detected.
An event is generated if the Earth-fault Limit is exceeded. You can set
additional trippings via parameterization.
If the rated fault currents are exceeded, SIMOCODE pro V reacts by either:
• Turning off the contactor controls QE, or
• By issuing a warning,
depending upon the configuration you have set.
SIMOCODE pro
5-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
5.1.2 Internal Earth-fault Monitoring
Response
Here you can set the SIMOCODE pro response to an internal earth fault:
Information".
Current from QE1

Current Measuring QE2
Module or Tripping
QE3
Earth-fault Monitoring
Current/Voltage QE4
Measuring Module QE5
Internal Earth Fault Response/Delay
see Table 5-1
Event "Internal
Earth Fault"
External Earth Fault
Event "Warning
External Earth Fault"
Fig. 5-1: "Earth-fault Monitoring" function block
Response Internal Earth Fault

Deactivated X
Signaling X
Warning X
Tripping X
Delay 0 - 25.5 s 0.5)
Table 5-1: "Internal Earth-fault Monitoring" response
Activity
Unless it has been deactivated, this function is always active, independent
of whether the motor is running or not (operating state "ON").
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 5-3
5.1.3 External Earth-fault Monitoring (with Summation Current Transformer)
Response
Here you can set the response of SIMOCODE pro to an External Earth Fault:
Information".
QE1
QE2
Earth-fault Monitoring Tripping QE3
QE4
Current from QE5
Summation Current Internal Earth Fault
Transformer/ Event "External
Earth-fault Module Earth Fault"
Response/Delay
External Earth Fault see Table 5-2
Event "Warning
External Earth Fault"
Fig. 5-2: "Earth-fault Monitoring" function block
Response External Earth Fault

Deactivated -
Signaling X
Warning X
Tripping X
Delay 0 - 25.5 s 0.5) 1)
Table 5-2: "External Earth-fault Monitoring" response
1) Further delay of the Summation Current Transformer Delay

If the response is set to "Signaling" the "External Earth Fault" event will be
generated in the case of an Earth Fault.
If the response is set to "Warning" the
"Warning External Earth Fault" event will be generated in the case of an
Earth Fault.
Activity
Unless deactivated, this function is always active, independent of whether
the motor is running or not (operating state "ON").
SIMOCODE pro
5-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
5.2 Current Limit Monitoring

5.2.1 Description
Current limit monitoring is used for process monitoring, independent of

Overload Protection.
SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring of the Motor Current for
freely-selectable Upper and Lower Current Limits. The response of
SIMOCODE pro when a Pre-warning or Trip Level has been reached can be
freely parameterized and delayed.
Motor current measurement is carried out via Current Measuring Modules
or Current/Voltage Measuring Modules.
QE1
QE2
Current Limits QE3
Tripping
QE4
QE5
Trip Level: I> 1)
Response when I> See

Table 5-3
Event
- Trip Level I>
Delay when I>
Current I_max from
Current Measuring
(Current or Warning Level: I>
Current/Voltage
Current/Voltage See
Response when I> Table 5-4 Event
Measuring Module) - Warning Level I>
Delay when I>
Trip Level: I< 2)
Response when I< See Event

Table 5-5 - Trip Level I<
Delay when I<
Warning Level: I<
See Event
Response when I<
Table 5-6 - Warning Level I<
Delay when I<
Hysteresis
1) Upper Limit
2) Lower Limit
Fig. 5-3: "Current Limits" function block
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 5-5
5.2.2 I> (Upper Limit)
Trip Level, Warning Level

When monitoring Current Limits I> (Upper Limit), two different Response
Levels I> (Upper Limit) Trip Level, I> (Upper Limit) Warning Level can be
parameterized and monitored.
If the current of one or more phases exceeds the Response Level, Current
Limit Monitoring is activated.
Trip Level: 0 to 1020% of Is in 4% increments
Warning Level: 0 to 1020 % of Is in 4% increments
Trip Level activity and Warning Level activity

The Trip Level / Warning Level is only effective when the motor is running,
the start-up procedure has been completed and there is no Test Position
Feedback (TPF) (run+).
Response at Trip Level
Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond when the Trip Level
is overshot.
Information".
Response Trip Level
Deactivated X
Signaling X
Warning -
Tripping X
Delay 0 - 25.5 s (0.5)
Table 5-3: "Warning Level" response for monitoring Current Limits I>
Response at Warning Level

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond when the Warning
Level is overshot:
Information".
Response Warning Level
Deactivated X
Signaling X
Warning X
Tripping -
Delay 0 - 25.5 s (0.5)
Table 5-4: "Warning Level" response for monitoring Current Limits I>
Hysteresis
Here you can set the Hysteresis for the Current Limits I> (Upper Limit):
Hysteresis 0 to 15% of the threshold value in 1% increments
Default: 5 %
SIMOCODE pro
5-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
5.2.3 I< (Lower Limit)

When monitoring Current Limits I< (Lower Limit), two different Response
Levels (Trip Level / Warning Level) can be parameterized and monitored.
Current limit monitoring is activated if the current of the phases (Imax) drops
below the Response Level.
Trip Level: 0 to 1020% of Is in 4% increments
Warning Level: 0 to 1020% of Is in 4% increments
Trip Level and Warning Level activity

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond when the Trip Level
is undershot:
Information".
Response Trip Level
Deactivated X
Signaling X
Warning -
Tripping X
Delay 0 - 25.5 s (0.5)
Table 5-5: "Warning Level" response for monitoring Current Limits I<

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the Warning Level
is undershot:
Information".
Deactivated X
Signaling X
Warning X
Tripping -
Delay 0 - 25.5 s (0.5)
Table 5-6: "Warning Level" response for monitoring Current Limits I<
Hysteresis
Here you can set the Hysteresis for the Current Limits I< (Lower Limit):
Hysteresis 0 to 15% of the threshold value in 1% increments
Default: 5%
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 5-7
5.3 Voltage Monitoring

Description
SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase Undervoltage Monitoring of either a
three-phase network or a one-phase network for freely selectable limits.
The response of SIMOCODE pro on reaching a Pre-warning Level or Trip
Level can be freely parameterized and delayed.
Voltage is measured by Current/Voltage Measuring Modules. This is based
on the minimal voltage of all voltages Umin.
QE1
QE2
QE3
Voltage Monitoring Tripping
QE4
QE5
Trip Level: U<
Trip Level Activity

See
Response at Trip Level Table 5-7 Event
- Trip Level U<
Voltage Umin
Trip Delay
via
Current/Voltage
Measuring Module
Warning Level: U<
Warning Level Activity

See
Response at Warning Level Table 5-8 Event
- Warning Level U<
Warning Delay
Hysteresis 1)
1) Hysteresis for voltage, cos phi, power
Fig. 5-4: "Voltage Monitoring" function block

You can parameterize two different response levels (Trip Level / Warning
Level).
Voltage Monitoring will be activated if the voltage of one or more phases
falls below the Response Level or Warning Level.
Trip Level: 0 - 2,040 V in 8-V increments
Warning Level: 0 - 2,040 V in 8-V increments
SIMOCODE pro
5-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Trip Level and Warning Level Activity

Here you can specify in which motor operating states the Trip Level /
Warning Level is to take effect:
• Always (on) 1) Trip Level / Warning Level always takes effect,
regardless of whether the motor is running or at
a standstill
• Always, except TPF (on+) Trip Level / Warning Level always takes effect,
regardless of whether the motor is running or at
a standstill;
Exception: "TPF", i.e. motor feeder is in test
position
• If motor is running, except TPF (run) Trip level / warning level only takes effect if the
motor is ON and not in the test position
1) When using Basic Unit 2 (from product version *E03*) with a Current/
Voltage Measuring Module
Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the Trip Level is
undershot:
Information".
Response Trip Level
Deactivated X
Signaling X
Warning -
Tripping X
Delay 0 - 25.5 s (0.5)
Table 5-7: "Trip Level" response for Voltage Monitoring

is undershot:
Information".
Deactivated X
Signaling X
Warning X
Tripping -
Delay 0 - 25.5 s (0.5)
Table 5-8: "Warning Level" response for Voltage Monitoring
Hysteresis for voltage, cos phi, power

Here you can set the Hysteresis for voltage, cos phi and power:
Hysteresis for voltage, cos phi, power 0 to 15% of the threshold value
in 1% increments (5%)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 5-9
5.4 Cos Phi Monitoring

Description
Cos phi monitoring monitors the load condition of inductive loads. The main
field of application is asynchronous motors in 1-phase or 3-phase networks
with loads that fluctuate significantly. If the set Trip Level or Warning Level
is undershot, a signal is generated or the motor is switched off, depending
upon the setting.
QE1
QE2
Cos phi Monitoring QE3
Tripping
QE4
QE5
Trip Level
Cos phi from See Event

Response
Table 5-9
Current/Voltage - Trip Level cos phi <
Measuring Module Delay
Warning Level
Response See Event

Table 5-10
- Warning Level cos phi <
Delay
Hysteresis 1)
1)Hysteresis for voltage, cos phi, power

(see "Voltage Monitoring" function block)
Fig. 5-5: "Cos phi Monitoring" function block

You can parameterize two different response levels (Trip Level / Warning
Level) for cos phi Monitoring.
Trip Level: 0 - 100%
Warning Level: 0 - 100%
0 % = cos phi = 0.00

50 % = cos phi = 0.50
10 % = cos phi = 1.00
SIMOCODE pro
5-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the set Trip Level is
undershot:
Information".
Response Trip Level

Deactivated X
Signaling X
Warning -
Tripping X
Delay 0 - 25.5 s (0.5)
Table 5-9: "Trip Level" response for cos phi Monitoring

is undershot:
Information".

Deactivated X
Signaling X
Warning X
Tripping -
Delay 0 - 25.5 s (0.5)
Table 5-10: "Warning Level" response for cos phi Monitoring
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 5-11
5.5 Active Power Monitoring

Description
SIMOCODE pro can indirectly monitor the state of a device or system via
the Active Power. For example, by monitoring the Active Power of a pump
motor, conclusions can be drawn from the Active Power Level about the
flow rate or fluid fill levels.
SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring of the Active Power for
freely-selectable Upper and Lower Current Limits. The response of
SIMOCODE pro when a Pre-warning or Trip Level has been reached can be
freely parameterized and delayed.
Active Power is measured via Current/Voltage Measuring Modules.
QE1
QE2
QE3
Power Monitoring Tripping
QE4
QE5
Trip Level: P> 1)
See Event
Response when P>
Table 5-11
- Trip Level P>
Delay when P>
Warning Level: P>

Active Power from
Current/Voltage See
Response when P> Event
Measuring Module Table 5-12
- Warning Level P>
Delay when P>
Trip Level: P< 2)

See
Response when P< Table 5-11 Event
- Trip Level P<
Delay when P<
Warning Level: P<

See
Response when P< Table 5-12
Event
- Warning Level P<
Delay when P<
Hysteresis 3)
1) Upper Limit
2) Lower Limit
3) Hysteresis for voltage, cos phi, power
(see "Voltage Monitoring" function block)
Fig. 5-6: "Power Monitoring" function block
SIMOCODE pro
5-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02

With Active Power Monitoring, you can parameterize two different
Response Levels (Trip Level / Warning Level) for the Upper and Lower Limit.
Trip Level
• P> (Upper Limit) 0.000 - 4294967.295 kW
• P> (Lower Limit)
Warning Level
• P> (Upper Limit) 0.000 - 4294967.295 kW
• P< (Lower Limit)

Response when Trip Level P> (Upper Limit), P< (Lower Limit)
either undershot or overshot:
Information".
Response Trip Level
Deactivated X
Signaling X
Warning -
Tripping X
Delay 0 - 25.5 s (0.5)
Table 5-11: "Trip Level" response for Active Power Monitoring
Response when Warning Level P> (Upper Limit), P< (Lower Limit)
Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the set Warning
Level is either undershot or overshot:
Information".
Deactivated X
Signaling X
Warning X
Tripping -
Delay 0 - 25.5 s (0.5)
Table 5-12: "Warning Level" response for Active Power Monitoring
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 5-13
5.6 Monitoring 0/4-20 mA

Description
SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring of the analog signals of a
transducer (standard 0/4 - 20 mA output signal). The analog signals are fed
to the "0/4-20 mA" function block via the Analog Module.
QE1
Monitoring 0/4-20 mA
QE2
QE3
Tripping
Trip Level 0/4-20 mA > QE4
QE5
Trip Level Activity
See
Response at Trip Level Table 5-13
Event
- Trip Level
Trip Delay 0/4-20 mA >
Marking Trip Level
Warning Level 0/4-20 mA >
See Event
Response at Warning Level Table 5-14 - Warning Level
0/4-20 mA >
Warning Delay
Analog Input 1 of the Marking Warning Level

Analog Module
(AM Input 1)
Trip Level 0/4-20 mA <
Trip Level Activity
See
Response at Trip Level Table 5-13
Event
- Trip Level
Trip Delay 0/4-20 mA <
Marking Trip Level
Warning Level 0/4-20 mA <
See Event
Response at Warning Level Table 5-14 - Warning Level
0/4-20 mA <
Warning Delay
Marking Warning Level
Hysteresis
Fig. 5-7: "Monitoring 0/4-20 mA" function block
SIMOCODE pro
5-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02

With 0/4-20 mA Monitoring, you can parameterize two different response
Levels (Trip Level / Warning Level) for the Upper and Lower Limit.
Trip Level
• 0/4-20> (Upper Limit) 0.0 - 23.6 mA 8 (0.0 mA)
• 0/4-20< (Lower Limit)
Warning Level
• 0/4-20> (Upper Limit) 0.0 - 23.6 mA (0.0 mA)
• 0/4-20< (Lower Limit)

Here you can specify in which motor operating states the Trip Level /
Warning Level is to take effect:
• Always (on) Trip Level / Warning Level always takes effect,

regardless of whether the motor is running or
at a standstill
• Always, except TPF (on+) Trip Level / Warning Level always takes effect,
regardless of whether the motor is running or
at a standstill, with the exception of "TPF", i.e.
motor feeder is in Test Position
• If motor runs, except TPF (run) Trip Level / Warning Level only takes effect if
the motor is ON and not in the Test Position
• if motor is running, except TPF, The Trip Level / Warning Level only takes
with Start-up Override (run+) effect if the motor is running and the start-up
procedure has been completed, and there is
no Test Position Feedback (TPF)
Response when Trip Level 0/4-20 mA> (Upper Limit),

0/4-20 mA< (Lower Limit)
either undershot or overshot:
Information".
Response Trip Level

Deactivated X
Signaling X
Warning -
Tripping X
Delay 0 - 25.5 s (0.5)
Table 5-13: "Trip Level" response for 0/4-20 mA Monitoring
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 5-15
Response when Warning Level 0/4-20 mA> (Upper Limit), 0/4-20 mA< (Lower Limit)
Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the set Warning
Level is either undershot or overshot:
Information".

Deactivated X
Signaling X
Warning X
Tripping -
Delay 0 - 25.5 s (0.5)
Table 5-14: "Warning Level" response for 0/4-20 mA Monitoring
Marking
The marking is stored in the device and allocated and displayed in the Faults/
Warnings online dialog. Optional marking for designating the signal, e.g.
"0/4-20>"; range: up to 10 characters.
Hysteresis for 0/4-20 mA

Here you can set the fluctuation range for the Analog Signal:
Hysteresis for the Analog Signal 0 to 15% in 1% increments (5 %)
Note
Monitoring of a second process variable via Input 2 of the Analog Module
can be done, for example, by free Limit Monitors.
SIMOCODE pro
5-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
5.7 Operation Monitoring

5.7.1 Description
To avoid plant downtimes due to failed motors caused by excessive Run or

Stop Times, SIMOCODE pro can monitor the Operating Hours and Stop
Times of a motor and limit the number of motor starts in a defined time
frame.
If an adjustable Limit Value is exceeded, a signal or warning can be
generated that indicates maintenance or replacement of the motor in
question is required.
After replacing the motor, the Operating hours and Motor Stop Times can be
reset.
To avoid excessive thermal strain and premature aging of a motor, the
number of motor starts in a selectable time frame can be limited. The
number of starts still possible will be available for further processing in
SIMOCODE pro.
A low number of possible starts can be indicated by Pre-warnings.
Note
Operating hours, plant downtimes and the number of motor starts can be
monitored completely in the device and/or transmitted to the automation
system via PROFIBUS.
QE1
Tripping
QE2
Operation Monitoring QE3
QE4
Operating Hours QE5
Operating Hours Level See

Table 5-15
Response Event
- Operating Hours >
Motor Stop Time

Motor Stop Time Level
Control See
Functions Table 5-15
Response Event - Motor Stop Time >
Number of Starts
Permissible Starts
Permissible Starts
Time Range for Starts

See Event
Response at Overshoot Table 5-15 - Number of Starts >
See - Just One Start Possible
Response at Pre-warning
Table 5-15
Interlocking Time - No Start Possible
Fig. 5-8: "Operation Monitoring" function block
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 5-17
Response
Response Motor Opera- Motor Stop Number of Number of

ting Hours Time starts - Starts -
Monitoring - Monitoring - Overshoot Pre-warning
Level Level
Deactivated X X X X
Signaling X X X X
Warning X X X X
Tripping - - X -
Table 5-15: "Operation Monitoring" response
5.7.2 Motor Operating Hours Monitoring
The Motor Operating Hours monitoring function enables the operating hours
(service life) of a motor to be recorded so that motor maintenance prompts
can be generated in good time as applicable.
Level
If the operating hours exceed the set Response Level, the Monitoring
function will be activated.
Level: 0 to 119,3046 hours (0 h)
Activity
Response
You can set the Response for Overshoot here.
Information" and Table 5-15.
5.7.3 Motor Stop Time Monitoring
System parts for important processes often have dual drives (A and B
drives). Ensure that these are always operated alternately. This prevents
long Motor Stop Times and reduces the risk of non-availability. The Motor
Stop Time Monitoring function can be used, for example, to generate an
alarm, thus initiating connection of the motor.
Level
The length of the permissible Motor Stop Time is stipulated here; if
exceeded, monitoring will begin.
Level: 0 to 65,535 hours (0 h)
Activity
SIMOCODE pro
5-18 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Response
Here you can determine the response for when the Permissible Motor Stop
Time is exceeded: See also "Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro" in
Chapter "Important Information" and Table 5-15.
5.7.4 Monitoring the Number of Starts
Monitoring the Number of Starts can protect system parts (motor, switching
devices such as soft starters and converters) from too many start processes
within a parameterizable time frame and, thus, prevent damage. This is
particularly useful for commissioning or manual control.
The following schematic illustrates the principle of Monitoring the Number
of Starts.
1. Start within the time frame

Time frame Example:
3 starts allowed
Pre-warning Overshot
Fig. 5-9: Monitoring the Number of Starts
Permissible Starts
The maximum Number of Starts is set here. The time interval "Time Range
for Starts" commences to run after the first start. After the second to last
permissible start has been executed, the "Just One Start Possible" pre-
warning is generated.
Permissible starts: 1 to 255

The time range for permissible start processes is set here. The maximum
Number of Starts is only available again after the parameterized time range
for starts has expired. The number of available starts is shown by the analog
value "Permissible Starts - Actual Value".
Time Range for 00:00:00 to 18:12:15 hh:mm:ss
Starts:
Activity
Response at Overshoot
Here you can set the response for when the Number of Starts within the
Time Range for Starts has been overshot:
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 5-19
Response at Pre-warning
Here you can set the response required after the second to last start:
Interlocking Time
If a new start command is issued within the time range for starts after the
last permissible start, this new start command will no longer be executed if
the setting "Response at Overshoot - Tripping" has been set. "Trip - No. of
Starts >" will be displayed and the set Interlocking Time activated.
Interlocking Time: 00:00:00 to 18:12:15 hh:mm:ss
SIMOCODE pro
5-20 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
5.8 Analog Temperature Monitoring

Schematic and characteristic curve
Temperature monitoring of, for example, motor windings, motor bearings,
coolant and gearbox temperature, can be carried out via up to three Analog
Temperature Sensors such as NTC, KTY 83/84, PT100, PT1000.
SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring for overtemperature:
Separate levels can be set for the Warning Temperature and the Switch-off
Temperature.
Temperature Monitoring is based upon the highest temperature in all Sensor
Measuring Circuits of the Temperature Module.
QE1
QE2
Trip Level Tripping
QE3
Response at Trip Level See QE4

Table QE5
"Response"
(Marking)
Event
Max. Temperature of all
Sensor Measuring - Temperature Module
Circuits of the Warning Level Trip Level T>
Temperature Module
Response at Warning Level See - Temperature Module
Table Warning Limit T>
"Response"
"Response"
Hysteresis
Fig. 5-10: "Temperature Monitoring" function block
Settings
Temperature Description
Trip Level T> - 273 °C - 65,262 °C
Response at Trip Level Setting of response when the temperature is overshot (see the
T> following table and Chapter "Important Information")
Marking Trip Level T > No parameters. Optional marking for designating the event, e.g.
"Temperature >"; range: up to 10 characters
Warning Level T> - 273 °C - 65,262 °C
Response Warning Setting of response when the temperature is overshot (see the
Level T > following table and Chapter "Important Information")
Marking Warning No parameters. Optional marking for designating the event, e.g.
Level T > "Temperature >"; range: up to 10 characters
Hysteresis 0 - 255 °C in 1 °C increments
Default: 5 °C
Table 5-16: "Temperature Monitoring" settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 5-21

The Trip Level / Warning Level always takes effect, independent of whether
the motor is running or not (operating status "ON").
Response
Information".
• Overtemperature: Here you can select how SIMOCODE pro should respond
when the temperature has overshot the Warning Level / Trip Level.
Response Warning Limit T> Trip Level T>

Deactivated X -
Signaling X X
Warning X -
Tripping - X
Table 5-17: "Overtemperature" response
Caution
With motors for EEx e applications, the response must remain set to
"Tripping"!
Note
The sensor type, the number of measuring circuits in use and the response
to a sensor fault must be set in the "Temperature Module Inputs
(TM Inputs)" function block if Temperature Monitoring is being used.
Note
To monitor several Sensor Measuring Circuits individually and
independently, a suitable number of free Limit Monitors can be linked to the
"Temperature Module Inputs (TM Inputs)" function block and differing limits
set for the individual temperature sensors, instead of the "Temperature
Monitoring" function block.
SIMOCODE pro
5-22 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
5.9 Hysteresis for Monitoring Functions

The following diagram illustrates the function of the Hysteresis for
Monitoring Functions:
0HDVXUHG
YDOXH
7ULSOHYHO! +\VWHUHVLV
:DUQLQJOHYHO! +\VWHUHVLV
:DUQLQJOHYHO +\VWHUHVLV
7ULSOHYHO +\VWHUHVLV
7LPH
6LJQDOLQJ
7ULSOHYHO!

7LPH
6LJQDOLQJ
:DUQLQJOHYHO!

7LPH
6LJQDOLQJ
:DUQLQJOHYHO

7LPH
6LJQDOLQJ
7ULSOHYHO

7LPH
7KHK\VWHUHVHVDUHDOZD\VEDVHGRQWKHUHVSHFWLYHO\VHWUHVSRQVHOHYHO
H[FHSWLRQWHPSHUDWXUHPRQLWRULQJ
7KHWULSDQGZDUQLQJOHYHOHYHQWVFDQDOVREHGHOD\HGLQGLYLGXDOO\
Fig. 5-11: The hysteresis operating principle for monitoring functions
TL = Trip Level (Tripping)

WL = Warning Level (Warning)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 5-23
SIMOCODE pro
5-24 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Outputs 6
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information about the Outputs of
SIMOCODE pro.
• Relay Outputs on the Basic Unit and the Digital Modules
• Analog Module - Output
• Operator Panel LEDs
• Send Data on the PROFIBUS DP.
Target groups
• Programmers.
Necessary knowledge
• PROFIBUS DP.
You will find the dialogs in SIMOCODE ES under:
Further Function Blocks > Outputs.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 6-1
Outputs
6.1 Introduction
Description
SIMOCODE pro has various Outputs. These are represented by different

function blocks in SIMOCODE pro. They are the outgoing SIMOCODE pro
interfaces. Within SIMOCODE pro, the Outputs are represented as plugs on
the corresponding function blocks and can be assigned to any functions or
events via connections.
Outputs can be:
• Output Terminals on the exterior of the Basic Unit, Digital Modules and
the Analog Module
• LED on the Operator Panel for visualizing the operating state or different
statuses
• Outputs to PROFIBUS DP (Cyclic and Acyclic).
Schematic
The following schematic shows the general representation of the various
output types:
SIMOCODE pro
Plugs Output Output Terminals
SIMOCODE pro
Plugs Output LED Operator Panel
SIMOCODE pro
Plugs Output DP PROFIBUS DP
Fig. 6-1: General representation of the various output types
SIMOCODE pro
6-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Outputs

Outputs are used, e.g. for controlling motor contactors, status display or
signaling via PROFIBUS DP. The system provides different types of Outputs
depending on the device series and the Expansion Modules in use:
SIMOCODE
Outputs pro C (BU1) pro V (BU2)
Basic Unit Outputs (BU Outputs) ✓ ✓

Operator Panel LED (OP LED) ✓ ✓
Digital Module 1 outputs (DM1 Outputs) — ✓
Digital Module 2 Outputs (DM2 Outputs) — ✓
Analog Module Output (AM Output) — ✓
Acyclic Send Data (Acyclic Send) ✓ ✓
Cyclic Send Data (Cyclic Send) ✓ ✓
Table 6-1: Outputs
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 6-3
Outputs
6.2 Basic Unit Outputs

Description
SIMOCODE pro has a "BU Outputs" function block with three Relay
Outputs. You can e.g. switch contactors or lamps via these Relay Outputs.
For this, the Inputs (plugs) of the function block must be connected to the
respective sockets (usually the QE. Contactor Controls of the control
function). The "BU Outputs" function block consists of
• three plugs corresponding to the Relay Outputs Out1 to Out3
• three Relays
• Output Terminals.
Overall, there is:
– one "BU Outputs" function block for BU1 and BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "BU Outputs" function block:
SIMOCODE pro
BU Outputs
1 1 Terminal Numbers
Out1
2 2
Out2
3
3
6
Out3
7
Output Terminals
Fig. 6-2: "BU Outputs" function block
• Control of the Main Contactor in the Motor Feeder:
You can, e.g., define which Relay Output is used for controlling the Motor
Contactor in the motor feeder. For this, connect the desired Relay Output to
the respective "QE" Contactor Control of the control function.
• Lamp control for displaying operating states:
You can e.g. define which Relay Outputs are to be used for controlling the
lamps/LEDs displaying operating states of the motor (FAULT, ON, OFF,
FAST, SLOW...).
For this, connect the desired Relay Output to the respective "QE..."
Contactor Control of the control function. The following are specifically
intended for controlling lamps and LEDs:
In addition to the status displays, the "QL..." lamp controls automatically
signal via a 2-Hz flash frequency:
– Test mode (QLE.../QLA Lamp Outputs are flashing)
SIMOCODE pro
6-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Outputs
– Unacknowledged Fault (Lamp Output General Fault QLS is flashing)

– Transfer of any other information, status information, warnings, faults
etc. to the Relay Outputs
– Lamp test: all QL Outputs are activated for approx. 2 s.
In most cases, the Outputs of the Basic Unit will be connected to the QE or
QL Outputs. By referring to Table 4-21on page 4-60 you can determine
which QE Outputs are required for which control functions.
Settings
BU Outputs Description
Outputs 1 to 3 Control of the "BU Outputs" function block via any signal
(any sockets ,
e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.
usually from the QE Contactor Controls)
Table 6-2: Basic Unit Output Settings
The defaults depend on the selected application (template)
See Chapter E "Example Circuits".
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 6-5
Outputs
6.3 Operator Panel LEDs

Description
SIMOCODE pro has an "OP LED" function block for controlling the seven
freely-assignable LEDs. The LEDs are in the Operator Panel and can be used
to display any status. For this, the Inputs (plugs) of the "OP LED" function
block must be connected to the respective sockets (e.g. to the sockets for
the status information of the control function).
Note
The "OP LED" function block can only be used if the Operator Panel (OP) is
connected and configured in the device configuration!
The "OP LED" function block consists of

• Four plugs, "OP LED Green 1" to "OP LED Green 4", corresponding to the
green LEDs. The green LEDs are optically/constructionally allocated to the
buttons on the Operator Panel. They will normally display feedback
concerning the motor operating state
• Three plugs, "OP LED Yellow 1" to "OP LED Yellow 3", corresponding to the
yellow LEDs.
• Four green LEDs
• Three yellow LEDs (not for the operator panel with display).
Overall, there is:
– one "OP LED" function block on BU1 and BU2.
Operator Panel LEDs

The following diagram shows the front view of the Operator Panel and the
LEDs:
Green 1 Green 2 Green 3 Green 4
TEST/
RESET
Yellow 1 Yellow 2 Yellow 3
Fig. 6-3: Operator Panel LEDs
SIMOCODE pro
6-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Outputs
LEDs of the Operator Panel with Display

The following diagram shows the front view of the Operator Panel with
Display with LEDs:
Green 1
Green 2
Green 3
Green 4
Fig. 6-4: LEDs of the Operator Panel with Display for SIMOCODE pro V
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "OP LED" function block:
OP LED LED
Green 1
Green 2
Green 3
Green 4
Yellow 1
Yellow 2
Yellow 3
Fig. 6-5: Schematic of the "OP LED" function block
Note
The three yellow LEDs mentioned in this section are not available for the
Operator Panel with Display. Status information can be read out here
directly via the display. However, the corresponding three plugs can be
connected via the software. Nevertheless, they remain ineffective.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 6-7
Outputs
• Display of operating states:
You can, e.g., define which LEDs are to be used for displaying the operating
states (FAULT, ON, OFF, FAST, SLOW).
For this, connect the desired LED to the respective "QL" Lamp Control of the
control function.
In many cases, the LEDs are connected to the QL Outputs. By referring to
Table 4-21on page 4-60 you can determine which QL Outputs are required
for which control functions.
• Transfer of any other information, status information, warnings, faults, etc. to
the yellow LEDs.
Settings
OP LED Description
Green 1 to Control of the "OP LED" function block

Green 4 with any signal (any sockets ,
e.g. feedback concerning the "Motor" operating state)
Yellow 1 to Control of the "OP LED" function block

Yellow 3 *) with any signal (any sockets
e.g. displays for status, events, faults)
Table 6-3: Operator Panel LED settings
*) No function when using the Operator Panel with Display
Defaults depend on the selected application (template):

SIMOCODE pro
6-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Outputs
6.4 Digital Module Outputs

Description
SIMOCODE pro has two "DM1 Outputs" and "DM2 Outputs" function blocks,
which are each equipped with two Relay Outputs. You can, e.g., switch
contactors or lamps via these Relay Outputs. For this, the inputs (plugs of
the "DM Outputs" function blocks) must be connected to the respective
sockets (e.g. of the control function).
Note
"DM Outputs" function blocks can only be used if the corresponding Digital
Modules (DM) are connected and configured in the device configuration!
Each function block has

• Two plugs, corresponding to Relay Outputs Out1, Out2
• Two relays
• Output Terminals.
Overall, there is
– one "DM1 Outputs" function block on BU2, and
– one "DM2 Outputs" function block on BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "DM Outputs" function block:
DM1 Outputs DM2 Outputs

1 1
Out1 Out1
2 Out2 2 Out2
Output Terminals Output Terminals

Fig. 6-6: Schematic of the "DM1 Outputs" / "DM2 Outputs" function blocks
• Controlling the motor contactor in the motor feeder
You can, e.g., define which Relay Output is to be used for controlling the main
contactor in the motor feeder.
For this, connect the desired Relay Output to the respective "QE" Contactor
Control of the control function.
• Controlling lamps for displaying of operating states:
You can, e.g., define which Relay Outputs are to be used for controlling the
lamps/LEDs displaying operating states of the motor (FAULT, ON, OFF, FAST,
SLOW...).
For this, connect the desired Relay Output to the respective "QL..." Lamp
Control of the control function.
• Transfer of any other information, status information, warnings, faults, etc. to
the Relay Outputs.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 6-9
Outputs
In many cases, the Outputs of the Digital Module will be connected to the
QE Outputs. By referring to Table 4-21on page 4-60 you can determine
which QE Outputs are required for which control functions.
Settings
"DM1/DM2 Description
Outputs"
Outputs 1 to 2 Control of the "DM1 Outputs" and "DM2-Outputs" function blocks

with any signal (any sockets ,
e.g. Device Inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.,
usually from the QE Contactor Controls)
Table 6-4: "DM1/DM2 Outputs" settings
Defaults depend on the selected application (template):
SIMOCODE pro
6-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Outputs
6.5 Analog Module Output

Description
You can expand Basic Unit 2 with an Analog Output using the Analog
Module. The corresponding function block allows every analog value (2 byte/
1 word) in SIMOCODE pro to be output as a 0/4 A - 20 mA signal, for
example, on a connected pointer instrument. By activating the function
block via the "Assigned Analog Output Value" plug with any integer value
between 0 and 65535, an equivalent analog signal of 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20
mA will be sent to the Output Terminals of the Analog Module.
Note
The "AM Output" function block can only be used if the Analog Module (AM)
is connected and configured in the device configuration!
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "AM Output" function block:
AM Output
Assigned OUT+
Start Value of Value Range
Analog Output Value
End Value of Value Range OUT-
Output Signal
Fig. 6-7: Schematic of the "AM Output" function block
Settings
Signal/value Range
Assigned Analog Output Value Any value (1 word / 2 byte) in

SIMOCODE pro
Output Signal 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA
Start Value of Value Range 0 - 65535
End Value of Value Range 0 - 65535
Table 6-5: "Analog Module Output" settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 6-11
Outputs
Note
The Outputs of the analog module are passive outputs. Thus, to configure
an Analog Output Circuit, each output will also require an isolated current
source connected in series. If the Output of the Analog Module is not being
used by another application, it can also be used as current source for an
Analog Module Output Circuit. The "Start Value of Value Range" and the "End
Value of Value Range" of the Analog Module Output have to be set to 65535
for this. Thus, the maximum possible current will always be available via the
Analog Module Output.
SIMOCODE pro
6-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Outputs
1) Output of the Effective Motor Current - across the entire motor
current range
The motor current of a motor ranges from 0 to 8 A.
The Rated Current IN of the motor at nominal load is 2 A.
The parameterized Set Current Is in SIMOCODE ES corresponds to the
Rated Current IN (2 A). In SIMOCODE pro, representation of the effective
phase currents or the maximum current (current IL_1, IL_2, IL_3, max.
current I_max) corresponds to the selected range as a percentage of the
parameterized Set Current Is:
– 0 A Motor Current corresponds to 0% of Is
– The smallest unit for the Effective Motor Current in SIMOCODE pro is
1% (see Chapter B.8 "Data Record 94 - Measured Values")
PRWRUFXUHQW,PD[
>,PD[RI,H@
$
HQWLUHUDQJH
PRWRUFXUUHQWRI,H
,1 ,H $
$,1

W>V@
Fig. 6-8: Application example: Motor Current Output - entire range
As a result,
– the "Start Value of Value Range" to be selected is: 0
– the "End Value of Value Range" to be selected is: 400.
AM Output
Assigned
OUT+
Analog Output Value 0 Start Value of Value Range
Max. Current I_max OUT-
400 End Value of Value Range
0-20mA Output Signal
Fig. 6-9: Application example: Motor Current Output - output values to function block
AM Output
When the parameterized "Output Signal" = 0 - 20 mA:

– 0% Motor Current corresponds to: 0 mA at the Analog Module Output

– 400% Motor Current corresponds to: 20 mA at the Analog Module Output.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 6-13
Outputs
2) Output of the Effective Motor Current - only part of the motor current
range (overload range)
The Motor Current of a motor ranges from 0 to 8 A.
The Rated Current IN of the motor at nominal load is 2 A.
The parameterized Set Current Is in SIMOCODE ES corresponds to the
Rated Current IN (2 A). However, only the overload range (2 A - 8 A) is to be
displayed on a pointer instrument via the Analog Module Output.
In SIMOCODE pro, representation of the effective phase currents or the
maximum current (current IL_1, IL_2, IL_3, max. current I_max) corresponds
to the selected range as a percentage of the parameterized Set Current Is:
– The smallest unit for the Effective Motor Current in SIMOCODE pro is 1%
(see Chapter B.8 "Data Record 94 - Measured Values").
PRWRUFXUUHQW,PD[
>,PD[RI,H@
$
3DUWLDOUDQJHRIWKHPRWRUFXUUHQW
2YHUORDGUDQJHRI,H
,1 ,H $
$,1

W>V@
Fig. 6-10: Application example: Motor Current Output - overload range
As a result,
– the "Start Value of Value Range" to be selected is: 100
– the "End Value of Value Range" to be selected is: 400.
AM Output
Assigned
OUT+
Analog Output Value 100 Start Value of Value Range
Max. Current I_max OUT-
400 End Value of Value Range
0-20 mA Output Signal
Fig. 6-11: Application example: Motor Current Output - output values to function block
AM Output

SIMOCODE pro
6-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Outputs
Notes (concerning examples 1 and 2):

In SIMOCODE pro, phase currents are available as a percentage of the Set
Current Is. When using the Analog Module Output to display the Effective
Motor Current on a connected pointer instrument, the Effective Motor
Current is always indicated as a percentage of the Set Current. If the
selected control function is for a motor with only one speed, the display on
the pointer instrument can be in percent (% of Is) as well as absolute (e.g. in
A).
In the case of motors / control functions with two speeds and, thus, two Set
Currents (e.g. Pole-changing Starters or Dahlanders), the motor current is
only displayed on the pointer instrument as a percentage of the effective Set
Current Is1 or Is2, depending upon which of the two speeds (slow or fast) is
prevalent.
3) Output of any analog value from the automation system, cyclically

via PROFIBUS
One word (2 byte) can be cyclically transmitted from the automation system
to SIMOCODE pro via PROFIBUS. Any value can be output as a 0/4 to 20
mA signal by directly connecting this cyclic control word from PROFIBUS to
the Analog Module Output. If the transmitted value is in S7 Format (0 to
27648) it must be taken into consideration when parameterizing:
AM Output
Assigned
Analog Output Value OUT+
0 Start Value of Value Range
Cyclic Receive 2/3 OUT-
End Value of Value Range
27648
(1 word, cycl. from the PLC)
0-20 mA Output Signal
Fig. 6-12: Output of an analog value from the automation system
As a result,
– The "Start Value of Value Range" to be selected is: 0
– The "End Value of Value Range" to be selected is: 27648.

– 0: 0 mA at the Analog Module Output
– 27648: 20 mA at the Analog Module Output.

– 0: 4 mA at the Analog Module Output
– 27648: 20 mA at the Analog Module Output.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 6-15
Outputs
6.6 Cyclic Send

Description
The "Cyclic Send" function blocks allow you to specify the information to be
transferred to the automation system via PROFIBUS DP.
"Cyclic Send" function blocks consist of
• Eight bits each (two bytes, byte 0 and byte 1 for binary information)
• Four words (= eight bytes byte 2 to 9 for four analog values, freely
parameterizable)
• One output to PROFIBUS DP each.
Overall, there are
– Three "Cyclic Send" function blocks (0, 1, 2/9).
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Cyclic Send" function blocks:
Cyclic Send 0 with eight bits Cyclic Send 1 with eight bits
for binary information for binary information
Basic type 1 (for BU 2) Basic type 1 (for BU 2)

Basic type 2 (for BU 1 and BU 2) Basic type 2 (for BU 1 and BU 2)
Byte 0 Cyclic Send 0 Byte 1 Cyclic Send 1

Bit 0 Bit 0
Bit 1 Bit 1
Bit 2 Bit 2
Bit 3 DP Bit 3 DP
To PROFIBUS DP To PROFIBUS DP
Bit 4 Bit 4
Bit 5 Bit 5
Bit 6 Bit 6
Bit 7 Bit 7
Cyclic Send 2/9 with four words (eight bytes) Cyclic Send 2/3 with one word (two bytes)
for up to four analog values for one analog value
Basic type 1 (for BU 2) Basic type 2 (for BU 1 and BU 2)
Cyclic Send 2/9 Cyclic Send 2/9
Byte 2/3 Byte 2/3

Byte 4/5 to to
DP DP
Byte 6/7 PROFIBUS DP PROFIBUS DP
Byte 8/9
Fig. 6-13: Schematic of the "Cyclic Send" function blocks
SIMOCODE pro
6-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Outputs
Cyclic Services
Cyclic Send Data is exchanged once in every DP cycle between the DP
master and the DP slave. The DP master sends the Cyclic Control Data to
SIMOCODE pro. In response, SIMOCODE pro sends the Cyclic Send Data
to the DP master.
Settings
Cyclic Send Data Description
Byte 0 to 1 Control of the bits with any signals

Bit 0 to bit 7 (any sockets
Basic types 1*, 2 e.g. Device Inputs, Send Data, etc.)
Byte 2/3 Control of one word (two bytes) with any analog values
Basic types 1*, 2 (any sockets
e.g. Maximum Current Imax, remaining Cooling Time, actual value
of timers, etc.)
Byte 4/5, 6/7, 8/9 Control of four words (eight bytes) with any analog values
Basic type 1* (any sockets )
Table 6-6: Cyclic Send Data settings
*) For Basic Unit 2 only
Byte 0 of the Send Data is already preset. Byte 2/3 is preset with the Max.
Current Imax!
See also Chapter 12.3 "Telegram Description and Data Access".
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 6-17
Outputs
6.7 Acyclic Send

Description
In addition to "Cyclic Send" it is also possible to transfer a further 16 bit of
binary information to the PLC/PC via Acyclic Services.
The "Acyclic Send" function blocks allow you to specify the information to be
acyclically transferred to the automation system via PROFIBUS DP. The
Inputs (plugs) of the function blocks must be connected to the respective
sockets.
The "Ayclic Send" function blocks consist of
• eight bits each (= two bytes, byte 0 and byte 1 for binary information)
• one output to PROFIBUS DP each.
In total there are
• two "Acyclic Send" function blocks on BU 1 and BU 2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Acyclic Send" function blocks:
Byte 0 Acyclic Send 0 Byte 1 Acyclic Send 1

Bit 0 Bit 0
Bit 1 Bit 1
Bit 2 Bit 2
Bit 3 DP
Bit 3 DP
to PROFIBUS DP to PROFIBUS DP
Bit 4 Bit 4
Bit 5 Bit 5
Bit 6 Bit 6
Bit 7 Bit 7
Fig. 6-14: Schematic of the "Acyclic Send" function blocks
Acyclic Services
Acyclic Send Data will only be transferred on request.
The information (two bytes) can be found in
Chapter B.18 "Data Record 203 - Acyclic Send".
This data record can be read by every master (PLC or PC) that supports the
Acyclic Services of PROFIBUS DPV1.
Settings
Acyclic Send Data Description
Byte 0 to 1 Control of bits with any signals

Bit 0 to bit 7 (any sockets , e.g. device inputs, Send Data, status information,
events, etc.)
Table 6-7: Acyclic Send Data settings
SIMOCODE pro
6-18 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Inputs 7
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information on the Inputs of SIMOCODE pro.
The Inputs are:
• Binary Inputs on the Basic Units and Digital Modules
• Operator Panel Buttons
• Temperature Module Inputs
• Analog Module Inputs
• Control Data from PROFIBUS DP.
Target groups
• Planners.
Necessary knowledge
• The principle of connecting plugs to sockets.
Navigation in
SIMOCODE ES
Device parameters > Inputs.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 7-1
Inputs
7.1 Introduction
Description
SIMOCODE pro has various Inputs. These are represented by the different
function blocks in SIMOCODE pro. These function blocks are the ingoing
SIMOCODE pro interfaces. Within SIMOCODE pro, these inputs are
represented as sockets on the corresponding function blocks and can be
assigned via connections to any functions. Inputs can be:
• Input Terminals , located on the outside of the Basic Units and Digital
Modules
• Buttons on the Operator Panel (one Test/Reset button, four freely-
parameterizable buttons), and Basic Units (one Test/Reset button)
• Temperature Module Inputs
• Analog Module Inputs
• Inputs from PROFIBUS DP (Cyclic and Acyclic).
Schematic
The following schematic shows a general representation of the Input types:
SIMOCODE pro
Input terminals Input Sockets
SIMOCODE pro
Buttons
- Control commands Input Sockets
- TEST/RESET
SIMOCODE pro
PROFIBUS DP DP Input Sockets
Fig. 7-1: General representation of the Input types
SIMOCODE pro
7-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Inputs

Inputs are used, for example, to input external signals e.g. via pushbuttons,
key-operated switches, etc. These external signals are processed further
internally via appropriate connections. The system has different Inputs
depending upon the device series:
SIMOCODE
Inputs pro C (BU 1) pro V (BU 2)
Basic Unit Inputs (BU Inputs) ✓ ✓

Operator Panel Buttons (OP Buttons) ✓ ✓
Digital Module 1 Inputs (DM1 Inputs) — ✓
Digital Module 2 Inputs (DM2 Inputs) — ✓
Temperature Module Inputs (TM Inputs) — ✓
Analog Module Inputs (AM Inputs) — ✓
Acyclic Receive (Acycl. Receive) ✓ ✓
Cyclic Receive (Cycl. Receive) ✓ ✓
Table 7-1: Inputs
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 7-3
Inputs
7.2 Basic Unit Inputs

Description
SIMOCODE pro has a "BU Inputs" function block with four binary inputs with
common potential. You can connect, e.g., the buttons for a Local Control
Station to the Inputs. These signals can be used for further processing in
SIMOCODE pro by internally connecting the sockets of the "BU Inputs"
function block.
The "BU Inputs" function block consists of:
• Input Terminals located on the outside of the Basic Unit, corresponding
to the sockets "BU Input 1" to "BU Input 4"
• Sockets in SIMOCODE pro that can be connected to any plugs, e.g. to the
"Control Stations" function block
• A socket for the "TEST/RESET" button:
The function of the "TEST/RESET" button is generally dependent upon the
operating status of the device:
- Reset function for the acknowledgement of any pending faults
- Test function for carrying out device tests.
In addition, other functions can be assigned to the "TEST/RESET" button (e.g.
operation of the Memory Module and the addressing plug).
For this, see also Chapter 10.2 "Test/Reset".
Overall, there is
– 1 "BU Inputs" function block on BU 1 and BU 2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "BU Inputs" function block:
Basic Unit (BU)

Terminal BU Inputs
Numbers 8
IN1 1
9
IN2 2
10
IN3 3
4
IN4 4
5
Button
TEST/RESET BU Test/Reset Button
Fig. 7-2: Schematic of the "BU Inputs" function block
SIMOCODE pro
7-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Inputs
The Inputs can be used, for example, for connecting the Start and Stop
Buttons of the Local Control Station, which can then be assigned to the
"Local-Control Station" function block.
If assigned accordingly, the input signals can also be used to activate
function blocks such as "Reset" or "External Fault".
Supplying the Inputs

See Chapter 13.2.1 "Basic Units, Expansion Modules and Decoupling
Module".
Settings
Basic unit Description
Delay You can set a delay time for the Inputs, if required.
Inputs Range: 6, 16, 26, 36 ms
Table 7-2: Settings for "Basic Unit Inputs"
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 7-5
Inputs
7.3 Operator Panel Buttons

Description
The operator panel contains buttons 1 to 4 and the
"TEST/RESET" button. Correspondingly, the "OP Buttons" function block is
available in SIMOCODE pro with five sockets.
Note
The "OP Buttons" function block can only be used if the operator panel (OP)
is connected and configured in the device configuration!
Note
The operator panel with display does not have a Test/reset button. The
allocated functions can be carried out via the operator panel menu or via
softkeys. Similarly, the corresponding status signal will then be available at
the OP Test/Reset button socket.
• Operator panel, buttons 1 to 4:

Buttons 1 to 4 are usually used to input control commands for the motor
feeder. Control commands can be, for example:
- Motor ON (on >), Motor OFF (off) for a direct starter
- Motor LEFT (on<), Motor OFF (off), Motor RIGHT (on >) for a reversing
starter
- Motor SLOW (on >), Motor FAST (on >>), Motor OFF (off) for a Dahlander
circuit.
However, the buttons 1 to 4 are not rigidly assigned to the above mentioned
control commands, and can be assigned to other functions via different
internal connection of the respective function block socket in
SIMOCODE pro.
• Operator panel, "TEST/RESET" button:
The function of the "TEST/RESET" button is generally assigned to fixed
functions:
- Reset function for the acknowledgement of pending faults
- Test function for carrying out device tests.
- Operation of the memory module or the addressing plug
Nevertheless, the status of the "TEST/RESET" button can be read from the
corresponding socket of the function block and can be assigned to further
functions in SIMOCODE pro.
See also Chapter 10.2 "Test/Reset",Chapter 14.2.2 "Setting the PROFIBUS DP
Address" and Chapter 14.3.2 "Securing and Saving Parameters".
SIMOCODE pro
7-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Inputs
Operator panel buttons

The following diagram shows the front view of the operator panel and
buttons:
Button 1 Button 2 Button 3 Button 4 Button "TEST/RESET"
TEST/
RESET
Fig. 7-3: Operator panel buttons
Buttons on the operator panel with display

The following diagram shows the front view of the operator panel with
display and buttons:
Button 1
Button 2
Button 3
Button 4
Fig. 7-4: Buttons on the operator panel with display for SIMOCODE pro V
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 7-7
Inputs
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "OP Buttons" function block:
Button 1 OP buttons OP - Button 1
Button 2 OP - Button 2
TEST/RESET 1) OP - Test/Reset Button

Button
Fig. 7-5: Schematic of the "OP Buttons" function block

1) Operable via the menu on the operator panel with display
SIMOCODE pro
7-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Inputs
7.4 Digital Module Inputs

Description
SIMOCODE pro has two "DM Inputs" function blocks, each with 4 grouped
Binary Inputs with common potential. You can connect e.g. the buttons for a
Local Control Station to the inputs. These signals can be further processed
in SIMOCODE pro by internally wiring the sockets of the "DM Inputs"
function blocks.
Note
The "DM Inputs" function blocks can only be used if the respective Digital
Module (DM) is connected and configured in the device configuration!
Each "DM Inputs" function block consists of

• Input Terminals located on the outside of the Digital Module,
corresponding to the sockets "DM Input 1" to "DM Input 4"
• Sockets in SIMOCODE pro that can be connected to any plugs, e.g. to the
"Control Stations" function block.
Overall, there is
– one "DM1 Inputs" and "DM2 Inputs" function block for BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "DM1/DM2 Inputs" function blocks:
Digital Module (DM) Digital Module (DM)

Terminal DM1 Inputs DM2 Inputs
Numbers 25 25
IN1 1 IN1 1
23 23
IN2 2 IN2 2
24 24
IN3 3 IN3 3
26 26
IN4 4 IN4 4
27 27
Fig. 7-6: Schematic of the "DM1/DM2 Inputs" function blocks
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 7-9
Inputs
Digital Modules allow the number of Binary Inputs and Outputs on Basic
Unit 2 to be increased in increments.
SIMOCODE pro V can thus be extended to a maximum of twelve Binary
Inputs and seven Binary Outputs. By allocating accordingly, Input Signals
can be used to activate, for example, function blocks such as "Reset" or
"External Fault". An external fault can be, for example, the Binary Signal of
an External Overspeed Monitor, signaling that the Nominal Speed of a motor
has been undershot.
Supplying the Inputs

See Chapter 1.7.7 "Expansion Modules for the SIMOCODE pro V Device
Series".
Settings
Basic Unit Description
Delay Time If required, you can set a Delay Time for the Inputs.
Inputs Range: 6, 16, 26, 36 ms
These values are valid for Digital Modules with a 24 V DC Input
Supply.
For Digital Modules with a 110 to 240 V AC/DC Input Supply, the
values are approx. 40 ms higher.
Table 7-3: "DM1/DM2 Inputs" settings
SIMOCODE pro
7-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Inputs
7.5 Temperature Module Inputs

Description
SIMOCODE pro has a "TM Inputs" function block with three analog sockets
corresponding to the three Sensor Measuring Circuits of the Temperature
Module. The temperature (in K) of the three Measuring Circuits can be read
from these sockets and processed internally. An additional analog socket
always supplies the Maximum Temperature of all three Measured
Temperatures. Furthermore, the two binary sockets of the function block
represent the status of the Sensor Measuring Circuits. The temperatures
can be processed internally and/or transmitted to the automation system via
the "Cyclic Send" function block.
Note
The "TM Inputs" function block can only be used if the Temperature Module
(TM) has been connected and configured in the device configuration!
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "TM Inputs" function block:
Inputs: TM Inputs
R PT/KTY
50 1T3
Max. Temperature
51 2T3
Sensor Type Temperature 1
1 2 u Range:
52 3T3 Temperature 2 0 ... 65535 K
Response at Sensor Fault/
R NTC 53 1T2 Out of Range Temperature 3
54 2T2
Number of Act. Sensors Event
1 2 u 55 3T2
- Sensor Fault
56 T1 - Out of Range
Terminal
Numbers 57 T1
Fig. 7-7: Schematic of the "TM Inputs" function block
Notes on wiring
You can connect up to three 2-wire or 3-wire Temperature Sensors. You will
find further information in Chapter 13.3 "Wiring".
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 7-11
Inputs
Among other things, you can monitor the following motor components:
• Motor windings
• Motor bearings
• Motor coolant temperature
• Motor gearbox oil temperature.
The individual temperatures of the three Sensor Measuring Circuits can be
monitored independently of each other by connecting free Limit Monitors.
Settings
Temperature Module Description
Sensor Type PT100, PT1000, KTY83, KTY84, NTC
Response 1) at Sensor Fault / Deactivated, Signaling, Warning, Tripping

Out of Range
Number of Active Sensors 1 sensor, 2 sensors, 3 sensors
Table 7-4: Temperature Module Input settings
1)
Response Sensor Fault / Out of Range
Deactivated X
Signaling X
Warning X
Tripping X
Delay -
Table 7-5: "Sensor Fault / Out of Range" response

Information".
SIMOCODE pro
7-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Inputs
7.6 Analog Module Inputs

Description
SIMOCODE pro has an "AM Inputs" function block with two analog sockets,
corresponding to the two Analog Inputs of the Analog Module. The effective
analog value of each Input can be read from these sockets and processed
internally. An additional binary socket of the function block represents the
status of the Sensor Measuring Circuits. The analog values can be
processed internally and/or transmitted cyclically to the automation system
via the "Cyclic Send" function blocks.
Note
The "AM Inputs" function block can only be used if the respective analog
module (AM) has been connected and configured in the device
configuration!
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "AM Inputs" function block:
AM Inputs
Inputs:
30 IN1+ Input Signal
31 IN2+ Response at Input 1 Range:

Open Circuit Input 2 0 ... 27648
33 IN1-
Terminal Active Inputs Event
Numbers 34 IN2- Open Circuit
Fig. 7-8: Schematic of the "AM Inputs" function block
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 7-13
Inputs
Typical applications are e.g.:
• Fill-level monitoring for implementing dry running protection for pumps
• Monitoring of pollution in a filter using a differential pressure transducer.
Settings
Analog Module Description
Input Signal 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA
Response at Open Circuit Signaling, Warning, Tripping
Active Inputs 1 input, 2 inputs
Table 7-6: Settings for Analog Module Inputs
Note
Note
The value of the Analog Module Inputs is in S7 format.
Notice
The Inputs of the Analog Module are passive inputs, i.e. to configure an
Analog Input Circuit, each Input will require an additional, potential-free
external current source connected in series. If the Output of the Analog
Module is not being used by another application, it can be used as current
source for an Input Circuit of the Analog Module. The "Start Value of Value
Range" and the "End Value of Value Range" of the Analog Module Output
have to be set to 65535 for this. Thus, the maximum possible current will
always be available via the Analog Module Output.
SIMOCODE pro
7-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Inputs
7.7 Cyclic Receive

Description
With the "Cyclic Receive" function block, you can specify which Cyclic Data
from the automation system will be further processed via PROFIBUS DP in
SIMOCODE pro. These will normally be PLC/PCS binary control commands.
Connection with the "Control Stations" function block in SIMOCODE pro will
allow the motor to be controllable via PROFIBUS DP. Direct connection of
the analog value with the "AM Output" function block will result in, for
example, the Cyclic Output of the value sent via PROFIBUS at the Output of
the Analog Module.
The "Cyclic Receive" function blocks consist of:
• Eight bits each (= two bytes, byte 0 and byte 1 for binary information)
• One word (= two bytes, byte 2 to 3 for an analog value, freely
programmable) for basic type 1
• One input each from PROFIBUS DP.
Overall, there are
– three "Cyclic Receive" function blocks (0, 1, 2/3).
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Cyclic Receive" function blocks:
Cyclic Receive 0 Cyclic Receive 1

Byte 0 Byte 1
Bit 0 Bit 0
Bit 1 Bit 1
Bit 2 Bit 2
DP From PROFIBUS DP Bit 3 DP From PROFIBUS DP Bit 3
Bit 4 Bit 4
Bit 5 Bit 5
Bit 6 Bit 6
Bit 7 Bit 7
Cyclic Receive 2/3 1)

DP Byte 2/3
Analog Value
1) BU2 with basic type 1 only
Fig. 7-9: Schematic of the "Cyclic Receive" function blocks
Cyclic Services
The Cyclic Data is exchanged between DP master and DP slave once every
DP cycle. The DP master sends the Cyclic Receive Data (Cyclic Receive) to
SIMOCODE pro each time. SIMOCODE pro responds by sending the Cyclic
Send Data (Cyclic Send) to the DP master.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 7-15
Inputs
7.8 Acyclic Receive

Description
In addition to "Cyclic Receive", it is possible to transfer further data
acyclically to SIMOCODE pro via PROFIBUS DP.
With the "Acyclic Receive" function block, you can specify which acyclic
information from PROFIBUS DP will be further processed in
SIMOCODE pro. For this, simply connect the sockets of the "Acyclic
Receive" function block to any other function blocks in SIMOCODE pro.
The "Acyclic Receive" function blocks consist of:
• Eight bits each (= two bytes, byte 0 and byte 1 for binary information)
• One word (= 2 bytes, byte 2 to 3 for an analog value, freely
parameterizable)
• One Input each from PROFIBUS DP.
Overall, there are
• three "Acyclic Receive" function blocks (0, 1, 2/3).
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Acyclic Receive" function blocks:
Acyclic Receive 0 Acyclic Receive 1

Byte 0 Byte 1
Bit 0 Bit 0
Bit 1 Bit 1
Bit 2 Bit 2
DP From PROFIBUS DP Bit 3 DP From PROFIBUS DP Bit 3
Bit 4 Bit 4
Bit 5 Bit 5
Bit 6 Bit 6
Bit 7 Bit 7
Acyclic Receive 2/3 1)

DP Byte 2/3
Analog Value
1) BU2 with basic type 1 only
Fig. 7-10: Schematic of the "Acyclic Receive" function blocks
Acyclic Services
Acyclic Data is only transferred on request.
The information (4 bytes) can be found in data record 202.
This data record can be read by every master (PLC or PC) that supports the
Acyclic Services of PROFIBUS DPV1. Connection monitoring is activated
every time the data set is received. The content of the data set is deleted
after a 5-second time-out has elapsed.
SIMOCODE pro
7-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Analog Value Recording 8
In this chapter
This chapter provides information regarding the possibility of recording the
measured curves of different measured values, e.g. the motor current when
the motor is running, using SIMOCODE pro V.
The increasing wear on the motor and the equipment driven by the motor all
cause the motor current to change over time. By recording the motor
current at different points in time and making direct comparisons,
conclusions can be drawn regarding the condition of the motor and the
equipment.
Target groups
• Configurators
• Programmers
• Commissioners
• Service personnel.
Necessary knowledge
• SIMOCODE pro
• Motor protection, motor control
Device parameters > Analog Value Recording.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 8-1
Analog Value Recording
Description
The "Analog Value Recording" function block can be used to record various
analog values (2 bytes/1word) in SIMOCODE pro over a set period of time.
For example, you can use this function block to record the characteristic
curve of the motor current when the motor is started.
Recording is carried out directly in SIMOCODE pro on the basis of the motor
feeder and independently of PROFIBUS or the automation system. Every
analog value present at the "Allocated Analog Value" analog socket is
recorded and saved. The recording starts on the basis of the edge (positive/
negative) via any binary signal at the Trigger Input of the function block. Up
to 60 values can be saved internally in the device. The time frame of the
recording is indirectly determined by the selected sampling rate:
Sampling time = sampling rate[s] x 60 values.
The Pre-trigger can be used to specify how far in advance the recording
should commence before the Trigger Signal is issued. The Pre-trigger is set
as a percentage of the entire Sampling Time. In addition, with
SIMOCODE ES you can also export the measured curve into a *.csv file for
further processing, for example, in MS Excel.
Functional principle
$OORFDWHGDQDORJYDOXH
HJPRWRUFXUUHQW,PD[>@
WLPH
3UHWULJJHU>@ 6DPSOLQJUDWH>V@
6DPSOLQJWLPH 6DPSOLQJUDWH>V@

7ULJJHULQSXW 7ULJJHUHGJH SRVLWLYH

WLPH
Fig. 8-1: Functional principle of the Analog Value Recording
The old measured curve will be overwritten in SIMOCODE pro each time a
new Trigger Signal is sent to the Trigger Input.
SIMOCODE pro
8-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Analog Value Recording (Record)"
function block:
Record
Trigger Input
Trigger Edge
Assigned
Analog Value Sampling Rate
Pre-trigger
Fig. 8-2: Schematic of the "Analog Value Recording" function block
Settings
Signal/Value Range
Trigger Input The Analog Value Recording starts when

any signal is issued
(arbitrary sockets ,
e.g. Device Inputs, Motor Current Flowing)
Allocated Analog Value Any value (1 word / 2 byte) in

SIMOCODE pro
Trigger Edge Positive/negative
Sampling Rate 0.1 to 50 s in 0.1-s increments
Pre-trigger 0 to 100% in 5% increments
Table 8-1: "Analog Value Recording" settings
Application example
Motor Current Recording when the motor starts/Sampling Time = 12 s/Pre-
trigger = 25% (3 s):
Record
Motor Current Flowing Trigger Edge

Positive
0.2 s Sampling Rate

Max. Current I_max
25%
Pre-trigger
Fig. 8-3: Application example of the Analog Value Recording
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 8-3
SIMOCODE pro
8-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
3UF50 Compatibility Mode 9
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information on the 3UF50 compatibility mode.
Target groups
• Configurators
Necessary knowledge
• knowledge about PROFIBUS DP.
Device Parameters > 3UF50 Compatibility Mode.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 9-1
3UF50 Compatibility Mode
Description
The 3UF50 compatibility mode is applied when a SIMOCODE-DP device is
to be replaced by a SIMOCODE pro device without changing the
configuration.
In the 3UF50 compatibility mode you can operate a SIMOCODE pro-V basic
unit 2 with a 3UF50 configuration.
In this case, the communication using SIMOCODE pro behaves the same as
communication using SIMOCODE-DP from the point of view of the PLC
(Master class 1).
SIMOCODE-DP supports cyclic communication (basic types 1-3), diagnosis
as well as DPV1 data records (DR 130, DS 131, DS 133).

In order for the technical functions (parameterization) of SIMOCODE-DP to
be integrated into the technical functions of SIMOCODE pro V, the device
parameters must be adjusted accordingly. The "Win-SIMOCODE-DP
Converter" software supports you in this process. This software enables you
to convert the parameter files (smc files) created with Win-SIMOCODE-DP
into SIMOCODE ES parameter files (sdp files).
Safety information
Notice
Communication with a DP-Master (Master class 2), e.g. with the Win-
SIMOCODE-DP Professional software via PROFIBUS DP, is not covered by
the 3UF50 compatibility mode.
Notice
In the 3UF50 compatibility mode, the start-up parameter block is always set,
i.e. the transmission of the device parameters created using SIMOCODE-
DP-GSD or the object manager SIMOCODE-DP cannot be integrated into
SIMOCODE pro V.
Notice
The 3UF50 compatibility mode supports SIMOCODE-DP projects in which
SIMCODE-DP is integrated via GSD SIEM8031.gs?, SIEM8069.gs? or via the
object manager (OM) SIMOCODE DP.
SIMOCODE pro
9-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Diagram of Send and Receive Data

The following table shows the Send and Receive Data in compatibility
mode:
Receive
Basic type 1 Basic type 1 Basic type 2 Basic type 2 Basic type 3 Basic type 3
SIMOCODE- SIMOCODE SIMOCODE- SIMOCODE SIMOCODE- SIMOCODE
DP pro V DP pro V DP pro V
0 Cyclic Receive - 0 Cyclic Receive - 0 Cyclic Receive -
1 bit 0. . 1.7 1 bit 0. . 1.7 1 bit 0 1.7 1.7
Receive Data Receive Data Receive Data
2 Not supported 2 Not supported 2 Not supported
3 3 3
Table 9-1: "Receive" configuration
Send
Basic type 1 Basic type 1 Basic type 2 Basic type 2 Basic type 3 Basic type 3
SIMOCODE- SIMOCODE SIMOCODE- SIMOCODE SIMOCODE- SIMOCODE
DP pro V DP pro V DP pro V
0 Cyclic Send 0 Cyclic Send 0 Cyclic Send
1 Send Data Bit[0.0] 1.7 1.7 1 Send Data Bit[0.0] 1.7 1.7 1 Bit[0.0] 1.7 1.7
Send Data
2 Specified: Max. 2 Specified: Max. 2 Acycl. Send
Motor current Current I_max Motor current Current I_max Bit[0.0] 1.7 1.7
3 3 3
4 Number of Number of Starts
5 Starts (Bytes 0 - 3)
6
7 Value Counter 1
8 Counter 1 Actual Value
9 Value Counter 2
10 Counter 2 Actual Value
11 Value Sensor TM - Max.

Temperature
Table 9-2: "Send" configuration
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 9-3
Diagram of the Diagnosis Data

The following table shows the Diagnosis Data in the 3UF50-compatibility
mode:
Byte Setup 3UF50 - Device-specific Byte Setup 3UF50 - Device-specific Equivalent in SIMOCODE pro V
Bit diagnosis acc. to DP standard Bit diagnosis acc. to
SIMOCODE-DP DPV1 SIMOCODE-DP
6 0x0B
7 0x81
8 0x04 Same as 3UF50 diagnosis
6 0x0E 9 0x00
7.0 Free 10.0 Free
7.1 Event: DP block 10.1 Event: DP block Event - Start-up Parameter
Block Active
7.2 Event: Emergency Start 10.2 Event: Emergency Start Status - Emergency Start Executed
7.3 Event: HW Test ok 10.3 Event: HW Test ok • No Fault - HW Fault Basic Unit
• No Fault - Module Fault
• No Fault - Temporary Components
7.4 Free 10.4 Free -
7.5 Event: Ext. Event 1 10.5 Event: Ext. Event 1 Event - Ext. Fault 5
7.6 Event: Ext. Event 2 10.6 Event: Ext. Event 2 Event - Ext. Fault 6
7.7 Event: Ext. Fault 3 10.7 Event: Ext. Event 3 -
8.0 Warning: Ext. Warning 11.0 Warning: Ext. Warning Warning - Ext. Fault 3
8.1 Warning: Unbalance > 40% 11.1 Warning: Unbalance > 40% Warning - Unbalance
8.2 Event: Failure PLC-CPU 11.2 Event: Failure PLC-CPU Status - PLC/PCS
8.3 Warning: Sensor Short Circuit 11.3 Warning: Sensor Short Circuit Warning - Thermistor Short Circuit
8.4 Event: Cooling Down Period 11.4 Event: Cooling Down Period Status - Cooling Down Period Active
Active Active
8.5 Status: TPF 11.5 Status: TPF Status - Test Position (TPF)
9.0 Warning: Earth Fault 12.0 Warning: Earth Fault • Warning - Int. Earth Fault
or
• Ext. Warning Earth Fault
9.1 Warning: Overload 12.1 Warning: Overload Warning - Overload
9.2 Warning: Overload + Unbalance 12.2 Warning: Overload + Unbalance Warning - Overload + Phase Failure
9.3 Warning: I1 Response Level 12.3 Warning: I1 Response Level Warning - Warning Level I>
Overshot Overshot
9.4 Warning: I1 Response Level 12.4 Warning: I1 Response Level Warning - Warning Level I<
Undershot Undershot
9.5 Warning: I2 Response Level 12.5 Warning: I2 Response Level -
Overshot Overshot
9.6 Warning: I2 Response Level 12.6 Warning: I2 Response Level -
Undershot Undershot
Table 9-3: Diagram of the Diagnosis Data in the 3UF50 compatibility mode
SIMOCODE pro
9-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
9.7 Warning: Thermistor 12.7 Warning: Thermistor • Warning - Thermistor Overload
• Warning - Thermistor Open Circuit
• Warning - TM Warning T>
• Warning - TM Sensor Fault
• Warning - TM Out of Range
10.0 Trip: Earth Fault 13.0 Trip: Earth Fault • Trip - Int. Earth Fault
or
• Trip - Ext. Earth Fault
10.1 Trip: Overload 13.1 Trip: Overload Trip - Overload
10.2 Trip: Overload + Unbalance 13.2 Trip: Overload + Unbalance Trip - Overload + Phase Failure
10.3 Trip: I1 Response Level Overshot 13.3 Trip: I1 Response Level Overshot Trip - Trip Level I>
10.4 Trip: I1 Response Level 13.4 Trip: I1 Response Level Trip - Trip Level I<
Undershot Undershot
10.5 Trip: I2 Response Level Overshot 13.5 Trip: I2 Response Level Overshot -
10.6 Trip: I2 Response Level 13.6 Trip: I2 Response Level -
Undershot Undershot
10.7 Trip: Thermistor 13.7 Trip: Thermistor • Trip - Thermistor Overload
• Trip - Thermistor Short Circuit
• Trip - Thermistor Open Circuit
• Trip - TM Trip T>
• Trip - TM Sensor Fault
• Trip - TM Out of Range
11.0 Trip: F ON 14.0 Trip: F ON Trip - Feedback ON
11.1 Trip: F OFF 14.1 Trip: F OFF Trip - Feedback OFF
11.2 Trip: Motor Blocked 14.2 Trip: Motor Blocked Trip - Stalled Rotor
11.3 Trip: Positioner Blocked 14.3 Trip: Positioner Blocked Trip - Stalled Positioner
11.4 Trip: Double 0 14.4 Trip: Double 0 Trip - Double 0
11.5 Trip: Double 1 14.5 Trip: Double 1 Trip - Double 1
11.6 Trip: End Position 14.6 Trip: End Position Trip - End Position
11.7 Trip: Antivalence 14.7 Trip: Antivalence Trip - Antivalence
12.0 Trip: ESB 15.0 Trip: ESB Trip - Ext. Fault 4
12.1 Trip: OPO 15.1 Trip: OPO Trip - Operational Protection OFF (OPO)
12.2 Trip: UVO 15.2 Trip: OPO Trip - Undervoltage (UVO)
12.3 Trip: Ext. Fault 1 15.3 Trip: Ext. Fault 1 Trip - Ext. Fault 1
12.4 Trip: Ext. Fault 2 15.4 Trip: Ext. Fault 2 Trip - Ext. Fault 2
12.5 Trip: TPF fault 15.5 Trip: TPF fault Trip - Cold Starting (TPF) Error
12.6 Trip: Runtime ON 15.6 Trip: Runtime ON Trip - Execution ON Command
12.7 Trip: Runtime OFF 15.7 Trip: Runtime OFF Trip - Execution STOP Command
13.0 Trip: Parameter Fault 0 16.0 Trip: Parameter Fault 0 Trip - Parameterization
13.1 Trip: Parameter Fault 1 16.1 Trip: Parameter Fault 1 -
13.4 Trip: Parameter Fault 4 16.4 Trip: Parameter Fault 4 Trip - Configuration Fault
Table 9-3: Diagram of the Diagnosis Data in the 3UF50 compatibility mode (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 9-5
13.7 Trip: Parameter Fault 7 16.7 Trip: Parameter Fault 7 Trip - HW Fault Basic Unit
14 - Number of Overload Trips Number of Overload Trips
15
16 - I of the Overload Trip [%/IE)] Last Trip Current
17
18 - Operating Hours [10h] Motor Operating Hours
19
Table 9-3: Diagram of the Diagnosis Data in the 3UF50 compatibility mode (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
9-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Standard Functions 10
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information about the standard functions stored
as function blocks in SIMOCODE pro. Standard functions are typical motor
functions that can be activated according to need and, as applicable,
individually set for each motor feeder.
Target groups
• Configurators
• Programmers of application programs for reference purposes.
Necessary knowledge
• Motor protection
• Control functions, Control Stations.
Further function blocks > Standard Functions.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 10-1
Standard Functions
10.1 Introduction
Description
So-called "Standard Functions" in the form of function blocks are also stored
in SIMOCODE pro, and can be used as required. These function blocks may
contain:
• Plugs ( )
• Sockets ( ) in the form of an event
• Setting values, e.g. the response when External Faults occur ("Signaling",
"Warning" or "Tripping").
Schematic
The following schematic shows the general representation of the function
block of a standard function:
Plug 1 - n Standard Function

Plug 1 - n
Plug 1 - n Setting Value
Fig. 10-1: General representation of the function block of a standard function

These function blocks work independently of the selected control function
and can be used as optional supplements. They are ready to be used and
only require activating by connecting the plug(s) of the respective function
block.
Depending on the device series, the system offers several different function
blocks for such standard functions:
SIMOCODE
Function Block pro C (BU 1) pro V (BU 2)
Test 2 2
Reset 3 3
Test Position Feedback (TPF) 1 1
External Fault 4 6
Operational Protection OFF (OPO) — 1
Power Failure Monitoring (UVO) — 1
Emergency Start 1 1
Watchdog (PLC/PCS Monitoring) 1 1
Timestamping — 1
Table 10-1: Function Blocks
SIMOCODE pro
10-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Standard Functions
10.2 Test/Reset
Test/Reset description
The function of the "TEST/RESET" button on the Basic Unit is generally
dependent upon the operating status of the device:
• Reset function: if a fault occurs
• Test function: in other operating states.
In addition to the TEST/RESET buttons, SIMOCODE pro allows internal Test/
Reset tripping via the "Test" function block. The "Test" function block consists
of:
• One plug.
Overall, there are:
• Two function blocks, "Test 1" and "Test 2", for BU1 and BU2, whereby each
function block has a slightly different function:
– Test 1: When testing/tripping the Output Relays
– Test 2: Without tripping the Output Relays (normally for testing via the bus).
Schematic
The following schematic shows a general representation of the "Test/Reset"
function blocks:
"Test/Reset" Function Blocks
Test 1
Test 1
Test 2
Test 2
Reset 1 Control Functions

Reset 1
Reset 2
Reset 2
Reset 3
Reset 3
BU "TEST/RESET" Button
Test/Reset - Button Blocked
OP "TEST/RESET" Button*
Fig. 10-2: "Test/Reset" function blocks
*) The Operator Panel with Display does not have a Test/Reset button. The
respective functions can be carried out via the Operator Panel menu or via
softkeys.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 10-3
Standard Functions
Testing
Testing can be carried out as follows:
• Via the "TEST/RESET" button on the Basic Unit and on the Operator Panel (can
be deactivated), as well as via PC with SIMOCODE ES software.
• Via the plugs of the internal "Test 1" or "Test 2" function blocks
• Via the menu of the Operator Panel with Display (e.g. the "Commands" menu
item).
Testing can be terminated at any time - it does not influence the Thermal
Motor Model / Overload Function, i.e. after switching off via TEST, the
system can be reset immediately.
Tripping only occurs for Test 1 when the operating mode is set to "Remote".
Reset Function
Resetting can be carried out as follows:
• Via the "TEST/RESET" button on the Basic Unit and on the Operator Panel (can
be deactivated), as well as via PC with SIMOCODE ES software.
• Via the "Reset Input" plug of the internal function blocks via the plugs of the
internal function blocks "Reset 1", "Reset 2" and "Reset 3".
• Via the menu of the Operator Panel with Display (e.g. the "Commands" menu
item).
The "Reset" function block consists of:
• One plug.
Overall, there are:
– Three function blocks, "Reset 1 to Reset 3" for BU1 and BU2.
All Reset Inputs (sockets) are equal (OR function).
Test Function:
A SIMOCODE pro function test can also be initialized via the test function.
The test function comprises the following steps:
• Lamp/LED test (test function < 2 s activated)
• Testing the device functionality (Test Function activated for 2 s - 5 s)
• For the "Test 1" function block only: switching off the QE (Test Function
activated for > 5 s).
SIMOCODE pro
10-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Standard Functions
Test Phases
The following table shows the test phases when the "TEST/RESET" button is
pressed longer:
Test Status Without Main Current With Main Current

Phase
O.K. Fault 1) O.K. Fault
Hardware Test / Lamp Test
"DEVICE" LED Oran. Green Oran. Green

< 2s
"GEN.FAULT" LED
Contactor Control Unchanged Unchanged Unchanged Unchanged
Show QL
Hardware Test / Lamp Test results
"DEVICE" LED Green Red Green Red

2s-5s
"GEN.FAULT" LED
Contactor Control Unchanged Deactivated Unchanged Deactivated
Relay Test

>5s
"GEN.FAULT" LED
Contactor Control Deactivated Deactivated Deactivated Deactivated
LED lit/activated LED flashing LED flickering LED off
*) "Fault" only displayed after 2 s
Table 10-2: The states of the Status LEDs / Contactor Controls during the test
Test settings
Test 1 to 2 Description
Input Activates the "Reset" function block

from any signal
(any sockets ,
e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Test/Reset Button The blue Test/Reset buttons on the Basic Unit and the Operator
Blocked Panel are usually intended for acknowledging faults and for carrying
out a device test.
The buttons can be locked via "Test/Reset Buttons Blocked". They
can then be used for other purposes. On the Operator Panel with
Display, blocking is carried out via the corresponding menu
function.
(Default: unblocked)
Table 10-3: Test settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 10-5
Standard Functions
Acknowledgement of faults
Generally, the following applies to the acknowledgement of faults:
• Faults can only be acknowledged
– If the cause of the fault has been eliminated
– If there is no "ON" control command pending.
• A reset will not be possible if the cause of the fault has not been eliminated
or if an "ON" control command is pending. The reset will be saved depending
on the type of fault. Saving a reset is indicated by the "GEN. FAULT" LED on
the Basic Unit and on the Control Panel. The LEDs change from flashing to
continuous signal.
Automatic acknowledgement of faults

Faults are automatically acknowledged in the following cases:
• A reset has been saved and the cause of the fault is no longer present (user
has previously acknowledged the fault)
• Auto-reset of Overload Tripping or Thermistor Tripping if Motor Protection
Reset = Auto (acknowledgement is automatic following expiration of the
Cooling Down Period). The motor cannot start immediately since resetting is
not possible if an ON command is pending.
• If a configured module fails, all related faults will be acknowledged
automatically. However, a configuration fault will be generated (exception:
Operator Panel, if parameterized accordingly). This ensures that a module
fault does not cause the General Fault to be acknowledged automatically.
• If a function or module is deactivated in the device configuration (via
parameterization), all related faults are acknowledged automatically (the
motor cannot start immediately since parameters cannot be entered if an ON
command is pending).
• If a function’s parameter is changed from "Tripping" to "Warning", "Signaling" or
"Deactivated", all related faults will be acknowledged automatically.
• For an external fault: with its own parameter: "Auto-Reset".
Reset settings
Reset 1 to 3 Description
Input Control of the "Reset" function block

from any signal
(any sockets ,
Test/Reset Button The blue Test/Reset buttons on the Basic Unit and on the Operator
Blocked Panel are intended for acknowledging faults and carrying out device
tests.
The buttons can be locked via "Test/Reset Buttons Blocked". These
can then be used for other purposes. On the Operator Panel with
Display, blocking is carried out via the menu (Default: unblocked).
Table 10-4: Reset settings
SIMOCODE pro
10-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Standard Functions
10.3 Test Position Feedback (TPF)

Description
You can carry out the "Cold Starting" function test using the "Test Position
Feedback (TPF)" function block. For this purpose, The Input (plug) of the
function block must be connected to the respective socket. The activated
test position will be indicated by the flashing QL of the control function.
The "Test Position Feedback (TPF)" function block consists of
• One plug
• One "Status - Test Position" socket.
This is set when a signal is issued at the Input.
• One "Trip - Test Position Feedback" socket.
This is set when
– "TPF" is activated although current is flowing in the main circuit
– "TPF" is activated and current is flowing in the main circuit.
Overall, there is
– One "Test Position Feedback" function block for BU1 and BU2.
Note
When the Test Position is enabled, the QLE/QLA sockets of the control
function are controlled through blinking, e.g. to indicate test operation of the
motor feeder via a blinking LED button.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Test Position Feedback" function block:
Status -
TPF Test Position
Input
Type Trip -
Test Position Feedback Fault
Fig. 10-3: "Test Position Feedback" function block
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 10-7
Standard Functions
Cold Starting
If the motor feeder is in the test position, its main circuit will be isolated
from the network. However, the control voltage will be connected.
The "Cold Starting" function test is carried out in this status. Cold starting
means the motor feeder is tested without a current in the main circuit.
To differentiate this function from normal operation, it must be enabled via
the socket on the function block.
Feedback stating that the motor feeder is isolated from the mains voltage
can result, for example, via an auxiliary contact of the main switch in the
motor feeder that is connected to any device input (terminal). This is then
internally connected to the "Test Position Feedback (TPF) - Input" plug of the
function block. When using Current/Voltage Measuring Modules, this type
of Auxiliary Contact is entirely unnecessary. The "TPF" function block can be
activated by monitoring for undervoltage ("Voltage Monitoring" function
block).
Thereafter, the Contactor Outputs can be set via the control stations
(see Chapter 4.1 "Control Stations"), enabling the current-free status to be
tested.
If current mistakenly flows during test operation, the Contactor Outputs are
switched off by "Trip - Test Position Feedback".
"Trip - Test Position Feedback (TPF)" fault message and acknowledgement
Notice
"Trip - Test Position Feedback (TPF)" will be generated if:
• "TPF" is activated, although current is flowing in the motor feeder
• "TPF" is activated and current is flowing in the motor feeder.
Acknowledge with "Reset".
Settings
Test Position Description

Feedback (TPF)
Input Control of the "Test Position Feedback (TPF)" function block with
any signal
(any sockets ,
e.g. device input)
Type Specification of the input logic

• NO contact (1-active)
• NC contact (0-active)
Table 10-5: Test Position Feedback (TPF) settings
SIMOCODE pro
10-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Standard Functions
10.4 External Fault

Description
The "External Faults 1-6" function blocks can be used to monitor any
statuses and/or external devices, to generate fault messages and, if
necessary, to switch off the motor. To do this, the Inputs (plugs) of the
"External Fault" function blocks must be connected to any sockets (e.g.
device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.). External faults can also
be "marked" in SIMOCODE pro. This facilitates their allocation to the actual
malfunction. Example: Monitoring the rotational speed of the motor using
an external rotational-speed monitor.
The "External Fault" function block consists of
• Two plugs (1 plug for setting, 1 plug for resetting)
• One "Event - External Fault" socket. This is set when a signal is pending at the
Input.
Overall, there are:
– Four "External Faults 1 to 4" function blocks for BU1
– Six "External Faults 1 to 6" function blocks for BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "External Fault" function blocks:
External Fault 1 External Fault 2

Input Input
Type Event - Type Event -
Ext. Fault 1 Ext. Fault 2
Activity Activity
Response Response
Reset Reset
Reset Reset
(Marking) (Marking)

Input Input
Activity Activity
Response Response
Reset Reset
Reset Reset
(Marking) (Marking)

Input Input
Activity Activity
Response Response
Reset Reset
Reset Reset
(Marking) (Marking)
Fig. 10-4: "External Fault" function blocks
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 10-9
Standard Functions
Special reset options:

A specific Reset Input is also available in addition to the other reset options
(Remote Reset, Test/Reset button, OFF Command-Reset). Furthermore,
Auto-Reset can also be activated.
See below.
Settings
External Fault Description

1 to 6
Input Control of the "External Fault" function block using the monitored
signal (any socket ,
Type Specification of the input logic:
Activity To specify in which motor operating state the External Fault is to be
evaluated:
• Always:
Always evaluate, regardless of whether the motor is running or at
a standstill.
• Only when the motor is ON:
Evaluation only when the motor is switched ON.
Response Specification of the response to an External Fault when activated
via the Input (see the following table and Chapter "Important
Information").
Reset Acknowledgment of the "External Fault" using any signal
(any sockets ,
Reset also by Specification of further (common) acknowledgement options using
additional reset types:
• Test/Reset buttons on the Basic Unit and on the Operator Panel
or, in the case of the Operator Panel with Display, via the menu
(Panel-Reset)
• Remote Reset: Acknowledgement via Reset 1-3, DPV1, "Reset"
command
• Auto-Reset: The trip resets itself after the cause has been
eliminated (after removal of the activation signal)
• Off Command-Reset: "OFF" control command, resets the fault.
Marking No parameters. Optional marking to designate the signal, e.g.
"Rotational Speed >", e.g. with SIMOCODE ES.
Range: up to 10 characters.
Table 10-6: External Fault settings
"External Fault" response
Response External Fault

Fault/tripping X
Warning X
Event X
Deactivated -
Table 10-7: "External Fault" response
SIMOCODE pro
10-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Standard Functions
10.5 Operational Protection OFF (OPO)

10.5.1 Response for Positioner Control Function
Description
The "Operational Protection OFF (OPO)" function block returns the Positioner
to a safe position. In order to do this, the input (plug) must be connected to
the respective socket (e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP,
etc.).
The "Operational Protection Off" function block consists of
• One plug
• One "Status - OPO" socket. This is set when a signal is pending at the Input.
• One "Trip - OPO Fault" socket. This is set when the respective, safe end
position has been reached.
In total there is:
– One "Operational Protection Off (OPO)" function block for BU2.
The following table shows the general functionality:
OPO Initial position when OPO is pending
Positioner Positioner Positioner Positioner Positioner

is Open Runs in Open Stop/OFF Runs in Close is Closed
Direction Direction
Reaction to OPO
Parameterized Fault Fault Fault - -

response Reset: Reset: Reset:
"Positioner with Close with Close with Close
Closing" Command Command Command
Runs in Close Runs in Close Runs in Close Runs in Close

Direction Direction Direction Direction
Parameterized - - Fault Fault Fault
"Pos. Opening" Reset: Reset: Reset:
response with Open with Open with Open
Command Command Command
Runs in Open Runs in Open Runs in Open Runs in Open

Direction Direction Direction Direction
Table 10-8: General functionality of Operational Protection Off (OPO) for "Positioner" control function
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Operational Protection Off (OPO)"
function block:
Operational Protection Status -

OFF (OPO) Operational Protection OFF (OPO)
Input
Reaction Positioner
Trip -
Type
Operational Protection OFF (OPO)
Fig. 10-5: "Operational Protection OFF (OPO)" function block
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 10-11
Standard Functions
Settings
Operational Description
Protection OFF
(OPO)
Input Control of the "Operational Protection OFF" function block using the
monitored signal (any socket ,
e.g. device inputs, etc.)
Positioner Specification of the response for the "Positioner" control function

response when activated via the Input:
• CLOSED: Positioner moves to the "Closed"end position
• OPEN: Positioner runs in the "Open" end position.
Type Specification of the input logic

Table 10-9: Settings Operational Protection OFF
Safety information
Note
A "Trip - Operational Protection OFF (OPO)" fault message is not generated if
the "OPO" command attempts to run the Positioner to the end position in
which it is already in, or to which it is heading.
Note
No other control command (counter command or stop command) is carried
out while "Operational Protection OFF (OPO)" is active.
Note
The "Trip - Operation Protection Off (OPO)" fault message must be
acknowledged using the open or closed control command, depending on
the present "OPO" end position.
Note
Acknowledgement is carried out even if the desired end position has not yet
been reached.
Note
The fault message is available as diagnosis via PROFIBUS DP.
SIMOCODE pro
10-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Standard Functions
10.5.2 Response to other Control Functions
Description
For other control functions, the following scenarios can be differentiated
between for OPO:
• Motor in operation: The motor is switched off with a "Trip - Operational
Protection OFF (OPO)" fault.
• The motor is off. Initially no fault. The "Trip - Operational Protection OFF
(OPO)" fault only occurs when an "ON Command" is issued.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 10-13
Standard Functions
10.6 Power Failure Monitoring (UVO)

Description
The "Power Failure Monitoring (UVO)" function block is activated via the
plug. This is carried out via an External Voltage Relay that is connected to
the function block via the Binary Inputs of SIMOCODE pro.
Process (see process diagram below).
1) All Contactors (QE) are immediately deactivated after response by the
Monitoring Relay / Activation of the Input (UVO).
2) The motor will be switched back to its previous status if the voltage returns
within the "Power Failure Time". This can either take place immediately or can
be additionally delayed (Restart Time Delay).
3) If the "Power Failure Time" expires before the voltage returns, the device
signals a fault (UVO fault):
Prerequisite: The SIMOCODE pro control voltage is buffered and not
interrupted.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Power Failure Monitoring (UVO)"
function block
UVO
Trip -
Power Failure (UVO)
Input* Type
Power Failure Time
*Activation
Restart Time Delay External Power Failure Monitoring
Fig. 10-6: Schematic of the "Power Failure Monitoring (UVO)" function block
1)
UVO
t
Power Failure Power Failure
2) Time Time
QE
3)
Trip Trip
Fig. 10-7: Power Failure Monitoring (UVO) process diagram
SIMOCODE pro
10-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Standard Functions
Settings
Power Failure Description

Monitoring (UVO)
Input Control of the "Power Failure Monitoring" function block using the
monitored signal
(any socket ,
Type Specification of the type of power failure monitoring:

• Deactivated
• Service supply is not interrupted.
The control voltage from SIMOCODE pro remains constant.
The interruption of the mains voltage must be measured, for
example, by a separate Voltage Relay.
Power Failure Time Start time after power failure.

If the mains voltage returns within the Power Failure Time, all the
drives that were connected before the power failure are
automatically reconnected.
If the mains voltage does not return within this time period, the
drives remain disconnected and the "Trip - Power Failure (UVO)"
fault message is generated.
Once the mains voltage has returned, the fault message can be
acknowledged using "Reset".
Range: 0 to 25.5 seconds.
Restart Time Delay The Restart Time Delay can be set so that not all motors restart
(staggered) simultaneously (the mains voltage would otherwise breakdown
again).
Range: 0 to 255 seconds.
Table 10-10: Power Failure Monitoring settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 10-15
Standard Functions
10.7 Emergency Start

Description
The Emergency Start deletes the Thermal Memory from SIMOCODE pro
each time it is activated. This enables immediate Restarting of the motor
after an Overload Trip. This function can be used to:
– Enable a Reset and start up the motor again immediately after an Overload
Trip
– Delete the Thermal Memory (Motor Model) during operation, if required.
Caution
If Emergency Starts are carried out too frequently, Thermal Overloading of
the motor could result!
Since the Emergency Start is edge-triggered, this function cannot

permanently affect the Thermal Motor Model.
An Emergency Start is carried out as follows:
• Via the plug of the function block. To do this, the Input (plug) of the function
block must be connected to any socket (e.g. device inputs, control bits from
PROFIBUS DP, etc.).
The "Emergency Start" function block consists of:
• One plug
• One "Status - Emergency Start Executed" socket. This is set when the
Emergency Start is carried out.
Overall, there is:
– One "Emergency Start" function block for BU1 and BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Emergency Start" function block:
Status -
Emergency Start Emergency Start
Executed 1)
Input
1) The "Emergency Start Executed" signal is triggered by the Edge (Input) and reset
when the current flows.
Fig. 10-8: Function block "Emergency Start"
Settings
Emergency Start Description
Input Control of the "Emergency Start" function block from any signal
(any sockets ,
Table 10-11: Emergency Start settings
SIMOCODE pro
10-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Standard Functions
10.8 Watchdog (Bus Monitoring, PLC/PCS Monitoring)

Description
The "Watchdog" function block monitors communication with the PLC via
PROFIBUS DP, as well as the operating state of the PLC in the "Remote"
operating mode.
Schematic
Bus Monitoring:
With this type of monitoring, the "Trip - Bus" fault is generated if
• "Bus Monitoring" is active
• When, in the "Remote" operating mode (mode selector S1=1 and S2=1), the
Cyclic Data transfer between the PLC and SIMOCODE pro is interrupted, e.g.
by the PROFIBUS DP connection being interrupted.
• "Status - Bus o.k." can always be evaluated. If SIMOCODE pro is cyclically
exchanging data with the PLC,
"Status - Bus o.k." is set to "1"-
PLC/PCS Monitoring:
With this type of monitoring, "Trip - PLC/PCS" is generated if
• "PLC/PCS Monitoring" is activated.
• The PROFIBUS DP switches to "CLEAR" status when in the "Remote"
operating mode (mode selector S1=1 and S2=1).
• The "Status - PLC/PCS in Run" can always be evaluated. If the PROFIBUS DP
is in the "CLEAR" status, the "Status - PLC/PCS in Run" is set to "0".
If the "PLC/PCS Monitoring - Input" is connected primarily to the "Cyclic
Receive - Bit 0.7" bit, the status of the PLC is deduced from this bit only.
Watchdog
(PLC/PCS Monitoring)
Bus/PLC-Fault - Reset
Cyclic Communication Status - PLC/PCS in Run
Bus Monitoring Status - Bus o.k. (bus is active)
Trip - Bus
PLC/PCS Monitoring
Trip - PLC/PCS
PLC/PCS Monitoring - Input Bus Response
(level sensitive)
Fig. 10-9: "Watchdog (PLC/PCS Monitoring)" function block
Notice
"Bus Monitoring" and "PLC/PCS Monitoring" can only be effective if the DP
slave address monitoring is activated in the DP master system.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 10-17
Standard Functions
Settings
Watchdog Description
Monitoring Control of the "Watchdog" function block using the monitored signal
PLC/PCS Input (any sockets ,
e.g. control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
Bus Monitoring • Activated:

If a bus fault occurs, the "Trip - Bus" fault message is generated
and must be acknowledged
• Deactivated:
No fault message; however, the "Status - Bus o.k." information
can be evaluated at anytime.
PLC/PCS • Activated:
Monitoring If an SPS fault occurs, the "Trip - PLC/PCS" fault message is
generated and must be acknowledged
• Deactivated:
No fault message; however, the "Status - PLC/PCS in Run"
information can be evaluated at anytime.
Bus/PLC-Fault - You can select whether faults are to be acknowledged

Reset automatically or manually.
Range: Manual/Automatic
Table 10-12: Watchdog settings
"Trip Bus"/"Trip PLC/PCS" response
Response Trip Bus Trip PLC/PCS

Trip X X
Warning - -
Event - -
Deactivated X X
Table 10-13: "Trip Bus" / "Trip PLC/PCS" response
SIMOCODE pro
10-18 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Standard Functions
10.9 Timestamping
Description
SIMOCODE pro V can timestamp up to eight digital signals with high
temporal precision (10 ms). In the process, every change in the state of the
digital signal will be recorded.
Possible areas of application are:

• Precise chronological recording of faults in a procedural system
• Analysis of system interrelationships
• Recording and signaling of time-critical signal changes.
Prerequisite
To use SIMOCODE pro-V timestamping, the DP master being used must
support time synchronization functions via PROFIBUS (e.g. DP master
connections for SIMATIC S7-400), or a master clock must be used (e.g.
SICLOCK).
Process in STEP 7
Activation of the time synchronization for SIMOCODE pro V occurs
in STEP 7 HW Config in the slave properties under "Time Synchronization".
Notice
The set synchronization interval must correspond to the configuration of the
clock master.
For SIMOCODE pro, transmission of time-stamped information is analogous

to transmission with SIMATIC S7 IM 153-2.
Therefore, the "FB 62 TIMESTMP" function block can be used for further
processing of time-stamped information in the CPU, to transmit time-
stamped messages from the "Standard Library > Miscellaneous Blocks"
library.
Note
The "LADDR" parameter contains the diagnosis address of the DP slave
from STEP 7 HW Config.
LADDR2 contains the diagnosis address of slot 2 of SIMOCODE pro in the
DP mode "DPV1" of the DP master (integrated via OM SIMOCODE pro). For
all other configurations, LADDR2 will contain the same address as LADDR.
In contrast to the STEP7 online help of the FB62, when integrating via GSD,
the slot number of the module is transmitted with Slot 1 for signal
messages, and with Slot 0 for special messages.
You will find further information about FB 62 in the STEP7 online help.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 10-19
Standard Functions
Schematic
The "Timestamping" standard function consists of
• Eight sockets "Timestamping - Input 0 to Input 7".
Overall, there is:
• One "Timestamp" function block for BU2.
Timestamp
Input 0
Input 1 Timestamping Active Event - Timestamping Function Active + o.k.
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7
Fig. 10-10: "Timestamp" function block
Settings
You can activate/deactivate the timestamping function via the
"Timestamping Active" checkbox.
SIMOCODE pro
10-20 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Logic Modules 11
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information about the Logic Modules of
SIMOCODE pro. Logic Modules are function blocks which are modeled not
only on standard logic functions, e.g. Truth Tables (AND, OR,...), but also on
Counters and Timers. In addition to the predefined control functions, you
can use this, for example, to implement Logical Functions, Time Relay
Functions and Counter Functions without being dependent on external
components (relays).
Target groups
• Configurators
• Programmers.
Necessary knowledge
• The basics of digital signal processing, e.g. Timers, Counters, etc.
Further Function Blocks > Logic Modules.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 11-1
Logic Modules
11.1 Introduction
Description
Freely programmable Logic Modules are function blocks that process Input
Signals and provide Binary or Analog Output Signals according to their
internal logic components. Logic Modules can contain:
• Plugs
• An internal logic component
• Sockets
• Settings, e.g. the time for a Timer.
Schematic
The following schematic shows a general representation of a Logic Module:
Plug 1
Logic Module
Plug 1 - n
(Logic component)
Plug n
Setting Value
Fig. 11-1: General representation of a Logic Module

You can use the Logic Modules to carry out additional functions for your
application. These can be used, for example, to implement Logical
Functions, Time Relay Functions and Counter Functions. Depending on the
device series, the system provides several Logic Modules:
SIMOCODE
Logic Module pro C pro V

BU1 BU2
Number Number
Truth Tables 3 Inputs / 1 Output 3 6

Truth Tables 2 Inputs / 1 Output — 2
Truth Tables 5 Inputs / 2 Outputs — 1
Timer 2 4
Counter 2 4
Signal Conditionings 2 4
Non-Volatile Elements 2 4
Flashing 3 3
Flickering 3 3
Limit Monitor — 4
Calculation Modules (Calculator)* — 2
Table 11-1: Freely-programmable Logic Modules
*) Only for Basic Unit 2 for product version *E03* onwards
SIMOCODE pro
11-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Logic Modules
11.2 Truth Table for 3I/1O

Description
The Truth Table for 3I/1O consists of
• Three plugs
• One logic component
• One socket.
You can choose from the eight possible input conditions the one with which
to generate an Output Signal.
Overall, there are:
– Three Truth Tables, 1 to 3 for BU1
– Six Truth Tables, 1 to 6 for BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Truth Table for 3I/1O" Logic Modules:
Input 1 Input 1
Truth Table 1 3I/1O Truth Table 2 3I/1O
Input 2 Output Input 2 Output
Input 3 Input 3
Input 1 Input 1
Input 3 Input 3
Input 1 Input 1
Input 3 Input 3
Fig. 11-2: "Truth Table for 3I/1O" Logic Modules
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 6050-22 DS 02 11-3
Logic Modules
Example
You want to implement the following circuit:
Circuit: Truth Table, input conditions colored in gray:
S1= S2= S3= K1=

Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Output
S1 S2
0 0 0 0
0 0 1 0
0 1 0 0
S3
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
K1
1 0 1 1
K1 switches with: 1 1 0 0
(S1 or S2) and S3
or 1 1 1 1
S1 and S2 and S3
Fig. 11-3: Example of a Truth Table
SIMOCODE pro
11-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Logic Modules
Circuit and parameterization
L1
Circuit: N
K1
BU Inputs BU Outputs
BU
1
S1 1 Input 1
Truth Table 1 3I/1O
2 Out1
S2 2 Input 2 Output
3
S3 3 Input 3
Parameterization with SIMOCODE ES Set bits for

Output Signals
Connect Inputs, i.e.
Connect plugs with sockets
Fig. 11-4: Example circuit and parameterization for Truth Table for 3I/1O
Settings
Truth Tables 1-6 for Description

3I/1O -
Input 1 to 3 Activate the Truth Table with any signal

(any sockets
Table 11-2: Settings for Truth Table for 3I/1O
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 6050-22 DS 02 11-5
Logic Modules

Description
The Truth Table for 2I/1O consist of
• 2 plugs
• 1 logic component
• 1 socket.
You can choose from four possible input conditions the one with which to
generate an Output Signal.
Overall, there are:
– two Truth Tables, 7 to 8 for BU2.
Schematic
Input 1 Input 1
Truth Table 7 for 2I/1O Truth Table 8 for 2I/1O
Output Output
Input 2 Input 2
Example
You want to implement the following circuit:
Circuit:
Truth Table, input conditions colored in gray:
S1= S2= K1=

Input 1 Input 2 Output
S1 S2
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 1
K1 K1 switches with:
S1 or S2
Fig. 11-6: Example of Truth Table for 2I/1O
SIMOCODE pro
11-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Logic Modules

Description
The Truth Table for 5I/2O consists of
• Five plugs
• Two sockets.
You can choose from 32 possible input conditions the one with which to
generate up to 2 Output Signals.
Overall, there is:
– one Truth Table 9 for BU2.
Schematic
Input 1
Truth Table 9 for 5I/2O
Input 2 Output 1
Input 3
Input 4 Output 2
Input 5
Settings
Truth Table 9 for Description

5I/2O -
Input 1 to 5 Activation by any signal

(any sockets
Table 11-3: Settings for Truth Table for 5I/2O
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 6050-22 DS 02 11-7
Logic Modules
11.5 Counters
Description
Counters are integrated in the SIMOCODE pro system. These are activated
via the plugs "+" or "-".
The Counter Output switches to "1" when the preset limit is reached. The
Counter is reset with "Reset".
The actual value is available as a socket for further processing and can also
be transmitted to the automation system.
• Plug +: increases actual value by 1 (maximum: limit value)
• Plug –: Decreases the actual value by 1 (minimum: 0).
• Reset: resets the actual value to 0.
The Counter consists of
• 3 plugs (input +, input – and reset)
• One socket.
• One "Actual Value" analog socket with the current value in the range between
0 and the limit. It remains even if there is a voltage failure.
Overall, there are:
• two Counters, 1 to 2 for BU1
• four Counters, 1 to 4 for BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Counters" Logic Modules:
Input + Input +
Counter 1 Counter 2
Input – Output Input – Output
Reset Actual Value Reset Actual Value

Limit Limit
Input + Input +
Counter 3 Counter 4
Input – Output Input – Output

Limit Limit
Fig. 11-8: "Counter" Logic Modules
Note
The time between the events to be counted depends on
- the Input Delay
- the Device Cycle Time.
SIMOCODE pro
11-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Logic Modules
Note
The actual value remains the same
- During parameterization or failure of the supply voltage
- If there are simultaneous Input Signals at Input + and Input –.
Note
The Output is always 0 if a Reset is pending.
Settings
Counters 1 to 4 - Description
Input + Increases the actual value by 1.

Activation by any signal
(any sockets
Input – Decreases the actual value by 1.

(any sockets
Reset Resets the Counter to 0 (count value and output)

(any sockets
Limit The maximum value that can be reached when counting and where
the counter issues an Output Signal.
Range: 0 - 65535
Table 11-4: Counter settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 6050-22 DS 02 11-9
Logic Modules
11.6 Timer
Description
The timer consists of
• 2 plugs (input and reset)
• One socket.
• One "Actual Value" analog socket with the actual value.
The actual value is available as a socket for further internal processing and
can also be transmitted to the automation system.
If an input signal is pending, the timer can issue an Output Signal according
to the chosen Timer type:
• With Closing Delay
• With Closing Delay with Memory
• With OFF Delay
• With Fleeting Closing.
Overall, there are:
– Two timers, 1 to 2 for BU1
– Four timers, 1 to 4 for BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Timer" Logic Modules:
Input Input
Timer 1 Timer 2
Output Output
Type Type
Value Value
Input Input
Timer 3 Timer 4
Output Output
Type Type
Value Value
Fig. 11-9: "Timer" Logic Modules
Note
SIMOCODE pro
11-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Logic Modules
Note
The response of the sockets of all Timers (Input, Reset) has been
completely changed to level-active for Basic Unit 1 from version *E05* and
higher and Basic Unit 2 from version *E03* and higher. Use of an
unchanged parameter file utilizing integrated Timers may thus result in a
different response if such Basic Units are used. For example, if "Fixed Level
- '1'" is set at the Timer Input, the timer function is automatically restarted
after the Timer Reset occurs. However, in Timers with the parameterized
Type = "Fleeting Closing" there is no change in the response.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 6050-22 DS 02 11-11
Logic Modules
Output Response of the Timer

(Basic Unit 1 before version *E05* and Basic Unit 2 before version *E03*)
With Closing Delay:
Input
Reset
Time
t t
Output
With Closing Delay with Memory:
Input
Reset
Time
t t t
Output
With OFF Delay:
Input
Reset
Time
t t t
Output
With Fleeting Closing:
Input
Reset
Time
t
Output
Fig. 11-10: Output Response, Timer (Basic Unit 1 before version *E05* and Basic Unit 2 before
version *E03*)
SIMOCODE pro
11-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Logic Modules
Output Response of the Timer

(Basic Unit 1 from version *E05* onwards and Basic Unit 2 from version *E03* onwards)
With Closing Delay:
Input
Reset
Time
t t t
Output
With Closing Delay with Memory:
Input
Reset
Time
t t t t
Output
With OFF Delay:
Input
Reset
Time
t t t t
Output
With Fleeting Closing:
Input
Reset
Time
t t t
Output
Fig. 11-11: Output Response, Timer (Basic Unit 1 from version *E05* onwards and Basic Unit 2 from
version *E03* onwards)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 6050-22 DS 02 11-13
Logic Modules
Settings
Timers 1 to 4 - Description
Input Activation by any signal

(any sockets ,
Reset Resets the actual value to 0.

(any sockets ,
Type Different Output Responses

Range: Closing Delay, Closing Delay with Memory,
Closing Delay, with Fleeting Closing
Value Time during which the Timer provides an Output Signal when
activated, depending on the Output Response (type).
Range: 0 to 65535, unit 100 ms
Table 11-5: Timer settings
SIMOCODE pro
11-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Logic Modules
11.7 Signal Conditioner

Description
If an Input Signal is pending, the Signal Conditioner can issue an Output
Signal according to the chosen Timer type:
• Non Inverting
• Inverting
• Edge Rising with Memory
• Edge Falling with Memory.
You can set the Output Response.
The Signal Conditioner consists of
• Two plugs (Input and Reset)
• One socket.
Overall, there are:
– two Signal Conditioners for BU1 (Signal Conditioners 1 to 2)
– four Signal Conditioners for BU2 (Signal Conditioners 1 to 4).
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Signal Conditioner" Logic Modules:
Input Input
Signal Conditioner 1 Signal Conditioner 2
Output Output
Reset Reset
Type Type
Input Input
Signal Conditioner 3 Signal Conditioner 4
Output Output
Reset Reset
Type Type
Fig. 11-12: "Signal Conditioner" Logic Modules
Note
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 6050-22 DS 02 11-15
Logic Modules
Types of Signals/Output Responses
Level Not Inverted
Input
Reset
Output
Level Inverted
Input
Reset
Output
Edge Rising with Memory
Input
Reset
Output
Edge Falling with Memory

Input
Reset
Output
Fig. 11-13: Types of Signals/Output Responses of the Signal Conditioners
SIMOCODE pro
11-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Logic Modules
NOR function
You can implement a NOR function with the "Level Inverted" type of signal:
Input Reset Output Schematic
0 0 1
Input
1 0 0 Output
Reset
> 1
0 1 0 =
1 1 0
Table 11-6: NOR function
Settings
Signal Conditioner Description

1 to 4 -

(any sockets ,
Reset Resets the Signal Conditioner to 0.

(any sockets ,

Range:
Level Not Inverted, Level Inverted,
Edge Rising with Memory, Edge Falling with Memory
Table 11-7: Signal Conditioner settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 6050-22 DS 02 11-17
Logic Modules
11.8 Non-Volatile Elements

Description
Non-volatile Elements behave like Signal Conditioners.
The Output Signals remain after failure of the supply voltage.
If an Input Signal is pending, the signal conditioner can issue an Output
Signal according to the type of Signal Conditioner chosen:
• Non Inverting
• Inverting
• Edge Rising with Memory
• Edge Falling with Memory.
You can set the Output Response.
The non-volatile Element consists of
• Two plugs (Input and Reset)
• One socket.
Overall, there are:
– two Non-volatile Element s 1 to 2 for BU1
– Four Non-volatile Elements 1 to 4 for BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Non-volatile Elements" Logic Modules:
Input Input
Non-vol. Elem. 1 Non-vol. Elem. 2
Output Output
Reset Reset
Type Type
Input Input
Non-vol. Elem. 1 Non-vol. Elem. 2
Output Output
Reset Reset
Type Type
Fig. 11-14: "Non-volatile Elements" Logic Modules
Note
SIMOCODE pro
11-18 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Logic Modules
Types of Signals/Output Responses
Level Not Inverted
Input
Reset
Output
Level Inverted
Input
Reset
Output
Edge Rising with Memory

Voltage Failure
Input
Reset
Output
Edge Falling with Memory

Voltage Failure
Input
Reset
Output
Fig. 11-15: Signal Types/Output Responses of Non-volatile Elements
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 6050-22 DS 02 11-19
Logic Modules
NOR function
You can implement a NOR function with the "Level Inverted" type of signal:
Input Reset Output Schematic
0 0 1
Input
1 0 0 Output
Reset
> 1
0 1 0 =
1 1 0
Table 11-8: NOR function
Settings
Non-volatile Description
Elements
1 to 4 -

(any sockets
Reset Resets the Signal Conditioner to 0.

(any sockets

Range: Level Not Inverted, Level Inverted,
Edge Rising with Memory, Edge Falling with Memory
Table 11-9: Non-volatile Elements settings
SIMOCODE pro
11-20 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Logic Modules
11.9 Flashing
Description
If an Input Signal is pending at its plug, the "Flashing" logic module issues a
signal to its socket, which alternates between binary 0 and 1 with a fixed
frequency of 1 Hz. You can use this to make the LEDs on the Operator Panel
flash.
The Logic Module consists of
• One plug
• One socket.
Overall, there are:
– three "Flashing 1 to 3" Logic Modules for BU1 and BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Flashing" Logic Modules:
Flashing 1 Flashing 2
Input Output Input Output
Flashing 3
Input Output
Fig. 11-16: "Flashing" Logic Modules
Settings
Flashing 1 to 3 - Description

(any sockets ,
e.g. device inputs, signals, status, etc.)
Table 11-10: Flashing settings
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 6050-22 DS 02 11-21
Logic Modules
11.10 Flickering
Description
You can use the "Flickering" Logic Modules to assign the "Flickering" function
to the Operator Panel LEDs (for example).
If an Input Signal is pending, the "Flickering" function block issues an Output
Signal with a frequency of 4 Hz.
The function block consists of
• One plug
• One socket.
Overall, there are:
– three "Flickering 1 to 3" Logic Modules for BU1 and BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Flickering" Logic Modules:
Flickering 1 Flickering 2
Input Output Input Output
Flickering 3
Input Output
Fig. 11-17: "Flickering" Logic Modules
Settings
Flickering 1 to 3 - Description

(any sockets ,
e.g. events, etc.)
Table 11-11: Flickering settings
SIMOCODE pro
11-22 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Logic Modules
11.11 Limit Monitor

Description
Any analog values (2 bytes/1 word) can be monitored for limit overshooting
or undershooting. The Limit Monitor issues the "Limit" signal to its socket. In
addition, Limit Monitors can be "labeled" according to their function.
Example: Monitoring the individual Sensor Measuring Circuits of the
Temperature Module (Temperature 1 - 3) for Overtemperature.
The limit monitor consists of
• One analog plug
• One socket.
Overall, there are:
– four Limit Monitors, 1 to 4 for BU2.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Limit Monitor" Logic Modules:
Limit Monitor 1 Limit Monitor 2

Input Limit Value 1 Input Limit Value 2
Limit Limit
Activity Activity
Response Response
(Marking) (Marking)
Limit Monitor 3 Limit Monitor 4

Input Limit Value 3 Input Limit Value 4
Limit Limit
Activity Activity
Response Response
(Marking) (Marking)
Fig. 11-18: "Limit Monitor" Logic Modules
Response
Response Limit Value 1 to 4
Tripping -
Warning -
Signalling X
Disabled -
Delay 0 - 25.5 s (0.5)
Table 11-12: Response of the limit values

Information".
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 6050-22 DS 02 11-23
Logic Modules
Functional principle
The Limit Signal issued depends on
• The operating state of the motor
• The TPF function
• The parameterized "Activity":
– ON
– ON+
– RUN
– RUN+.
The following display shows a flow chart with the different "Activity"
parameters.
Activity
Class-time
OFF START Motor is Running OFF
"ON"
Not with TPF 1) "ON+"
Not with TPF 1) "RUN"
Not with TPF 1) "RUN+"
Time
1) TPF: There is Test Position Feedback, the motor feeder is in the test
position, i.e. its main circuit is isolated from the network. However, the
control voltage is connected.
Fig. 11-19: Limit Monitor Activity
SIMOCODE pro
11-24 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Logic Modules
Settings
Limit Monitor - Description
Input Analog plug of the Limit Monitor to be connected with the analog
value (2 bytes) which is to be monitored,
(e.g. Maximum Current Imax, Remaining Cooling Time, Actual
Value of Timers, etc.).
Type Specifies if the Limit Value has to be monitored for overshooting or

undershooting.
Activity Determines in which motor operating state the Limit Monitor is to

be evaluated:
• ON, i.e. always evaluate, independent of whether the motor is
running or not
• ON+, i.e. always evaluate, independent of whether the motor is
running or not
Exception: 'TPF', i.e. motor feeder is in Test Position.
• RUN, i.e. evaluate only if the motor is in the ON state and not in
Test Position (TPF)
• RUN+, i.e. evaluate only if the motor is running and the start-up
procedure is finished (i.e. the "Start Active" message is no longer
pending) and there is no Test Position Feedback (TPF); Example:
Cos phi Monitoring.
Limit Monitor Response Value. The Return Value is always determined by

the "Limit Monitor - Delay" parameter.
Range: 0 - 65535.
Delay Specifies the time period for which the limit must be constantly
overshot before the "Signal - Limit" output is set.
Range: 0 - 25.5 s (0.5).
Marking No parameters. Optional marking to designate the signal, e.g.

"Limit>"; Range: Max. of 10 characters.
Table 11-13: Limit Monitor settings
Note
When using Limit Monitors, always ensure that the correct range and unit
are used for the analog values connected to the Limit Input. These always
have a direct influence on the unit of the Limit Value to be set. The units and
the ranges of all relevant analog values can be found in Chapter B.8 "Data
Record 94 - Measured Values" and Chapter B.9 "Data Record 95 - Service
Data / Statistical Data".
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 6050-22 DS 02 11-25
Logic Modules
Examples of typical units and ranges in SIMOCODE pro:
Unit Range
Temperatures (e.g. Max. temperature) 1K 0 - 65535
Operating Hours 1s 0 - 1193046
Motor Stop Time 1h 0 - 65535
Active Power 1W 0 - 4294967295
Apparent Power 1 VA 0 - 4294967295
Timer Actual Value 100 ms. 0 - 65535
Currents (e.g. max. Strom_I max) 1 % of Is 0 - 66535
Analog Module Inputs - 0 - 27648 (S7 format)

Table 11-14: Examples of typical units and ranges in SIMOCODE pro
Thus, for example, a Limit Value of 473 (K) should be parameterized for a
Limit Monitor to monitor a maximum temperature of 200 °C.
SIMOCODE pro
11-26 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Logic Modules
11.12 Calculators (Calculation Modules)

Description
Both the "Calculator 1" and "Calculator 2" Logic Modules integrated in Basic
Unit 2 contain the standard calculation modes and enable all analog values
that occur in SIMOCODE pro to be adapted, calculated and converted, e.g.
• Conversion of the measured temperatures from K (Kelvin) to °F or °C
• Conversion of the motor current from [%] to [A]
• Conversion of the 0/4 - 20 mA signals of the Analog Module directly into fill
levels, pressures and flow rates.
The Analog Value (2 Byte/1 Word) present at the Analog Socket is calculated
using a defined formula and using freely-selectable parameters (Counters,
Denominators, Operators, Offsets). The result of the calculation is output as
an Analog Value at the Analog Socket of the Logic Module (2 Bytes/1 Word)
for further processing.
Each Calculator consists of:

• One analog plug (Calculator 1) or two analog plugs (Calculator 2)
• One analog socket.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Calculator" Logic Modules:
Calculator 1
Input Counter
Output
Denominator
Range: 0 - 65535
Offset
Calculator 2
Input 1 Operating Mode

Output
Counter 1
Range: 0 - 65535
Input 2 Denominator 1
Operator
Offset
Counter 2
Denominator 2
Fig. 11-20: "Calculator" Logic Modules
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 6050-22 DS 02 11-27
Logic Modules
Operating Modes for Calculator 2

The mode of the "Calculator 2" Logic Module can be changed via the
"Operating Mode" parameter:
• Operating mode 1
The Analog Value at Input 1 is combined with the Analog Value at Input 2 via a
pre-defined formula, using the specified parameters (Counters,
Denominators, Offsets, Operators).
The result is available as an Analog Value at the Output of the function block
for further processing (1 word/2 bytes).
• Operating Mode 2
The Analog Values at Input 1 and Input 2 are processed together as a double
word. Input 1 represents the high word and Input 2 the low word. The result
is calculated using the formula defined for this operating mode using the
specified parameters (Counters, Denominators, Offsets) and is output from
the function block as 1 word/2 bytes. In Operating Mode 2 it is also possible
to process double words (e.g. Active Power, Apparent Power) and to generate
2 bytes/1 word.
SIMOCODE pro
11-28 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Logic Modules
Settings
Calculator - Description
Calculator 1 - Input Any value (2 bytes/1 word)
Range: 0 - 65535
Calculator 1 - Output Calculated value /(2 bytes/1 word)
Range: 0 - 65535
Calculator 1 - Counter Range: -32766 to +32767, increment 1
Calculator 1 - Denominator Range: 0 - 255, increment 1
Calculator 1 - Offset Range: -32766 to +32767, increment 1
Calculator 2 - Input 1 Any value (2 bytes/1 word)
Range: 0 - 65535
Calculator 2 - Input 2 Any value (2 bytes/1 word)
Range: 0 - 65535
Calculator 2 - Output Calculated value (2 bytes/1 word)
Range: 0 - 65535
Calculator 2 - Counter 1 Range: -127 to +128, increment 1
Calculator 2 - Denominator 1 Range: 0 - 255, increment 1
Calculator 2 - Counter 2 1) Range: 0 - 255, increment 1
Calculator 2 - Denominator 2 1) Range: -127 to +128, increment 1
Calculator 2 - Offset Range: -32766 to +32767, increment 2
Calculator 2 - Operating Mode 1 or 2
Calculator 2 - Operator 1) +, -, *, /
1) only relevant for Operating Mode = 1
Table 11-15: Calculator settings
Formulae
Calculator 1
Input Output
Counter
* Input + Offset
Denominator
Calculator 2
Input 1 Counter 1 Counter 2 Output
* Input 1 Operator
* Input 2 + Offset
Input 2 Denom. 1 Denom. 2
Oper. Mode 1
Calculator 2
Input 1
(High) Counter 1 Output
Input 2 * Input 1, Input 2 + Offset
(Low) Denom. 1
Oper. Mode 2
Fig. 11-21: Calculator formulae
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 6050-22 DS 02 11-29
Logic Modules
Examples
Example 1
• Conversion of the maximum temperature of the Temperature Module from K
to °C
TM Inputs Calculator 1
Max. Temperature 1
* Input + -273 0 ... 65535 °C
Unit = 1 K
Sensor Type 1
Response at
Sensor Fault/
Out of Range
Number of
Act. Sensors
Fig. 11-22: Example 1
Example 2
• Conversion of the maximum temperature of the Temperature Module from K
to °F
TM inputs Calculator 1
Max. Temperature 9
* Input + -460 0 ... 65535 °F
Unit = 1 K
Sensor Type 5
Response at
Sensor Fault/
Out of Range
Number of
Act. Sensors
Example 3
• Conversion of the motor current I max. from % to A (e.g. Set Current
Is = 3.36 A)
(only possible for motors with one rotational speed)
Calculator 1
336
Max. Current I_max * Input + 0 0 ... 3427 (0 ... 34.72 A)
Unit = 1 % 100
SIMOCODE pro
11-30 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Communication 12
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information about the options of SIMOCODE
pro communication, e.g. communication with a PLC. The presetting of the
Receive, Send and Diagnosis Data is sufficient for almost all applications so
that the parameterization only has to be changed to a small extent.
Otherwise, you can adapt the settings of the individual bits specifically for
your application.
Target groups
• Configurators
Necessary knowledge
• knowledge about PROFIBUS DP.
You will find the following dialogs in SIMOCODE ES:
Device Parameters > Bus Parameters
Further Function Blocks > Outputs > Acyclic Send Data
Further Function Blocks >Outputs > Cyclic Send Data.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 12-1
Communication
12.1 Definitions
PROFIBUS DP
PROFIBUS bus system with the DP protocol. DP stands for decentralized
periphery. The main task of PROFIBUS DP is fast Cyclic Data exchange
between the central DP master and the periphery devices.
PROFIBUS DPV1
PROFIBUS DPV1 is an extension of the DP protocol. It enables Acyclic Data
exchange of Parameter, Diagnosis, Receive and Test Data.
DP master
A master is designated as a DP master if it works with the DP protocol
according to the EN 50 170 standard, Volume 2, PROFIBUS.
Class 1 master
A class 1 master is an active station on the PROFIBUS DP. The Cyclic Data
exchange with other stations is characteristic for this type of master. Typical
class 1 masters are, for example, PLCs with a PROFIBUS DP connection.
Class 2 master
A class 2 master is an optional station on the PROFIBUS DP.
Typical class 2 masters are, for example,
• PC/programming devices with the SIMOCODE ES professional software
• SIMATIC PDM (PCS7)
• PC with SIMATIC power control software (power management).
DPV1 slave
A slave is designated as a DPV1 slave if it is operated on the PROFIBUS bus
with the PROFIBUS DP protocol and works according to the EN 50 170
standard, Volume 2, PROFIBUS.
GSD
Device data (GSD) include DP slave descriptions in a uniform format. Using
GSD (device data) makes it easier to parameterize the
DP slaves in a DP master system.
OM SIMOCODE pro
OM SIMOCODE pro (object manager) is used instead of GSD (device data)
to integrate SIMOCODE pro into STEP7.
OM SIMOCODE pro enables the use of SIMOCODE ES Professional (if it is
installed) for parameterization within STEP7.
SIMOCODE pro
12-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Communication
SIMATIC PDM
Software package for the configuration, parameterization, commissioning
and maintenance of devices (e.g. transducers, controllers, SIMOCODE) and
for configuring networks and PCs.
SIMOCODE pro S7 slave

SIMOCODE pro S7 slave is a slave which is fully integrated into Step7. It is
connected via OM SIMOCODE pro. It supports the S7 model (Diagnosis
Alarms, Process Alarms).
Writing data
Writing data means that data is transmitted to the SIMOCODE pro system.
Reading data
Reading data means that data is transmitted from the SIMOCODE pro
system.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 12-3
Communication
12.2 Data Transfer

Options for data transfer
The following figure shows the options for data transfer:
Class 1 master Class 2 master

SIMATIC S7 with PROFIBUS DP communication processor PC or programming device with
SIMOCODE ES Professional
Maximum of two
class 2 masters
Data transfer to class 1 master,

depending on the slave operating PROFIBUS DPV1 standard extension: Parameterization,
mode (see Chapter 12.4.1 "Slave diagnosis, receiving, sending, testing via PROFIBUS DPV1
Operating Modes")
PC/PD e.g. with SIMOCODE ES Smart

Parameterizing, diagnosis, receiving,
sending, testing via system interface
Fig. 12-1: Options for data transfer
Communication principle
The following figure shows the communication principle and the way data is
transmitted depending on the master and slave operating modes:
Class 1 master Class 2 master (max. 2)
PLC CPU
Cyclic I/O Acyclic Acyclic Acyclic
PC or PCS
e.g.
SIMOCODE ES
Professional
PLC
Communication processor
Configuration GSD
Startup
Parameter
Lock
SIMOCODE pro
3UF7
Diagnosis Alarms Parameter
Data Records Data Records
DPV0
Cycl. Send Data
Cycl. Receive Data DPV1 DPV1
Fig. 12-2: Communication principle
SIMOCODE pro
12-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Communication
12.3 Telegram Description and Data Access

12.3.1 Cyclic Data
The Cyclic Data is exchanged between the PROFIBUS DP master and DP

slave once every DP cycle. The PROFIBUS DP master module then sends
the Receive Data to SIMOCODE pro.
In response, SIMOCODE pro sends the Send Data to the master module.
The Cyclic Data is accessed via the Inputs (Send Data) and Outputs (Receive
Data) in the program of the PLC.
The length of the Cyclic Data which is to be transferred is already set when
SIMOCODE pro is integrated into the DP master system. This is achieved by
selecting the basic type which in turn determines the structure and the
length of the Cyclic Data.
The following basic types are available:

• Cyclic Data from the PROFIBUS DP master to SIMOCODE pro:
Designation Length Designation Infor-
mation
Basic type 1 4 bytes of Cyclic Receive -
Receive Data Bit 0.0 to 1.7
BU2
Cyclic Receive -
Analog Value
Basic type 2 2 bytes of Cyclic Receive - BU1
Receive Data Bit 0.0 to 1.7 BU2
Table 12-1: Cyclic Data from the PROFIBUS DP master to SIMOCODE pro
• Cyclic Data from SIMOCODE pro to the PROFIBUS DP master:

Designation Length Designation Infor-
mation
Basic type 1 10 bytes of Send Data Cyclic Send -
Bit 0.0 to 1.7
BU2
Cyclic Send -
Analog Inputs 1 to 4
Basic type 2 4 bytes of Send Data Cyclic Send -
Bit 0.0 to 1.7 BU1
Cyclic Send - BU2
Analog Input 1
Table 12-2: Cyclic Data from SIMOCODE pro to the PROFIBUS DP master
The Cyclic Data contents (digital/analog information) is set by

parameterization, e.g. with the "SIMOCODE ES" software.
When the "SIMOCODE ES" parameterization software is started, the Cyclic
I/O Data is preset when the type of application (control functions) is
selected (see Chapter B.20 "Assignment of Cyclic Receive and Send Data
for Predefined Control Functions").
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 12-5
Communication
12.3.2 Diagnosis Data and Alarms
The Diagnosis Data contains important information about the status of

SIMOCODE pro. This simplifies troubleshooting.
In contrast to the Cyclic Data, the Diagnosis Data is only transmitted to the
master module if it changes.
PROFIBUS DP differentiates between:
• Standard Diagnosis
• Status Information
• Channel-related Diagnosis
• Process and Diagnosis Alarms according to DPV1.
Configure Diagnosis Response

In SIMOCODE pro, you can set which Diagnosis Events trigger the
transmission of Diagnosis Data or the Alarms to the PLC:
• Diagnosis for device errors, e.g. parameterization errors, hardware errors
• Diagnosis triggered by trips:
The Diagnosis Data or Alarms are transferred to the PLC for events which are
marked with an "F" in the "DP Diagnosis" column in
Table B-8: Data Record 92 - Diagnosis.
• Diagnosis triggered by warning:
marked with an "W" in the "DP Diagnosis" column in
• Diagnosis triggered by event
marked with an "E" in the "DP Diagnosis" column in
Parameterization with SIMOCODE ES

Set the response in the Device Parameters > Bus Parameters > Diagnosis
Dialog.
SIMOCODE pro
12-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Communication
12.3.3 Configuration of the Slave Diagnosis
Byte 0
Byte 1 Station Status 1 to 3
Byte 2
Standard
Byte 3 Master PROFIBUS address Diagnosis
Byte 4 High byte

Byte 5 Low byte Manufacturer's
identification
Byte 6
Byte 7
Identification-related Diagnosis
Byte 8
.
. Status Information
.
Byte 27
Byte 28
Channel-related Diagnosis
Byte 29
(dynamic, n = 0; 3; 6)
Byte 30
Advanced
Diagnosis
Byte 31
Channel-related Diagnosis
Byte 32
(dynamic, n = 0; 3; 6)
Byte 33
Byte 28+n
.
. Diagnosis Alarm (Temporary)
.
Byte 48+n
Byte 28+n
.
. Process Alarm (Temporary)
.
Byte 48+n
Fig. 12-3: Configuration of the Slave Diagnosis
The maximum length of the diagnosis telegram is 62 bytes.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 12-7
Communication
Station Status - Definition

The station status provides an overview of the state of a DP slave.
Station Status 1
Bit Meaning Cause/Corrective Measures

0 The DP slave cannot be addressed Check the following:
by the DP master. • Is the correct PROFIBUS address set on
the DP Slave?
• Is the bus connection plug plugged in?
• Is the DP slave connected to the power
supply?
• Is the RS-485 repeater configured
correctly?
1 The DP slave is not yet ready for the The DP slave is just starting up.
data transfer. Wait until the startup is completed.
2 The configuration data sent from the Check whether the correct station type and
DP master to the DP slave does not the correct configuration of the DP slave
correspond to the configuration of has been entered in the configuration
the DP slave. software.
3 External Diagnosis is available Evaluate the Identification-related
(general diagnosis display) Diagnosis, the Status Information and/or
the Channel-related Diagnosis.
Bit 3 is reset as soon as all errors are
rectified. The bit is reset if there is a new
diagnosis message in the bytes of the
above-mentioned diagnosis.
4 The required function is not Check the configuration.
supported by the DP slave
5 The DP master cannot interpret the Check the bus configuration.
response of the DP slave.
6 The DP slave type does not Enter the correct station type in the
correspond to the software configuration software.
configuration.
7 The DP slave has been Bit is always 1 when you are accessing the
parameterized by another DP master DP slave from the programming device or
(not by the DP master which has from another DP master (for example).
access to the DP slave at the The PROFIBUS address of the DP master
moment). which parameterized the DP slave is in the
"Master PROFIBUS address" diagnosis byte.
Table 12-3: Configuration of Station Status 1 (byte 0)
SIMOCODE pro
12-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Communication
Station Status 2
Bit Meaning
0 The DP slave must be parameterized again.
1 There is a diagnosis message. The DP slave will not function until the error is
rectified (static diagnosis message).
2 The bit is always "1" when the DP slave with this PROFIBUS address is present.
3 The address monitoring is activated for this DP slave.
4 The DP slave received the "FREEZE" control command 1).
5 The DP slave received the "SYNC" control command 1) .
6 0: Bit is always "0".
7 The DP slave is deactivated, i.e. it is decoupled from the current processing.
1) Bit is only updated if another diagnosis message also changes.
Table 12-4: Configuration of Station Status 2 (byte 1)
Station Status 3
Station Status 3 is not relevant for the slave diagnosis.
Bit Meaning
0 to 7 Bits are always "0".
Table 12-5: Configuration of Station Status 3
Master PROFIBUS address - definition

The PROFIBUS address of the DP master (class 1 master) is stored in the
"Master PROFIBUS address" diagnosis byte:
• which parameterized the DP slave and
• which has read and write access to the DP slave.
The master PROFIBUS address is in byte 3 of the slave diagnosis.
Manufacturer's identification - definition

A code is stored in the manufacturer's identification which describes the DP
slave type.
Byte 4 Byte 5 Manufacturer's identification for

80H FDH SIMOCODE pro
Table 12-6: Configuration of the manufacturer's identification
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 12-9
Communication
Identification-related Diagnosis - definition

The Identification-related Diagnosis begins at byte 6 and is 2 bytes long.
Identification-related Diagnosis - configuration
7 6 5 0 Bit number
Byte 6 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 = 0x42
Length of the Identification-related Diagnosis

including byte 6 (= 2 bytes)
Code for Identification-related Diagnosis
7 6 5 0 Bit number
Byte 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x GSD
0: Identification-related Diagnosis is not available

1: Identification-related Diagnosis is available
7 6 5 0 Bit number
Byte 7 0 0 0 0 x 0 0 0 OM SIMOCODE pro
0: Identification-related Diagnosis is not available

1: Identification-related Diagnosis is available
Fig. 12-4: Configuration of the Identification-related Diagnosis
SIMOCODE pro
12-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Communication
Status Information - definition

The Status Information provides the detailed status of SIMOCODE pro.
Status Information - configuration

The Status Information is configured as follows:
7 6 5 0 Bit number
Byte 8 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 = 0x14
Length of the Status Information

including byte 9 (= 20 bytes)
7 0
Byte 9 0x81 Status Information
7 0
Byte 10 x Slot number GSD: 0x01
OM SIMOCODE pro: 0x04
Byte 11 0x00
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit number
..
Byte 12
. Detailed messages
Byte 27
Fig. 12-5: Status Information configuration
Detailed information can be found in Chapter A.5 "Detailed Events of the

Slave Diagnostics".
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 12-11
Communication
Channel-related Diagnosis - definition

Channel-related Diagnosis is a detailed version of the identification-related
diagnosis. They supply information about the device errors of
SIMOCODE pro.
Channel-related Diagnosis - configuration

The Channel-related Diagnosis is configured as follows:
7 6 5 0 Bit number
Byte 28 1 0 0 0 0 0 x x
0x80 GSD
0x83 OM SIMOCODE pro
Code for Channel-related Diagnosis
7 6 5 0 Bit number
Byte 29 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
Input/output channel
7 6 5 0 Bit number
Byte 30 0 0 0
Error type 9 or 16 (table below)
Channel type:
000B: No special channel type
Byte 31 to Next Channel-related Diagnosis message

Byte 33 (Allocation as for byte 28 to 30)
Fig. 12-6: Configuration of the channel-related diagnosis
The block for the Channel-related Diagnosis, which has a length of 3 bytes,
is either missing (if there is no Channel-related Diagnosis) or is available
once or twice.
Error types
The diagnosis message is output on channel 0.
No. Error type Meaning/cause

F9 01001: • Internal error/device error Exact information:
Error • Error during self-test See Chapter B.7 "Data
F16 10000: • Incorrect parameter value Record 92 - Device
Parameterization Diagnosis".
error
Table 12-7: Error types
SIMOCODE pro
12-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Communication
Alarms - Diagnosis Alarm

Device errors or parameter errors are alarm sources for Diagnosis Alarms.
As soon as SIMOCODE pro sets a Diagnosis Alarm, the OB 82 Diagnosis
Alarm is started in the SIMATIC-S7.
Diagnosis Alarm - Configuration

The Diagnosis Alarm is configured as follows:
Byte 28+n 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 = 0x14
Length of the Diagnosis Alarm

including header byte 9 (= 20 bytes)
7 0
Byte 29+n 0x01 Diagnosis Alarm
7 0
Byte 30+n x Slot number GSD: 0x01
Byte 31+n 0x00
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit number
Byte 32+n
Contents of Data Record 1
Byte 48+n
n = 0; 3; 6
Fig. 12-7: Configuration of the Diagnosis Alarm
The first byte of the block for Diagnosis Alarms can be moved by 3 or 6
bytes depending on the number of blocks for the Channel-related Diagnosis.
You will find a detailed description of the information contained in Data

Record 1 in Chapter B.2 "Data Record 0/1 - S7 System Diagnosis".
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 12-13
Communication
Alarms - Process Alarm

Trips, Warnings and Events are alarm sources for Process Alarms.
As soon as SIMOCODE pro sets a Process Alarm, the OB 40 Process Alarm
is started in the SIMATIC-S7.
Process Alarm - Configuration

The Process Alarm is configured as follows:
7 6 5 0 Bit number
Byte 28+n 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 = 0x14
Length of the Process Alarm

including header byte 9 (= 20 bytes)
7 0
Byte 29+n 0x02 Process Alarm
7 0
Byte 30+n x Slot number GSD: 0x01
Byte 31+n 0x00
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit number
Byte 32+n
Detailed messages
Byte 48+n
n = 0; 3; 6
Fig. 12-8: Configuration of the Process Alarm
The first byte of the block for Process Alarms can be moved by 3 or 6 bytes
depending on the number of blocks for the Channel-related Diagnosis.
Detailed information can be found in Chapter A.5 "Detailed Events of the

Slave Diagnostics".
SIMOCODE pro
12-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Communication
12.4 Integration of SIMOCODE pro in the DP Master

Systems
12.4.1 Slave Operating Modes
The following table shows an overview of the slave operating modes which
SIMOCODE pro can be operated with on the class 1 master:
Class 1 master
SIMOCODE pro DP master DP master S7 master

connected as: manufacturer- manufacturer-
independent, independent,
without DPV1 alarms with DPV1 alarms
• DPV1 slave • Cyclic Data • Cyclic Data • Cyclic Data

via GSD exchange exchange exchange
• Standard Diagnosis • Standard Diagnosis • Standard Diagnosis
• Status Information • Status Information • Status Information
• Parameterization • Process and • Process and
during startup (only Diagnosis Alarm Diagnosis Alarm
BU1) • Parameterization • Parameterization
• Acyclic writing and during startup (only during startup (only
reading of DPV1 BU1) BU1)
Data Records (if • Acyclic writing and • Acyclic writing and
supported by the reading of DPV1 reading of DPV1
master) data records data records
• S7 slave via — — • Cyclic Data

OM exchange
SIMOCODE pro • Standard Diagnosis
• Process and
Diagnosis Alarm
• Parameterization
during startup
• Acyclic writing and
reading of DPV1
data records
Table 12-8: Slave operating modes of SIMOCODE pro
12.4.2 Preparing the Data Transfer
In order to communicate with the class 1 master (PLC), a connection

according to Table 12-8: Slave operating modes of SIMOCODE pro must be
present and the PROFIBUS-DP address must be configured.
See Chapter 14.2.2 "Setting the PROFIBUS DP Address" for more
information about setting the address.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 12-15
Communication
12.4.3 Integration of SIMOCODE pro as a DPV1 Slave via GSD in the

Configuration Software
SIMOCODE pro is connected as a standard slave in your system via the

GSD file.
You can download the GSD file
• From the internet at http://www.siemens.com/profibus-gsd (under
switchgears)
The following GSD files are available for SIMOCODE pro C:
• SI0180FD.GSG (German)
• SI0180FD.GSE (English)
• SI0180FD.GSF (French).
The following GSD files are available for SIMOCODE pro V:
• SI1180FD.GSG (German)
• SI1180FD.GSE (English)
• SI1180FD.GSF (French).
Notice
If you want to utilize the complete functionality of SIMOCODE pro (e.g.
timestamping), your configuration tool must support GSD files - Rev. 5 such
as e.g. STEP7 V5.3 and higher.
The following table describes how to integrate the GSD file in SIMATIC S7
and SIMOCODE pro from the hardware catalog.
Step STEP7, V5.1+SP2 onwards

1 Start STEP 7 and in the HW configuration select the menu command
"Extras > Install new GSD file".
2 In the following dialog, select the GSD file to be installed and confirm
with "OK" -->. The field device is displayed in the hardware catalog in the
"PROFIBUS DP" directory under "Further field devices > Switching devices
> SIMOCODE pro".
3 Enter "SIMOCODE pro C" or "SIMOCODE pro V" on the PROFIBUS.
4 Only for SIMOCODE pro V:
SIMOCODE pro V can be connected in two basic types (basic type 1 or
basic type 2). See Chapter 12.3.1 "Cyclic Data".
Insert the desired basic type "Basic type 1" or "Basic type 2" as a module.
5 Check the set DP alarm mode (DPV0 or DPV1) as well as the release of
the DPV-1 Alarms in the properties of the DP slave.
These settings influence the evaluation of the Diagnosis Data and the
Alarms (see Chapter 12.5 "Evaluating Diagnosis Data" and Chapter 10.9
"Timestamping").
6 Only for SIMOCODE pro C:
It is possible to set the device parameters which are automatically
transmitted to SIMOCODE pro during every startup in the object
properties under "Parameterization > Device-specific Parameters" (see
Chapter 12.7.3 "Parameter Data During Startup").
Table 12-9: Integration of SIMOCODE pro as DPV1 slave via GSD in the Configuration Software
SIMOCODE pro
12-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Communication
12.4.4 Integration of SIMOCODE pro as SIMATIC PDM Object (DPV-1 Slave via
GSD) in STEP7-HW Config
SIMOCODE pro can be integrated as a PDM-Object in the STEP7-

HW Config of the SIMATIC PDM (Process Device Manager) software from
version 6.0 + SP1 onwards. The PDM option "Integration in STEP 7" is
required for this.
The following table describes how you can insert SIMOCODE pro as a PDM
object in the STEP7-HW Config from the hardware catalog.
Step STEP7, V5.1+SP2 onwards
1 Start STEP 7 and open the "HW Config".
2 To integrate SIMOCODE pro as a PDM object, navigate in the hardware

catalog in the "PROFIBUS DP > Devices" directory.
3 Enter
"SIMOCODE pro C (PDM)" or
"SIMOCODE pro V (PDM)" on the PROFIBUS.
Only for SIMOCODE pro V:
Enter the desired basic type "Basic type 1" or "Basic type 2" as a module.
4 Check the set DP alarm mode (DPV0 or DPV1) as well as the enable of the
DPV-1 alarms in the properties of the DP slave.
These settings influence the evaluation of the diagnosis data and the
alarms (see Chapter 12.5 "Evaluating Diagnosis Data" and Chapter 10.9
"Timestamping").
5 Start SIMATIC PDM to create the device parameters by double clicking on

the slave symbol (see Chapter 12.7.2 "SIMATIC PDM").
Table 12-10: Integration of SIMOCODE pro as SIMATIC PDM Object (DPV-1 Slave via GSD) in
STEP7-HW Config
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 12-17
Communication
12.4.5 Integration of SIMOCODE pro as S7 Slave via OM SIMOCODE pro
The "OM SIMOCODE pro" software must be installed to utilize the

advantages of SIMOCODE ES Professional to parameterize SIMOCODE pro
from the STEP7-HW Config. OM SIMOCODE pro is included in the scope of
supply of the "SIMOCODE ES Professional" software.
Install the corresponding software.
The following table describes how you can insert SIMOCODE pro in
the STEP7-HW Config from the hardware catalog.
Step STEP7
1 Start STEP 7 and open the "HW Config".
2 To integrate SIMOCODE pro as an S7 slave, navigate in the hardware

catalog in the "PROFIBUS DP > Devices > Motor Management System"
directory.
3 Enter
SIMOCODE pro C, SIMOCODE pro V (basic type 1) or
SIMOCODE pro V (basic type 2) on the PROFIBUS.
Only for SIMOCODE pro V:
Insert the desired basic type "Basic type 1" or "Basic type 2" as a module.
4 Start the "SIMOCODE ES Professional" software to create the device

parameters with the "Parameters" button under "Parameters" in the object
properties of slot 4 of this S7 slave. The created parameters are
incorporated in STEP7 and are automatically transmitted to
SIMOCODE pro during startup (see Chapter 12.7.3 "Parameter Data
During Startup").
Table 12-11: Integration of SIMOCODE pro as S7 Slave via OM SIMOCODE pro
SIMOCODE pro
12-18 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Communication
12.5 Evaluating Diagnosis Data

The way in which the Diagnosis Data is read out depends on which DP
master system you have integrated in SIMOCODE pro and how the
integration was carried out (see Chapter 12.4 "Integration of SIMOCODE pro
in the DP Master Systems").
12.5.1 SIMOCODE pro Integrated with GSD
DP master with DPV1 alarm support (DPV1 alarm mode)

(e.g. all new SIMATIC S7-300/400-DP master systems)
The Diagnosis Data is transmitted and evaluated via Diagnosis Alarms in DP
master systems with DPV1 alarm support.
A precondition is that the alarms in the PROFIBUS configuration tool
(diagnosis alarms, process alarms) are enabled.
You can ascertain in which DP alarm mode the integration has been carried
out and whether the alarms are enabled using the configuration tool in the
properties of the DP slave. In SIMATIC STEP7 this is carried out in HW
Config via the properties of the DP slave.
• Response and process in STEP7
A Diagnosis Alarm (OB 82) is triggered in the CPU for every new diagnosis of
a device error, whereas a Process Alarm (OB 40) is triggered for every new
diagnosis triggered by Trips/Warnings/Events. If the OB 82 or the OB 40 is
not programmed, the CPU goes into the "STOP" mode.
• Alarms from a DPV1 slave received with STEP7
The alarms are read directly in OB 82 or OB 40 with the SFB 54 "RALRM".
The data region which is addressed with the SFB 54 via the "AINFO"
parameter contains written alarm information in Section "Diagnosis Alarm -
Configuration" and in Section "Process Alarm - Configuration". The first byte
which is read corresponds to byte 28.
Note
The interface of the SFB 54 "RALRM" is identical to the interface of the FB
"RALRM" as defined in the "PROFIBUS Guideline PROFIBUS
Communication and Proxy Function Blocks according to IEC 61131-3"
standard.
You will find further information about SFB 54 in the STEP7 online help.
DP master without DPV1 alarm support (DPV1 alarm mode)

(e.g. all older SIMATIC S7-300/400-DP master systems)
The SIMOCODE pro Diagnosis Data can be evaluated via device-specific
diagnosis (status Information) as well as a Channel-related Diagnosis as part
of extended diagnosis in DP master systems
(see Chapter 12.3.3 "Configuration of the Slave Diagnosis").
You can ascertain in which DP alarm mode the integration has been carried
out using the configuration tool in the properties of the DP slave.
The device-specific diagnosis contains detailed information about Trips,
Warnings and Events which are recorded by the process via
SIMOCODE pro, while information about Trips which concern the hardware
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 12-19
Communication
of the device are transmitted via the Channel-related Diagnosis.

• Response and process in STEP7:
The OB 82 in the CPU is started for every new diagnosis (diagnosis triggered
by Device Fault, Diagnosis triggered by Trips/Warnings/Events). If the OB 82
is not programmed, the CPU goes into the "STOP" mode.
• Reading out the slave diagnosis with STEP7
It can be ascertained which DP slave has transmitted Diagnosis Data by
evaluating the start information of the OB82 ("OB82_MDL_ADDR" variable).
OB82_MDL_ADDR corresponds to the configured diagnosis address of the
slave in the HW Config. The Diagnosis Data is then read, e.g. in the cyclic
part of the user program with the SFC 13 "DPNRM_DG".
The Diagnosis Data which is read with the SFC 13 corresponds to the
configuration described in Chapter 12.3.3 "Configuration of the Slave
Diagnosis".
You will find further information about SFC 13 in the STEP7 online help.
12.5.2 Integration of SIMOCODE pro in SIMATIC S7 with OM SIMOCODE ES
The Diagnosis Data about the Diagnosis Alarms and Process Alarms is
transmitted and evaluated during the integration of SIMOCODE pro as an
S7 slave.
DP masters which are operated in "DPV1" DP mode

(e.g. all new SIMATIC S7-300/400-DP master systems)
Response and process in STEP7:
A Diagnosis Alarm (OB 82) is triggered in the CPU for every new diagnosis
of a device error, whereas a Process Alarm (OB 40) is triggered for every
new diagnosis triggered by Trips/Warnings/Events.
If the OB 82 or the OB 40 is not programmed, the CPU goes into the "STOP"
mode.
• Alarms from a DPV1 slave received with STEP7:
The alarms are read directly in OB 82 or OB 40 with the SFB 54 "RALRM".
The data region which is addressed with the SFB 54 via the "AINFO"
parameter contains the alarm information described in Section "Diagnosis
Alarm - Configuration" and Section "Process Alarm - Configuration". The first
byte which is read corresponds to byte 28.
You will find further information about SFB 54 in the STEP7 online help.
DP masters which are operated in "S7 compatible" DP mode (e.g. all older SIMATIC
S7-300/400-DP master systems)
Response and process in STEP7:
A Diagnosis Alarm (OB 82) is triggered in the CPU for every new diagnosis
of a device error, whereas a Process Alarm (OB 40) is triggered for every
new diagnosis triggered by Trips/Warnings/Events.
If the OB 82 or the OB 40 is not programmed, the CPU goes into the "STOP"
mode.
You will find more information about device errors in the start information of
the OB 82 in the "OB82_MDL_DEFECT" variable.
The start information of the OB 40 contains the "OB40_POINT_ADDR"
variable, which in turn contains the data of the Process Alarm that is
SIMOCODE pro
12-20 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Communication
described in bytes 32 to 35 (see Section "Process Alarm - Configuration").

The reading of the complete diagnosis can then be initiated from the OB 40
(for example), while the complete diagnosis data record 92 is read, e.g. in
the cyclic user program with the SFC 59 "RD_REC".
You will find further information about SFC 59 in the STEP7 online help.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 12-21
Communication
12.6 Data Records

Data records contain additional information about the DP slave which can
only be read or partly written.
These data records can be accessed for reading and writing via cyclic DPV1
functions. This makes it possible, for example, to operate, monitor and
parameterize SIMOCODE pro.
You can use these functions if they are supported by the DP master. You will
find an overview of the data records provided by SIMOCODE pro in
Chapter B "Data Formats and Data Records".
Special function blocks must be started in the user program in the PLC for
access to the DPV1 data records unlike access to cyclic I/O data.
Access to data records in STEP7

Reading and writing access to data records is gained by starting the system
functions SFC 59 "RD_REC" and SFC 58 "WR_REC" or at the CPU which
supports the "DPV1" mode with the system function blocks SFB 52 "RDREC"
and SFB 53 "WRREC".
Note
The interface of the SFB 52 "RDREC" and the SFB 53 "WRREC" is identical to
the FB "RDREC" and "WRREC" as defined in the "PROFIBUS Guideline
PROFIBUS Communication and Proxy Function Blocks according to IEC
61131-3" standard.
You will find further information about SFB and SFC in the STEP7 online
help.
SIMOCODE pro
12-22 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Communication
12.7 Parameterization via PROFIBUS

12.7.1 SIMOCODE ES Professional
With SIMOCODE ES Professional you can parameterize all the

SIMOCODE pro devices which are connected to the same PROFIBUS DP
network from a central location. Parameter data which has been previously
created with the software can therefore be transmitted directly to
SIMOCODE pro via PROFIBUS DP.
Note
A PC with a system connection for PROFIBUS (e.g. SIMATIC NET CP 5512
or CP 5611) is required to carry out online functions via PROFIBUS DP, e.g.
transfer of SIMOCODE pro parameters.
The above-mentioned system connections for PROFIBUS are operated

together with SIMOCODE ES Professional as a class 2 master and use
acyclic DPV1 communication functions for the communication with
SIMOCODE pro.
Notice
The startup parameter block (Device Parameter > Bus Parameter) must
always be set for this form of parameterization to avoid overwriting the
device parameters with any existing parameter data during startup.
12.7.2 SIMATIC PDM
The standard version of SIMATIC PDM (PDM Basic) provides you with a
comparable functionality to SIMOCODE ES Professional for
parameterization of SIMOCODE pro via PROFIBUS:
The following additional functions are available with the PDM option
"Integration in STEP7":
• "Offline Saving" of SIMOCODE pro parameter data in the STEP7 project and
manual transmission (no automatic transfer of parameter data during
startup!)
• "Routing via S7 Stations".
Example: Parameterization of all SIMOCODE pro devices from a central
engineering station, together with hardware components which provide a
data record gateway (CP443-5 Extended, IE/PB link), also in connection with
different networks.
Notice
The startup parameter block (Device Parameter > Bus Parameter) must
always be set for this form of parameterization to avoid overwriting the
device parameters with any existing parameter data during startup.
You will find further information about SIMATIC PDM in the SIMATIC-PDM
manual.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 12-23
Communication
12.7.3 Parameter Data During Startup
Parameters are transferred to the device during every startup of

SIMOCODE pro on PROFIBUS DP.
Depending on the master module and the type of integration used, either
standard parameters or standard parameters and device-specific
parameters (SIMOCODE pro parameters) are transferred. The parameters
are saved in the PLC or in the DP master and are transferred automatically
to the DP slave during the system startup.
You can set the device-specific parameters
• with the configuration tool when the GSD (BU1 only) is loaded, e.g. with
STEP7-HW Config. This possibility is available for SIMOCODE pro C. The
SIMOCODE pro parameter is created by configuring the device-specific
parameters in the slave properties.
• in the "SIMOCODE ES Professional" software during the integration of
SIMOCODE pro in STEP7 HW Config as a S7 slave via OM SIMOCODE pro.
This possibility is available for SIMOCODE pro C and SIMOCODE pro V. You
can start the "SIMOCODE ES Professional" software for easy configuration of
the parameterization from STEP7-HW Config using the button in the
"Parameter" tab in the object properties of slot 4.
Notice
In order to be able to carry out the device parameterization during startup,
the startup parameter block ("Device Parameter > Bus Parameter") must
remain unset.
SIMOCODE pro is then parameterized with the device-specific parameters
stored in the DP master, and any existing parameters in the device are
overwritten.
12.8 Timestamping/Time Synchronization

See Chapter 10.9 "Timestamping".
SIMOCODE pro
12-24 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces 13
In this chapter
This chapter contains information about mounting and wiring individual
SIMOCODE pro components.
Target groups
• Technicians
• Electricians
• Maintenance and service personnel.
Necessary knowledge
• Basic general knowledge about SIMOCODE pro.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 13-1
Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces
13.1 General Information about Mounting and Wiring

Safety guidelines
Warning
Dangerous electrical voltage! Can cause electric shock and
burning. Ensure the system and the device are disconnected from voltage
before beginning work.
Notice
Observe the information contained in the operating instructions.
Mounting lugs for screw attachment
Notice
For technical reasons, there are two different mounting lugs for the screw
attachment:
For Basic Units, Expansion Modules,
Decoupling Module: Order No. 3RP1903
For Current Measuring Modules and
Current/Voltage Measuring Modules,
45 mm and 55 mm width: Order No. 3RP1900-0B
Removable terminals
Notice
The removable terminals are mechanically coded and will only fit in a certain
position!
SIMOCODE pro
13-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
13.2 Mounting
13.2.1 Basic Units, Expansion Modules and Decoupling Module
You can attach these system components as follows:

• Snap-on mounting onto a 35-mm standard mounting rail, without tools
• Snap-on mounting of the Basic Units onto Current Measuring Modules of 45
mm and 55 mm width (up to 100 A) with integrated standard mounting rail
• Screw attachment with mounting lugs (Order No:3RP1903) and screws on a
level surface.
These mounting lugs are only suitable for Basic Units, Expansion Modules
and the Decoupling Module!
Snap-on mounting onto standard mounting rails

SIMOCODE pro C SIMOCODE pro V Expansion Module,
with increased install. depth Decoupling Module
BU1 BU2
Snap-on mounting onto a Current Measuring Module

e.g. a 45-mm wide Current Measuring Module with BU1
Standard mounting rail
Screw attachment
3RP1903 3RP1903
Ø 5 mm
Ø 5 mm
Fig. 13-1: Mounting of Basic Unit, Expansion Modules and the Decoupling Module
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 13-3
13.2.2 Current Measuring Modules

• Current measuring modules up to 100 A: Standard mounting rail mounting or
screw attachment with mounting lugs (Order No: 3RP1903-0B) and screws on
a level surface. These mounting lugs are only suitable for Current Measuring
Modules (and Current/Voltage Measuring Modules)! For Current Measuring
Modules up to 25 A you will require an additional 25-mm spacer.
• Current Measuring Modules up to 200 A: Standard mounting rail mounting or
screw attachment.
• Current Measuring Modules up to 630 A: Screw attachment.
3UF7000-1AU00-0 0.3 A up to 3 A 3UF7102-1AA00-0

3UF7101-1AA00-0 2.4 A up to 25 A 10 A up to 100 A
Snap-on mounting
45 mm width 55 mm width
Screw attachment
3RP1900-0B 25-mm spacer 3RP1900-0B
3UF7103-1AA00-0 3UF7103-1BA00-0 3UF7104-1BA00-0

20 A up to 200 A 20 A up to 200 A 63 A up to 630 A
Snap-on mounting or Snap-on mounting or Screw attachment
screw attachment screw attachment
Fig. 13-2: Mounting the Current Measuring Modules
SIMOCODE pro
13-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
13.2.3 Current/Voltage Measuring Modules

• Current/Voltage Measuring Modules up to 100 A: Standard mounting rail
mounting or screw attachment with mounting lugs (Order No: 3RP1903-0B)
and screws on a level surface. These mounting lugs are only suitable for
Current/Voltage Measuring Modules (and Current Measuring Modules)! For
Current/Voltage Measuring Modules up to 25 A you will require an additional
25-mm spacer.
• Current/Voltage Measuring Modules up to 200 A: Standard mounting rail
mounting or screw attachment.
• Current/Voltage Measuring Modules up to 630 A: Screw attachment.
3UF7101-1AA00-0 0.3 A up to 3 A 3UF7101-1AA00-0

3UF7111-1AA00-0 2.4 A up to 25 A 10 A up to 100 A
Snap-on mounting
45 mm width 55 mm width
Screw attachment
3RP1900-0B 25-mm spacer 3RP1900-0B
3UF7101-1AA00-0 3UF7113-1BA00-0 3UF7114-1BA00-0

20 A up to 200 A 20 A up to 200 A 63 A up to 630 A
Snap-on mounting or Snap-on mounting or Screw attachment
screw attachment screw attachment
Fig. 13-3: Mounting the Current/Voltage Measuring Modules
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 13-5
13.2.4 Operator Panel and Operator Panel with Display
Operator panels are designed to be installed e.g. in the front panels of

motor control centers or in switchgear cabinet doors.
Install as follows:
Step Description
1 Make a cutout, e.g. in the front panel or switchgear cabinet door. Dimensions
(see Fig. 13-4 and 13-5).
2 Position the operator Panel or the Operator Panel with Display in the cutout.
3 Snap the four mounting brackets onto the Operator Panel
4 Lock the Operator Panel in position by tightening the four mounting bracket
screws.
Table 13-1: Sequence for installing the Operator Panel / Operator Panel with Display
Operator Panel Mounting bracket

4x
Cutout
90+0.5
Front panel
30+0.5
switchgear
cabinet door, etc.
Fig. 13-4: Mounting the Operator Panel
SIMOCODE pro
13-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Operator Panel with Display Mounting bracket
Cutout
91,5+0.5
54,5+0.5
Fig. 13-5: Mounting the Operator Panel with Display
Warning
To ensure IP54 tightness and the correct functionality of the Operator Panel,
the tightening torque of the screws provided should not be set too high
when mounting.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 13-7
13.2.5 Exchanging a 3UF52 Operator Panel for a 3UF720 Operator Panel
To exchange a 3UF52 Operator Panel for the smaller 3UF720 Operator

Panel, proceed as follows:
Step Description
1 Unscrew the four mounting bracket screws and remove the 3UF52 Operator
Panel from the front panel or switchgear cabinet door.
2 Ensure that the dimensions of the cutout in the front panel or switchgear
cabinet door measure 91.5 +0.5 mm (width) and 54.5+0.5 mm (height)
(see Fig. 13-6).
3 Slide the seal provided onto the Operator Panel Adapter (see Fig. 13-6).
4 Position the Operator Panel Adapter in the cutout.
5 Position the Operator Panel in the Adapter.
6 Snap the four mounting brackets onto the Operator Panel
7 Lock the Operator Panel in position by tightening the four mounting bracket
screws (see Fig. 13-7 and safety guidelines!).
Table 13-2: Exchanging a 3UF52 Operator Panel for a 3UF720 Operator Panel
4x
Fig. 13-6: Mounting the Operator Panel Adapter (1)
SIMOCODE pro
13-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
IP 54
Fig. 13-7: Mounting the Operator Panel Adapter (2)
Warning
To ensure IP54 tightness and the correct functionality of the Operator Panel,
the tightening torque of the screws provided should not be set too high
when mounting.
Notice
A SIMOCODE pro 3UF7 system operator panel can not be used with
SIMOCODE-DP 3UF5, and vice versa.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 13-9
13.3 Wiring
13.3.1 Basic Units, Expansion Modules and Decoupling Module
Basic Units, Expansion Modules and the Decoupling Module have
removable terminals. You do not have to detach the wiring to exchange
these devices!
Removable terminals
Basic Units Expansion Modules/
Decoupling Module
D D
C C
A A
A, C, D: Coding
Fig. 13-8: Removable terminals on Basic Units, Expansion Modules and the Decoupling Module
Notice
The removable terminals are mechanically coded and will only fit in a certain
position!
Cables
The cable cross sections are the same for all devices. The following table
shows cable cross sections, stripping lengths and tightening torques of the
cables for the removable terminals:
Removable terminals Screwdriver Tightening torque
PZ2/ TORQUE: 7 LB/IN: - 10.3 LB/IN.

Ø 5 mm - 6 mm 0.8 Nm - 1.2 Nm
Stripping lengths Cable cross section
10 Solid 2 x 0.5 mm2 - 2.5 mm2 /

1 x 0.5 mm2 - 4 mm2
2 x AWG 20 to 14 / 1 x AWG 20 to 12
10 Finely stranded 2 x 0.5 mm2- 1.5 mm2 /

with/without 1 x 0.5 mm2- 2.5 mm2
wire end ferrule 2 x AWG 20 to 16 / 1 x AWG 20 to 14
Table 13-3: Cable cross sections, stripping lengths and tightening torques of the cables
SIMOCODE pro
13-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Supplying the Inputs of the Basic Unit

There are three possibilities for supplying the Inputs:
• a): 24 V DC internal
• b): 24 V DC external However, Input 3 is the reference potential, i.e.
three Inputs are available.
• c): 24 V DC external Only possible for Basic Units with a supply voltage of
24 V DC!
a) b) c)
24 V DC internal, 4 Inputs usable 24 V DC external, 3 Inputs usable 24 V DC external, 4 Inputs usable
Basic Unit (BU) Basic Unit (BU) Basic Unit (BU)
BU Inputs BU Inputs BU Inputs
IN1 1 IN1 1 IN1 1

IN2 2 IN2 2 IN2 2
IN3 3 IN3 3 IN3 3
(not usable)
IN4 4 IN4 4 IN4 4
A1
24 V DC
A2
Only possible for the Basic Unit with

24 V DC supply voltage!
Fig. 13-9: 24 V DC for supplying the Inputs
All inputs work reactionless, i.e. the signal statuses on neighboring inputs
do not influence each other.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 13-11
Basic Unit pin assignment

The following table shows the pin assignment of the removable terminals:
Connection Assignment
Upper terminals
1 Root for Relay Outputs 1 and 2 1 OUT1 2 .2 3 4 IN3 IN4 5 T2
2 Relay Output OUT1

6 OUT3 7 24 V8 9 IN1 IN2 10 T1
3 Relay Output OUT2
ϑ
4 Digital Input IN3
5 Digital Input IN4 SIMOCODE PRO
T2 Thermistor connection (binary PTC)
6 Relay Output OUT3 DEVICE

BUS
7 Relay Output OUT3
GEN. FAULT
8 24 V DC only for IN1 to IN4
9 Digital Input IN1
10 Digital Input IN2 TEST/
PROFIBUS DP
RESET
T1 Thermistor connection (binary PTC)
Lower terminals
A1 Pin 1 supply voltage
A2 Pin 2 supply voltage
A PROFIBUS DP Pin A
B PROFIBUS DP Pin B A1 A2 A B SPE/PE
SPE/PE Shielded/PE
Table 13-4: Pin assignment for the removable terminals of the Basic Unit
Sequence for wiring the removable terminals for Basic Units

Proceed as follows:
Step Description
1 Connect the cables to the upper and lower terminals.
2 If you wish to use the A/B terminals for PROFIBUS DP, connect the
PROFIBUS DP cable-shielding to the SPE/PE terminal.
Notice
The A/B terminals are an alternative to the 9-pole SUB-D connection! Baud
rates of up to 1.5 MBit/s are possible!
3 Connect the system shielding to the SPE/PE terminal.
Table 13-5: Wiring the removable terminals of the Basic Unit
SIMOCODE pro
13-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Basic Unit connection example
b)
a)
T1 T2 9 10 4 5 8
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 24 V
1
OUT1
Device 2
OUT2
Bus
3
Gen. Fault
6
OUT3
7
PROFIBUS DP
A1 A2 A B SPE/PE
Max. 1.5 MBd
Fig. 13-10: Basic Unit connection example
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 13-13
Supplying the Digital Module Inputs

• Digital Module with 24 V DC input supply
• Digital Module with 110 to 240 V AC/DC input supply
24 V DC external 110 V up to 240 V AC/DC external
Digital Module (DM) Digital Module (DM)
N/M
DM Inputs N/M
DM Inputs
~
IN1 1 IN1 1
IN2 2 IN2 2
IN3 3 IN3 3
IN4 4 IN4 4
Fig. 13-11: Supplying the Digital Module Inputs
Digital Module pin assignment

Connection Assignment
Upper terminals
20 Root for Relay Outputs 1 and 2 20 OUT1 21 .2 22
21 Relay Output OUT1

23 IN1 IN2 24 25
22 Relay Output OUT2
23 Digital Input IN1
25 N/M for IN1 to IN4
Lower terminals
PE PE
READY
26 IN3 IN4 27 PE
Table 13-6: Pin assignment of the removable terminals of the Digital Module
SIMOCODE pro
13-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Digital Module connection example
~ AC
+
DC
–
23 IN1 24 IN2 26 IN3 27 IN4 25 N/M
20
Ready 21
OUT1
22
OUT2
PE
Fig. 13-12: Digital Module connection example
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 13-15
Earth-fault Module pin assignment

Connectio Assignment
n
Upper terminals
40 Input C1 Summation Current 40 C1

Transformer
43 Input C2 Summation Current 43 C2

Transformer
Lower terminals
PE PE
READY
EM
3UF7 500–1AA00–0
G/YYMMDD *Exx*
PE
Table 13-7: Pin assignment of the removable terminals of the Earth-fault Module
SIMOCODE pro
13-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Earth-fault Module connection example
L1
L2
L3
N
Z2
3UL22
Z1
*) *) Cable shielding recommended
40 43
C1 C2
Ready
PE
Fig. 13-13: Earth-fault Module connection example
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 13-17
Temperature Module pin assignment

n
Upper terminals
50 Input T3, Temperature Sensor 1 50 1T3 51 2T3 52 3T3

51 Input T3, Temperature Sensor 2
52 Input T3, Temperature Sensor 3 53 1T2 54 2T2 55 3T2
Lower terminals
56 Input T1, Temperature Sensor 1 to 3
57 Input T1, Temperature Sensor 1 to 3
PE Shielded/PE
READY
TM
3UF7 700–1AA00–0
G/YYMMDD *Exx*
56 T1 57 PE
Table 13-8: Pin assignment of the removable terminals of the Temperature Module
You can connect up to three 2-wire or 3-wire Temperature Sensors.

• 2-wire Temperature Sensors:
Bridge the T2 terminals with the T3 terminals.
• 3-wire temperature sensors.
Assign terminals 56 and 57 doubly when three sensors are used.
SIMOCODE pro
13-18 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Temperature Module connection example
3 x max. 3 x max.
1) 2)
ϑ ϑ
*) *) *) Cable shielding recommended.
T1 1T2 1T3 T1 1T2 1T3

T1 2T2 2T3 T1 2T2 2T3
T1 3T2 3T3 T1 3T2 3T3
53 50 54 51 55 52
1T2 2T2 3T2
1T3 2T3 3T3
Ready
T1 T1
56 57 PE
NTC Temperature Sensor:
NTC type: B 57227-K333-A1

Q 63022-K7182-S1 R
Fig. 13-14: Temperature Module connection example
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 13-19
Analog Module pin assignment

n
Upper terminals
30 Analog Input IN1+ 30 IN1+ 31 IN2+
31 Analog Input IN2+

33 IN1- 34 IN2-
Lower terminals
36 Analog Output OUT+
37 Analog Output OUT+
PE PE READY
AM
3UF7 400–1AA00–0
G/YYMMDD *Exx*
36 +OUT- 37 PE
Table 13-9: Pin assignment of the removable terminals of the Analog Module
SIMOCODE pro
13-20 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Analog Module connection example
2 x max. L+
IIN (0/4 mA - 20 mA) + (potential-free current source, e.g. isolating amplifier)
-
*) M
IN1+ IN1-
IN2+ IN2-
30 33 31 34
IN1+ IN1- IN2+ IN2-
Ready
OUT+ OUT-
36 37 PE *) Cable shielding recommended for up to 30 m
*) and for outside of the switchgear cabinet.
+ Cable shielding necessary for over 30 m
RL
IOUT (0/4 A - 20 mA)
-
RL < 500 Ohm
Fig. 13-15: Analog Module connection example
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 13-21
Decoupling Module pin assignment

n
Upper terminals
Lower terminals
PE PE
READY
DCM
3UF7 150–1AA00–0
G/YYMMDD *Exx*
PE
Table 13-10: Pin assignment of the removable terminals of the Decoupling Module
Decoupling Module connection example
Ready
Fig. 13-16: Decoupling Module connection example
Wiring the removable terminals of the Expansion Modules and the Decoupling
Module
Connect the system shielding to the PE terminal.
SIMOCODE pro
13-22 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
13.3.2 Current Measuring Modules
Select a suitable Current Measuring Module for measuring current,

independent of motor current size:
• Through-hole technology up to 200 A: The cables of the three phases are
passed through the through-hole openings.
• Bus connection system from 20 A to 630 A, also for direct connection to
Siemens contactors.
The following table shows the various current measuring modules:
Current Measuring Module Main circuit connection
3UF7000-1AU00-0 Through-hole
0.3 A - 3 A technology
Ø Through-hole
openings: 7.5 mm
3UF7101-1AA00-0
2.4 A - 25 A
Ø Through-hole
openings: 7.5 mm
3UF7102-1AA00-0
10 A - 100 A L1
L2
Ø Through-hole
Ø
L3
N
openings: 14 mm
3UF7103-1AA00-0
20 A - 200 A L1 L2 L3
Ø Through-hole
openings: 25 mm
3UF7103-1BA00-0 Bus connection

20 A - 200 A system
Conductor cross T1 T2 T3
section:
16 mm² - 95 mm², M
3~
AWG 5 to 3/0
3UF7104-1BA00-0
63 A - 630 A
Conductor cross
section:
50 mm² - 240 mm²,
AWG 1/0 kcmil to
500 kcmil
Table 13-11: Current Measuring Modules
Notice
Pay attention to the correct assignment and the correct routing direction
when connecting or routing the cables of the single phases of the main
circuit!
Observe the information in the operating instructions!
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 13-23
13.3.3 Current/Voltage Measuring Modules
Select a suitable Current Measuring Module for measuring current and

voltage, independent of motor current size:
• Through-hole technology up to 200 A: The cables of the three phases are
passed through the through-hole openings.
• Bus connection system from 20 A to 630 A, also for direct connection to
Siemens contactors.
The following figure shows the various Current/Voltage Measuring Modules:
Current/Voltage Measuring Main circuit

Module connection
3UF7101-1AA00-0 Through-hole
0.3 A - 3 A technology
Ø Through-hole
openings: 7.5 mm
3UF7111-1AA00-0
2.4 A - 25 A
Ø Through-hole
openings: 7.5 mm
3UF7101-1AA00-0
10 A - 100 A L1
L2
Ø Through-hole L3
openings: 14 mm N
3UF7101-1AA00-0
20 A - 200 A L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
Ø Through-hole
openings: 25 mm
3UF7113-1BA00-0 Bus connection

20 A up to 200 A system T1 T2 T3
Conductor cross
section: M
16 mm² - 95 mm², 3~
AWG 6 to 3/0
3UF7114-1BA00-0
63 A - 630 A
Conductor cross
section:
50 mm² - 240 mm²,
AWG 1/0 kcmil to
500 kcmil
Table 13-12: Current/Voltage Measuring Modules
SIMOCODE pro
13-24 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Safety guidelines
Note
Measuring of measured values relating to voltage or power:
For Current/Voltage Measuring Modules, connect the main circuit L1, L2, L3
with the connection terminals (L1, L2, L3) of the removable terminals via a
3-core cable. The supply cables may have to have additional cable
protection, for example, via short-circuit proof cable or fuses.
Notice
When connecting or routing the cables of the single phases of the main
circuit, ensure correct assignment of the phases on the Current/Voltage
Measuring Modules and correct routing direction! Observe the information
in the operating instructions!
Removable terminals
The following table shows cable cross sections, stripping lengths and
tightening torques of the cables for the removable terminals:
Removable terminals Screwdriver Tightening torque
PZ2/Ø 5 mm - TORQUE: 7 LB/IN: - 10.3 LB/IN.

6 mm 0.8 Nm - 1.2 Nm
Stripping lengths Cable cross section
10 Solid 2 x 0.5 mm2 - 2.5 mm2 /

1x 0.5 mm2 - 4 mm2
2 x AWG 20 to 14 / 1 x AWG 20 to 12
10 Finely stranded 2 x 0.5 mm2 - 1.5 mm2 /

with/without 1 x 0.5 mm2- 2.5 mm2
end sleeve 2 x AWG 20 to 16 / 1 x AWG 20 to 14
Table 13-13: Cable cross sections, stripping lengths and tightening torques of the cables
The following is a representation of the pin assignment of the removable
terminals:
Lower Upper
L1, L2, L3:
Terminals for connecting the 3-wire
cable of the main circuit
Fig. 13-17: Pin assignment of the terminals of the Current/Voltage Measuring Modules
Caution
The L1 and L3 phases are interchanged on the upper/lower terminals!
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 13-25
13.3.4 Current Measuring with an External Current Transformer (Interposing

Transformer)
Description
SIMOCODE pro can be operated with external current transformers. The
secondary cables of the current transformer are looped through the three
through-hole openings of the Current Measuring Module, and short-
circuited. The secondary current of the external current transformer is the
primary current of the SIMOCODE pro Current Measuring Module.
Notice
If the main circuit is using rated current, the secondary current of the
current transformer must be within the setting range of the Current
Measuring Module used!
Main Circuit Secondary Circuit

L1 L2 L3
K1
K2
Current Measuring Basic Unit
K3 Module 3UF 71 3UF 70
L
M 3UF18 Current Transformer

3~
Fig. 13-18: Current measuring with an external 3UF18 current transformer
Transformation ratio
The transformation ratio is calculated using the following formula:
Primary current (external current transformer)
Transformation ratio =
Secondary current x number of loops n
(ext. current transformer) (current measuring module)
In the following examples, the displayed actual current flowing does not
need to be converted, even when an interposing transformer is used, since
SIMOCODE pro only outputs the proportional value, based upon the
parameterized Set Current Is.
SIMOCODE pro
13-26 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Technical data of the current transformer

• Secondary current: 1A
• Frequency: 50 Hz / 60 Hz
• Transformer rating: Recommended > 2.5 VA, according to the secondary
current and cable length
• Overcurrent factor: 5P10 or 10P10
• Accuracy class: 1
Example 1:
• 3UF1868-3GA00 current transformer:
– Primary current: 820 A at nominal load
– Secondary current: 1 A
• SIMOCODE pro with 3UF7 100-1AA00-0 current measuring module,
Set Current 0.3 to 3 A
This means:
– The secondary current of the current transformer is 1 A at the rated load
and is, therefore, within the 0.3 to 3 A setting range of the Current
Measuring Module used
– The Set Current Is to be parameterized in SIMOCODE pro is 1 A.

L1 L2 L3
K1
Current Measuring
K2
Module 3UF 71 Basic Unit
K3 Setting Range: 3UF 70
L 0.3 A - 3 A

3~
Primary Current at Secondary Current: 1 A Set Current Is: 1 A

Nominal Load: 820 A
Fig. 13-19: Example (1 of 2) for current measuring with an 3UF18 external current transformer
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 13-27
Example 2:
• 3UF1868-3GA00 current transformer:
– Primary current: 205 A at nominal load
– Secondary current: 0.25 A
• SIMOCODE pro with 3UF7 100-1AA00-0 Current Measuring Module,
Set Current 0.3 to 3 A
This means:
– The secondary current of the current transformer is 0.25 A at the rated
load and is, therefore, not within the 0.3 A to 3 A setting range of the
Current Measuring Module used.
– The secondary current must be boosted by multiple looping of the
secondary cables through the through-hole openings of the Current
Measuring Module. Double-looping results in 2 x 0.25 A = 0.5 A.
– The Set Current Is to be parameterized in SIMOCODE pro is 0.5 A.

L1 L2 L3
Double-looping through of the secondary cables
K1
Current Measuring
K2
Module 3UF 71 Basic Unit
K3 Setting Range: 3UF 70
L 0.3 A - 3 A

3~
Primary Current at Secondary Current: 2 x 0.25 A Set Current Is: 0.5 A

Nominal Load: 205 A
Fig. 13-20: Example (2 of 2) for current measuring with an 3UF18 external current transformer
Note
When using Basic Unit 2 (SIMOCODE pro V) from version *E03* onwards,
the Set Current does not have to be converted. It will correspond to the
rated current flowing on the main current side.
Additional entry of the transformation ratio of the current transformer
(interposing transformer) will result in automatic conversion in the device.
SIMOCODE pro
13-28 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
13.4 System Interfaces

13.4.1 General
Please observe the following:

• SIMOCODE pro system components are connected to each other via the
system interfaces.
• Cables of different lengths are available for connecting the system
components.
• The system is always configured according to the Basic Unit. Basic Units have
two system interfaces:
– Bottom: For outgoing connection cables that, in the case of BU1, always
lead to the Current Measuring Module.
– Front: For outgoing connecting cables leading to an Expansion Module
or Operator Panel, or for PC cables, Memory Module or addressing
plugs.
• Current Measuring Modules have one system interface:
– Bottom or front: Incoming connecting cable from the Basic Unit.
• Expansion Modules have 2 interfaces on the front.
– Left: For incoming connecting cable from the upstream Expansion
Module or Basic Unit BU2.
– Right: For outgoing connecting cables leading to an Expansion Module
or Operator Panel, or for PC cables, Memory Modules or addressing
plugs.
• Decoupling Modules have 2 interfaces on the front:
– Left: For incoming connecting cable from the upstream Expansion
Module or Basic Unit BU2.
– Right: Exclusively for the outgoing connection cable to the Current/
Voltage Measuring Module.
• Operator Panels have two system interfaces:
– Front: For PC cables, Memory Modules and addressing plugs.
– Rear side: For incoming connecting cable from the upstream Expansion
Module or Basic Unit.
• System interfaces not in use are closed with the cover.
Warning:
Applies to system interfaces on Operator Panels and on door adapters (IP54
degree of protection):
When using for the first time, press the cover firmly against its stop in the
socket!
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 13-29
Fig. 13-21: Closing the system interface using the system interface cover on the door adapter
Fig. 13-22: Closing the system interface using the system interface cover on the Operator Panel
Fig. 13-23: Closing the system interface using the system interface cover on the Operator Panel
with Display
SIMOCODE pro
13-30 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Example
The following figure shows an example of a SIMOCODE pro V installation:
Basic Unit (BU) Expansion Modules (DM, AM, EM, TM)

Incoming, from
• Expansion Module
• Basic Unit BU2
Outgoing, to
• Current Measuring Module
• Decoupling Module
Outgoing, to Outgoing, to
• Expansion Module • Expansion Module
• Operator Panel • Operator Panel
Current Measuring Module (IM) Operator Panel (OP)

Incoming, from
• upstream Expansion Module
• Basic Unit
UF-01130
Incoming, from
• Basic Unit
SIMOCODE pro V
Basic Unit (BU2) Current Measuring
Module (IM)
Expansion Module
Operator Panel (OP)

UF-01130
Cover
Fig. 13-24: Example of system interfaces
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 13-31
13.4.2 System Interfaces on Basic Units, Expansion Modules, Decoupling

Module, Current Measuring Modules and Current/Voltage Measuring
Modules
The system interfaces are located on the front and bottom of the Basic
Units. Other system components can be connected here
• via a connecting cable, e.g. Digital Modules, Current Measuring Modules
• by plugging them in directly, e.g. addressing plugs and Memory Modules.
System interfaces not in use can be closed using the system interface
cover.
Notice
Only connect system interfaces when disconnected from voltage!
Basic Units Expansion Modules/

Decoupling Module
System
2 System
interfaces Memory Module,
interfaces
Connecting cable addressing plug
system interface cover
Current Measuring Modules
System
interface
Connecting cable
Current/Voltage Measuring Modules
Removable terminals
System
interface
Connecting cable Removable terminals
Fig. 13-25: Connecting system components to the system interface
SIMOCODE pro
13-32 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Sequence for connecting cables to the system interface

Proceed as follows:
Step Description
1 Place the plug in the plug shaft, keeping it is as straight as possible. Ensure
that the catches on the plug shaft above the plug housing audibly click into
place.
For SIMOCODE pro C, the system interfaces on the bottom can only be
used for the Current Measuring Module!
2 Use the cover to close system interfaces that are not in use
Table 13-14: Connecting to the system interface
Example: SIMOCODE pro C
Catches Color coding
1 3
System interfaces on the

front side and bottom Catches
Connecting
Cover cable
Fig. 13-26: Procedure for connecting to the system interfaces
Safety Guidelines
Notice
For SIMOCODE pro C, the system interfaces on the bottom can only be
used for the Current Measuring Module!
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 13-33
Notice
Only a Current/Voltage Measuring Module may be connected to the system
interface on the right of the Decoupling Module. Memory Module,
addressing plugs or PC cables will not be recognized there.
Notice
Observe the color coding for the connection cable (see diagram)!
SIMOCODE pro
13-34 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
13.4.3 System Interfaces on the Operator Panel and the Operator Panel with
Display
The Operator Panel has two system interfaces:

• Rear side system interface. This is not normally accessible on an integrated
Operator Panel. The incoming cable from the Basic Unit or Expansion Module
is always connected here.
• Front system interface. This is normally accessible on an integrated Operator
Panel. Components are only connected directly when needed, and removed
again after use.
These can be:
– Memory Module
– Addressing plug
– PC cable for connecting a PC/programming device
– Cover (if the system interface is not in use).
Rear system interface Front system interface
Connecting cable
E.g. Memory Module
Fig. 13-27: System interfaces on the Operator Panel
Rear system interface Front system interface
E.g. Memory Module
Fig. 13-28: System interfaces on the Operator Panel with Display
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 13-35
Sequence for connecting cables to the system interface of the Operator Panel and the
Operator Panel with Display
Proceed as follows:
Step Description
1 Place the plug in the plug shaft, keeping it is as straight as possible. Ensure
that the catches on the plug shaft above the plug housing audibly click into
place.
The incoming connecting cable is connected to the rear side.
2 Use the cover to close system interfaces that are not in use
Table 13-15: Connecting system components to the system interface
Notice
In order to ensure IP54 degree of protection, press the cover firmly against
its stop in the socket when using for the first time (see figure!).
When mounting the Operator Panel using the screws provided, ensure the
tightening torque is not set too high.
Note
Throughout connection, you can place the cover on one of the two "park
positions" (see Fig. 13-29).
Notice
Observe the color coding for the connection cable (see diagram)!
SIMOCODE pro
13-36 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Front
Cover Park pos.
Rear
Catches
1
1
2
Catches 0
Color coding
Connecting cable
Fig. 13-29: Sequence for connecting cables to the system interface of the Operator Panel
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 13-37
Front
Cover
Park position
Rear
Fig. 13-30: Sequence for connecting cables to the system interface of the Operator Panel with
Display
SIMOCODE pro
13-38 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
13.5 PROFIBUS DP to a 9-Pole SUB-D Socket

The PROFIBUS DP can only be connected to the Basic Unit.
Notice
The 9-pole SUB-D connection is an alternative to the A/B terminals!
Sequence for connecting PROFIBUS DP to the Basic Unit

Proceed as follows:
Step Description
1 Connect the PROFIBUS DP cable with the 9-pole SUB-D plug to the
PROFIBUS DP interface.
Table 13-16: Wiring the removable terminals of the Digital Module
Example: SIMOCODE pro C
9-pole
SUB-D plug
PROFIBUS DP interface
9-pole SUB-D socket
PROFIBUS DP cable
Fig. 13-31: Connecting the PROFIBUS DP to the 9-pole SUB-D socket
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 13-39
13.6 Installation Guidelines for the PROFIBUS DP

Specifications
The key data contained in this chapter is valid for Siemens products and
cables.
PROFIBUS User Organization (PUO) installation guidelines

For electrical PROFIBUS networks, please also adhere to the
PROFIBUS DP/FMS installation guidelines of the PROFIBUS User
Organization. They contain important information about the cable
arrangement and commissioning of
PROFIBUS networks.
Publisher:
PROFIBUS User Organization e. V.
Haid-und-Neu-Strasse 7
76131 Karlsruhe, Germany
Tel.: ++721 / 9658 590

Fax: ++721 / 9658 589
Internet: http://www.profibus.com
Guidelines, Order No. 2.111
See also the "SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS Networks" manual at

http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/1971286.
Application of bus termination modules

The 3UF1900-1K.00 bus termination module is primarily intended for use in
MCC motor feeders. It provides correct bus termination, even for removed
MCC plug-in units. The bus termination module can also be utilized when a
(SUB-D) standard plug cannot be used for the last device on a bus line.
The 3UF1900-1KA00 bus termination module may also be connected to 220/
230 V, 380/400 V, 115/120 V or 24 V AC. The 3UF1900-1KB00 version can be
used for 24VDC.
Fig. 13-32: Bus termination module
SIMOCODE pro
13-40 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Commissioning and Service 14
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information about how SIMOCODE pro is
commissioned, how components are replaced and how statistics are read.
Target groups
• Commissioners
• Technicians
Necessary knowledge
• General basic knowledge about SIMOCODE pro, e.g. from Chapter 1
• SIMOCODE ES software.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 14-1
Commissioning and Service
14.1 General Information about Commissioning and Service

Safety Guidelines
Warning
Dangerous electrical voltage! Can cause electric shock and burning. Ensure
the system and the device are disconnected from voltage before beginning
work.
Notice
Observe the information contained in the operating instructions.
Prerequisites
The following prerequisites must be fulfilled for commissioning and
servicing:
• SIMOCODE pro is already mounted and wired
• The motor is switched off.
Notes on parameterizing
You can parameterize SIMOCODE pro as follows:
• With the Memory Module in which the parameters of a Basic Unit have
already been saved. The Memory Module is plugged into the system
interface. If the Memory Module is connected to the system interface and
the supply voltage returns to the Basic Unit, the Basic Unit will be
automatically parameterized by the Memory Module. The parameters can
also be loaded into the Basic Unit from the Memory Module by briefly
pressing the Test/Reset button.
• With the SIMOCODE ES software via serial interface.
The PC/programming device is connected to the system interface with the
PC cable.
• With an automation system and/or SIMOCODE ES software via
PROFIBUS DP. For this, the PROFIBUS DP cable should be connected to the
PROFIBUS DP interface of the Basic Unit.
Commissioning options
There are two commissioning options:
1. Normal case: SIMOCODE pro has not yet been parameterized and still has
the factory settings:
When connected to PROFIBUS DP, the "bus" LED flashes green when a
DP-master is connected.
2. SIMOCODE pro has already been parameterized:
– The parameters have already been loaded into the Basic Unit.
– The parameters from a previous application still exist. Check whether
the parameters (e.g. the set current) apply to the new application.
Change these accordingly, if necessary.
SIMOCODE pro
14-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
14.2 Commissioning
14.2.1 Sequence
Please observe the information in the previous Chapter "General Information

about Commissioning and Service" on Page 14-2.
To commission SIMOCODE pro, proceed as follows:
Step Description
1 Switch on the supply voltage. In a fault-free state, the following LEDS should
light up or flash green:
• "Device" (lights up)
• "Bus" if PROFIBUS DP is connected (lights up or flashes).
Continue with Step 2.
Otherwise, carry out diagnosis according to the LED display.
You will find further information in Chapter 14.2.3 "Diagnosis via LED Display".
Try to rectify the fault.
2 If you wish to make SIMOCODE pro available on the PROFIBUS DP, set the
PROFIBUS DP address. You will find further information about this in Chapter
"Setting the PROFIBUS DP Address" on Page 14-4.
3 Parameterize SIMOCODE pro or check the existing parameterization e.g. with

a PC via SIMOCODE ES software.
For this, connect the PC/programming device to the system interface with the
PC cable (see the diagram below).
Notice
For basic unit 1 (SIMOCODE pro C), only use the front system interface!
Table 14-1: Commissioning the Basic Unit
PC cable,
Order No. 3UF7940-0AA00-0
Fig. 14-1: Connecting a PC to the Basic Unit
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 14-3
14.2.2 Setting the PROFIBUS DP Address
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via the addressing plug
Note:
This setting cannot be carried out if the Test/Reset button has been blocked.
Proceed as follows:
Step Description
1 Set desired valid address on the DIP switch.

The switches are numbered.
Example address 21: Put the "16"+"4"+"12" switches in the "ON" position.
2 Plug the addressing plug into the system interface. The "Device" LED lights
up yellow.
3 Briefly press the Test/Reset button. The set address is accepted. The
"Device" LED flashes yellow for approx. 3 seconds.
4 Pull out the addressing plug from the system interface.
Table 14-2: Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via the addressing plug
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via SIMOCODE ES

Proceed as follows:
Step Description

3 Open the menu Switchgear > Open Online.
4 Select RS232 and the corresponding COM interface.
Press OK to confirm.
5 Open the dialog Device Parameters > Bus Parameters.
6 Select the DP address.
7 Save the data in the Basic Unit with
Target System > Load to Switchgear. The address is set.
Table 14-3: Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via SIMOCODE ES
SIMOCODE pro
14-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
14.2.3 Diagnosis via LED Display
The Basic Units and the Operating Panel have three LEDs for displaying
specific device states:
LED Status Display Description Corrective measures for

faults
Device Device Green Device ready for use —
status Green Internal fault Send back the Basic
flickering Unit
Yellow Memory Module or —
addressing plug
recognized, Test/Reset
buttons control the
Memory Module or
addressing plug
Yellow Memory Module / —
flashing addressing plug read in;
factory settings
configured (duration:3 s)
Yellow Memory Module —
flickering programmed (duration:
3 s)
Red Parameterization Parameterize again and
incorrect (also Gen. switch the control
Fault ON) voltage off and on again
Basic Unit defective Replace Basic Unit!
(also Gen. Fault ON)
Red Memory Module, Reprogram/replace the
flashing addressing plug, Memory Module,
Expansion Modules replace the Expansion
defective (also Gen. Modules
Fault ON - flashing)
OFF Supply voltage too low Check whether the
supply voltage is
connected / switched
on
Bus Bus OFF Bus not connected or Connect the bus or
status bus fault check bus parameters
Green Baud rate recognized / —
flashing communication with
PC/programming device
Green Communication with —
PLC/PCS
Gen. Fault Red Fault pending; reset has Rectify fault, e.g.
Fault status been saved overload
Red Fault pending; reset has Rectify fault, e.g.
flashing not been saved overload
OFF No fault —
Table 14-4: Diagnosis via LED display
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 14-5
14.3 Service
14.3.1 Preventive Maintenance
Preventive maintenance is an important step towards avoiding faults and

unforeseen costs. Industrial plants require regular professional maintenance
so that e.g. production losses due to plant downtimes are avoided.
Preventive maintenance ensures that all components are always kept in
perfect working order.
Reading out statistical data

SIMOCODE pro provides statistical data that can be read out with, for
example, SIMOCODE ES under Target System > Service Data / Statistical
Data. For example, via "Motor Operating Hours" and "Number of Starts", you
can decide whether motor and/or motor contactors should be replaced.
Fig. 14-2: Reading out statistical data
SIMOCODE pro
14-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
14.3.2 Securing and Saving Parameters
Always save the parameters in the memory module or in a SIMOCODE ES

file. This particularly applies if you replace a Basic Unit, or if you wish to
transfer data from one Basic Unit to another.
Saving parameters from the Basic Unit into the Memory Module
Note:
This function will not be available if the Test/Reset button has been blocked.
Proceed as follows:
Step Description
1 Plug the Memory Module into the system interface. The "Device" LED lights
up yellow for approx. 10 seconds. During this time, press the "Test/Reset"
button for approx. 3 seconds. The parameters will be saved in the Memory
Module. After successful data transfer, the "Device" LED flickers yellow for
approx. 3 seconds.
If necessary, unplug the Memory Module from the system interface.
Table 14-5: Saving the parameters into the Memory Module
Saving parameters from the Basic Unit into a SIMOCODE ES file
Note:
Proceed as follows:
Step Description

3 Open the menu Target System > Load into PC. The parameters are loaded
into the main memory from the Basic Unit.
4 Click on the menu Switchgear > Save Copy as .... The parameters are saved
from the main memory into a SIMOCODE ES file.
Table 14-6: Saving parameters into a SIMOCODE ES file
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 14-7
Saving parameters from the Memory Module into the Basic Unit
Note:
Proceed as follows:
Step Description
1 Plug the memory module into the system interface. The "Device" LED lights up
yellow for approx. 10 seconds. During this time, briefly press the "Test/Reset"
button. The parameters will be transferred to the Basic Unit. After successful
data transfer, the "Device" LED flickers yellow for approx. 3 seconds.
2 If necessary, unplug the Memory Module from the system interface.
Table 14-7: Saving parameters from the Memory Module into the Basic Unit
Notice
If the Memory Module is plugged in, the parameters will be transferred
from the Memory Module to the Basic Unit when the supply voltage is
switched on.
Saving parameters from a SIMOCODE ES file into the Basic Unit

Proceed as follows:
Step Description

3 Click on the menu Switchgear > Open. The parameters from the
SIMOCODE ES file will be transferred to the main memory.
4 Click on the menu Target system > Load into switchgear. The parameters
will be saved into the Basic Unit from the main memory.
Table 14-8: Saving parameters from a SIMOCODE ES file to a Basic Unit
SIMOCODE pro
14-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
14.3.3 Replacing SIMOCODE pro Components
Safety Guidelines
Warning
The main power for the feeder and the supply voltage for the Basic Unit
must be switched off before replacing Current Measuring Modules and
Current/Voltage Measuring Modules.
Notice
Please observe the information contained in the operating instructions!
Notice
It is not necessary to detach the wiring from the removable terminals to
replace the components!
Replacing a Basic Unit

Proceed as follows:
Step Description
1 Save the parameters. See Chapter "Securing and Saving Parameters" on Page
14-7.
2 Switch off the main power for the feeder and the supply voltage for the Basic
Unit.
3 If necessary, pull the PC cable, the cover or the connecting cable out of the
system interface.
4 Remove the removable terminals. You do not need to detach the wiring.
5 Demount the Basic Unit.
6 Remove the removable terminals of the new Basic Unit.
7 Mount the new Basic Unit.
8 Plug in the wired removable terminals.
9 Plug the connecting cable into the system interface.
10 Switch on the supply voltage for the Basic Unit.
11 Save the parameters into the Basic Unit. See Chapter "Securing and Saving
Parameters" on Page 14-7.
12 Switch on the main power for the feeder.
Table 14-9: Replacing a Basic Unit
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 14-9
Replacing an Expansion Module or a Decoupling Module

Proceed as follows:
Step Description
Unit.
2 If necessary, pull the PC cable, the cover or the connecting cable out of the
system interface.
3 Remove the removable terminals. You do not need to detach the wiring.
4 Demount the Expansion Module or the Decoupling Module.
5 Remove the removable terminals of the new Expansion or Decoupling
Module.
6 Mount the new Expansion Module or Decoupling Module.
7 Plug in the wired removable terminals.
Table 14-10: Replacing an Expansion Module or a Decoupling Module
SIMOCODE pro
14-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Replacing the Current Measuring Module and the Current/Voltage Measuring Module
Proceed as follows:
Step Description
Unit.
2 Pull out the connecting cable from the system interface.
3 Pull out the removable terminal from the module as illustrated below
(Current/Voltage Measuring Modules only).
4 Disconnect the three cables of the three phases of the main circuit.
5 Replace the module (see Chapter 13.2.2 "Current Measuring Modules" and
Chapter 13.2.3 "Current/Voltage Measuring Modules").
6 Connect the three cables of the main circuit, leading them through the
through-hole openings.
7 Plug the removable terminals onto the module (Current/Voltage Measuring

Modules only).
Table 14-11: Replacing the Current Measuring Module and the Current/Voltage Measuring Module
Upper terminals
Lower terminals
Fig. 14-3: Replacing Current/Voltage Measuring Modules
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 14-11
14.3.4 Resetting the Factory Settings
With the factory settings, all parameters are reset to the factory values.
Resetting the factory settings with the Test/Reset button on the Basic Unit
Proceed as follows (also deletes any previous password setting!):
Step Description
1 Switch off the supply voltage for the Basic Unit.

2 Press the Test/Reset button on the Basic Unit and keep it pressed.
3 Switch on the supply voltage for the Basic Unit. The Device LED lights up
yellow.
4 Release the Test/Reset button after approx. two seconds.
5 Press the Rest/Reset button again after approx. two seconds.
6 Release the Test/Reset button after approx. two seconds.
7 Press the Test/Reset button again after approx. two seconds.
9 Factory settings are reset.
Table 14-12: Resetting factory settings with the Test/Reset button on the Basic Unit
Notice
If any one of the steps is not carried out correctly, the Basic Unit will revert
to normal operation.
Notice
This function is always active, independent of the "Test/Reset - Button
Blocked" parameter.
Resetting the basic factory setting with the SIMOCODE ES software

Prerequisite: SIMOCODE pro is connected to the PC/programming device
via PROFIBUS DP or via the system interface and SIMOCODE ES is started.
Proceed as follows (resets to factory settings, excluding the password):
Step Description
1 Click on the menu Switchgear > Open Online.

2 In the menu, select Target System > Command > Factory Settings.
3 Confirm with "Yes".
4 Factory settings are reset.
Table 14-13: Resetting the factory settings with the SIMOCODE ES software
SIMOCODE pro
14-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
14.4 Error Buffer / Error Protocol Read-Out

Timestamping in the error buffer is based on the operating hours
(resolution:1 s) of SIMOCODE pro.
The "Error/Fault" and "Mains ON" events are logged. Each of these events is
given a timestamp.
• Error/Fault:
The last 21 faults are stored in a ring buffer, whereby the fault that is
incoming (rising edge) is always logged. A fault that is going (falling edge) will
not be logged.
• Mains ON:
If the most recent entry was "Mains ON", this is not logged multiple times.
Instead, the fault number is used as a Mains ON counter. Thus, the error
buffer cannot be deleted by frequent ON/OFF operations.
Entry 1 is the most recent entry and entry 21 the oldest.
The data will be displayed via the "SIMOCODE ES" software.
Example:
Screenshot
Fig. 14-4: Example of event logging using the "SIMOCODE ES" software
SIMOCODE pro has an error buffer, in which the 21 most recent errors/
faults, "Mains On" events and time information are recorded. The time
information is based upon the operating hours of the device (resolution 1 s),
i.e. the amount of time that the device is supplied with control supply
voltage.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 14-13
Example:
The most recent "Mains ON" event was logged at a device operating time of
17 days, 21 hours and 31 minutes. Therefore, at the moment of "Mains ON",
the device was operating (supplied with voltage) for 17d21h31min. The
"No. of Starts >" fault was logged at a device operating time of 18 days,
22 hours, 17 minutes, i.e. 24h 46min after the most recent "Mains ON".
SIMOCODE pro
14-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Alarm, Fault and System Events 15
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information about troubleshooting.
Target groups
• Commissioners
• Configurators
Necessary knowledge
• Basic general knowledge about SIMOCODE pro
• Knowledge about SIMOCODE ES software
• Knowledge about PROFIBUS DP.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 15-1
Alarm, Fault and System Events
Event Description Fault Acknow- Contactor

(alphabetical) Processing ledgement Control
Analog Module There is a wire break in the Check the Transducer Reset
Open Circuit Analog Value Measuring Circuit. and the Measuring
Circuit.
Antivalence Only for Positioner 5 control Limit Switch Defect, Tripped

function: The Change-over Limit Switch Open
Contacts of the Limit Switch do Circuit
not issue an antivalent signal.
Configuration The configured device • Please check whether Rectify the Tripped
Fault configuration does not match the all configured fault; reset
existing configuration. components are
present.
• Check the actual
-configuration using
"Configuration".
Double 0 Both Torque Switches have • Open Circuit Torque Tripped

activated simultaneously. The Switch.
motor feeder has been turned off. • Torque Switch is
defective.
Double 1 Both Limit Switches have Limit Switch is defective. Tripped

activated simultaneously.
End Position Except Positioner 5 control Counter command Tripped

function: The state of the Limit
Switch has changed without a
command (Positioner has left the
End Position without a command)
Execution The motor feeder could not be • Main circuit is Reset Tripped
ON-Command turned on after an ON command interrupted (fuse,
is issued. circuit breaker)
• Motor Contactor or
Contactor Control is
defective
• Parameter Execution
Time is too short.
Execution The motor feeder could not be • The Contactor Contact Reset; counter Tripped
STOP-Command turned off after a STOP command is welded command
was issued. • Parameter Execution
Time is too short
• The "OPEN" End
Position has not been
reached during the
parameterized runtime
(only for the
"Positioner" and
"Solenoid Valve" control
functions).
External Earth External Earth-fault Monitoring Please check the motor Reset Tripped
Fault has activated. An impermissibly connection cable for
high Fault Current is flowing. damage.
External Fault A signal is pending at the Input Check the motor feeder According to Tripped
1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 (socket) of the "External Fault 1, 2, parameterizatio
3, 4, 5 or 6" standard function. n
Table 15-1: Alarm, fault and system events
SIMOCODE pro
15-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02

Feedback OFF The Current Flow in the motor • The main circuit has Reset Tripped
feeder has been interrupted been interrupted (fuse,
without the motor feeder being circuit breaker, main
turned off. switch).
• The Motor Contactor
or Contactor Control is
defective
Feedback ON Current is flowing in the motor • Contactor Contacts Reset; counter Tripped
feeder without the motor feeder have been manually command
being switched on activated
• Contactor has not been
switched on via
SIMOCODE
Hardware Faults The SIMOCODE pro basic device Please replace the Basic Rectify the fault Tripped
hardware is defective. Unit.
See Chapter 13
"Mounting, Wiring,
Interfaces".
Internal Earth Internal Earth-fault Monitoring Please check the motor Reset Tripped
Fault has been activated. connection cable for
An impermissibly high Fault damage.
Current is flowing.
Just one Start The start after the next one

Possible should not be carried out until the
Interlocking Time has expired.
Module Fault At least one SIMOCODE pro • The connecting cable Rectify the Tripped
module is not ready for use. is defective or has not fault; reset
been plugged in
correctly.
• Module is defective.
Please replace the
module.
For this, see
Chapter 13 "Mounting,
Wiring, Interfaces".
Motor Operating The configured Limit Value for the Please adopt the
Hours > Motor Operating Hours has been maintenance measures
exceeded. intended for the feeder.
Motor Stop The configured Limit Value for Please adopt the
Time > Motor Stop Time Monitoring has maintenance measures
been exceeded. intended for the feeder.
If possible, switch on the
feeder.
No Start Possible The permissible Number of Starts Reset Tripped

in the monitoring timeframe has
been attained. The next start
should not be carried out until the
Interlocking Time has expired.
Table 15-1: Alarm, fault and system events (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 15-3

Operational An "Operational Protection OFF Reset Tripped; for

Protection OFF (OPO)" signal is pending. Positioners: QE1
(OPO) A switched-on motor feeder has or QE2 switched
been switched off. on until End
Switching on is not possible while Position is
the OPO signal is pending. reached -
dependent upon
configuration
Overload The motor feeder has been Please check the motor Reset, auto- Tripped
overloaded. and the application that reset
is driven by the motor.
The motor can only be
switched on again after
the Cooling Down Period
has expired or after an
Emergency Start.
Overload and The motor feeder has been Check the motor feeder Reset or Tripped
Unbalance asymmetrically overloaded. and the motor. auto-reset
Possible causes: The motor can only be
• Phase Failure switched on again after
• Fault in the motor windings. the Cooling Down Period
has expired or after an
Emergency Start.
Parameter It is not possible to change at More than one

changes not least one parameter in the current parameter can only be
allowed in the operating state. changed if the motor
current operating feeder is switched off
state and is not in the
"Remote" operating
mode.
For an overview of
parameters that can
always be changed,
see: Chapter "Data
Records - Overview" on
Page B-2.
Parameter is There is a fault in the parameter Check the parameter

faulty ("Event" data transmitted to the device. data (data records 130 -
category) Faults in the parameter data can 133) that has been
occur, for example, if device transmitted to the device
parameterization was not carried for correctness of
out with SIMOCODE ES or contents.
SIMATIC PDM.
Parameter is The parameter data is faulty. The designation of the Rectify the Tripped
faulty ("General faulty parameter can be fault; reset
Fault" category) found via the number
(byte No.) in the system
manual, Chapter A
"Tables".
Permissible The Permissible Number of Starts Reset Tripped

Number of Starts in the monitoring timeframe has
Exceeded already been exceeded. The next
start should not be carried out
until the Interlocking Time has
expired.
SIMOCODE pro
15-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02

PhaseUnbalance The Limit Value for Phase Check the motor feeder Reset Tripped
Unbalance has been exceeded. A and the motor.
Phase Unbalance can cause an
overload.
Possible causes:
• Phase Failure
• Faults in the motor windings.
Power Failure The power failure lasted longer Reset Tripped

(UVO) than the set Power Failure Time.
Pre-Warning - The motor feeder is in Overload Please check the motor

Overload Operation. and the application that
(I > 115%) If this condition continues to is being driven by the
persist, the motor feeder will trip motor.
within a short period of time due
to overload.
Required At least one parameterized Activate only the

function is not function is not supported by the functions that are
supported product version of the Basic Unit. supported by the product
version of the Basic Unit.
For example,
SIMOCODE pro V Basic
Units with the product
version E01 do not
support Voltage
Measurement, the
Temperature Module or
the Analog Module.
Stalled Positioner The Torque Switch has activated • The Positioner may be "OPEN/ Tripped
before or without the respective blocked. CLOSED"
Limit Switch. • Acknowledge the fault counter
via "Free-wheeling" command.
with the
"OPEN/CLOSED"
counter command.
• Please check the
Positioner application
and the Limit
Switches.
Stalled Rotor The Maximum Motor Current has Please check the Reset Tripped
exceeded the threshold for application that is being
Stalled Rotor Protection. driven by the motor.
Possible cause: The motor is
blocked.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 15-5

Start-up The Start-up Parameter Block

Parameter Block prevents adoption of
Active SIMOCODE pro parameters that
can be saved in the DP Master.
The block must be set when
• SIMOCODE ES
or
• SIMATIC PDM
is used for parameterizing.
The block may not be set if
• SIMOCODE pro C/V is
integrated in STEP 7 via the
SIMOCODE pro object
manager (OM)
or
• SIMOCODE pro C has been
parameterized via GSD.
Notice
The parameter block is not active
in the case of devices that are still
set to the factory settings or
devices that have been reset to
Status - Cooling The motor feeder has been The motor can only be
Down Period switched off due to overload. switched on again after
active the Cooling Down Period
has expired.
Status - The Thermal Memory has been The motor can be

Emergency Start deleted with the function switched on again
executed "Emergency Start". immediately after an
Overload Trip.
Status - Test The motor feeder is in the Test

position (TPF) Position (TPF).
The main current circuit has been
interrupted and "Cold Starting" of
the feeder can be carried out.
Temperature The Temperature Sensor is Check the Temperature Reset Tripped

Module Out of delivering impermissible values. Sensor.
Range
Temperature The Temperature Warning Level Check the Temperature

Module - has been exceeded. Measuring Station.
Warning Level
exceeded
Temperature Either a Short Circuit or a Wire Check the Temperature Rectify the Tripped
Module Sensor Break (Open Circuit) has occurred Sensor and the sensor fault; reset
Fault in the Temperature Sensor cable.
Circuit.
Test Position Current is flowing in the motor The main circuit is not Reset Tripped
Feedback (TPF) feeder although the motor feeder interrupted in test
is in the Test Position (TPF). operation.
Test Trip The motor feeder has been Reset Tripped

checked and switched off by a
Test Trip.
SIMOCODE pro
15-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02

Thermistor Open A wire break has occurred in the Check the Thermistor Rectify the Tripped
Circuit Thermistor Sensor Cable. Sensor Cable and the fault; reset
Thermistor.
Thermistor Short A Short Circuit has occurred in Check the Thermistor Rectify the Tripped
Circuit the Thermistor Sensor Cable. Sensor Cable and the fault; reset
Thermistor.
Thermistor Trip Thermistor Protection has been Please check the motor Reset or auto- Tripped
Level activated. The temperature of the and the application that reset
motor is too high. is driven by the motor.
The motor cannot be
switched back on until
the temperature has
reached the Switch-back
Point of the thermistor.
Trip - Bus PROFIBUS DP communication Check the PROFIBUS Reset, auto- Tripped
has been interrupted or is connection (plugs, reset
interrupted cables, etc.)
Trip - PLC/PCS The PLC controlling the feeder Please check the Reset, auto- Tripped
was or is in the STOP-state. operating state of the reset
PLC.
Trip Antivalence The Limit Switches are not • Limit Switch Open Counter Tripped
reporting any Antivalent Signals. Circuit command
• Please check the "OPEN/
Positioner application CLOSED"
and the Limit Switches
Trip End Pos. Positioner / Solenoid Valve has Acknowledge the fault Reset; counter Tripped
left the End Position without a via "Free-wheeling" with command
command being issued. The the counter command
motor feeder has been switched "OPEN/CLOSED".
off.
Trip Temporary One of the following components Please replace the Rectify the Tripped
Components is defective: defective components. fault; reset
(e.g. memory • Addressing plug For this, see
module) • Memory module Chapter 13 "Mounting,
• PC cable. Wiring, Interfaces".
Warning Level The Power Factor cos phi has Please check the
cos phi < undershot the Warning Level. application that is being
Possible cause: The motor is driven by the motor.
being operated without a load.
Warning Level I< The Maximum Current has Please check the
Undershot undershot the Warning Level. application that is being
driven by the motor.
Warning Level I> The Maximum Current has Please check the
Overshot overshot the Warning Level. application that is being
Warning Level P< The Active Power of the motor Please check the
Undershot has undershot the Warning Level. application that is being
Warning Level The Active Power of the motor Please check the
P> Overshot has overshot the Warning Level. application that is being
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 15-7

Warning Level U< The Voltage in the motor feeder Check the motor feeder.
Undershot has undershot the Warning Level.
Possible causes:
• Undervoltage in the network
• Fuse has tripped.
Warning Level The measured value at the Analog Check the Measuring
0/4 - 20 mA< Input has undershot the Warning Station.
Undershot Level.
Warning Level The measured value at the Analog Check the Measuring
0/4 - 20 mA> Input has overshot the Warning Station.
Overshot Level.
Wrong Password SIMOCODE pro parameters are Please use the correct
protected by a password. password for changing
An attempt has been made to the parameters.
change the parameters without If you do not know the
entering the password. password, new
parameters can only be
entered after the factory
settings have been
restored.
For a description of
factory settings, please
refer to Chapter 14.3.4
"Resetting the Factory
Settings".
SIMOCODE pro
15-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Tables A
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find various tables which can help you when working
with SIMOCODE pro.
Target groups
• Configurators.
Necessary knowledge
• Thorough knowledge of SIMOCODE pro.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 A-1
A-2
A.1
Tables
Lamp control
QLE<< QLE< QLA QLE> QLE>>
Specification/ Control station Contactor control
(ON<<) (ON<) (OFF) (ON>) (ON>>)
Control function
Status signal
ON<< ON< OFF ON> ON>> QE1 QE2 QE3 QE4 QE5 ON<< ON< OFF ON> ON>>
Overload 1),2) - - - - - - - Active - - - - - - -
Direct starter 1),2) - - OFF ON - ON - - - - - OFF ON -
Reversing starter 1),2) - Left OFF Right - Right Left - - - Left OFF Right -
Circuit breaker 1),2) - - OFF ON - ON - OFF - - - - OFF ON -
impulse impulse
Star-delta - - OFF ON - Star Delta Network - - - - OFF ON -
starter 2) contactor contactor contactor
Star-delta starter Left OFF Right - Star Delta Right Left - Left OFF Right -
with reversal of the direction contactor contactor network network
of rotation 2) contactor contactor
Dahlander 2) - - OFF Slow Fast Fast Slow Fast - - - - OFF Slow Fast
star
contactor
Dahlander Left Left OFF Right Right Right Right Fast Left Left Left Left OFF Right Right
with reversal of the direction fast slow slow fast fast slow star slow fast fast slow slow fast
of rotation 2) contactor
Pole-changing switch 2) - - OFF Slow Fast Fast Slow - - - - - OFF Slow Fast
Pole-changing switch Left Left OFF Right Right Right Right - Left Left Left Left OFF Right Right
with reversing the direction fast slow slow fast fast slow slow fast fast slow slow fast
of rotation 2)
Valve 2) - - Closed Open - Open - - - - - - Closed Open -
Soft starter 2) - - OFF ON - ON - Reset ON - - - OFF ON -
Status Information for the Control Functions
network command
contactor
Soft starter with reversing - Left OFF Right - Right Left Reset ON - - Left OFF Right -
contactor 2) network- network- command
Table A-1: Active control stations, contactor/lamp controls and status information for control functions
contactor contactor
1) Basic unit 1, SIMOCODE pro C

Active Control Stations, Contactor/Lamp Controls and
2) Basic unit 2, SIMOCODE pro V
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02

SIMOCODE pro
Tables
A.2 Abbreviations and Specifications

Abbreviations
The following abbreviations are used in the tables:
Abbreviation Meaning
BU1 Basic Unit 1 (SIMOCODE pro C)
BU2 Basic Unit 2 (SIMOCODE pro V)
IM Current Measuring Module
UM Current/Voltage Measuring Module
DM1 Digital Module 1
DM2 Digital Module 2
OP Operator Panel
OPD Operator Panel with Display
AM Analog Module
EM Earth-Fault Module
TM Temperature Module
Th Thermistor
CF Control Function
Cycl. Cyclic
Acycl. Acyclic
S Trip
M Event
W Warning
Table A-2: Abbreviations
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 A-3
Tables
Specifications
The following specifications apply in the tables:
Example
Designation Type Range Unit Information

Reserved Byte[4]
Cos phi Byte 0 .. 100 1% BU2
Reserved Byte[5]
Max. Current I max Word 0 .. 65535 1% / Is BU1 BU2
Entries in italics are Entry for Basic Unit 1

not relevant (reserved) and Basic Unit 2
and, when writing,
should be filled with "0"
Parameters can be changed while running.
Fig. A-1: Table specifications
Signal - prm error number (bytes):

If parameterization is not possible, the number of the parameter group (prm
group) which caused the error is transmitted here.
Byte.Bit Designation ...

(Prm group)
0.0 Reserved
4.0 Device configuration (12) Parameter group 12
...
Fig. A-2: Example for parameter group
SIMOCODE pro
A-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Tables
A.3 Socket Assignment Table - Digital

Socket Assignment Table - Digital
This table contains all assignment numbers (No.) of the sockets (digital). You
only need these assignment numbers if you, for example, use a user
program to fill data records and write these back.
No. Designation Designation Information

0 Static Level Not Connected BU1 BU2
1 Fixed Level‚ 0 BU1 BU2
2 Fixed Level‚ 1 BU1 BU2
3 Reserved
4 Reserved
5 Reserved
6 Reserved
7 Reserved
8 Basic Unit (BU) BU - Test/Reset Button BU1 BU2
9 BU - Input 1 BU1 BU2
13 Reserved
14 Reserved
15 Reserved
16 Digital Module (DM) DM1 - Input 1 DM1
17 DM1 - Input 2 DM1
24 Reserved
25 Reserved
26 Reserved
27 Reserved
28 Reserved
29 Reserved
30 Reserved
31 Reserved
32 Operator Panel OP/OPD OP - Test/Reset Button OP OPD
33 OP - Button 1 OP OPD
Table A-3: Socket assignment table - Digital
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 A-5
Tables

37 Reserved
38 Reserved
39 Reserved
40 DPV1/RS-232 Interface Acyclic Receive - Bit 0.0 BU1 BU2
41 (Acyclic Data) Acyclic Receive - Bit 0.1 BU1 BU2
42 Acyclic Receive - Bit 0.2 BU1 BU2
56 PLC/PCS Interface PLC [DPV0] Cyclic Receive - Bit 0.0 BU1 BU2
57 (Cyclic Data) Cyclic Receive - Bit 0.1 BU1 BU2
58 Cyclic Receive - Bit 0.2 BU1 BU2
72 Enabled Control Command Enabled Control Command ON <<
73 Enabled Control Command ON <
Dependent on the Control
74 Enabled Control Command OFF
Function
75 Enabled Control Command ON >
76 Enabled Control Command ON >>
77 Reserved
78 Reserved
79 Reserved
Table A-3: Socket assignment table - Digital (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
A-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Tables

80 Contactor Controls Contactor Control 1 QE1
81 Contactor Control 2 QE2
Function
85 Reserved
86 Reserved
87 Reserved
88 Lamp Controls Display - QLE<< (ON <<)
89 Display - QLE< (ON <)
90 Display - QLA (OFF)
Function
91 Display - QLE> (ON >)
92 Display - QLE>> (ON >>)
93 Display - QLS (fault) BU1 BU2
94 Reserved
95 Reserved
96 Status Information - General Status - General Fault BU1 BU2
97 Status - General Warning BU1 BU2
98 Status - Device BU1 BU2
99 Status - Bus BU1 BU2
100 Status - PLC/PCS BU1 BU2
101 Status - Motor Current Flowing IM UM
102 Reserved
103 Reserved
104 Status Information - Receive Status - ON <<
105 Status - ON <
106 Status - OFF
Function
107 Status - ON >
108 Status - ON >>
109 Status - Start Active BU1 BU2
110 Status - Interlocking Time Active All Reversing Starters and
Positioners
111 Status - Change-Over Pause Active Star-delta,
Dahlander,
Pole-Changing Starter
112 Status - Runs in Open Direction
113 Status - Runs in Close Direction
114 Status - FC Dependent on the Control
115 Status - FO Function
116 Status - TC
117 Status - TO
118 Status - Cold Starting (TPF) BU1 BU2
119 Status - OPO BU2
120 Status - Remote Mode BU1 BU2
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 A-7
Tables

121 Status Information - Protection Status - Emergency Start Executed IM UM
122 Status - Cooling Down Period Active IM UM
123 Status - Pause Time Active IM UM
124 Status Information - Miscellaneous Status - Device Check Active BU1 BU2
125 Status - Phase Sequence 1-2-3 UM
126 Status - Phase Sequence 3-2-1 UM
127 Reserved
128 Events - Protection Event - Overload Operation IM UM
129 Event - Unbalance IM UM
130 Event - Overload IM UM
131 Event - Overload + Phase Failure IM UM
132 Event - Internal Earth Fault IM UM
133 Event - External Earth Fault EM
134 Event - Warning Ext. Earth Fault EM
135 Event - Thermistor Overload Th
136 Event - Thermistor Short Circuit Th
137 Event - Thermistor Open Circuit Th
138 Event - TM Warning T> TM
139 Event - TM Trip T> TM
140 Event - TM Sensor Fault TM
141 Event - TM Out of Range TM
142 Reserved
143 Reserved
144 Events - Level Monitoring Event - Warning I> IM UM
145 Event - Warning I< IM UM
146 Event - Warning P> UM
147 Event - Warning P< UM
148 Event - Warning cos phi< UM
149 Event - Warning U< UM
150 Event - Warning 0/4 - 20 mA> AM
151 Event - Warning 0/4 - 20 mA< AM
152 Event - Trip I> IM UM
153 Event - Trip I< IM UM
154 Event - Trip P> UM
155 Event - Trip P< UM
156 Event - Trip cos phi< UM
157 Event - Trip U< UM
158 Event - Trip 0/4 - 20 mA> AM
159 Event - Trip 0/4 - 20 mA< AM
160 Event - Stalled Rotor IM UM
161 Reserved
162 Reserved
163 Event - No Start Possible BU1 BU2
164 Event - No. of Starts > BU1 BU2
SIMOCODE pro
A-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Tables

165 Event - Just One Start Possible BU1 BU2
166 Event - Motor Operating Hours > BU1 BU2
167 Event - Motor Stop Time > BU1 BU2
168 Event - Limit 1 BU2
172 Events - Miscellaneous Event - External Fault 1 BU1 BU2
173 Event - External Fault 2 BU1 BU2
176 Event - External Fault 5 BU2
177 Event - External Fault 6 BU2
178 Reserved
179 Reserved
180 Event - Analog Module Open Circuit AM
181 Reserved
182 Reserved
183 Reserved
184 Events - Timestamp Function Event - Timestamping Function Active + OK BU2
185 Reserved
186 Reserved
187 Reserved
188 Events - System Interface Event - Configured Operation Panel Missing BU1 BU2
189 Reserved
190 Reserved
191 Reserved
192 Trip - General Trip - HW Fault Basic Unit BU1 BU2
193 Trip - Module Fault (Module e.g. IM, DM) BU1 BU2
194 Trip - Temporary Components (e.g. Memory BU1 BU2
Module)
195 Trip - Configuration Fault BU1 BU2
196 Trip - Parameterization BU1 BU2
197 Trip - Bus BU1 BU2
198 Trip - PLC/PCS BU1 BU2
199 Reserved
200 Trip - Controlling Fault - Execution Time ON
201 Fault - Execution Time OFF
Not for Overload Relays
202 Trip - FB ON
203 Trip - FB OFF
204 Trip - Stalled Positioner Positioner
205 Trip - Double 0 Solenoid Valve/Positioner
206 Trip - Double 1 Solenoid Valve/Positioner
207 Trip - End Position Solenoid Valve/Positioner
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 A-9
Tables

208 Trip - Antivalence Positioner
209 Fault - Cold Starting (TPF)-Error BU1 BU2
210 Trip - UVO Error BU2
211 Trip - OPO Error BU2
212 Reserved
213 Reserved
214 Reserved
215 Reserved
216 Freely-programmable Elements Truth Table 1 3I/1O Output BU1 BU2
217 Truth Table 2 3I/1O Output BU1 BU2
218 Truth Table 3 3I/1O Output BU1 BU2
219 Truth Table 4 3I/1O Output BU2
224 Truth Table 9 5I/2O Output 1 BU2
225 Truth Table 9 5I/2O Output 2 BU2
226 Reserved
227 Reserved
228 Reserved
229 Reserved
230 Reserved
231 Reserved
232 Timer 1 Output BU1 BU2
233 Timer 2 Output BU1 BU2
234 Timer 3 Output BU2
235 Timer 4 Output BU2
236 Counter 1 Output BU1 BU2
237 Counter 2 Output BU1 BU2
238 Counter 3 Output BU2
239 Counter 4 Output BU2
240 Signal Conditioner 1 Output BU1 BU2
241 Signal Conditioner 2 Output BU1 BU2
242 Signal Conditioner 3 Output BU2
243 Signal Conditioner 4 Output BU2
244 Non-Volatile Element 1 Output BU1 BU2
245 Non-Volatile Element 2 Output BU1 BU2
246 Non-Volatile Element 3 Output BU2
247 Non-Volatile Element 4 Output BU2
248 Flashing 1 Output BU1 BU2
251 Flickering 1 Output BU1 BU2
SIMOCODE pro
A-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Tables

254 Reserved
255 Reserved
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 A-11
Tables
A.4 Socket Assignment Table - Analog

This table contains all assignment numbers (No.) of the sockets (analog).
You only need these assignment numbers if you, for example, use a user
program to fill data records and write these back.
All inputs for analog data can only process values of type "Word" (2 bytes). In
order to also be able to process values of type "Byte", the following applies:
• The byte value is processed as a low byte, the high byte is always 0.
No. Designation Unit Information

0 Not Connected BU1 BU2
1 Reserved
2 Reserved
3 Reserved
4 Timer 1 - Actual Value 100 ms BU1 BU2
5 Timer 2 - Actual Value 100 ms BU1 BU2
6 Timer 3 - Actual Value 100 ms BU2
7 Timer 4 - Actual Value 100 ms BU2
8 Counter 1 - Actual Value BU1 BU2
9 Counter 2 - Actual Value BU1 BU2
10 Counter 3 - Actual Value BU2
11 Counter 4 - Actual Value BU2
12 Reserved
13 Reserved
14 Reserved
15 Reserved
16 Max. Current I_max 1%/Is IM UM
17 Current I_L1 1%/Is IM UM
20 Phase Unbalance 1% IM UM
21 Reserved
22 Reserved
23 Reserved
24 Voltage U_L1 1V UM
27 Cos phi 1% UM
28 Reserved
29 Reserved
30 Reserved
31 Reserved
32 Thermal Motor Model 2% IM UM
33 Time to Trip 100 ms IM UM
34 Recovery Time 100 ms IM UM
Table A-4: Socket assignment table - Analog
SIMOCODE pro
A-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Tables
No. Designation Unit Information

35 Last Trip Current 1%/Is IM UM
36 TM - Max. Temperature 1K TM
37 TM - Temperature 1 1K TM
40 Permissible Starts - Actual Value BU1 BU2
41 Motor Stop Time 1h BU1 BU2
42 Reserved
43 Reserved
44 AM - Input 1 See 1) AM
45 AM - Input 2 See 1) AM
46 Reserved
47 Reserved
48 Acyclic Receive - Analog Value BU1 BU2
49 Cyclic Receive - Analog Value BU2
50 Reserved
51 Reserved
52 Motor Operating Hours - H Word BU1 BU2
53 Motor Operating Hours - L word BU1 BU2
54 Int. Motor Operating Hours - H Word BU1 BU2
1s
55 Int. Motor Operating Hours - L word BU1 BU2
56 Device Operating Hours - H Word BU1 BU2
57 Device Operating Hours - L Word BU1 BU2
58 Number of Starts - H Word BU1 BU2
59 Number of Starts - L Word BU1 BU2
60 Int. Number of Starts Right - H Word BU1 BU2
61 Int. Number of Starts Right - L Word BU1 BU2
62 Int. Number of Starts Left - H Word BU1 BU2
63 Int. Number of Starts Left - L Word BU1 BU2
64 Reserved
.. Reserved
69 Reserved
70 Active Power P - H Word BU2
1W
71 Active Power P - L Word BU2
72 Apparent Power S - H Word BU2
1 VA
73 Apparent Power S - L Word BU2
75 Reserved
.. Reserved
255 Reserved
Table A-4: Socket assignment table - Analog (Cont.)
1) S7 format: 0/4 mA=0

20 mA=27648
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 A-13
Tables
A.5 Detailed Events of the Slave Diagnostics

The following table contains the detailed events of the slave diagnosis for
the status information and the process alarm. This information is also
contained in data record 92.
Byte.Bit Status Information Information

0.0 Trip - Controlling Trip - Execution ON Command BU1 BU2
0.1 Trip - Execution STOP Command BU1 BU2
0.2 Trip - FB ON BU1 BU2
0.3 Trip - FB OFF BU1 BU2
0.4 Fault - Stalled Positioner BU1 BU2
0.5 Trip - Double 0 BU1 BU2
0.6 Trip - Double 1 BU1 BU2
0.7 Trip - End Position BU1 BU2
1.0 Trip - Antivalence BU1 BU2
1.1 Trip - Cold Starting (TPF) Error BU1 BU2
1.2 Trip - UVO Error BU2
1.3 Trip - OPO Error BU2
1.4 Reserved
2.0 Reserved
2.1 Trips - Protection Trip - Unbalance IM UM
2.2 Trip - Overload IM UM
2.3 Trip - Overload + Phase Failure IM UM
2.4 Fault - Int. Earth Fault IM UM
2.5 Fault - Ext. Earth Fault EM
2.6 Reserved
2.7 Trip - Thermistor Overload Th
3.0 Trip - Thermistor Short Circuit Th
3.1 Trip - Thermistor Open Circuit Th
3.2 Reserved
3.3 Fault - TM Tripping T> TM
3.4 Trip - TM Sensor Fault TM
3.5 Trip - TM Out of Range TM
3.6 Reserved
4.0 Trips - Trip - Trip I> IM UM
4.1 Level Monitoring Trip - Trip I< IM UM
4.2 Trip - Trip P> UM
4.3 Trip - Trip P< UM
4.4 Fault - Tripping cos phi< UM
4.5 Trip - Trip U< UM
4.6 Trip - Trip 0/4 - 20 mA> AM
4.7 Trip - Trip 0/4 - 20 mA< AM
5.0 Trip - Stalled Rotor IM UM
5.1 Reserved
Table A-5: Detailed slave diagnosis events
SIMOCODE pro
A-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Tables

5.4 Trip - Number of Starts > BU1 BU2
5.5 Reserved
6.0 Trips - Fault - Ext. Fault 1 BU1 BU2
6.1 Miscellaneous Fault - Ext. Fault 2 BU1 BU2
6.2 Fault - Ext. Fault 3 BU1 BU2
6.3 Fault - Ext. Fault 4 BU1 BU2
6.4 Fault - Ext. Fault 5 BU2
6.5 Fault - Ext. Fault 6 BU2
6.6 Reserved
6.7 Reserved
7.0 Trip - Analog Module Open Circuit AM
7.1 Trip - Test Trip BU1 BU2
7.2 Reserved
8.0 Warnings - Protection Warning - Overload Operation IM UM
8.1 Warning - Unbalance IM UM
8.2 Warning - Overload IM UM
8.3 Warning - Overload + Phase Failure IM UM
8.4 Warning - Internal Earth Fault IM UM
8.5 Warning - External Earth Fault EM
8.6 Reserved
8.7 Warning - Thermistor Overload Th
9.0 Warning - Thermistor Short Circuit Th
9.1 Warning - Thermistor Open Circuit Th
9.2 Warning - TM Warning T> TM
9.3 Reserved
9.4 Warning - M Sensor Fault TM
9.5 Warning - TM Out of Range TM
9.6 Reserved
10.0 Warnings - Warning - Warning I> IM UM
10.1 Level Monitoring Warning - Warning I< IM UM
10.2 Warning - Warning P> UM
10.3 Warning - Warning P< UM
10.4 Warning - Warning cos phi < UM
10.5 Warning - Warning U< UM
10.6 Warning - Warning 0/4 - 20 mA> AM
10.7 Warning - Warning 0/4 - 20 mA< AM
11.0 Warning - Stalled Rotor IM UM
11.1 Reserved
11.3 Warning - No Start Possible BU1 BU2
11.4 Warning - Number of Motor Starts> BU1 BU2
11.5 Warning - Just One Start Possible BU1 BU2
11.6 Warning - Motor Operating Hours > BU1 BU2
11.7 Warning - Motor Stop Time > BU1 BU2
Table A-5: Detailed slave diagnosis events (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 A-15
Tables

12.0 Warnings - Miscellaneous Ext. warning Fault 1 BU1 BU2
12.1 Warning - Ext. Fault 2 BU1 BU2
12.4 Warning - Ext. Fault 5 BU2
12.5 Warning - Ext. Fault 6 BU2
12.6 Reserved
12.7 Reserved
13.0 Warning - Analog Module Open Circuit BU2
13.1 Reserved
14.0 Reserved
14.1 Status Information - Protection Status - Emergency Start Executed IM UM
14.2 Status - Cooling Down Period Active IM UM
14.3 Status - Pause Time Active IM UM
14.4 Reserved
14.5 Reserved
14.6 Status Information - Receive Status - Cold Starting (TPF) BU1 BU2
14.7 Reserved
15.0 Events - Event - Start-Up Parameter Block Active BU1 BU2
15.1 Parameterization Event - Parameter Changes Not Allowed in the BU1 BU2
Current Operating State
15.2 Event - Device Does Not Support the Required BU1 BU2
Functions
15.3 Event - Wrong Parameter BU1 BU2
15.4 Signal - Wrong Password BU1 BU2
15.5 Event - Password Protection Active BU1 BU2
15.6 Event - Factory Settings BU1 BU2
15.7 Event - Parameterization Active BU1 BU2
Table A-5: Detailed slave diagnosis events (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
A-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Data Formats and Data Records B
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information about the data records of
SIMOCODE pro.
Target groups
• Configurators
Necessary knowledge
• good knowledge about writing and reading data records
• good knowledge of SIMOCODE pro.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 B-1
Data Formats and Data Records
Data Records - Overview
Data record No. Description Read/write

1 S7 System Diagnosis Read
63 Analog Value Recording Read
67 Process Image of the Outputs Read
69 Process Image of the Inputs Read
72 Error Buffer Read
92 Device Diagnosis Read
(Faults, Warnings, Status Information)
94 Measured Values Read
95 Service/Statistical Data Read/write
130 Basic Unit, Device Parameter 1 (BU1 BU2) Read/write
131 Basic Unit, Device Parameter 2 (BU1 BU2) Read/write
132 Extended Device Parameter 1 (BU2) Read/write
133 Extended Device Parameter 2 (BU2) Read/write
139 Markings Read/write
160 Communication Parameters Read/write
165 Marking Read/write
202 Acyclic Receive Read/write
203 Acyclic Send Read
224 Password Protection Write
Table B-1: Data Records - Overview
SIMOCODE pro
B-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
B.1 Handling Data Records

This section contains helpful information about how best to handle data
records.
B.1.1 Writing/Reading Data Records
Access to data records via slot and index

• Slot: access via slot 1
• Index: data record number
Writing/reading data records with STEP7

You can access the data records from the user program.
• Writing data records:
S7 DPV1 master: by calling SFB 53 "WR_REC" or SFC 58
S7 master: by calling SFC 58
• Reading data records:
S7 DPV1 master: by calling SFB 52 "RD_REC" or SFC 59
S7 master: by calling SFC 59"
Further information
You will find further information on the SFBs
• in the "System Software for S7-300/400, System and Standard Functions"
reference manual
• in the STEP7 online help.
Byte arrangements
When data which is longer than one byte is saved, the bytes are arranged as
follows ("big endian"):
Byte arrangement Data type
Byte 0 High byte

High word
Byte 1 Low byte
Double word (D-word)
Byte 2 High byte
Low word
Byte 3 Low byte
Byte 0 High byte

Word
Byte 1 Low byte
Byte 0 Byte 0
Byte
Byte 1 Byte 1
Fig. B-1: Byte arrangement in "big endian" format
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 B-3
B.1.2 Abbreviations
The following abbreviations are used in the tables:
BU1 Basic Unit 1 (SIMOCODE pro C)

BU2 Basic Unit 2 (SIMOCODE pro V)
DM 1 Digital Module 1
DM 2 Digital Module 2
OP Operator Panel
AM Analog Module
Th Thermistor
CF Control Function
Cycl. Cyclic
Acycl. Acyclic
Table B-2: Abbreviations
B.1.3 Specifications
The following specifications apply in the tables:
Example
Designation Type Range Unit Information

Reserved Byte[4]
Cos phi Byte 0 .. 100 1% BU2
Reserved Byte[5]
Max. current Imax Word 0 .. 65535 1% / Ie BU1 BU2
Entries in italics are Entry relevant for Basic

not relevant (reserved) Unit 1 and Basic Unit 2
and, when writing,
should be filled with "0"
Parameters can be changed while running.
Fig. B-2: Specifications
Settings are valid/can only be made when the corresponding system

components are used.
SIMOCODE pro
B-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
B.2 Data Record 0/1 - S7 System Diagnosis
Byte DR0 DR1 Designation Type No Error Error Information

Bit
0.0 X X Module Fault/OK Bit 0 1
0.1 X X Internal Fault Bit 0 0
0.2 X X External Fault Bit 0 1
0.3 X X Channel Fault Bit 0 1
0.4 X X External Auxiliary VoltageMissing Bit 0 0
0.5 X X Front Panel Plug Missing Bit 0 0
0.6 X X Module not Parameterized Bit 0 0
0.7 X X Wrong Parameter on Module Bit 0 0
1.0 X X Module Type Bit [4] 3 3
1.4 X X Channel Information Available Bit 1 1
1.5 X X Application Information Available Bit 0 0
1.6 X X Substitute Diagnostic Alarm Bit 0 0
1.7 X X Reserved = 0 Bit 0 0
2.0 X X Application Module Wrong/Missing Bit 0 0
2.1 X X Communication Fault Bit 0 0
2.2 X X Operating Status (0=RUN, 1=STOP) Bit 0 0
2.3 X X Time Monitoring Activated Bit 0 0
2.4 X X Supply Voltage within Module Bit 0 0
Failed
2.5 X X Battery Flat (BATTF) Bit 0 0
2.6 X X Total Backup Power Failed Bit 0 0
3.0 X X Rack Failure (Detected by IM/UM) Bit 0 0
3.1 X X Processor Failure Bit 0 0
3.2 X X EPROM Error Bit 0 0
3.3 X X RAM Error Bit 0 0
3.4 X X ADC/DAC Error Bit 0 0
3.5 X X Blown Fuse Bit 0 0
3.6 X X PRAL Missing Bit 0 0
4.0 X Channel Type Byte 0x7D 0x7D
5.0 X Length of the Channel-Specific Byte 0x20 0x20
Diagnosis
6.0 X Number of Channels Byte 0x01 0x01
7.0 X Channel Fault Vector (One Bit per Byte 0x01 0x01
Channel)
8.0 X Reserved Bit 0 0
8.1 X Short Circuit Bit 0 0
8.2 X Undervoltage Bit 0 0
8.3 X Overvoltage Bit 0 0
8.4 X Overload Bit 0 0
8.5 X Overtemperature Bit 0 0
Table B-3: Data Record 0/1 - S7 System Diagnosis
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 B-5
Byte DR0 DR1 Designation Type No Error Error Information

Bit
8.6 X Open Circuit Bit 0 0
8.7 X Upper Limit Overshot Bit 0 0
9.0 X Lower Limit Undershot Bit 0 0
9.1 X Error Bit 0 X Error F9
10.0 X Parameterization Error Bit 0 X Error F16
10.1 X Sensor or Load Voltage Missing Bit 0 0
10.2 X Fuse Defective Bit 0 0
10.4 X Earth Fault Bit 0 0
10.5 X Reference Channel Fault Bit 0 0
10.6 X Process Alarm Missing Bit 0 0
10.7 X Actuator Warning Bit 0 0
11.0 X Actuator Trip Bit 0 0
11.1 X Safety-Related Trip Bit 0 0
11.2 X External Fault Bit 0 0
11.3 X Non-Specific Fault Bit 0 0
12.0 X Reserved Byte[4] 0 0
Table B-3: Data Record 0/1 - S7 System Diagnosis (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
B-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
B.3 Data Record 63 - Analog Value Recording
Byte.Bit Designation Type Range Information

0.0 StartPos Word 0 BU2
2.0 Channel No. Byte 1 BU2
3.0 Analog Value Record Currently Running Bit 0, 1 BU2
3.1 Trigger Event Occurred Bit 0, 1 BU2
3.2 Reserved Bit[6] 0
4.0 Measured Value (0) Word 0 ... 65535 BU2
...
124.0 Reserved Byte[76] 0
Table B-4: Data Record 63 - Recording of Analog Values
The unit of the measured value is dependent on the assigned analog value.
You will find all the available analog values with their units in
Chapter A.4 "Socket Assignment Table - Analog".
B.4 Data Record 67 - Process Image of the Outputs
Byte.Bit Designation Presetting Type Infor-

(also see parameters) mation
0.0 Cyclic Receive - Bit 0.0 Control Station - PLC/PCS [DP] ON < Bit
0.1 Cyclic Receive - Bit 0.1 Control Station - PLC/PCS [DP] OFF Bit
0.2 Cyclic Receive - Bit 0.2 Control Station - PLC/PCS [DP] ON > Bit
0.3 Cyclic Receive - Bit 0.3 Test 1 Bit
0.4 Cyclic Receive - Bit 0.4 Motor Protection - Emergency Start Bit
0.5 Cyclic Receive - Bit 0.5 Operation Mode Selector S1 Bit
0.6 Cyclic Receive - Bit 0.6 Reset 1 Bit
0.7 Cyclic Receive - Bit 0.7 Not Assigned Bit
BU1 BU2
2.0 to 3.7 Cyclic Receive - Analog Value Not Assigned Word BU2
Table B-5: Data Record 67 - Process Image of the Outputs
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 B-7
B.5 Data Record 69 - Process Image of the Inputs
Byte.Bit Designation Presetting Type Information

(also see parameters)
0.0 Cyclic Send - Bit 0.0 Status - ON < Bit
0.1 Cyclic Send - Bit 0.1 Status - OFF Bit
0.2 Cyclic Send - Bit 0.2 Status - ON > Bit
0.3 Cyclic Send - Bit 0.3 Event - Overload Operation Bit
0.4 Cyclic Send - Bit 0.4 Status - Interlocking Time Active Bit
0.5 Cyclic Send - Bit 0.5 Status - Remote Mode Bit
0.6 Cyclic Send - Bit 0.6 Status - General Fault Bit
0.7 Cyclic Send - Bit 0.7 Status - General Warning Bit
1.0 Cyclic Send - Bit 1.0 Not Assigned Bit BU1 BU2
1.1 Cyclic Send - Bit 1.1 Not Assigned Bit
2.0 PLC/PCS Analog Input 1 Max. Current I_max Word
4.0 PLC/PCS Analog Input 2 Not Assigned Word BU2
Table B-6: Data Record 69 - Process Image of the Inputs
SIMOCODE pro
B-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
B.6 Data Record 72 - Error Buffer
Byte.Bit Entry Designation Type Information

0.0 Timestamp D-Word BU1 BU2
4.0 1 Type Byte BU1 BU2
5.0 Error Number Byte BU1 BU2
...
Table B-7: Data Record 72 - Error Buffer
Timestamp
The operating hours of the device are used as a timestamp (resolution: 1 s).
Type/error number
If the type has the value 71, the entry contains a fault: Refer to the error
numbers for detailed information: You will find the meaning in the "Error
number" column of "Data Record 92 - Diagnostics" in Chapter B.7 "Data
Record 92 - Device Diagnosis".
If the type has the value 255, the entry displays "Power ON". In this case,
the error number contains the number of power ON operations, reduced
by 1 (0 = 1x Power ON, ...).
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 B-9
B.7 Data Record 92 - Device Diagnosis
Byte.Bit Designation Information DP Error No.

Diagn.*) ***)
0.0 Reserved
1.0 Status Information Status - General Fault BU1 BU2
- General
1.1 Status - General Warning BU1 BU2
1.2 Status - Device BU1 BU2
1.3 Status - Bus BU1 BU2
1.4 Status - PLC/PCS BU1 BU2
1.5 Status - Motor Current Flowing IM UM
1.6 Reserved
2.0 Status Information Status - ON <<
- Receive
2.1 Status - ON < Dependent on the
2.2 Status - OFF Control Function
2.3 Status - ON >
2.4 Status - ON >>
2.5 Status - Start Active BU1 BU2
2.6 Status - Interlocking Time Active All Reversing Starters
and Positioners
2.7 Status - Change-Over Pause Active Star-delta, Dahlander,
Pole-Changing
Starters
3.0 Status - Runs in Open Direction
3.1 Status - Runs in Close Direction
3.2 Status - FC Dependent on the
3.3 Status - FO Control Function
3.4 Status - TC
3.5 Status - TO
3.6 Status - Cold Starting (TPF) BU1 BU2 M
3.7 Status - OPO BU2
4.0 Status - Remote Mode BU1 BU2
4.1 Status Information Status - Emergency Start Executed IM UM M
- Protection
4.2 Status - Cooling Down Period Active IM UM M
4.3 Status - Pause Time Active IM UM
4.4 Status Information Status - Device Check Active BU1 BU2
- Miscellaneous
4.5 Status - Phase Sequence 1-2-3 UM
4.6 Status - Phase Sequence 3-2-1 UM
4.7 Reserved
5.0 Events - Protection Event - Overload Operation IM UM
5.1 Event - Unbalance IM UM
Table B-8: Data Record 92 - Diagnosis
SIMOCODE pro
B-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02

Diagn.*) ***)
5.2 Event - Overload IM UM
5.3 Event - Overload + Phase Failure IM UM
5.4 Event - Internal Earth Fault IM UM
5.5 Event - External Earth Fault EM
5.6 Event - Warning Ext. Earth Fault EM
5.7 Event - Thermistor Overload Th
6.0 Event - Thermistor Short Circuit Th
6.1 Event - Thermistor Open Circuit Th
6.2 Event - TM Warning T> TM
6.3 Event - TM Trip T> TM
6.4 Event - TM Sensor Fault TM
6.5 Event - TM Out of Range TM
6.6 Reserved
7.0 Events - Level Event - Warning I> IM UM
Monitoring
7.1 Event - Warning I< IM UM
7.2 Event - Warning P> UM
7.3 Event - Warning P< UM
7.4 Event - Warning cos phi< UM
7.5 Event - Warning U< UM
7.6 Event - Warning 0/4 - 20 mA> AM
7.7 Event - Warning 0/4 - 20 mA< AM
8.0 Event - Trip I> IM UM
8.1 Event - Trip I< IM UM
8.2 Event - Trip P> UM
8.3 Event - Trip P< UM
8.4 Event - Trip Cos Phi< UM
8.5 Event - Trip U< UM
8.6 Event - Trip 0/4 - 20 mA> AM
8.7 Event - Trip 0/4 - 20 mA< AM
9.0 Event - Stalled Rotor IM UM
9.1 Reserved
9.3 Event - No Start Possible BU1 BU2
9.4 Event - No. of Starts > BU1 BU2
9.5 Event - Just One Start Possible BU1 BU2
9.6 Event - Motor Operating Hours > BU1 BU2
9.7 Event - Motor Stop Time > BU1 BU2
10.0 Event - Limit 1 BU2
10.4 Events - Event - Ext. Fault 1 BU1 BU2
Miscellaneous
Table B-8: Data Record 92 - Diagnosis (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 B-11

Diagn.*) ***)
10.5 Event - Ext. Fault 2 BU1 BU2
11.0 Event - Ext. Fault 5 BU2
11.1 Event - Ext. Fault 6 BU2
11.2 Reserved
11.3 Reserved
11.4 Event - Analog Module Open Circuit AM
11.5 Reserved
12.0 Events - Event - Timestamping Function BU2
Timestamp Active + OK
Function
12.1 Reserved
12.4 Events - System Event - Configured Operator Panel BU1 BU2
Interface Missing
12.5 Event - Module Not Supported BU1 BU2
12.6 Reserved
13.0 Events - Memory Event - Memory Module Read In BU1 BU2
Module
13.1 Event - Memory Module BU1 BU2
Programmed
13.2 Event - Memory Module Erased BU1 BU2
13.3 Reserved
13.7 Events - Event - Addressing Plug Read In BU1 BU2
Addressing Plug
14.0 Events - Event - Start-Up Parameter Block BU1 BU2 M
Parameterization Active
14.1 Event - Parameter Changes Not BU1 BU2 M
Allowed in the Current Operating
State
14.2 Event - Device Does Not Support BU1 BU2 M
the Required Functions
14.3 Event - Wrong Parameter BU1 BU2 M
14.4 Signal - Wrong Password BU1 BU2 M
14.5 Event - Password Protection Active BU1 BU2
14.6 Event - Factory Settings BU1 BU2
14.7 Event - Parameterization Active BU1 BU2
15.0 Event - Prm-Error-Number (Bytes) BU1 BU2
**)
16.0 Reserved
17.0 Warnings - Warning - Overload Operation IM UM W
Protection
17.1 Warning - Unbalance IM UM W
17.2 Warning - Overload IM UM W
17.3 Warning - Overload + Phase Failure IM UM W
SIMOCODE pro
B-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02

Diagn.*) ***)
17.4 Warning - Internal Earth Fault IM UM W
17.5 Warning - External Earth Fault EM W
17.6 Reserved
17.7 Warning - Thermistor Overload Th W
18.0 Warning - Thermistor Short Circuit Th W
18.1 Warning - Thermistor Open Circuit Th W
18.2 Warning - TM Warning T> TM W
18.3 Reserved
18.4 Signal - TM Sensor Fault TM W
18.5 Warning - TM Out of Range TM W
18.6 Reserved
19.0 Warnings - Warning - Warning I> IM UM W
Level Monitoring
19.1 Warning - Warning I< IM UM W
19.2 Warning - Warning P> UM W
19.3 Warning - Warning P< UM W
19.4 Warning - Warning cos phi < UM W
19.5 Warning - Warning U< UM W
19.6 Warning - Warning 0/4 - 20 mA> AM W
19.7 Warning - Warning 0/4 - 20 mA< AM W
20.0 Warning - Stalled Rotor IM UM W
20.1 Reserved
20.3 Warning - No Start Possible BU1 BU2 W
20.4 Warning - Number of Motor Starts> BU1 BU2 W
20.5 Warning - Just One Start Possible BU1 BU2 W
20.6 Warning - Motor Operating Hours > BU1 BU2 W
20.7 Warning - Motor Stop Time > BU1 BU2 W
21.0 Warnings - Warning - Ext. fault 1 BU1 BU2 W
Miscellaneous
21.1 Warning - Ext. fault 2 BU1 BU2 W
21.4 Warning - Ext. fault 5 BU2 W
21.5 Warning - Ext. fault 6 BU2 W
21.6 Reserved
21.7 Reserved
22.0 Warning - Analog Module Open AM W
Circuit
22.1 Reserved
23.0 Trips - Trip - HW Fault Basic Unit BU1 BU2 F9 0
General
23.1 Trip - Module Fault BU1 BU2 F9 1
(e.g. IM, UM, DM Module)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 B-13

Diagn.*) ***)
23.2 Trip - Temporary Components (e.g. BU1 BU2 F9 2
Memory Module)
23.3 Trip - Configuration Fault BU1 BU2 F16 3
23.4 Trip - Parameterization BU1 BU2 F16 4
23.5 Trip - Bus BU1 BU2 5
23.6 Trip - PLC/PCS BU1 BU2 6
23.7 Reserved
24.0 Trips - Trip - Runtime ON CF = Positioner S 8
Receive
24.1 Trip - Execution STOP Command CF = Positioner S 9
24.2 Trip - FB ON CF = Positioner S 10
24.3 Trip - FB OFF CF = Positioner S 11
24.4 Trip - Stalled Positioner CF = Positioner S 12
24.5 Trip - Double 0 CF = Positioner S 13
24.6 Trip - Double 1 CF = Positioner S 14
24.7 Trip - End Position CF = Positioner S 15
25.0 Trip - Antivalence CF = Positioner S 16
25.1 Trip - Cold Starting (TPF) Error BU1 BU2 S 17
25.2 Trip - UVO Error BU2 S 18
25.3 Trip - OPO Error BU2 S 19
25.4 Reserved
26.0 Reserved
26.1 Trips - Protection Trip - Unbalance IM UM S 25
26.2 Trip - Overload IM UM S 26
26.3 Trip - Overload + Phase Failure IM UM S 27
26.4 Trip - Int. Earth Fault IM UM S 28
26.5 Trip - Ext. Earth Fault EM S 29
26.6 Reserved
26.7 Trip - Thermistor Overload Th S 31
27.0 Trip - Thermistor Short Circuit Th S 32
27.1 Trip - Thermistor Open Circuit Th S 33
27.2 Reserved
27.3 Trip - TM Trip T> TM S 35
27.4 Trip - TM Sensor Fault TM S 36
27.5 Trip - TM Out of Range TM S 37
27.6 Reserved
28.0 Trips - Level Trip - Trip I> IM UM S 40
Monitoring
28.1 Trip - Trip I< IM UM S 41
28.2 Trip - Trip P> UM S 42
28.3 Trip - Trip P< UM S 43
28.4 Trip - Trip cos phi< UM S 44
28.5 Trip - Trip U< UM S 45
SIMOCODE pro
B-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02

Diagn.*) ***)
28.6 Trip - Trip 0/4 - 20 mA> AM S 46
28.7 Trip - Trip 0/4 - 20 mA< AM S 47
29.0 Trip - Stalled Rotor IM UM S 48
29.1 Reserved
29.4 Trip - Number of Starts > BU1 BU2 S 52
29.5 Reserved
30.0 Trips - Trip - External Fault 1 BU1 BU2 S 56
Miscellaneous
30.1 Trip - External Fault 2 BU1 BU2 S 57
30.4 Trip - External Fault 5 BU2 S 60
30.5 Trip - External Fault 6 BU2 S 61
30.6 Reserved
30.7 Reserved
31.0 Trip - Analog Module Open Circuit AM S 64
31.1 Trip - Test Trip BU1 BU2 S 65
31.2 Reserved
*) The "DP Diagn." column contains the bits which are additionally available
in the diagnosis using PROFIBUS DP:
• S: Trip
• M: Event
• W: Warning
• F9, F16:Error types
See also Chapter A.5 "Detailed Events of the Slave Diagnostics".
**) Event - prm error number (bytes):
If parameterization is not possible, the number of the parameter group (prm
group) which caused the error is transmitted here. You will find the
parameter groups in the parameter data records 130 to 133.
Byte.Bit Designation
(Prm group)
0.0 Reserved
4.0 Device Configuration
(see above) (12) Parameter group 12
...
Fig. B-3: Example for parameter group
***) See "Error number" in Chapter B.6 "Data Record 72 - Error Buffer".
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 B-15
B.8 Data Record 94 - Measured Values

Byte.Bit Designation Type Range Unit Infor-
mation
0.0 Reserved Byte[4]
4.0 Thermal Motor Model Byte 0 .. 255 See 2) IM UM
5.0 Phase Unbalance Byte 0 .. 100 1% IM UM
6.0 Cos phi Byte 0 .. 100 1% UM
12.0 Max. current Imax Word 0 .. 65535 1 % / Ie IM UM
14.0 Current IL1 Word 0 .. 65535 1 % / Ie IM UM
20.0 Last Trip Current Word 0 .. 65535 1 % / Ie IM UM
22.0 Time to Trip Word 0 .. 65535 100 ms IM UM
24.0 Cooling Down Period Word 0 .. 65535 100 ms IM UM
26.0 Voltage UL1 Word 0 .. 65535 1V UM
32.0 AM Output Word 0 .. 32767 AM
34.0 AM - Input 1 Word 0 .. 32767 AM
See 1)
36.0 AM - Input 2 Word 0 .. 32767 AM
38.0 AM - Input 3 Word 0 .. 32767 AM
3)
40.0 TM - Max. Temperature Word 0 .. 65535 1 K see TM
42.0 TM - Temperature 1 Word 0 .. 65535 1 K see 3) TM
3)
44.0 TM - Temperature 2 Word 0 .. 65535 1 K see TM
46.0 TM - Temperature 3 Word 0 .. 65535 1 K see 3) TM
52.0 Active Power P D-Word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 1W UM
56.0 Apparent Power S D-Word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 1 VA UM
Table B-9: Data Record 94 - Measured Values
1) S7 format:
0/4 mA = 0
20 mA = 27648
2) Representation of the "Thermal Motor Model":
Value always refers to Symm. Trip Level,
Representation in 2% increments in bits 6..0 (range 0 to 254%),
bit 7 shows unbalance (fixed level 50%).
3) Representation in Kelvin.
SIMOCODE pro
B-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
B.9 Data Record 95 - Service Data / Statistical Data

Writing the service data / statistical data
Writing is only possible if the password protection is not active.
Additional abbreviations
r/w: value can be written/changed
r: value can only be read
Byte.Bit Designation Type Range Unit Informati
on
0.0 Reserved Byte[4] 0
4.0 Permissible Starts - Actual Value Byte 0 .. 255 r1) BU1 BU2
5.0 Reserved Byte
8.0 Number of Parameterizations Word 0 .. 65535 r BU1 BU2
10.0 Number of Overload Trips Word 0 .. 65535 r/w BU1 BU2
12.0 Number of Internal Overload Trips Word 0 .. 65535 r BU1 BU2
14.0 Motor Stop Time Word 0 .. 65535 1h r/w BU1 BU2
16.0 Timer 1 - Actual Value Word 0 .. 65535 100 ms r BU1 BU2
18.0 Timer 2 - Actual Value Word 0 .. 65535 100 ms r BU1 BU2
20.0 Timer 3 - Actual Value Word 0 .. 65535 100 ms r BU2
22.0 Timer 4 - Actual Value Word 0 .. 65535 100 ms r BU2
24.0 Counter 1 - Actual Value Word 0 .. 65535 r BU1 BU2
26.0 Counter 2 - Actual Value Word 0 .. 65535 r BU1 BU2
28.0 Counter 3 - Actual Value Word 0 .. 65535 r BU2
30.0 Counter 4 - Actual Value Word 0 .. 65535 r BU2
32.0 Reserved Byte
40.0 Motor Operating Hours D-Word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 1s r/w BU1 BU2
44.0 Int. Motor Operating Hours D-Word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 1s r BU1 BU2
48.0 Device Operating Hours D-Word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 1s r BU1 BU2
52.0 Number of Starts D-Word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF r/w BU1 BU2
56.0 Internal Number of Starts Right D-Word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF r BU1 BU2
60.0 Internal Number of Starts Left D-Word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF r BU1 BU2
64.0 Consumed Energy D-Word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 1 kWh r/w UM
Table B-10: Data Record 95 - Diagnosis - Statistical data
1) Can only be written when the Start Monitoring function is active!
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 B-17
B.10 Data Record 130 - Basic Device Parameters 1

Byte Designation Type Range De- Note Infor-
Bit (Prm group) fault mation
4.0 Device configuration (12) Byte[8] BU1 BU2
4.0 Device Class Byte 5, 9 5 = BU1 BU1 BU2
9 = BU2 BU2
5.0 Thermistor (Th) Bit 0, 1 1 = active; thermistor in the BU BU1 BU2
5.1 Reserved Bit[7]
6.0 Operator Panel (OP or OPD) Bit 0, 1 BU1 BU2
6.1 Analog Module (AM) Bit 0, 1 BU2
6.2 Temperature Module (TM) Bit 0, 1 BU2
6.3 Earth-Fault Module (EM) Bit 0, 1 BU2
6.4 Digital Module 1 (DM1) Bit[2] 0 .. 2 0 = No Digital Module BU2
1 = Monostable
2 = Bistable
6.6 Digital Module 2 (DM2) Bit[2] 0 .. 2 BU2
7.0 Reserved Bit[8]
8.0 Current Measuring Module Bit[7] 0 .. 5 0 = No Current Measurement BU1 BU2
(IM) 1 = 0.3 A - 3 A
2 = 2.4 A - 25 A
3 = 10 A - 100 A
4 = 20 A - 200 A
5 = 63 A - 630 A
8.7 Voltage Measuring (UM) Bit 0, 1 BU2
9.0 Reserved
10.0 Control Function (CF) 0x00 0x00 = Overload BU1 BU2
0x10 0x10 = Direct Starter BU1 BU2
0x11 0x11 = Reversing Starter BU1 BU2
0x12 0x12 = Linked Device BU1 BU2
0x20 0x20 = Star-Delta Starter BU2
0x21 0x21 = Star-Delta BU2
Reversing Starter
0x30 0x30 = Dahlander BU2
0x31 0x31 = Dahlander BU2
Reversing Starter
0x40 0x40 = Pole-Changing Starter BU2
0x41 0x41 = Pole-Changing BU2
Reversing Starter
0x50 0x50 = Valve BU2
0x60 0x60 = Positioner 1 BU2
0x70 0x70 = Soft Starter BU2
0x71 0x71 = Soft Starter with BU2
Reversing Contactor
11.0 Reserved Bit[8]
Table B-11: Data Record 130 - Basic Device Parameter 1
SIMOCODE pro
B-18 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02

12.0 Bit parameters (16)
12.0 No Configuration Fault due to Bit 0, 1 0 BU1 BU2
OP
12.1 Start-Up Parameter Block Bit 0, 1 1 BU1 BU2
Active
12.2 Test/Reset - Button Blocked Bit 0, 1 0 BU1 BU2
12.3 Bus and PLC/PCS - Reset Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Manual, 1 = Automatic BU1 BU2
12.4 Reserved Bit 0
12.5 Reserved Bit 0
12.6 Reserved Bit 0
12.7 Reserved Bit 0
13.0 Diagnosis Triggered by Event Bit 0, 1 0 BU1 BU2
13.1 Diagnosis Triggered by Bit 0, 1 1 BU1 BU2
Warning
13.2 Diagnosis Triggered by Trip Bit 0, 1 1 BU1 BU2
13.3 Diagnostics Triggered by Bit 0, 1 1 BU1 BU2
Device Fault
13.4 Reserved Bit 0
13.5 Reserved Bit 0
13.6 Bus Monitoring Bit 0, 1 1 BU1 BU2
13.7 PLC/PCS Monitoring Bit 0, 1 1 BU1 BU2
14.0 Overload Protection - Type of Bit 0, 1 0 0 = 3-phase, 1 = 1-phase IM UM
Load
14.1 Overload Protection - Reset Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Manual, 1 = Automatic IM UM
14.2 Reserved Bit 0
14.3 Saving Change-Over Command Bit 0, 1 0
14.4 Non-Maintained Command Bit 0, 1 0
Mode
14.5 Cold Starting Level (TPF) Bit 0, 1 0 0 = NO contact, 1 = NC contact BU1 BU2
14.6 Type of Consumer Load Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Motor, 1 = Resistive Load BU1 BU2
14.7 Reserved Bit 0
15.0 External Fault 1 - Type Bit 0, 1 0 0 = NO contact, 1 = NC contact BU1 BU2
15.1 External Fault 2 - Type Bit 0, 1 0 BU1 BU2
15.4 External Fault 1 - Activity Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Always, 1 = Only Motor ON BU1 BU2
15.5 External Fault 2 - Activity Bit 0, 1 0 BU1 BU2
Table B-11: Data Record 130 - Basic Device Parameter 1 (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 B-19

16.0 Bit[2] - Parameters (20)
16.0 Thermistor - Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 3 Th
Overload Response
16.2 Thermistor - Response Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 2 Th
to Sensor Error
16.4 Internal Earth Fault - Response Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0
16.6 Motor Protection - Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 3
Overload Response
17.0 Motor Protection - Overload Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 2
Response
17.2 Motor Protection - Overload Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 2
Response
17.4 Trip Response I> Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0
17.6 Warning Response I> Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0
18.0 Trip Response I< Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0
18.2 Warning Response I< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 0 = Deactivated
1 = Signaling
18.4 Stalled Rotor - Response Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 2 = Warning
18.6 Reserved Bit[2] 0 3 = Tripping
19.0 Monitoring the Number of Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU1 BU2
Starts -
Response at Overshoot
19.2 Monitoring the Number of Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 BU1 BU2
Starts -
Response at Pre-Warning
19.4 Motor Operating Hours Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 BU1 BU2
Monitoring - Response
19.6 Motor Stop Time Monitoring - Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 BU1 BU2
Response
20.0 Ext. Fault 1 - Response Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 1 BU1 BU2
21.2 Basic Unit - Delay Inputs Bit[2] 0-3 1 Offset 6 ms BU1 BU2
21.4 Timer 1 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = With Closing Delay BU1 BU2
21.6 Timer 2 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 1 = Closing Delay with Memory BU1 BU2
2 = With OFF Delay
3 = With Fleeting Closing
22.0 Signal Conditioner 1 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = Non-Inverting BU1 BU2
22.2 Signal Conditioner 2 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 1 = Inverting BU1 BU2
2 = Edge Rising with Memory
22.4 Non-Volatile Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU1 BU2
3 = Edge Falling with Memory
Element 1 - Type
22.6 Non-Volatile Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU1 BU2
Element 2 - Type
23.0 Reserved Bit[2] 0 BU1 BU2
SIMOCODE pro
B-20 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02

24.0 External Fault 1 - Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0101B Bit[0] = Panel Reset BU1 BU2
Reset also by Bit[1] = Auto-Reset
24.4 External Fault 2 - Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0101B Bit[2] = Remote Reset BU1 BU2
Reset also by Bit[3] = OFF Command-Reset
25.0 External Fault 3 - Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0101B BU1 BU2
Reset also by
25.4 External Fault 4 - Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0101B BU1 BU2
Reset also by
26.0 Limit Monitor - Bit[4] 0 .. 15 5 BU1 BU2
Hysteresis for Limit Monitors
28.0 Byte Parameters (28)
28.0 Internal Earth Fault - Delay Byte 0 .. 255 5 IM/UM
29.0 Overload Protection - Class Byte 5, 10 .. 35, 10 BU1
40 BU2
30.0 Motor Protection - Byte 0 .. 255 5 IM/UM
Delay with Overload
Operation
31.0 Motor Protection - Unbalance Byte 0 .. 100 40 IM/UM
Level
32.0 Unbalance Protection - Delay Byte 0 .. 255 5 IM/UM
with Unbalance
33.0 Interlocking Time Byte 0 .. 255 0
34.0 FB Time Byte 0 .. 255 5 0 = Deactivated
35.0 Trip Level I> Byte 0 .. 255 0 IM/UM
36.0 Warning Level I> Byte 0 .. 255 0 IM/UM
37.0 Trip Level I< Byte 0 .. 255 0 IM/UM
38.0 Warning Level I< Byte 0 .. 255 0 IM/UM
39.0 Stalled Rotor Level Byte 0 .. 255 0 IM/UM
40.0 Trip Delay I> Byte 0 .. 255 5 IM/UM
41.0 Warning Delay I> Byte 0 .. 255 5 IM/UM
42.0 Trip Delay I< Byte 0 .. 255 5 IM/UM
43.0 Warning Delay I< Byte 0 .. 255 5 IM/UM
44.0 Blocking Delay Byte 0 .. 255 5 IM/UM
45.0 Monitoring the Number of Byte 1 .. 255 1 BU1
Starts - Permissible Starts BU2
46.0 Reserved Byte 0
48.0 Truth Table 1 Type 3I/1O Byte 0 .. 0 BU1 BU2
11111111B
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 B-21

11111111B
11111111B
52.0 Word Parameters (32)
52.0 Motor Protection - Cooling Word 600 ..65535 3000 IM/UM
Down Period
54.0 Motor Protection - Pause Time Word 0 .. 65535 0 0 = Deactivated IM/UM
56.0 Execution Time Word 0 .. 65535 10 0 = Deactivated
58.0 Monitoring the Number of Word 0 .. 65535 0 BU1
Starts - BU2
60.0 Monitoring the Number of Word 0 .. 65535 0 BU1
Starts - Interlocking Time BU2
62.0 Stop Time Level > Word 0 .. 65535 0 BU1
BU2
64.0 Timer 1 - Limit Word 0 .. 65535 0 BU1
BU2
66.0 Timer 2 - Limit Word 0 .. 65535 0 BU1
BU2
68.0 Counter 1 - Limit Word 0 .. 65535 0 BU1
BU2
BU2
72.0 Reserved Word 0
74.0 Reserved Word 0
76.0 D-Word Parameters (36)
76.0 Operation Releases Bit[32] 0 .. 1..1B 0..0B
1)
80.0 Motor Protection - Set Current D-Word 30 IM/UM
Is1
84.0 Motor Operating Hours Level > D-Word 0 .. 0 BU1
0xFFFFFFFF BU2
88.0 Reserved D-Word 0
1) Value range dependent on current range of the IM/UM and the conversion factor
SIMOCODE pro
B-22 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
B.11 Data Record 131 - Basic Device Parameter 2 (Plug )
Byte. Designation Type Range De- Note Infor-

4.0 BU - Output 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
7.0 Reserved Byte 0
8.0 OP - LED Green 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 OP OPD
12.0 OP - LED Yellow 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 OP
16.0 Cyclic Send - Bit 0.0 Byte 0 .. 255 105 Default: Status - ON BU1 BU2
<
17.0 Cyclic Send - Bit 0.1 Byte 0 .. 255 106 Default: Status - OFF BU1 BU2
18.0 Cyclic Send - Bit 0.2 Byte 0 .. 255 107 Default: Status - ON BU1 BU2
>
19.0 Cyclic Send - Bit 0.3 Byte 0 .. 255 128 Default: Event - BU1 BU2
Overload Operation
20.0 Cyclic Send - Bit 0.4 Byte 0 .. 255 110 Default: Status - BU1 BU2
Interlocking Time
Active
Remote Mode
General Fault
General Warning
24.0 Cyclic Send - Bit 1.0 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
32.0 Acyclic Send - Bit 0.0 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
Table B-12: Data Record 131 - Basic Device Parameter 2
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 B-23

48.0 Monitoring PLC/PCS Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
49.0 Motor Protection - Emergency Start Byte 0 .. 255 60 Default: Cyclic IM UM
Receive - Bit 0.4
52.0 Operation Mode Selector S1 Byte 0 .. 255 61 Default: Cyclic BU1 BU2
Receive - Bit 0.5
53.0 Operation Mode Selector S2 Byte 0 .. 255 2 Default: Fixed Level BU1 BU2
Value "1"
54.0 Control Station - Local Control [LC] ON < Byte 0 .. 255 0 Dependen
55.0 Control Station - Local Control [LC] OFF Byte 0 .. 255 0 t on the
Control
56.0 Control Station - Local Control [LC] ON > Byte 0 .. 255 0
Function
57.0 Control Station - PLC/PCS [DP] ON < Byte 0 .. 255 56 Default: Cyclic
Receive - Bit 0.0
58.0 Control Station - PLC/PCS [DP] OFF Byte 0 .. 255 57 Default: Cyclic
Receive - Bit 0.1
59.0 Control Station - PLC/PCS [DP] ON > Byte 0 .. 255 58 Default: Cyclic
Receive - Bit 0.2
60.0 Control Station - PC[DPV1] ON < Byte 0 .. 255 0
61.0 Control Station - PC[DPV1] OFF Byte 0 .. 255 0
62.0 Control Station - PC[DPV1] ON > Byte 0 .. 255 0
63.0 Control Station - Operator Panel [OP] ON Byte 0 .. 255 0
<
64.0 Control Station - Operator Panel [OP] OFF Byte 0 .. 255 0
65.0 Control Station - Operator Panel [OP] ON Byte 0 .. 255 0
>
66.0 Control Function - ON < Byte 0 .. 255 73 Default: General
Control Station ON <
67.0 Control Function - OFF Byte 0 .. 255 74 Default: General
Control Station OFF
68.0 Control Function - ON > Byte 0 .. 255 75 Default: General
Control Station ON >
SIMOCODE pro
B-24 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02

69.0 Control Function - Feedback ON Byte 0 .. 255 101 Default: Status -
Motor Current
Flowing
70.0 External Fault 1 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
74.0 External Fault 1 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
78.0 Cold Starting (TPF) Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
79.0 Test 1 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 59 Default: Cyclic BU1 BU2
Receive - Bit 0.3
80.0 Test 2 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
81.0 Reset 1 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 62 Default: Cyclic BU1 BU2
Receive - Bit 0.6
82.0 Reset 2 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
83.0 Reset 3 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
88.0 Truth Table 1 3I/1O - Input 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
98.0 Timer 1 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
99.0 Timer 1 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
100.0 Timer 2 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
101.0 Timer 2 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
102.0 Counter 1 - Input + Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
103.0 Counter 1 - Input - Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
104.0 Counter 1 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
105.0 Counter 2 - Input + Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
106.0 Counter 2 - Input - Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
107.0 Counter 2 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
108.0 Signal Conditioner 1 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 B-25

109.0 Signal Conditioner 1 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
110.0 Signal Conditioner 2 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
111.0 Signal Conditioner 2 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
112.0 Non-Volatile Element 1 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
113.0 Non-Volatile Element 1 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
114.0 Non-Volatile Element 2 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
115.0 Non-Volatile Element 2 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
116.0 Flashing 1 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
119.0 Flickering 1 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2
122.0 Analog Parameters (44)
122.0 PLC/PCS Analog Input Byte 0 .. 255 16 Default: Max. BU1 BU2
Current I_max
SIMOCODE pro
B-26 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
B.12 Data Record 132 - Extended Device Parameter 1
Byte. Specification Type Range Unit De- Note Infor-

4.0 Bit parameters (17)
4.0 3UF50 - Compatibility Mode Bit 0, 1 0 BU2
4.1 3UF50 - Operating Mode Bit 0, 1 0 0 = DPV0, BU2
1 = DPV1
4.2 Reserved Bit 0
4.3 Reserved Bit 0
4.4 Reserved Bit 0
4.5 Reserved Bit 0
4.6 Reserved Bit 0
4.7 Reserved Bit 0
5.0 Reserved Bit 0
5.1 Reserved Bit 0
5.2 Reserved Bit 0
5.3 Reserved Bit 0
5.4 Analog Module - Measuring Range Bit 0, 1 0 AM
Input 0 = 0..20 mA
5.5 Analog Module - Measuring Range Bit 0, 1 0 1 = 4 - 20 mA AM
Output
5.6 Reserved Bit 0
5.7 Reserved Bit 0
6.0 Overshooting/Undershooting Limit 1 Bit 0, 1 0 0 = ">" BU2
6.1 Overshooting/Undershooting Limit 2 Bit 0, 1 0 (Overshooting) BU2
1 = "<"
6.2 Overshooting/Undershooting Limit 3 Bit 0, 1 0 BU2
(Undershooting)
6.3 Overshooting/Undershooting Limit 4 Bit 0, 1 0 BU2
6.4 Reserved Bit 0
6.5 OPO level Bit 0, 1 0 0 = NO Contact, BU2
1 = NC Contact
6.6 Positioner Response for OPO Bit 0, 1 0 0 = CLOSED, 1 = BU2
OPEN
6.7 Star-delta - Transformer Mounting Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Delta
1 = in Supply
Cable
7.0 External Fault 5 - Level Bit 0, 1 0 0 = NO Contact, BU2
7.1 External Fault 6 - Level Bit 0, 1 0 1 = NC Contact BU2
7.2 Reserved Bit 0
7.3 Reserved Bit 0
7.4 Monitoring External Fault 5 Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Always BU2
7.5 Monitoring External Fault 6 Bit 0, 1 0 1= Motor ON BU2
7.6 Reserved Bit 0
7.7 Reserved Bit 0
8.0 Calculation Module 2 - Operating Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Word BU2
Mode 1= D-Word
Table B-13: Data Record 132 - Extended Device Parameter 1
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 B-27

8.1 Reserved Bit 0
8.2 Reserved Bit 0
8.3 Reserved Bit 0
8.4 Timestamping Active Bit 0, 1 0 BU2
8.5 Reserved Bit 0
8.6 Reserved Bit 0
8.7 Reserved Bit 0
9.0 Reserved Bit 0
9.1 Reserved Bit 0
9.2 Reserved Bit 0
9.3 Reserved Bit 0
9.4 Reserved Bit 0
9.5 Reserved Bit 0
9.6 Reserved Bit 0
9.7 Reserved Bit 0
10.0 3UF50 - Basic Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 BU2
10.6 UVO Operating Mode Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 0 = Deactivated, BU2
1 = Activated
11.0 Trip Monitoring U< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 1 0 = ON (Always) UM
11.2 Warning Monitoring U< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 1 1 = ON+ UM
(Always, not
TPF)
2 = RUN (Motor
ON, not TPF)
12.0 Trip Monitoring Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = ON (Always) AM
0/4-20 mA> 1 = ON+
12.2 Warning Monitoring 0/4 - 20 mA> Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 (Always, not AM
TPF)
12.4 Trip Monitoring Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 AM
2 = RUN (Motor
0/4-20 mA<
ON, not TPF)
12.6 Warning Monitoring 0/4 - 20 mA< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 3 = RUN+ (motor AM
13.0 Monitoring Limit 1 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 ON, not TPF, BU2
13.2 Monitoring Limit 2 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 Start-Up BU2
13.4 Monitoring Limit 3 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 Override) BU2
13.6 Monitoring Limit 4 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU2
14.6 AM - Active Inputs Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 0 = 1 Input AM
1 = 2 Inputs
2 = 3 Inputs
15.0 DM - Delay Inputs Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 10 ms 1 Offset 6ms DM1/
DM2
Table B-13: Data Record 132 - Extended Device Parameter 1 (Cont.)
SIMOCODE pro
B-28 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02

15.2 AM - Response for Open Circuit Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 2 0 = Deactivated AM
15.4 EM - Response to an External Earth Bit[2] 1, 3 1 1 = Signaling EM
Fault 2 = Warning
3 = Tripping
15.6 EM - Response to Warning of an Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 EM
External Earth Fault
17.0 TM - Trip response T> Bit[2] 1, 3 3 0 = Deactivated TM
17.2 TM - Warning Response T> Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 2 1 = Signaling TM
2 = Warning
17.4 TM - Response to a Sensor Fault/Out Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 2 TM
3 = Tripping
of Range
17.6 TM - Active Sensors Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 2 0 = 1 Sensor TM
1 = 2 Sensors
2= 3 Sensors
18.0 Trip Response P> Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 0 = Deactivated UM
18.2 Warning Response P> Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 1 = Signaling UM
2 = Warning
18.4 Trip Response P< Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 UM
3 = Tripping
18.6 Warning Response P< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 UM
19.0 Trip Response cos phi< Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 UM
19.2 Warning Response cos phi< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 UM
19.4 Trip Response U< Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 UM
19.6 Warning Response U< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 UM
20.0 Trip Response 0/4 - 20 mA> Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 AM
20.2 Warning Response 0/4 - 20 mA> Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 AM
20.4 Trip Response 0/4 - 20 mA< Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 AM
20.6 Warning Response 0/4 - 20 mA< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 AM
22.0 Response - External Fault 5 Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 1 0 = Deactivated BU2
22.2 Response - External Fault 6 Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 1 1 = Signaling BU2
2 = Warning
3 = Tripping
23.0 Recording of Analog Values - Trigger Bit[2] 0, 1 0 0 = Positive BU2
Edge 1 = Negative
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 B-29

25.0 Timer 3 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = With Closing BU2
25.2 Timer 4 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 Delay BU2
1 = Closing
Delay with
Memory
2 = with OFF
Delay
3 = With
Fleeting
Closing
25.4 Signal Conditioner 3 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = Non- BU2
25.6 Signal Conditioner 4 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 Inverting BU2
1=
26.0 Non-Volatile Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU2
Inverting
Element 3 - Type
2 = Rising Edge
26.2 Non-Volatile Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 with Memory BU2
Element 4 - Type 3 = Falling Edge
with Memory
26.4 Calculation Module 2 - Operator Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = +,
1 = -,
2 = *,
3=/
28.0 TM - Sensor type Bit[3] 000B - 100B 000B 000B = PT100, TM
+Bit 001B = PT1000
010B = KTY83
011B = KTY84
100B = NTC
29.0 External Fault 5 - Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0101B Bit[0] = BU2
Reset also by Panel Reset,
29.4 External Fault 6 - Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0101B Bit[1] = BU2
Reset also by Auto-Reset,
Bit[2] =
Remote Reset,
Bit[3] = OFF
Command-Reset
32.0 Truth Table 7 type 2I/1O Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0 BU2
32.4 Truth Table 8 type 2I/1O Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0 BU2
33.0 Is1 Conversion Factor - Denominator Bit[4] 0 - 15 0 BU2
SIMOCODE pro
B-30 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02

33.4 Is2 Conversion Factor - Denominator Bit[4] 0 - 15 0 BU2
34.0 Hysteresis P - cos phi - U Bit[4] 0 - 15 5 1% UM
34.4 Hysteresis 0/4 - 20 mA Bit[4] 0 - 15 5 1% AM
35.0 Hysteresis Free Limits Bit[4] 0 - 15 5 1% BU2
37.0 EM - Delay Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 EM
38.0 Trip Level cos phi< Byte 0 - 100 1% 0 UM
39.0 Warning Level cos phi< Byte 0 - 100 1% 0 UM
40.0 Trip Level U< Byte 0 - 255 8V 0 UM
41.0 Warning level U< Byte 0 - 255 8V 0 UM
42.0 Trip Level 0/4 - 20 mA> Byte 0 - 255 *128 0 AM
43.0 Warning Level 0/4 - 20 mA> Byte 0 - 255 *128 0 AM
44.0 Trip Level 0/4 - 20 mA< Byte 0 - 255 *128 0 AM
45.0 Warning Level 0/4 - 20 mA< Byte 0 - 255 *128 0 AM
46.0 Trip Delay P> Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 UM
47.0 Warning Delay P> Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 UM
48.0 Trip Delay P< Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 UM
49.0 Warning Delay P< Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 UM
50.0 Trip Delay cos phi< Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 UM
51.0 Warning Delay cos phi< Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 UM
52.0 Trip Delay U< Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 UM
53.0 Warning Delay U< Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 UM
54.0 Trip Delay 0/4 - 20 mA> Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 AM
55.0 Warning Delay 0/4 - 20 mA> Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 AM
56.0 Trip Delay 0/4 - 20 mA< Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 AM
57.0 Warning Delay 0/4 - 20 mA< Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 AM
58.0 Delay Limit 1 Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 BU2
62.0 TM - Hysteresis Byte 0 - 255 1K 5 TM
63.0 Max. Star Time Byte 0 - 255 1s 20 Star-Delta
Starter
64.0 UVO Time Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 0 BU2
65.0 Staggering Time Byte 0 - 255 1s 0 BU2
66.0 Recording of Analog Values - Byte 0 - 20 5% 0 BU2
Sampling Rate
67.0 Calculation Module 2 - Denominator 1 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2
68.0 Calculation Module 2 - Counter 2 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2
69.0 Calculation Module 1 - Denominator Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2
70.0 Truth Table 4 Type 3I/1O Byte 0 .. 11111111B 0 BU2
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 B-31

73.0 Calculation Module 2 - Counter 1 Byte -128 - 127 0 BU2
74.0 Calculation Module 2 - Denominator 2 Byte -128 - 127 0 BU2
76.0 Word Parameters (33)
76.0 Analog Module - Start Value Output Word 0 .. 65535 0 Value for AM
0/4 mA
78.0 Analog Module - End Value Output Word 0 .. 65535 27648 Value for 20 mA AM
80.0 TM - Trip Level T> Word 0 .. 65535 1K 0 TM
82.0 TM - Warning level T> Word 0 .. 65535 1K 0 TM
84.0 Limit Monitor 1 - Limit Word 0 .. 65535 0 BU2
92.0 Timer 3 - Limit Word 0 .. 65535 100 ms 0 BU2
94.0 Timer 4 - Limit Word 0 .. 65535 100 ms 0 BU2
100.0 Change-Over Pause Word 0 .. 65535 10 ms 0
102.0 Recording of Analog Values - Word 1 .. 50000 1 ms 100 BU2
Sampling Rate
104.0 Is1 Conversion Factor - Counter Word 0 .. 65535 0 BU2
106.0 Is2 Conversion Factor - Counter Word 0 .. 65535 0 BU2
108.0 D-Word Parameters (37)
108.0 Overload Protection - Set Current Is2 D-Word 1) 10 mA 0
112.0 Trip Level P> D-Word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 1W 0 UM
116.0 Warning Level P> D-Word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 1W 0 UM
120.0 Trip Level P< D-Word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 1W 0 UM
124.0 Warning Level P< D-Word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF 1W 0 UM
128.0 Truth Table 9 Bit [32] 0 .. 1..1B 0 BU2
Type 5I/2O - Output 1
132.0 Truth Table 9 Bit [32] 0 .. 1..1B 0 BU2
Type 5I/2O - Output 2
136.0 Calculation Module 2, Offset D-Word -0x80000000 .. 0 BU2
0x7FFFFFFF
140.0 Calculation Module 1, Counter/Offset D-Word 2x 0 BU2
-32768..32767
1) Value range dependent on current range of the IM/UM and the conversion factor
SIMOCODE pro
B-32 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
B.13 Data Record 133 - Extended Device Parameter 2

(Plug )

4.0 DM1 - Output 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 DM1
5.0 DM1 - Output 2 Byte 0 .. 255 0 DM1
6.0 DM2 - Output 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 DM2
7.0 DM2 - Output 2 Byte 0 .. 255 0 DM2
8.0 Reserved Byte 0
9.0 Reserved Byte 0
12.0 Timestamping - Input 0 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
20.0 Recording of Analog Values - Trigger Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
22.0 Control Station - Local Control [LC] ON << Byte 0 .. 255 0 Depen-
23.0 Control Station - Local Control [LC] ON >> Byte 0 .. 255 0 dent
on the
24.0 Control Station - PLC/PCS [DP] ON << Byte 0 .. 255 0
Control
25.0 Control Station - PLC/PCS [DP] ON >> Byte 0 .. 255 0 Function
26.0 Control Station - PC[DPV1] ON << Byte 0 .. 255 0
27.0 Control Station - PC[DPV1] ON >> Byte 0 .. 255 0
28.0 Control Station - Operator Panel [OP] ON >> Byte 0 .. 255 0
29.0 Control Station - Operator Panel [OP] <>/ <<>> Byte 0 .. 255 0
30.0 Control Function - ON << Byte 0 .. 255 0
31.0 Control Function - ON >> Byte 0 .. 255 0
32.0 Auxiliary Control Input - FC Byte 0 .. 255 0
33.0 Auxiliary Control Input - FO Byte 0 .. 255 0
34.0 Auxiliary Control Input - TC Byte 0 .. 255 0
35.0 Auxiliary Control Input - TO Byte 0 .. 255 0
36.0 External Fault 5 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
37.0 External Fault 6 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
40.0 External Fault 5 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
Table B-14: Data Record 133 - Extended Device Parameter 2
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 B-33

41.0 External Fault 6 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
44.0 UVO fault Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
45.0 OPO error Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
46.0 Truth Table 4 3I/1O - Input 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
64.0 Timer 3 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
65.0 Timer 3 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
66.0 Timer 4 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
67.0 Timer 4 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
68.0 Counter 3 - Input + Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
69.0 Counter 3 - Input - Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
70.0 Counter 3 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
71.0 Counter 4 - Input + Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
72.0 Counter 4 - Input - Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
73.0 Counter 4 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
74.0 Signal Conditioner 3 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
75.0 Signal Conditioner 3 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
76.0 Signal Conditioner 4 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
77.0 Signal Conditioner 4 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
78.0 Non-Volatile Element 3 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
79.0 Non-Volatile Element 3 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
80.0 Non-Volatile Element 4 - Input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
81.0 Non-Volatile Element 4 - Reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2
SIMOCODE pro
B-34 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02

88.0 Analog Parameters (45)
88.0 Analog Module - Output Byte 0 - 255 0 AM
89.0 Analog Input Limit 1 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2
93.0 Calculation Module 1 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2
94.0 Recording of Analog Values - Analog Input Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2
95.0 PLC/PCS Analog Input 2 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2
98.0 Calculation Module 2 - Input 1 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2
99.0 Calculation Module 2 - Input 2 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 B-35
B.14 Data Record 139 - Marking

The diagnostics
• External fault 1 to 6 (status information warnings and faults)
• Limit 1 to 4 (status information)
• TM warning T>/tripping T> (status information, warnings and faults)
• Warning/tripping 0/4 - 20 mA<> (status information, warnings and faults)
can be parameterized to have various meanings e.g. fill level >, stock hot,
etc. To simplify the diagnostics, these texts can be saved in the device.
These can be created, read out and displayed, for example, with
SIMOCODE ES. The texts have no functionality.
Byte.Bit Designation Type Information
10.0 Marking - External Fault 1 Byte[10] BU1 BU2
50.0 Marking - External Fault 5 Byte[10] BU2
60.0 Marking - External Fault 6 Byte[10] BU2
90.0 Marking - Limit 1 Byte[10] BU2
130.0 Marking - TM warning T> Byte[10] BU2
140.0 Marking - TM Trip T> Byte[10] BU2
150.0 Marking - Warning 0/4 - 20 mA> Byte[10] BU2
160.0 Marking - Warning 0/4 - 20 mA< Byte[10] BU2
170.0 Marking - Trip 0/4 - 20 mA> Byte[10] BU2
180.0 Marking - Trip 0/4 - 20 mA< Byte[10] BU2
Table B-15: Data Record 139 - Marking
SIMOCODE pro
B-36 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
B.15 Data Record 160 - Communication Parameters
Notice
Only the address is relevant for writing. The baud rate is recognized
automatically. The current baud rate is read.
4.0 Station Address Byte

BU1 BU2
5.0 Baud Rate Byte
6.0 to 11.0 Reserved Byte[6]
Table B-16: Data Record 160 - Communication Parameters
B.16 Data Record 165 - Comments
4.0 Plant Identifier Byte[32]
36.0 Location Designation Byte[22]

BU1 BU2
58.0 Date Byte[16]
112.0 Comment Byte[54]
Table B-17: Data Record 165 - Comments
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 B-37
B.17 Data Record 202 - Acyclic Receive

Description
The Acyclic Receive Data can be used for any functions. The Receive Data is
available as device-internal Outputs (sockets).
4.0 Acyclic Receive - Bit 0.0 Bit

BU1 BU2
6.0 Acyclic Receive - Analog Value Word
Table B-18: Data Record 202 - Acyclic Receive
SIMOCODE pro
B-38 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
B.18 Data Record 203 - Acyclic Send

Description
Any data can be transmitted via the Acyclic Send Data. The Send Data is
available as device-internal Inputs (plugs).
0.0 Acyclic Send - Bit 0.0 Bit

BU1 BU2
Table B-19: Data Record 203 - Acyclic Send
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 B-39
B.19 Data Record 224 - Password Protection

Description
• Password protection ON
If the data record is received with this control flag, the password protection is
activated and the password is accepted. If, at the time of receiving,
"Password protection ON" and the password are not the same, the event
"Event - Password False" is set and no change is carried out.
• Password protection OFF
If the data record is received with this control flag, the password protection
is deactivated. If the password is false, the event "Event - Password False" is
set and no change is carried out.
4.0 Control Flag: 0 = Password Protection OFF Bit BU1 BU2

1 = Password Protection ON
4.1 Reserved Bit [31]
8.0 Password Byte[8] BU1 BU2
Table B-20: Data Record 224 - Password Protection
SIMOCODE pro
B-40 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
B.20 Assignment of Cyclic Receive and Send Data for

Predefined Control Functions
B.20.1 Overload Relay
Cycl. Receive Data

Bit 0.0 Not Connected
Bit 0.3 Further Function Blocks -> Standard Functions -> Test/Reset -> Test 1 - Input
Bit 0.4 Further Function Blocks -> Standard Functions -> Emergency Start -> Emergency Start -
Input
Bit 0.6 Further Function Blocks -> Standard Functions -> Test/Reset -> Reset 1 - Input
Byte 2/3 *) (Analog Value) Not Connected
Cycl. Send Data
Bit 0.3 Event - Pre-Warning Overload (I>115 %)
Bit 0.6 Status - General Fault
Bit 0.7 Status - General Warning
Byte 2/3 (Analog Value) Maximum Current I_max
Byte 6/7 *) (Analog Value)( Not Connected
Table B-21: Assignment of Cyclic Receive/Send Data - Overload Relay
*) for SIMOCODE pro V, basic type 1 only
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 B-41
B.20.2 Direct Starter
Cycl. Receive Data

Bit 0.1 Device Parameters -> Motor Control -> Control Stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> OFF
Bit 0.2 Device Parameters -> Motor Control -> Control Stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> ON
Bit 0.3 Further Function Blocks -> Standard Functions - Test/Reset -> Test 1 - Input
Bit 0.4 Further Function Blocks -> Standard Functions -> Emergency Start -> Emergency Start - Input
Bit 0.5 Device Parameters -> Motor Control -> Control Stations -> Operation Mode Selector S1
Cycl. Send Data
Bit 0.1 Status - OFF
Bit 0.2 Status - ON >
Bit 0.5 Status - Remote Mode
Table B-22: Assignment of Cyclic Receive/Send Data - Direct Starter
SIMOCODE pro
B-42 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
B.20.3 Reversing Starter
Cycl. Receive Data

Bit 0.0 Device Parameters -> Motor Control -> Control Stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> ON <
Bit 0.2 Device Parameters -> Motor Control -> Control Stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> ON >
Cycl. Send Data
Bit 0.0 Status - ON <
Bit 0.4 Status - Interlocking Time Active
Table B-23: Assignment of Cyclic Receive/Send Data - Reversing Starter
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 B-43
B.20.4 Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB)
Cycl. Receive Data

Cycl. Send Data
Table B-24: Assignment of Cyclic Receive/Send Data - Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB)
SIMOCODE pro
B-44 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
B.20.5 Star-Delta Starter
Cycl. Receive Data

Cycl. Send Data
Bit 0.2 Status - ON
Bit 0.4 Status - Change-Over Pause Active
Table B-25: Assignment of Cyclic Receive/Send Data - Star-delta Starter
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 B-45
B.20.6 Star-Delta Reversing Starter
Cycl. Receive Data

Cycl. Send Data
Table B-26: Assignment of Cyclic Receive/Send Data - Star-delta Reversing Starter
SIMOCODE pro
B-46 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
B.20.7 Dahlander
Cycl. Receive Data

Bit 0.0 Device Parameters -> Motor Control -> Control Stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> ON >>
Cycl. Send Data
Bit 0.0 Status - ON >>
Table B-27: Assignment of Cyclic Receive/Send Data - Dahlander
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 B-47
B.20.8 Dahlander Reversing Starter
Cycl. Receive Data

Bit 1.0 Device Parameters -> Motor Control -> Control Stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> ON <<
Cycl. Send Data
Bit 1.0 Status - ON <<
Bit 1.2 Status ON <
Table B-28: Assignment of Cyclic Receive/Send Data - Dahlander Reversing Starter
SIMOCODE pro
B-48 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
B.20.9 Pole-Changing Starter
Cycl. Receive Data

Cycl. Send Data
Table B-29: Assignment of Cyclic Receive/Send Data - Pole-changing Starter
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 B-49
B.20.10 Pole-Changing Reversing Starter
Cycl. Receive Data

Bit 1.0 Device Parameters -> Motor Control -> Control Stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> ON <<
Cycl. Send Data
Bit 1.0 Status - ON <<
Bit 1.2 Status ON <
Table B-30: Assignment of Cyclic Receive/Send Data - Pole-changing Reversing Starter
SIMOCODE pro
B-50 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
B.20.11 Solenoid Valve
Cycl. Receive Data

Bit 0.1 Device Parameters -> Motor Control -> Control Stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> CLOSED
Bit 0.2 Device Parameters -> Motor Control -> Control Stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> OPEN
Cycl. Send Data
Bit 0.1 Status - OFF (Closed)
Bit 0.2 Status - ON > (Open)
Byte 2/3 (Analog Value) Not Connected
Table B-31: Assignment of Cyclic Receive/Send Data - Solenoid Valve
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 B-51
B.20.12 Positioner
Cycl. Receive Data

Bit 0.0 Device Parameters -> Motor Control -> Control Stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> CLOSED
Bit 0.1 Device Parameters -> Motor Control -> Control Stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> STOP
Bit 0.2 Device Parameters -> Motor Control -> Control Stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> OPEN
Cycl. Send Data
Bit 0.0 Status - ON < (Closed)
Bit 0.1 Status - OFF (Stop)
Bit 0.2 Status - ON > (Open)
Bit 1.0 Status - Positioner Runs in Open Direction
Bit 1.2 Status - Positioner Runs in Close Direction
Table B-32: Assignment of Cyclic Receive/Send Data - Positioner
SIMOCODE pro
B-52 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
B.20.13 Soft Starter
Cycl. Receive Data

Cycl. Send Data
Table B-33: Assignment of Cyclic Receive/Send Data - Soft Starter
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 B-53
B.20.14 Soft Starter with Reversing Contactor
Cycl. Receive Data

Cycl. Send Data
Table B-34: Assignment of Cyclic Receive/Send Data - Soft Starter with Reversing Contactor
SIMOCODE pro
B-54 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Dimension Drawings C
In this chapter
This chapter contains the technical dimension drawings of the
SIMOCODE pro system components.
Target groups
• Configurators
• Technicians.
Necessary knowledge
• Thorough knowledge of switchgear configuration.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 C-1
Dimension Drawings
C.1 3UF70 Basic Unit

C.1.1 SIMOCODE pro C 3UF7000 Basic Unit
12
106
80
5
45 5 36
86 4
C.1.2 SIMOCODE pro V 3UF7010 Basic Unit

12
106
80
5
45 5 65
115 4
SIMOCODE pro
C-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Dimension Drawings
C.2 3UF710 Current Measuring Module

3UF7100, 0.3 A to 3 A,
3UF7101, 2.4 A to 25 A
84
45 5 40
7,5
T3 T1
38
T2
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 C-3
Dimension Drawings

3UF7102, 10 A to 100 A
94
55 5 67
14
T1
T3
65
T2
SIMOCODE pro
C-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Dimension Drawings

3UF7103, 20 A to 200 A
120
95
79
95
7 5 140
78
25
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 C-5
Dimension Drawings

3UF7103, 20 A to 200 A
120
95
37 17
9
119
95
79
7 5 47
140
84
SIMOCODE pro
C-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Dimension Drawings

3UF7104, 63 A to 630 A
145
50 25
11
57
147
122
125 85
9
60,5 6
148
60,5
6
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 C-7
Dimension Drawings
C.3 Current/Voltage Measuring Modules

3UF7110, 0.3 A to 3 A,
3UF7111, 2.4 A to 25 A
45
85
21
5
7
31
11
66
SIMOCODE pro
C-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Dimension Drawings

3UF7112, 10 A to 100 A
55
94
20
5
12
23
60
92
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 C-9
Dimension Drawings

3UF7113-1AA, 20 A to 200 A

SIMOCODE pro
C-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Dimension Drawings

3UF7113-1BA, 20 A to 200 A
37 9 17 79
Ø
119
79
95
95 5 47
140
120
3
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 C-11
Dimension Drawings

3UF7114, 63 A to 630 A
48 25
1
Ø1
88
147
122
1
125 Ø1
32
67
149
145
6
SIMOCODE pro
C-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Dimension Drawings
C.4 3UF7200 and 3UF7210 Operator Panels

C.4.1 3UF7200 Operator Panel
96
27,9
29
36
8,9
32,3
41,1
26 20,7
C.4.2 3UF7210 Operator Panel with Display
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 C-13
Dimension Drawings
C.5 Expansion Modules / Decoupling Module
10
92
68
22,5 5 115 4
15
110
Versions:
• 3UF73 Digital Modules
• 3UF7500 Earth-fault Module
• 3UF7700 Temperature Module
• 3UF7400 Analog Module
• 3UF715 Decoupling Module
SIMOCODE pro
C-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Dimension Drawings
C.6 Accessories
C.6.1 Door Adapter
IP54
37 24.5+0.5
ø3
R2
.4
Ø
±0
3
.1
13.5+0.5
17 37±0.1
46
IP54
26.5+0.5
R2
ø3
39
.4
13.5+0.5
37
C.6.2 Operator Panel Adapter

SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 C-15
Dimension Drawings
SIMOCODE pro
C-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Technical Data D
In this chapter
This chapter contains information about SIMOCODE pro technical data.
Target groups
• Configurators.
Necessary knowledge
• Thorough knowledge of switchgear configuration
• Thorough knowledge of SIMOCODE pro.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 D-1
Technical Data
D.1 Common Technical Data

Permiss. Ambient Temperature
In operation -25 °C to +60 °C 1)
For storage and transport -40 °C to +80 °C 2)
Site altitude above sea level
< 2000 m
< 3000 m Max. +50 °C (no safe isolation)
< 4000 m Max. +40 °C (no safe isolation)
Degree of protection (according
to IEC 60529)
All components (except Current IP20
Measuring Module with Bus
Connection, Operator Panel and
Door Adapter)
Current Measuring Module with IP00
Bus Connection
Operator Panel (front) and Door IP54
Adapter (front) with Cover
Shock resistance (sine pulse) 15 g / 11 ms
Mounting position Any
Frequencies 50/60 Hz ± 5%
EMC stability Corresponds to Degree of Severity 3
according to IEC 60947-1
Conducted interference, burst 2 kV (power ports) overvoltage limiter
according to IEC 61000-4-4 isrequired for inductive loads.
1 kV (signal ports)
Conducted interference, high 10 V
frequency according to IEC 61000-
4-6
Conducted interference, surge 2 kV (line to earth)
according to IEC 61000-4-5 1 kV (line to earth)
Electrostatic discharging, 8 kV (air discharge)
ESD according to IEC 61000-4-2 6 kV (contact discharge) 3)
Field-related interference according 10 V/m
to IEC 61000-4-3
EMC emitted interference
according to IEC 60947-1
This is a Class A product. This product can
cause radio interference if used in a
domestic environment. Therefore, the user
may need to implement suitable
countermeasures.
Conducted and emitted DIN EN 55011/DIN EN 55022 (CISPR11/CISPR22)
interference (corresponds to Degree of Severity A)
Safe isolation All SIMOCODE pro circuits are isolated from each other
according to IEC 60947-1 according to IEC 60947-1, i.e. dimensioned with double
creepage distance and air clearance.
Notice
Please observe the information in the "Safe Isolation" test
report, No. 2668.
1) For 3UF721 Operator Panel with Display 0... 60 °C

2) For 3UF721 Operator Panel with Display -20... 70 °C
3) For 3UF721 Operator Panel with Display 4kV
SIMOCODE pro
D-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Technical Data
D.2 Technical Data of the Basic Units

Mounting Snap-on mounting onto 35-mm standard mounting rails or
screw attachment via additional plug-in lugs
Display
• Red/green/yellow "DEVICE" LED • Red: "Function Test was Negative, Device is Blocked"
• Green: "Ready for Operation"
• Yellow: "Memory Module or Addressing Plug Detected"
• OFF: "No Control Supply Voltage"
• Green "BUS" LED • Continuous light: "Communication with PLC/PCS"
• Flashing: "Baud Rate Detected / Communication with PC/
Programming Device"
• Red "GEN. FAULT" LED Continuous light / flashing: "Feeder Fault", e.g. Overload
Tripping
TEST/RESET" Button • Resets the device after tripping
• Function Test (system self-test)
• Operation of Memory Module, Addressing Plug
System interfaces
• Front For connecting an Operator Panel or Expansion Modules. The
Memory Module, Addressing Plug or a PC cable can also be
connected to the system interface for parameterization
purposes.
• Bottom For connecting a Current Measuring Module or Current/Voltage
Measuring Module
PROFIBUS DP interface
• Interface design RS485
• Connection system 9-pole SUB-D socket (12 MBit)
Terminals (1.5 MBit), connection cross section as per control
circuit
Connection of a PROFIBUS DP cable via terminal connection or
9-pole SUB-D socket.
Rated Control Supply Voltage Us 110 V - 240 V AC/DC 50/60 Hz 24 V DC
(according to DIN EN 61131-2)
Operating Range 0.85 x Us - 1.1 x Us 0.85 x Us - 1.2 x Us
Power Consumption
• Basic Unit 1 (3UF7000) 7 VA 5W
• Basic Unit 2 (3UF7010) 10 VA 7W
(including two Expansion Modules
connected to Basic Unit 2)
Rated Insulation 300 V (at Degree of Pollution 3)
Voltage Ui
Rated Impulse Withstand Voltage 4 kV
Uimp
Mains Buffering Time • SIMOCODE pro C type 50 ms
(longer power failures lead to 24 V DC
shutdown of the relay outputs 110 V - 240 V AC/DC
(monostable)) • SIMOCODE pro V
24 V DC
• SIMOCODE pro V type 200 ms
110 V - 240 V AC/DC
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 D-3
Technical Data
Relay Outputs:
• Number 3 monostable Relay Outputs
• Auxiliary Contacts of the The isolated NO contacts (NC contact response
3 Relay Outputs parameterizable via Internal Signal Conditioning), 2 Relay
Outputs with common root, one Relay Output separate, freely-
assignable to control functions (e.g. Network, Star or Delta
Contactor or Signaling of the Operating State)
• Mandatory Short-circuit Protection • Fuse link, operating class gL/gG 6 A, fast-acting 10 A
for Auxiliary Contacts (Relay (IEC 60947-5-1)
Outputs) • Miniature circuit breaker 1.6 A, C-characteristic
(IEC 60947-5-1)
• Miniature circuit breaker 6 A, C-characteristic (Ik < 500 A)
• Rated Uninterrupted Current 5A
6 A at max. +50 °C
• Rated Switching Capacity AC-15 6 A / 24 V AC 6 A / 120 V AC 3 A / 230 V AC
DC-13 2 A / 24 V DC 0.55 A / 60 V DC 0.25 A / 125 V DC
Inputs (binary) 4 inputs with a common root that are supplied via the device
electronics (24 V DC) for measuring process signals (e.g. Local
Control Station, Key-operated Switch, Limit Switch, etc.),
freely-assignable to control functions.
• 24 V DC
Cable lengths (single) 300 m
Input characteristic Type 1 accord. to EN 61131-2
Thermistor Motor Protection
(PTC binary)
• Total Cold Resistance < 1.5 kOhm
• Response Value 3.4 kOhm - 3.8 kOhm
• Return Value 1.5 kOhm - 1.65 kOhm
• Cable lengths Cross section:2.5 mm2 Length:2 x 250 m
1.5 mm2 2 x 150 m
0.5 mm2 2 x 50 m
Connection
• Tightening torque TORQUE: 7 LB.IN - 10.3 LB.IN
0.8 Nm - 1.2 Nm
• Connection cross sections:
- Solid 2 x 0.5 mm2 - 2.5 mm2 / 1 x 0.5 mm2 - 4 mm2
2 x AWG 20 to 14 / 1 x AWG 20 to 12
- Finely stranded, with end sleeves 2 x 0.5 mm2 - 1.5 mm2 / 1 x 0.5 mm2 - 2.5 mm2
2 x AWG 20 to 16 / 1 x AWG 20 to 14
SIMOCODE pro
D-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Technical Data
D.3 Technical Data of the Current Measuring Modules or

Current/Voltage Measuring Modules
Mounting
• Set Current le = 0.3 A - 3 A; Snap-on mounting onto 35-mm standard mounting rails or
2.4 A - 25 A; 10 A - 100 A screw attachment via additional plug-in lugs
(3UF71.0, 3UF71.1, 3UF71.2)
• Set Current ls = 20 A - 200 A Snap-on mounting onto 35-mm standard mounting rails, screw
(3UF7103, 3UF7 113) attachment onto the mounting plate or direct mounting to the
contactor
• Set Current ls = 63 A - 630 A Screw attachment to the mounting plate or direct mounting to
(3UF7103, 3UF7 114) the contactor
System interface for connection to a Basic Unit or Decoupling Module
Main Circuit
• Set Current Is 3UF71.0: 0.3 A - 3 A 3UF71.1: 20 A - 200 A
3UF71.1:2.4 A - 25 A 3UF71.1: 63 A - 630 A
3UF71.1: 10 A - 100 A
• Rated Insulation Voltage Ui (at 690 V 1)
Degree of Pollution 3)
• Rated Operational Voltage Ue 690 V
• Rated Impulse Withstand Voltage 6 kV 2)
Uimp
• Rated Frequency 50/60 Hz
• Type of current Three-phase current
• Short circuit Additional Short-circuit Protection in Main Circuit
required 3)
• Accuracy of Current Measuring +/- 3 %
(ranging from 1 times the
minimum Set Current Imin to
8 times the maximum Set Current
Imax)
Typical measuring range of the
Voltage Measuring
• Phase-to-phase voltage / line-to- 110 V - 690 V (only the phase voltages are available in the
line voltage (e.g. UL1L2) system as measured values)
• Phase voltage (e.g. UL1) 65 V - 400 V
Accuracy of
• voltage measuring in the range +/- 3 % (typical)
230 V - 400 V
• cos phi measurement (in the +/- 5 % (typical)
nominal load range cos phi =
0.4 ... 0.8) +/- 5 % (typical)
• apparent power measurement (in
the nominal load range)
1) for 3UF7103 and 3UF7104 up to 1000 V
2) for 3UF7103 and 3UF7104 up to 8 kV
3) More information can be found at http://www.siemens.com/simocode and Chapter D.7 "Short-Circuit Protection
with Fuses for Motor Feeders for Short-Circuit Currents up to 50 kA and 690 V" on Page D-14.
4) Screw connection is possible with an appropriate 3RT19... box terminal.
5) When connecting cable lugs complying with DIN 46235 to cables with a cross section larger than 95 mm2, the
3RT19 56-4EA1 terminal cover is required to maintain phase separation.
6) When connecting cable lugs complying with DIN 46234 to cables with a cross section larger than 240 mm 2 and
when connecting cable lugs complying with DIN 46235 to cables with a cross section larger than 185 mm2, the
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 D-5
Technical Data
Notes on voltage measuring

• in ungrounded networks or • In this network, the Current/Voltage Measuring Module can
networks with integrated only be used with one decoupling module that is connected
insulation measurement and/or upstream in series with the system interface.
insulation monitoring
• Suppy cable for voltage
• Caution
measurement
Note that the supply cables for voltage measurement may
require additional cable protection
Through-hole opening Diameter

• Set current 0.3 A - 3 A; 7.5 mm
2.4 A - 25 A
• Set current 10 A - 100 A 14.0 mm
• Set current 20 A - 200 A 25.0 mm
Bus connection 4)
• Set current Is 20 A - 200 A 63 A - 630 A
• Connection screw M8 x 20 M10 x 30
• Tightening torque 10 Nm - 14 Nm 14 Nm - 24 Nm
• Solid with cable lug 16 mm2 - 95 mm2 4)5) 50 mm2 - 240 mm2 4)6)
2 2 4)5)
• Stranded with cable lug 25 mm - 120 mm 70 mm2 - 240 mm2 4)6)
• AWG cable 6 kcmil - 300 kcmil 1/0 kcmil - 500 kcmil
Connection for voltage measurement
0.8 Nm - 1.2 Nm
2 x AWG 20 to 14 / 1 x AWG 20 to 12
2 x AWG 20 to 16 / 1 x AWG 20 to 14
1) for 3UF7103 and 3UF7104 up to 1000 V
2) for 3UF7103 and 3UF7104 up to 8 kV
3) More information can be found at http://www.siemens.com/simocode and Chapter D.7 "Short-Circuit Protection
with Fuses for Motor Feeders for Short-Circuit Currents up to 50 kA and 690 V" on Page D-14.
4) Screw connection is possible with an appropriate 3RT19... box terminal.
5) When connecting cable lugs complying with DIN 46235 to cables with a cross section larger than 95 mm2, the
6) When connecting cable lugs complying with DIN 46234 to cables with a cross section larger than 240 mm 2 and
when connecting cable lugs complying with DIN 46235 to cables with a cross section larger than 185 mm2, the
SIMOCODE pro
D-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Technical Data
D.4 Technical Data of the Decoupling Module

Display
• Green "READY" LED
System interfaces The left interface is for connection to a Basic Unit or an
expansion module, the right interface is exclusively for
connection to a Current/Voltage Measuring Module.
Connection cross sections
• Connection torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2
• Solid mm2 1 x (0.5 ... 4.0); 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
• Finely stranded, with end sleeves mm2 1 x (0.5 ... 2.5); 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
• AWG cable (solid) AWG 1 x AWG 20 to 12/2 x AWG 20 to 14
• AWG cable (finely stranded) AWG 1 x AWG 20 to 14/2 x AWG 20 to 16
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 D-7
Technical Data
D.5 Technical Data of the Expansion Modules

D.5.1 Technical Data of the Digital Modules

Display
• Green "READY" LED • Continuous light: "Ready for Operation"
• Flashing: "No Connection to Basic Unit"
System interfaces For connecting to a Basic Unit, an additional expansion
module, a Current Measuring Module or a Current/Voltage
Measuring Module or the Operator Panel
Control Circuit
Rated Insulation 300 V (for Degree of Pollution 3)
Voltage Ui
Rated Impulse Withstand 4 kV
Voltage Uimp
Relay Outputs
• Number 2 monostable or bistable Relay Outputs (depend. on version)
• Auxiliary Contacts of the 2 Relay Isolated NO contacts (NC contact response parameterizable
Outputs via internal signal conditioning), Relay Outputs all with
common root, freely-assignable to control functions (e.g.
network, star or delta contactor or status information about
the operating state).
• Stipulated Short-circuit • Fuse links, operating class gL/gG 6 A, fast-acting 10 A
Protection for Auxiliary (IEC 60947-5-1)
Contacts (Relay Outputs) • Miniature circuit breaker 1.6 A, C-characteristic
(IEC 60947-5-1)
• Miniature circuit breaker 6 A, C-characteristic (Ik < 500 A)
• Rated Uninterrupted Current 5A
6 A at max. +50 °C
• Rated Switching Capacity AC-15 6 A / 24 V AC 6 A / 120 V AC 3 A / 230 V AC
DC-13 2 A / 24 V DC 0.55 A / 60 V DC 0.25 A / 125 V DC
Inputs (binary) 4 externally supplied, isolated Inputs (24 V DC or 110 V - 240 V
AC/DC, depending on version), inputs with common root for
measuring process signals (e.g. Local Control Station, Key-
operated Switches, Limit Switches, ...), freely-assignable to
control functions.
• 24 V DC
Cable lengths (single) 300 m
Input characteristic Type 2 according to EN 61131-2
• 110 V up to 240 V AC/DC
Cable lengths (single) 200 m (cable capacitance 300 nF/km)
Input characteristic —
Connection
0.8 Nm - 1.2 Nm
2 x AWG 20 to 14 / 1 x AWG 20 to 12
2 x AWG 20 to 16 / 1 x AWG 20 to 14
SIMOCODE pro
D-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Technical Data
D.5.2 Technical Data of the Analog Module

Display
Control Circuit
Type of connection: 2-wire connection
Inputs:
• Channels 2 (passive)
• Parameterizable measuring 0/4 mA - 20 mA
ranges
• Cable shielding Recommended for up to 30 m and outside the switchgear
cabinet; shielding mandatory for cables over 30 m
• Max. input current 40 mA
(destruction limit)
• Accuracy ±1 %
• Input resistance 50 Ohm
• Conversion time 150 ms
• Resolution 12 bit
• Open circuit detection For measuring range 4 mA - 20 mA
• Isolation of the Inputs to the No
device electronics
Output:
• Channels 1
• Parameterizable output range 0/4 mA - 20 mA
• Cable shielding Recommended for up to 30 m and outside the switchgear
cabinet; shielding mandatory for cables over 30 m
• Max. output voltage 30 V DC
• Accuracy ±1 %
• Max. output load 500 Ohm
• Conversion time 25 ms
• Resolution 12 bit
• Short-circuit proof Yes
• Isolation of the Outputs to the No
device electronics
Connection:
• Tightening Torque TORQUE: 7 LB.IN - 10.3 LB.IN
0.8 Nm - 1.2 Nm
2 x AWG 20 to 14 / 1 x AWG 20 to 12
2 x AWG 20 to 16 / 1 x AWG 20 to 14
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 D-9
Technical Data
D.5.3 Technical Data of the Earth-Fault Module

Display
Control Circuit
Connectable 3UL22 summation 0.3/0.5/1 A
current transformer with rated
fault currents IN
• IEarth fault < 50 % IN No tripping
• IEarth fault > 100 % IN Tripping
Response delay (conversion time) 300 ms - 500 ms, additionally delayable
Connection:
0.8 Nm - 1.2 Nm
2 x AWG 20 to 14 / 1 x AWG 20 to 12
2 x AWG 20 to 16 / 1 x AWG 20 to 14
D.5.4 Technical Data of the Temperature Module

Display
Sensor Circuit
Conversion time 500 ms
Type of connection: 2 or 3-wire connection
Typical sensor current:
• PT100 1 mA (typical)
• PT1000/KTY83/KTY84/NTC 0.2 mA (typical)
Open Circuit Detection / Short-
circuit Detection / measuring
range:
SIMOCODE pro
D-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Technical Data
• PT100/PT1000 Open Circuit, Short Circuit; measuring range: -50 °C - +500 °C

• KTY83-110 Open Circuit, Short Circuit; measuring range: -50 °C - +175 °C
• KTY84 Open Circuit, Short Circuit; measuring range: -40 °C - +300 °C
• NTC Short Circuit; measuring range: +80 °C to +160 °C
Measuring accuracy at an ambient <+ 2 K
temperature of 20 °C (T20)
Deviation due to ambient 0.05 per K deviation from T20
temperature (as % of measuring
range)
Connection:
0.8 Nm - 1.2 Nm
2 x AWG 20 to 14 / 1 x AWG 20 to 12
2 x AWG 20 to 16 / 1 x AWG 20 to 14
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 D-11
Technical Data
D.6 Technical Data of the Operator Panels

D.6.1 Technical Data of the Operator Panel
Mounting Installation in a switchgear cabinet door or in a front panel, with

IP54 system interface cover
Display
• Red/green/yellow "DEVICE" LED • Red: blocked "Function Test was Negative, Device is
Blocked"
• Flashing green: "No Connection to Basic Unit"
• Yellow: "Memory Module or Addressing Plug
Detected"
• Flashing: "Baud Rate Detected / Communication
with PC/Programming Device"
• Red "GEN. FAULT" LED • Continuous light / "Feeder Fault" e.g. overload tripping
flashing:
• 3 yellow LEDs / 4 green LEDs For freely assigning any status signals
Buttons
• Test/Reset • Resetting the device after tripping
• Function test (system self-test)
• Operation of Memory Module, Addressing Plug
• Control buttons • Control of the motor feeder, freely assignable
System interfaces
• Front For connecting a Memory Module, an Addressing Plug or a PC-
Cable for parameterization purposes
• Rear For connecting a cable to the Basic Unit or the expansion
module
D.6.2 Technical Data of the Operator Panel with Display
Mounting Installation in a switchgear cabinet door or in a front panel, with

IP54 system interface cover
Display
• Red/green/yellow "DEVICE" LED • Red: blocked "Function Test was Negative, Device is
Blocked"
• Flashing green: "No Connection to Basic Unit"
• Yellow: "Memory Module or Addressing Plug
detected"
• Flashing: "Baud Rate Detected / Communication
with PC/Programming Device"
• Red "GEN. FAULT" LED • Continuous light / "Feeder Fault" e.g. overload tripping
flashing:
SIMOCODE pro
D-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Technical Data
• 4 green LEDs For freely-assigning any status signals (preferably for feedback
on the switching state, e.g. ON, OFF, LEFT, RIGHT)
Display Graphic display of present measured values, operating and
diagnosis data or status information
Buttons
• Control buttons • Control of the motor feeder, freely assignable
• Arrow keys • Navigation in the display menu
• Softkeys • Various functions, depending upon the menu, e.g. Test, Reset,
operation of Memory Module and Addressing Plug
System interfaces
• Front For connecting a Memory Module, an Addressing Plug or a PC-
Cable for parameterization purposes
• Rear Connection to the Basic Unit or expansion module
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 D-13
D-14
D.7
690V 415V
Technical Data
Short-circuit protection with Fuses for Motor Feeders Fast fuse links 3) British
for Short-circuit Currents up to 50kA and 690V
NH Type 3NA Type 3ND Standards
for 3UF7 and 3RB22/3RB23 inclusive Current Measuring Module 3RB29
DIAZED Type 5SB aM Fuses
NEOZED Type 5SE BS88
Overload relay Contactor CLASS Overload relay Contactor CLASS Overload relay Contactor Operating class
Setting range 5 and10 15 *) 3UF7 only 20 25 *) 3UF7 only Setting range 30 35 *) 3UF7 only 40 *) 3UF7 only Setting range gL(gG)
5)
(Type) Rated operating current Ie/AC-3 in A for (Type) Rated operating current Ie/AC-3 in A for (Type) Type of coordination
400V / 500V / 690V 400V / 500V / 690V 400V / 500V / 690V 400V / 500V / 690V 400V / 500V / 690V 400V / 500V / 690V 400V / 500V / 690V 1 2 2 2
0.3 - 3.0A 3RT1015 3,0 / 3,0 / 3,0 3,0 / 3,0 / 3,0 3,0 / 3,0 / 3,0 3,0 / 3,0 / 3,0 0.3 - 3.0A 3RT1015 3,0 / 3,0 / 3,0 3,0 / 3,0 / 3,0 3,0 / 3,0 / 3,0 0.3 - 3.0A 3RT1015 35 20 20
3RT1016 3,0 / 3,0 / 3,0 3,0 / 3,0 / 3,0 3,0 / 3,0 / 3,0 3,0 / 3,0 / 3,0 3RT1016 3,0 / 3,0 / 3,0 3,0 / 3,0 / 3,0 3,0 / 3,0 / 3,0 3RT1016 35 20 20
2.4 - 25A 3RT1015 7,0 / 5,0 / 4,0 7,0 / 5,0 / 4,0 7,0 / 5,0 / 4,0 7,0 / 5,0 / 4,0 2.4 - 25A 3RT1015 7,0 / 5,0 / 4,0 7,0 / 5,0 / 4,0 7,0 / 5,0 / 4,0 2.4 - 25A 3RT1015 35 20 20
3RT1016 9,0 / 6,5 5,2 9,0 / 6,5 5,2 9,0 / 6,5 5,2 9,0 / 6,5 5,2 3RT1016 9,0 / 6,5 5,2 9,0 / 6,5 / 5,2 8,5 / 6,5 5,2 3RT1016 35 20 20
3RT1017 12,0 / 9,0 / 6,3 11,0 / 9,0 / 6,3 10,0 / 9,0 / 6,3 9,5 / 9,0 / 6,3 3RT1017 9,0 / 9,0 / 6,3 9,0 / 9,0 / 6,3 8,5 / 8,5 / 6,3 3RT1017 35 20 20
3RT1023 9,0 / 6,5 / 5,2 9,0 / 6,5 / 5,2 9,0 / 6,5 / 5,2 3RT1023 3RT1023 63 25 25
3RT1024 12,0 / 12,0 / 9,0 12,0 / 12,0 / 9,0 12,0 / 12,0 / 9,0 12,0 / 12,0 / 9,0 3RT1024 12,0 / 12,0 / 9,0 12,0 / 12,0 / 9,0 12,0 / 12,0 / 9,0 3RT1024 63 25 20 25
3RT1025 17,0 / 17,0 / 13,0 17,0 / 17,0 / 13,0 16,0 / 16,0 / 13,0 15,0 / 15,0 / 13,0 3RT1025 14,0 / 14,0 / 13,0 13,0 / 13,0 / 13,0 12,0 / 12,0 / 12,0 3RT1025 63 25 20 25
3RT1026 25,0 / 18,0 / 13,0 18,0 / 18,0 / 13,0 16,0 / 16,0 / 13,0 15,0 / 15,0 / 13,0 3RT1026 14,0 / 14,0 / 13,0 13,0 / 13,0 / 13,0 12,0 / 12,0 / 12,0 3RT1026 100 35 20 25
3RT1034 25,0 / 25,0 / 20,0 25,0 / 25,0 / 20,0 22,3 / 22,3 / 20,0 20,3 / 20,3 / 20,3 3RT1034 19,1 / 19,1 / 19,1 17,6 / 17,6 / 17,6 16,1 / 16,1 / 16,1 3RT1034 125 63 50 63
3RT1035 25,0 / 25,0 / 24,0 25,0 / 25,0 / 24,0 25,0 / 25,0 / 24,0 25,0 / 25,0 / 24,0 3RT1035 25,0 / 25,0 / 24,0 25,0 / 25,0 / 24,0 23,5 / 23,5 / 23,5 3RT1035 125 63 50 63
10-100A 3RT1034 32,0 / 32,0 / 20,0 25,5 / 25,5 / 20,0 22,3 / 22,3 / 20,0 20,3 / 20,3 / 20,0 10-100A 3RT1034 19,1 / 19,1 / 19,1 17,6 / 17,6 / 17,6 16,1 / 16,1 / 16,1 10-100A 3RT1034 125 63 50 63
3RT1035 40,0 / 40,0 / 24,0 33,0 / 33,0 / 24,0 29,4 / 29,4 / 24,0 28,0 / 28,0 / 24,0 3RT1035 26,5 / 26,5 / 24,0 25,0 / 25,0 / 24,0 23,5 / 23,5 / 23,5 3RT1035 125 63 50 80
3RT1036 50,0 / 50,0 / 24,0 38,5 / 38,5 / 24,0 32,7 / 32,7 / 24,0 29,4 / 29,4 / 24,0 3RT1036 26,5 / 26,5 / 24,0 25,0 / 25,0 / 24,0 23,5 / 23,5 / 23,5 3RT1036 160 80 50 80
3RT1044 65,0 / 65,0 / 47,0 56,0 / 56,0 / 47,0 49,0 / 49,0 / 47,0 45,0 / 45,0 / 45,0 3RT1044 41,7 / 41,7 / 41,7 38,2 / 38,2 / 38,2 34,5 / 34,5 / 34,5 3RT1044 200 125 63 125
3RT1045 80,0 / 80,0 / 58,0 61,0 / 61,0 / 58,0 53,0 / 53,0 / 53,0 47,0 / 47,0 / 47,0 3RT1045 45,0 / 45,0 / 45,0 43,0 / 43,0 / 43,0 40,0 / 40,0 / 40,0 3RT1045 200 160 80 160
3RT1046 95,0 / 95,0 / 58,0 69,0 / 69,0 / 58,0 59,0 / 59,0 / 58,0 53,0 / 53,0 / 53,0 3RT1046 50,0 / 50,0 / 50,0 47,0 / 47,0 / 47,0 44,0 / 44,0 / 44,0 3RT1046 200 160 100 160
3RT1054 100,0 / 100,0 / 100,0 93,2 / 93,2 / 93,2 81,7 / 81,7 / 81,7 74,8 / 74,8 / 74,8 3RT1054 69,0 / 69,0 / 69,0 63,0 / 63,0 / 63,0 57,0 / 57,0 / 57,0 3RT1054 355 315 160 250
3RT1055 100,0 / 100,0 / 100,0 100,0 / 100,0 / 100,0 97,5 / 97,5 / 97,5 3RT1055 90,0 / 90,0 / 90,0 82,0 / 82,0 / 82,0 74,0 / 74,0 / 74,0 3RT1055 355 315 200 315
20-200A 3RT1054 115,0 / 115,0 / 115,0 93,2 / 93,2 / 93,2 81,7 / 81,7 / 81,7 74,8 / 74,8 / 74,8 20-200A 3RT1054 69,0 / 69,0 / 69,0 64,0 / 64,0 / 64,0 20-200A 3RT1054 355 315 160 250
3RT1055 150 / 150 / 150 122 / 122 / 122 107 / 107 / 107 98 / 98 / 98 3RT1055 90 / 90 / 90 82 / 82 / 82 74 / 74 / 74 3RT1055 355 315 200 315
3RT1056 185 / 185 / 170 150 / 150 / 150 131 / 131 / 131 120 / 120 / 120 3RT1056 111 / 111 / 111 102 / 102 / 102 93 / 93 / 93 3RT1056 355 315 200 315
63-630A 3RT1064 225 / 225 / 225 182 / 182 / 182 160 / 160 / 160 146 / 146 / 146 63-630A 3RT1064 135 / 135 / 135 126 / 126 / 126 63-630A 3RT1064 500 400 250 400
3RT1065 265 / 265 / 265 215 / 215 / 215 188 / 188 / 188 172 / 172 / 172 3RT1065 159 / 159 / 159 146 / 146 / 146 133 / 133 / 133 3RT1065 500 400 315 400
3RT1066 300 / 300 / 280 243 / 243 / 243 213 / 213 / 213 195 / 195 / 195 3RT1066 180 / 180 / 180 165 / 165 / 165 150 / 150 / 150 3RT1066 500 400 315 400
3RT1075 400 / 400 / 400 324 / 324 / 324 284 / 284 / 284 260 / 260 / 260 3RT1075 240 / 240 / 240 220 / 220 / 220 200 / 200 / 200 3RT1075 630 500 400 450
3RT1076 500 / 500 / 450 405 / 405 / 405 355 / 355 / 355 325 / 325 / 325 3RT1076 300 / 300 / 300 275 / 275 / 275 250 / 250 / 250 3RT1076 630 500 500 500
3RT1264 225 / 225 / 225 225 / 225 / 225 225 / 225 / 225 194 / 194 / 194 3RT1264 173 / 173 / 173 152 / 152 / 152 131 / 131 / 131 3RT1264 500 500 400 450
3RT1265 265 / 265 / 265 265 / 265 / 265 265 / 265 / 265 228 / 228 / 228 3RT1265 204 / 204 / 204 180 / 180 / 180 156 / 156 / 156 3RT1265 500 500 400 450
3RT1266 300 / 300 / 300 300 / 300 / 300 300 / 300 / 300 258 / 258 / 258 3RT1266 231 / 231 / 231 204 / 204 / 204 177 / 177 / 177 3RT1266 500 500 400 450
3RT1275 400 / 400 / 400 400 / 400 / 400 400 / 400 / 400 344 / 344 / 344 3RT1275 316 / 316 / 316 3RT1275 800 800 630 800
3RT1276 500 / 500 / 500 500 / 500 / 500 500 / 500 / 500 430 / 430 / 430 3RT1276 385 / 385 / 385 340 / 340 / 340 316 / 316 / 316 3RT1276 800 800 630 800
2)
3TF68 630 / 630 / 630 502 / 502 / 502 440 / 440 / 440 408 / 408 / 408 3TF68 2) 376 / 376 / 376 344 / 344 / 344 317 / 317 / 317 3TF68 2) 800 5004) 630 500
2) 2)
3TF69 630 / 630 / 630 630 / 630 / 630 572 / 572 / 572 531 / 531 / 531 3TF69 500 / 500 / 500 469 / 469 / 469 438 / 438 / 438 3TF69 2) 800 6304) 630 630
1) Can be mounted on contactors (after demounting the box terminal block). 1) Can be mounted on contactors (after demounting the box terminal block). 1) Can be mounted on contactors (after demounting the box terminal block).
2) Cannot be mounted on contactors. 2) Cannot be mounted on contactors. 2) Cannot be mounted on contactors.
3) Observe operating voltage. 3) Observe operating voltage. 3) Observe operating voltage.
4) Ensure that the safety margin between the maximum AC-3 operating current and the fuse rating is sufficient 4) Ensure that the safety margin between the maximum AC-3 operating current and the fuse rating is sufficient. 4) Ensure that the safety margin between the maximum AC-3 operating current and the fuse rating is sufficient.
5) Assignment and short-circuit devices according IEC60947-4-1. 5) Assignment and short-circuit devices according IEC60947-4-1. 5) Assignment and short-circuit devices according IEC60947-4-1.
Type of coordination "1": Contactors and starters may not endanger either persons or systems in the event of a short circuit. Type of coordination "1": Contactors and starters may not endanger either persons or systems in the event of a short circuit. Type of coordination "1": Contactors and starters may not endanger either persons or systems in the event of a short circuit.
They are not suitable for further operation until they have been repaired or the respective parts have been replaced. They are not suitable for further operation until they have been repaired or the respective parts have been replaced. They are not suitable for further operation until they have been repaired or the respective parts have been replaced.
Type of coordination "2": Contactors and starters may not endanger either persons or systems in the event of a short circuit and must be suitable Type of coordination "2": Contactors and starters may not endanger either persons or systems in the event of a short circuit and must be suitable Type of coordination "2": Contactors and starters may not endanger either persons or systems in the event of a short circuit and must be suitable
for further operation. There is danger of contact welding. for further operation. There is danger of contact welding. for further operation. There is danger of contact welding.
for Short-Circuit Currents up to 50 kA and 690 V
Short-Circuit Protection with Fuses for Motor Feeders
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02

SIMOCODE pro
Technical Data
D.8 Typical Response Times

D.8.1 SIMOCODE pro C device series
Time: Inputs Time: Processing Time: Outputs

Basic Unit Set Delay Time 10 ms
Thermistor 400 ms
PROFIBUS 30 ms 30 ms
30 ms
Current measuring 200 ms
Internal Earth Fault 300 ms - 600 ms +
Set delay
D.8.2 SIMOCODE pro V 1) device range
Time: Inputs Time: Processing Time: Outputs

Basic Unit Set Delay Time 10 ms
Thermistor 400 ms
PROFIBUS 5 ms 5 ms
Current Measuring 300 ms
Voltage Measuring 300 ms
Active Power / cos 1000 ms.
phi
Internal Earth Fault 300 - 600 ms +
Set delay 5 ms
Earth Fault Module 300 - 500 ms +

External Earth Fault Set delay
Digital Module (24 V) 15 ms + Delay 25 ms

Digital Module 50 ms + Delay 25 ms
(110 V - 240 V)
Analog Module 150 ms 25 ms
Temperature Module 500 ms
1) Based upon a typical hardware set-up: Basic Unit + Current Measuring Module + 2 expansion modules
Response time = inputs conversion time + internal processing time + outputs

conversion time
Example:
You wish to switch a relay output of the Basic Unit via PROFIBUS when the
"remote" bit is set:
• SIMOCODE pro C:
Reaction time = 30 ms + 30 ms + 10 ms = 70 ms
• SIMOCODE pro V:
Reaction time = 5 ms + 5 ms + 10 ms = 20 ms
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 D-15
Technical Data
SIMOCODE pro
D-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Example Circuits E
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find example circuits
• for the following parameterizable control functions:
– Overload Relay
– Direct Starter
– Reversing Starter
– Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB)
– Star-Delta Starter
– Star-Delta Reversing Starter
– Dahlander
– Dahlander Reversing Starter
– Pole-Changing Starter
– Pole-Changing Reversing Starter
– Solenoid Valve
– Positioner
– Soft Starter
– Soft Starter with Reversing Contactor.
• for safety-oriented tripping with Emergency-STOP for:
– Direct Starters (category 2 and 4)
– Reversing Starters (category 2 and 4)
– Star-Delta Starters (category 4)
– Pole-Changing Starters (category 2 and 4)
– Dahlanders (category 4).
Target groups
This manual is addressed to the following target groups:
• Planners
• Configurators
• Technicians
• Electricians
• Commissioners.
Necessary knowledge
• Basic SIMOCODE pro knowledge (see Chapter 1)
• Basic knowledge of SIMOCODE ES parameterization software.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 E-1
Example Circuits
E.1 General
Objectiveof the example circuits
The examples should
• Show how to implement a circuit for a specific Control Function
using SIMOCODE pro
• Help you modify these examples for your respective application
• Help you implement other applications easily.
Fundamental steps
• Implementation of external wiring (for control and feedback of main circuit
devices and control and signaling devices) (see circuit diagrams)
• Implementation/activation of internal SIMOCODE pro functions, with control
and evaluation of the SIMOCODE pro Inputs/Outputs (internal
SIMOCODE pro wiring) (see function circuit diagrams with the functions
blocks of the graphical editor of the "SIMOCODE ES" configuration software).
• Setting up the Cyclic Receive and Send Data for the communication of
SIMOCODE pro with a PLC (See function circuit diagrams and the
"Assignment of Cyclic Receive and Send Data" tables)
Prerequisites
• Load feeder/motor is present
• PLC/PCS Control with PROFIBUS DP interface is present
• The main circuit is already connected
• PC/programming device is present
• SIMOCODE ES software is installed
• The Basic Unit has the factory settings. More information about how to apply
the factory settings can be found in the "Resetting the factory settings"
section of the SIMOCODE pro manual.
SIMOCODE pro
E-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Example Circuits
E.2 "Overload Relay" Example Circuit
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 E-3
13($&+]9
1$&+]9 1$&+]9
E-4
/ / /
E.2.1
/ 1 1
/
1
3( 352),%86
$
%
$
%
3(

Example Circuits
; ;
) )

4

,! ,!

&$ &$

,! ,! ,!

Fig. E-1: "Overload Relay" circuit diagram

$
$
$
;
$
%
63(3(

7
/
/
/
3URILEXV'3 9$&
'HYLFH
6<6
%86
&7
6,02&2'(SUR&9
*HQIDXOW
%DVLF8QLW 7HVWUHVHW
%8
&XUUHQWPHDVXUHPHQW
37& 287 287 287
9
,1 ,1 ,1 ,1
7
7
7

7
7
"Overload Relay" Circuit Diagram
!
+

!
.

; ;

;
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU

3(
8
9
:
0
0 3(
$&
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02

SIMOCODE pro
Example Circuits
E.2.2 "Overload Relay" Function Circuit Diagram
Fig. E-2: "Overload Relay" function circuit diagram
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 E-5
13($&+]9
E-6
1$&+]9 1$&+]9 E.3
/ / /
E.3.1
/ 1 1
/
1
3( 352),%86
$
%
$
%
3(

Example Circuits

; ;
4 ) )

) ) ) ) )
&$ &$

Fig. E-3: "Direct Starter" circuit diagram

$
$
%
;
63(3(
$
$

7 $
/
/
/
3URILEXV'3 9$&
'HYLFH
%86 21 2)) 7(67
6<6
6,02&2'(SUR&9
&7
6<6
5(6(7
*HQIDXOW
%DVLF8QLW '(9,&( %86 *(1)$8/7
7HVWUHVHW
%8
&XUUHQWPHDVXUHPHQW
37& 287 287 287 2SHUDWRUSDQHO
9
"Direct Starter" Circuit Diagram
,1 ,1 ,1 ,1
7
7
7

7
7

$
.
"Direct Starter" Example Circuit

$
.

'2/

; ;

; 0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
/RFDO

2Q
6 6
/RFDO

2II
3(
8
9
:
0
0 3(
$&
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02

SIMOCODE pro
Example Circuits
E.3.2 "Direct Starter" Function Circuit Diagram
Fig. E-4: "Direct Starter" function circuit diagram
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 E-7
13($&+]9
1$&+]9 1$&+]9
E-8
/ / /
E.4
E.4.1
/ 1 1
/
1
3(
352),%86
$
%
$
%
3(

Example Circuits

; ;
4 ) )

,! ,! ,! ,! ,!
&$ &$

Fig. E-5: "Reversing Starter" circuit diagram

$
$
%
$
$
;
63(3(

7 $
/
/
/
3URILEXV'3 9$&
'HYLFH
%86 21 21! 2)) 7(67
&7
6<6
6<6
6,02&2'(SUR&9 5(6(7
*HQIDXOW
%DVLF8QLW '(9,&( %86 *(1)$8/7
7HVWUHVHW
%8
2SHUDWRUSDQHO
&XUUHQWPHDVXUHPHQW
37& 287 287 287
9
,1 ,1 ,1 ,1
7
7
7

7
7
"Reversing Starter" Circuit Diagram
$
$
. .

$
$
. .

"Reversing Starter" Example Circuit

; ;
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU

; 5XQVLJQDOULJKW
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU

5XQVLQJDOOHIW
6 6 6

/RFDO

2II
3(

8
9
:
/RFDO
0 5XQVLJQDOULJKW
0 3(
$& /RFDO
5XQVLJQDOOHIW
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02

SIMOCODE pro
Example Circuits
E.4.2 "Reversing Starter" Function Circuit Diagram
Fig. E-6: "Reversing Starter" Function Circuit Diagram
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 E-9
4
;
;

13($&+]9
E-10
E.5
1$&+]9 1$&+]9
E.5.1
/ / / 0
;
;
/ 1 1

/ ,! ,! ,!

1
;
;
;
;
;
3( 352),%86
$
%
$
%
;

;
Example Circuits

$
$
'
'
$
$
$
; ;
Circuit
4 & )

0
) ) ) ) )

&$ &$
$
;
63(3(
$
%
$
$

7 $
/
/
/
3URILEXV'3 9$&
'HYLFH
%86 21 2)) 7(67
6,02&2'(SUR9
&7
6<6
5(6(7
6<6
*HQIDXOW
%DVLF8QLW '(9,&( %86 *(1)$8/7
7HVWUHVHW
%8
2SHUDWRUSDQHO
&XUUHQWPHDVXUHPHQW
37& 287 287 287
9
,1 ,1 ,1 ,1
7
7
7

7
7

Fig. E-7: "Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) 3VL" circuit diagram
;
;
4 4
;
;
;
4
;
;

0 ;

;

&
&
&
; ;
&LUFXLWEUHDNHU0&&%RQ

"Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) 3VL" Circuit Diagram
&LUFXLWEUHDNHU0&&%RII
)HHGEDFN

&%5RQ
6 6
)HHGEDFN

&%5UHOHDVHG
"Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) 3VL" Example
/RFDO
2Q
/RFDO
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02

SIMOCODE pro
Example Circuits
E.5.2 "Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) 3VL" Function Circuit Diagram
Fig. E-8: "Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) 3VL" function circuit diagram
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 E-11
13($&+]9
1$&+]9 1$&+]9
E-12
/ / /
E.6
E.6.1
/ 1 1
/
1
3( 352),%86
$
%
$
%
3(

'
'
'
'
Example Circuits
$
$
$
; ;
4 ) )

,! ,! ,!

,! ,!

&$ &$
$
$
%
$
$
;
63(3(

7 $
/
/
/
3URILEXV'3 9$&
'HYLFH
%86 21 2)) 7(67
6<6
6<6
&7
6,02&2'(SUR9 5(6(7
*HQIDXOW
%DVLF8QLW '(9,&( %86 *(1)$8/7
7HVWUHVHW
%8
2SHUDWRUSDQHO
&XUUHQWPHDVXUHPHQW
37& 287 287 287
9
,1 ,1 ,1 ,1
7
7
7

7
7

Fig. E-9: "Star-Delta Starter" circuit diagram (Current Measuring in Delta)

$
$
$
. . . . . .

$
$
$

"Star-Delta Starter" Example Circuit

&
&
&
&
&
; ; ;
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
'HOWDFRQWDFWRU

6WDUFRQWDFWRU
6 6

/RFDO
"Star-Delta Starter" Circuit Diagram (Current Measuring in Delta)
2Q
0
/RFDO
: :
2II
9 0 9

8 $& 8
3(
3(
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02

SIMOCODE pro
Example Circuits
E.6.2 "Star-Delta Starter" Function Circuit Diagram (Current Measuring in Delta)
Fig. E-10: "Star-Delta Starter" function circuit diagram (Current Measuring in Delta)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 E-13
13($&+]9
1$&+]9 1$&+]9
/ / /
E-14
E.6.3
/ 1 1
/
1
3( 352),%86
$
%
$
%
3(

'
'
'
'
Example Circuits
$
$
$
; ;
Cable)
4 ) )

,! ,! ,!

,! ,!

&$ &$
$
$
%
$
$
;
63(3(

7 $
/
/
/
3URILEXV'3 9$&
'HYLFH
%86 21 2)) 7(67
6<6
6<6
&7
6,02&2'(SUR9 5(6(7
*HQIDXOW
%DVLF8QLW '(9,&( %86 *(1)$8/7
7HVWUHVHW
%8
2SHUDWRUSDQHO
&XUUHQWPHDVXUHPHQW
37& 287 287 287
9
,1 ,1 ,1 ,1
7
7
7

7
7

$
$
$
. . . . . .

$
$
$

Fig. E-11: "Star-Delta Starter" circuit diagram (Current Measuring in Incoming Cable)

&
&
&
&
&
; ; ;
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
'HOWDFRQWDFWRU

6WDUFRQWDFWRU
6 6

/RFDO
2Q
0
"Star-Delta Starter" Circuit Diagram (Current Measuring in Incoming
/RFDO
: :
2II
9 0 9

8 $& 8
3(
3(
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02

SIMOCODE pro
Example Circuits
E.6.4 "Star-Delta Starter" Function Circuit Diagram (Current Measuring in

Incoming Cable)
Fig. E-12: "Star-Delta Starter" function circuit diagram (Current Measuring in Incoming Cable)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 E-15
13($&+]9
1$&+]9 1$&+]9
/ / /
E-16
E.7
E.7.1
/ 1 1
/
1
3( 352),%86
$
%
$
%
3(

'
'
'
'
$
$
$
$
$
; ;
Example Circuits
$
4 ) ) 21 21! 2)) 7(67
6<6
5(6(7

'(9,&( %86 *(1)$8/7
2SHUDWRUSDQHO
,! ,! ,!

,! ,!

&$ &$
$
$
;
63(3(
$
$
$
%

3(

3URILEXV'3 9$& 10
.5 ./ 'HYLFH 287 287
%86
6<6
6<6

&7
6<6
6,02&2'(SUR9

*HQIDXOW 6,02&2'(SUR9
%DVLF8QLW 7HVWUHVHW
5HDG\
9$& 'LJLWDOPRGXOH
37& 287 287 287
Fig. E-13: "Star-Delta Reversing Starter" circuit diagram

9
,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1

7
7
/
/
/
7

$
$
$
$
. . ./ .5

%8 . .

$
$
$
$

&XUUHQWPHDVXUHPHQW
7
7
7
"Star-Delta Reversing Starter" Circuit Diagram

&
&
&
&
&

; ; ;
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
5LJKW
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU

/HIW
6 6 6
'HOWDFRQWDFWRU

"Star-Delta Reversing Starter" Example Circuit
6WDUFRQWDFWRU
0
: : /RFDO
9 0 9 5LJKW

8 $& 8
/RFDO
3(

3(
/HIW
/RFDO
2II
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02

SIMOCODE pro
Example Circuits
E.7.2 "Star-Delta Reversing Starter" Function Circuit Diagram
Fig. E-14: "Star-Delta Reversing Starter" function circuit diagram
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 E-17
13($&+]9 1$&+]9 1$&+]9
/ / /
E.8
E-18
E.8.1
/ 1 1
/
1
3( 352),%86
$
%
$
%
0%

'
'
'
'
$
$
$
$
$
Example Circuits
; ;
) )

4

) ) )

) )

Fig. E-15: "Dahlander" circuit diagram

&$ &$
;
63(3(
$
$
%
$
$

$
/
/
/
7 3URILEXV'3 9$&
'HYLFH
%86 21!! 21! 2)) 7(67
6,02&2'(SUR9
&7
6<6
5(6(7
6<6
*HQIDXOW
%DVLF8QLW '(9,&( %86 *(1)$8/7
"Dahlander" Circuit Diagram
7HVWUHVHW
%8
37& 2SHUDWRUSDQHO
287 287 287
&XUUHQWPHDVXUHPHQW
9
,1 ,1 ,1 ,1
7
7
7

7
7
"Dahlander" Circuit Diagram

$
$
$
. . . . . .

$
$
$

0DLQVFRQWDFWRU

&
&
&
&
&
; ; ; )DVW
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
6ORZ
6WDUFRQWDFWRU
)DVW

6 6 6
/RFDO

)DVW
0 /RFDO
:
6ORZ
:
9 0 9

$& /RFDO
8 8 2II
3(
3(
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02

SIMOCODE pro
Example Circuits
E.8.2 "Dahlander" Function Circuit Diagram
Fig. E-16: "Dahlander" function circuit diagram
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 E-19
13($&+]9
E.9
E-20
1$&+]9 1$&+]9
E.9.1
/ / /
/ 1 1
/
1
3( 352),%86
$
%
$
%
3(

Example Circuits

'
'
'
'
$
$
$
$
$
; ;
$
!!! 21 21! 2)) 7(67 0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
6<6
5(6(7
4 ) ) '(9,&( %86 *(1)$8/7
)DVW

5LJKW
2SHUDWRUSDQHO
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
) ) ) 6ORZ

) )
5LJKW

&$ &$
6WDUFRQWDFWRU
$
$
./ ./ )DVW

$
$
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
6ORZ
/HIW
$ 0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
;
$
63(3(
$
%
$
$

3(

7 )DVW
/
/
/
3URILEXV'3 9$& 10
$EVICE 287 287 /HIW
"53
Fig. E-17: "Dahlander Reversing Starter" circuit diagram

6<6
6<6
6<6
3)-/#/$%PRO6
#4
'ENFAULT 6,02&2'(SUR9 /RFDO
"ASIC5NIT
5HDG\
4ESTRESET 9$& 'LJLWDOPRGXOH
%8 2II
37& 287 287 287
&XUUHQWPHDVXUHPHQW
,1 ,1 ,1 ,1
9
,1 ,1 ,1 ,1
7
7
7
/RFDO

7
7

6ORZ
5LJKW
/RFDO
)DVW
5LJKW

$
$
$
./ .5 ./ . .5 .5 .

.5 /RFDO

$
$
$

6ORZ
/HIW
"Dahlander Reversing Starter" Circuit Diagram

/RFDO
)DVW

/HIW

&
&
&
&
&
%
%
%
%
%
; ; ; ;

6 6 6 6 6

"Dahlander Reversing Starter" Example Circuit

0

: :
9 0 9

$&
8 8
3(
3(
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02

SIMOCODE pro
Example Circuits
E.9.2 "Dahlander Reversing Starter" Function Circuit Diagram
Fig. E-18: "Dahlander Reversing Starter" function circuit diagram (1/2)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 E-21
Example Circuits
Fig. E-19: "Dahlander Reversing Starter" Function Circuit Diagram (2/2)
SIMOCODE pro
E-22 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Example Circuits
E.10 "Pole-Changing Starter" Example Circuit
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 E-23
13($&+]9
1$&+]9 1$&+]9
/ / /
E-24
/ 1 1
E.10.1
/
1
3( 352),%86
$
%
$
%
3(

'
'
'
'
$
$
$
; ;
Example Circuits
4 ) )

,! ,! ,!

,! ,!

&$ &$
$
;
63(3(
$
%
$
$

7 $
/
/
/
3URILEXV'3 9$&
Fig. E-20: "Pole-Changing Starter" circuit diagram

'HYLFH
%86 21!! 21! 2)) 7(67
&7
6<6
6,02&2'(SUR9 5(6(7
6<6
*HQIDXOW
%DVLFXQLW 'HYLFH %86 *(1)$8/7
7HVWUHVHW
%8
2SHUDWRUSDQHO
&XUUHQWVHQVLQJ
37& 287 287 287
9
,1 ,1 ,1 ,1
7
7
7

7

7
"Pole-Changing Starter" Circuit Diagram

$
$
. .
. .
$
$

&
&
&
&
&
; ; ;
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
)DVW
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU

6ORZ
6 6 6

0 /RFDO
)DVW

: :
9 0 9 /RFDO

8 $& 8 6ORZ
3(
3(
/RFDO
2II
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02

SIMOCODE pro
Example Circuits
E.10.2 "Pole-Changing Starter" Function Circuit Diagram
Fig. E-21: "Pole-Changing Starter" function circuit diagram
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 E-25
13($&+]9
1$&+]9 1$&+]9
E-26
/ / /
E.11
E.11.1
/ 1 1
/
1
3( 352),%86
$
%
$
%
3(

Example Circuits

'
'
'
'
$
$
$
; ; $
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
!!! 21 21! 2)) 7(67
6<6
5(6(7 )DVW
4 ) ) '(9,&( %86 *(1)$8/7
5LJKW

2SHUDWRUSDQHO
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
) ) ) 6ORZ

,! ,! 5LJKW

&$ &$
$
$
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
./ ./ 6ORZ

/HIW
$
$
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
)DVW
$ /HIW
$
63(3(
$
%
$
$
;

0%

7
/
/
/
3URILEXV'3 9$& 10 /RFDO
'HYLFH 287 287
%86 2II
6<6
6<6
6<6
6,02&2'(SUR9
&7
%DVLF8QLW
5HDG\
7HVWUHVHW 9$& 'LJLWDOPRGXOH /RFDO
%8
6ORZ
Fig. E-22: "Pole-Changing Reversing Starter" circuit diagram

37& 287 287 287
9
&XUUHQWPHDVXUHPHQW
,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 5LJKW
7
7
7

7
7

/RFDO
)DVW
5LJKW
/RFDO

$
$
6ORZ
.5 ./ .5 ./ .5 .5 /HIW

$
$
/RFDO
)DVW
/HIW

"Pole-Changing Reversing Starter" Circuit Diagram

&
&
&
&
&
%
%
%
%
%
; ; ; ;

6 6 6 6 6

0
: :

"Pole-Changing Reversing Starter" Example Circuit
9 0 9

8 $& 8
3(
3(
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02

SIMOCODE pro
Example Circuits
E.11.2 "Pole-Changing Reversing Starter" Function Circuit Diagram
Fig. E-23: "Pole-Changing Reversing Starter" function circuit diagram (1/2)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 E-27
Example Circuits
Fig. E-24: "Pole-Changing Reversing Starter" function circuit diagram (2/2)
SIMOCODE pro
E-28 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Example Circuits
E.12 "Solenoid Valve" Example Circuit
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 E-29
13($&+]9
1$&+]9 1$&+]9
/ / /
E-30
/ 1 1
E.12.1
/
1
3( 352),%86
$
%
$
%
3(

Example Circuits

; ;
4 ) )

,! ,! ,! ,! ,!
&$ &$

Fig. E-25: "Solenoid Valve" circuit diagram

$
$
%
$
$
;
63(3(

$
3URILEXV'3 9$&
'HYLFH
%86 23(1 &/26( 7(67
6<6
&7
6<6
6,02&2'(SUR9 5(6(7
*HQIDXOW
%DVLF8QLW '(9,&( %86 *(1)$8/7
7HVWUHVHW
37& 2SHUDWRUSDQHO
287 287 287
9
,1 ,1 ,1 ,1

"Solenoid Valve" Circuit Diagram
7
7

$
.

$
.

; ;
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU )HHGEDFN

1
; /LPLWVZLWFK
/RFDO &ORVH
2Q

)HHGEDFN

6 6 50= 50$ /RFDO OLPLWVZLWFK
3(
2II 2SHQ

3(

<

GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02

SIMOCODE pro
Example Circuits
E.12.2 "Solenoid Valve" Function Circuit Diagram
Fig. E-26: "Solenoid Valve" function circuit diagram
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 E-31
13($&+]9 1$&+]9 1$&+]9
/ / /
E-32
/ 1 1
E.13
E.13.1
/
1
3( 352),%86
$
%
$
%
3(

Example Circuits
; ;
$ 0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
2SHQ
4 ) ) &/26( 23(1 6723 7(67
6<6
5(6(7

'(9,&( %86 *(1)$8/7 0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
&ORVHG
2SHUDWRUSDQHO
,! ,! ,! ,! ,! /RFDO
&$ &$

6WRS
Fig. E-27: "Positioner 1" circuit diagram

/RFDO
&ORVHG
/RFDO
$ 2SHQ
$
;
63(3(
$
%
$
$

3(

7
/
/
/
3URILEXV'3 9$& 10
'HYLFH 287 287
%86 )HHGEDFN
6<6
6<6
6,02&2'(SUR9
&7
6<6
*HQIDXOW 6,02&2'(SUR9 /LPLWVZLWFK
%DVLF8QLW
5HDG\
7HVWUHVHW 9$& 'LJLWDOPRGXOH &ORVHG
%8
"Positioner 1" Circuit Diagram
37& 287 287 287
9
&XUUHQWPHDVXUHPHQW
,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1
7
7
7
)HHGEDFN

/LPLWVZLWFK

7
7

2SHQ
"Positioner" Example Circuit
$
$
. .

$
$
. .

; ; ;

;

50= 50$ 6 6 6

3(

8
9
:

0
0 3(
$&
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02

SIMOCODE pro
Example Circuits
E.13.2 "Positioner 1" Function Circuit Diagram
Fig. E-28: "Positioner 1" function circuit diagram
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 E-33
13($&+]9
1$&+]9 1$&+]9
/ / /
E-34
/ 1 1
E.13.3
/
1
3( 352),%86
$
%
$
%
3(

;
Example Circuits
;
$
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
4 ) ) &/26( 23(1 6723 7(67
2SHQ
6<6
5(6(7

'(9,&( %86 *(1)$8/7
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
2SHUDWRUSDQHO &ORVH
,! ,! ,! ,! ,! /RFDO
&$ &$

6WRS

/RFDO
&ORVHG
$ /RFDO
$ 2SHQ
63(3(
$
%
$
$

;

3(
7
/
/
/
3URILEXV'3 9$& 10
'HYLFH 287 287 )HHGEDFN
%86 7RUTXHVZLWFK
6<6
6<6
6<6
6,02&2'(SUR9
&7
*HQIDXOW 6,02&2'(SUR9 &ORVHG
%DVLF8QLW
5HDG\
7HVWUHVHW 9$& 'LJLWDOPRGXOH
%8
37& 287 287 287 )HHGEDFN
9
&XUUHQWPHDVXUHPHQW
,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1
7
7
7
/LPLWVZLWFK

7
7

&ORVHG
)HHGEDFN
/LPLWVZLWFK
2SHQ
$
$
. . )HHGEDFN
7RUTXHVZLWFK

$
$
2SHQ
. .

; ; ;

;

'0= 50= 50$ '0$
6 6 6

3(

8
9
:

0
0 3(
$&
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02

SIMOCODE pro
Example Circuits
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 E-35
13($&+]9 1$&+]9 1$&+]9
/ / /
E-36
/ 1 1
E.13.5
/
1
3( 352),%86
$
%
$
%
3(

; ;
Example Circuits
$
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
4 ) ) &/26( 23(1 6723 7(67 2SHQ
6<6
5(6(7

'(9,&( %86 *(1)$8/7
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
2SHUDWRUSDQHO &ORVHG
,! ,! ,! ,! ,!
&$ &$ /RFDO

6WRS

/RFDO

&ORVHG
$ /RFDO
$
$
%
$
$

2SHQ
;
63(3(

3(

7
/
/
/
3URILEXV'3 9$& 10
%86
6<6
6<6
&7
6<6
6,02&2'(SUR9 7RUTXHVZLWFK
%DVLF8QLW &ORVHG
5HDG\
7HVWUHVHW 9$& 'LJLWDOPRGXOH
%8
37& 287 287 287 )HHGEDFN
&XUUHQWPHDVXUHPHQW
9
,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1
7
7
7
/LPLWVZLWFK

7
7

&ORVHG
)HHGEDFN
/LPLWVZLWFK
2SHQ
$
$
. .

$
$
. .

; ; ;

;

'0= 50= 50$ 6 6 6

3(

8
9
:
0

0 3(
$&
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02

SIMOCODE pro
Example Circuits
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 E-37
13($&+]9
1$&+]9 1$&+]9
/ / /
E-38
/ 1 1
E.13.7
/
1
3( 352),%86
$
%
$
%
3(

Example Circuits

; ;
$ 0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
2SHQ
4 ) ) &/26( 23(1 6723 7(67
6<6
5(6(7

'(9,&( %86 *(1)$8/7 0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
&ORVHG
2SHUDWRUSDQHO
,! ,! ,! ,! ,! /RFDO
&$ &$

6WRS

/RFDO

&ORVHG
/RFDO
$ 2SHQ
$
$
%
$
$

;
63(3(
3(

7
/
/
/
3URILEXV'3 9$& 10
'HYLFH 287 287
%86 )HHGEDFN
6<6
6<6
6<6
6,02&2'(SUR9
&7
%DVLF8QLW
5HDG\
%8
37& 287 287 287
9
&XUUHQWPHDVXUHPHQW
,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 )HHGEDFN
7
7
7
/LPLWVZLWFK

7
7

2SHQ
)HHGEDFN
7RUTXHVZLWFK
2SHQ
$
$
. .

$
$
. .

; ; ;

;

50= 50$ '0$ 6 6 6

3(

8
9
:
0
0 3(
$&
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02

SIMOCODE pro
Example Circuits
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 E-39
13($&+]9
1$&+]9 1$&+]9
/ / /
E-40
/ 1 1
E.13.9
/
1
3( 352),%86
$
%
$
%
3(

Example Circuits
; ;
$
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
2SHQ
4 ) ) &/26( 23(1 6723 7(67
6<6
5(6(7

'(9,&( %86 *(1)$8/7 0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
2SHUDWRUSDQHO &ORVHG
,! ,! ,! ,! ,! /RFDO
&$ &$

6WRS

/RFDO
&ORVHG
/RFDO
$
$ 2SHQ
63(3(
$
%
$
$

;

3(
7
/
/
/
3URILEXV'3 9$& 10
%86 7RUTXHVZLWFK
6<6
6<6
6<6
6,02&2'(SUR9
&7
%DVLFXQLW
5HDG\
%8
37& 287 287 287
9
&XUUHQWPHDVXUHPHQW
,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1
7
7
7
)HHGEDFN

7
7

7RUTXHVZLWFK

/LPLWVZLWFK
2SHQ
$
$
. .

$
$
. .

; ; ;

;

'0=50= '0$50$
6 6 6

3(

8
9
:

0
0 3(
$&
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02

SIMOCODE pro
Example Circuits
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 E-41
13($&+]9 1$&+]9 1$&+]9
/ / /
E-42
/ 1 1
E.14
E.14.1
/
1
3( 352),%86
$
%
$
%
3(
Example Circuits

;
;
4 ) )
$
%

RII

,! ,! ,!

$

%
,! ,!

&$ &$
Fig. E-37: "Soft Starter" circuit diagram (1/2)

%XVFRQQHFWRURQ6XE'
$
;
63(3(
$
%
$
$

7 $
/
/
/
3URILEXV'3 9$&
'HYLFH
%86 21! 2)) 7(67
6<6
6,02&2'(SUR9
&7
6<6
5(6(7
*HQIDXOW
"Soft Starter" Circuit Diagram
%DVLF8QLW '(9,&( %86 *(1)$8/7

7HVWUHVHW
%8
37& 2SHUDWRUSDQHO
287 287 287
&XUUHQWPHDVXUHPHQW
9
,1 ,1 ,1 ,1
7
7
7

7
7

0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
6RIWVWDUWHU

$(55
$21
!2%3
!
"Soft Starter" Example Circuit

6WDUW
.
6RIWVWDUWHU

5HVHW

$/
$/
$/
!
+ 6RIWVWDUWHU

)DXOW
!

/RFDO
2Q

/RFDO
2II

;

6 6

GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02

SIMOCODE pro
Example Circuits
$
0
5:
6,.267$57
8 7 / $/
7
$&
9 / $/
0
: 7 / $/

3(
3( 3( 3(

%UDNH
FRQWDFWRU

$FFHOHUDWLRQ
ILQLVKHG
$(55

)DXOW

$5(6
5HVHW

2II
$21
2Q

$
'&/9

1/
&$
)

$&9

$&9
,!

$&9
Fig. E-38: "Soft Starter" circuit diagram (2/2)
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 E-43
Example Circuits
E.14.2 "Soft Starter" Function Circuit Diagram
Fig. E-39: "Soft Starter" function circuit diagram
SIMOCODE pro
E-44 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Example Circuits
E.15 "Soft Starter with Reversing Contactor" Example

Circuit
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 E-45
13($&+]9
E-46
1$&+]9 1$&+]9
/ / /
E.15.1
/ 1 1
/
1
3( 352),%86
$
%
$
%
3(
Example Circuits

;
$ 0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
; 5LJKW
4 ) ) 21!! 21! 2)) 7(67
$
%
6<6
5(6(7

'(9,&( %86 *(1)$8/7
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
RII /HIW

2SHUDWRUSDQHO
,! ,! ,! 6RIWVWDUWHU

,! ,!

$

%

6WDUW
&$ &$
6RIWVWDUWHU

5HVHW
$

$21
$5(6
%XVFRQWDFWRURQ6XE'
6RIWVWDUWHU
$ )DXOW
$

$
%
$
$

;
63(3(

3(
7
/
/
/
3URILEXV'3 9$& 10 /RFDO
'HYLFH 287 287 5LJKW
%86
6<6
6<6
&7
6<6
6,02&2'(SUR9
%DVLFXQLW /RFDO
5HDG\
7HVWUHVHW 9$& 2SHUDWRUSDQHO
%8 2II
37& 287 287 287
9
,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1
&XUUHQWPHDVXUHPHQW
7
7
7
/RFDO

7
7
/HIW
$(55

$
$

Fig. E-40: "Soft Starter with Reversing Contactor" circuit diagram (1/2)
. . . .

$
$

$/
$/
$/

;
"Soft Starter with Reversing Contactor" Circuit Diagram

6 6 6

GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02

SIMOCODE pro
E-47 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
SIMOCODE pro
Fig. E-41: "Soft Starter with Reversing Contactor" circuit diagram (2/2)
$
0
8 7 / $/
9 7 / $/
5:
$&
: 7 / $/
6,.267$57

0 3(
3( 3(
3(

%UDNH
FRQWDFWRU

$FFHOHUDWLRQ
ILQLVKHG
$(55

)DXOW

$5(6
5HVHW

2II
$21
2Q

$
'&/9

1/

)
&$
$&9
$&9
,!

$&9
Example Circuits
Example Circuits
E.15.2 "Soft Starter with Reversing Contactor" Function Circuit Diagram
Fig. E-42: "Soft Starter with Reversing Contactor" function circuit diagram
SIMOCODE pro
E-48 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Example Circuits
E.16 Safety-Oriented Tripping with Emergency STOP
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 E-49
/9'&
E-50
E.16.1
/ 13($&+]9 0
/
/ 352),%86
$
%
$
%
1
3(
3(
Example Circuits
$

) 21 2)) 7(67
5(6(7
6<6

'(9,&( %86 *(1)$8/7
4

,! /9'&

,!,!,!

$
$
%
;
63(3(
$
$

.
Direct Starter, Category 2
3URILEXV'3 'HYLFH
%XV
&7
6<6
6,02&2'(SUR&9
*HQIDXOW
7HVWUHVHW
/
/
/
37& ,1 1 1 ,1 287 287 287
9

7
7
%8

7
7
7
&XUUHQWPHDVXUHPHQW
.

$FNQRZOHGJH(0(5*(1&<6723
8
9
:
3(
$ < <
0
0 3(
$&
$
$
7.%%
.
$
Fig. E-43: "Safety-Oriented Tripping with Emergency STOP" circuit diagram, Direct Starter, category 2
$FWXDWRUIDLOXUH
(0(5*(1&<6723SXVKEXWWRQ
%DVLFXQLW
2SHUDWRUSDQHO 0
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02

SIMOCODE pro
Example Circuits
Fig. E-44: "Safety-Oriented Tripping with Emergency STOP" function circuit diagram,
Direct Starter, category 2
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 E-51
/9'&
13($&+]9
E-52
0
/
E.16.2
/
/ 352),%86
$
%
$
%
1
3(
3(

;

Example Circuits
21 2)) 7(67

5(6(7
6<6
) '(9,&( %86 *(1)$8/7

4

/9&'
)

,!,!,!

$
$
%
.
;
63(3(
$
$

3URILEXV'3 'HYLFH 9'&
Direct Starter, Category 4
%86
&7
6<6
6,02&2'(SUR&9
*HQIDXOW
7HVWUHVHW
/
/
/
.
287 287 287
9
37& ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1

.
7
7
%8

7
7
7
&XUUHQWPHDVXUHPHQW
. (0(5*(1&<6723DFNQRZOHGJHG

3(
$ << <
9
8
:
0 0 3(
$&
$
<< $ <
$FNQRZOHGJHPHQW(0(5*(1&<6723
7.&%
.
$
$
Fig. E-45: "Safety-Oriented Tripping with Emergency STOP" circuit diagram, Direct Starter, category 4
.
$
%DVLFXQLW
2SHUDWRUSDQHO
0
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02

SIMOCODE pro
Example Circuits
Direct Starter, category 4
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 E-53
/9'&
0
E-54
13($&+]9
/
E.16.3
/ 352),%86
$
%
$
%
/
1
3(
3(

;

Example Circuits
21! 21!! 2)) 7(67

5(6(7
6<6
;
)

'(9,&( %86 *(1)$8/7
4

,!

/9'&
,!,!,!

$

$
%
;
63(3(
$
$
.
3URILEXV'3 'HYLFH 9'& .
6<6
%XV
&7
6,02&2'(SUR&9
/
/
/
*HQIDXOW
7HVWUHVHW
287 287 287
9
37& ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1
Reversing Starter, Category 2
%8

7
7
7
7
7

&XUUHQWPHDVXUHPHQW
(0(5*(1&<6723DFNQRZOHGJHG
$ < <

. .

7.&%
$
$
$
. .
3(
$
$
9
8
:
$FWXDWRUIDLOXUH
0 0 3(
$&
0DLQVFRQWDFWRUURWDWLRQOHIW
Fig. E-47: "Safety-Oriented Tripping with Emergency STOP" circuit diagram, Reversing Starter, category 2
0DLQVFRQWDFWRUURWDWLRQULJKW
%DVLFXQLW
0
2SHUDWRUSDQHO
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02

SIMOCODE pro
Example Circuits
Reversing Starter, category 2
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 E-55
13($&+]9
/
E-56
/ /9'&
E.16.4
/ 0
1
3( 352),%86
$
%
$
%
3(

;
Example Circuits

; 21! 21!! 2)) 7(67
5(6(7
6<6
4 '(9,&( %86 *(1)$8/7

)

,!,!,!

,! /9'&

.

$

$
%
;
63(3(
$
$
6<6
%XV
&7
6,02&2'(SUR&9
/
/
/
*HQIDXOW
7HVWUHVHW
Reversing Starter, Category 4
.
287 287 287
9
37& ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1
%8

7
7
.
7
7
7

.
&XUUHQWPHDVXUHPHQW
$ < < <

. .

7.&%
< < $ <

$
$
. .
$
$
3(
9
$
8
:
0 0 3( .
$&
0DLQV&RQWDFWRUOHIW
0DLQV&RQWDFWRUULJKW
$
Fig. E-49: "Safety-Oriented Tripping with Emergency STOP" circuit diagram, Reversing Starter, category 4
%DVLF8QLW
2SHUDWRU3DQHO
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02

SIMOCODE pro
Example Circuits
Reversing Starter, category 4
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 E-57
13($&+]9
E-58
/ /9'&
352),%86
E.16.5
/
/ $ % $% 0
1
3(
$

;
3(
21! 21!! 2)) 7(67

; 5(6(7
6<6
Example Circuits
category 4

'(9,&( %86 *(1)$8/7

4
)

! ! !
/9'&

!

. $

$
$
%
$
63(3(
;

6,02&2'(SUR9 %XV
6<6
&7
*HQIDXOW
7HVWUHVHW
/
/
/
37& ,1 1 1 ,1 287 287 287
9
.

7
Star-Delta Starter, Category 4
7
.

7
7
7
&XUUHQWPHDVXUHPHQW
.
$ < < <

. . .

7.&% $FNQRZOHGJH(0(5*(1&<6723
< < $ <
$
$
$
. . .
$
$
$
Fig. E-51: "Safety-Oriented Tripping with Emergency STOP" circuit diagram, Star-Delta Starter,
6WDUFRQWDFWRU
'HOWDFRQWDFWRU
0
0DLQVFRQWDFWRU
$
: :
.
9 0 9
$
8 $& 8
3(
3(
0
%DVLF8QLW
2SHUDWRU3DQHO
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02

SIMOCODE pro
Example Circuits
Fig. E-52: "Safety-Oriented Tripping with Emergency STOP" function circuit diagram, Star-Delta Starter,
category 4
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 E-59
/9'&
E-60
13($&+]9 0
/
E.16.6
/ 352),%86
$
%
$
%
/
1
3(
21!! 21 2)) 7(67
5(6(7
3(
6<6

; '(9,&( %86 *(1)$8/7

category 2
Example Circuits

;
)

4

,! /9'&

,!,!,!

$

$
%
;
63(3(
.
$
$
3URILEXV'3 'HYLFH 9'& .
6<6
%86
&7
6,02&2'(SUR&9
*HQIDXOW
/
/
/
7HVWUHVHW
287 287 287
9
37& ,1 1 1 ,1
%8

7
7
7
7
7

Pole-Changing Starter, Category 2

$ < <

. .

$
$
$
7.%%
. .
$
$
$FWXDWRUIDLOXUH
0
0DLQVFRQWDFWRUIDVW
0DLQVFRQWDFWRUVORZ
::
Fig. E-53: "Safety-Oriented Tripping with Emergency STOP" circuit diagram, Pole-Changing Starter,
9 0 9
8 $& 8
3(
3(
0
%DVLF8QLW
2SHUDWRU3DQHO
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02

SIMOCODE pro
Example Circuits
Pole-Changing Starter, category 2
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 E-61
/9'&
E-62
13($&+]9 0 E.16.7
/
/ 352),%86
$
%
$
%
/
1
3(
3(

;

Example Circuits
category 4
21! 21!! 2)) 7(67

5(6(7
6<6
;
)

'(9,&( %86 *(1)$8/7
4

,!

/9'&
,!,!,!

$

$
%
;
63(3(
$
$
.

6<6
%86
&7
6,02&2'(SUR&9
/
/
/
*HQIDXOW
7HVWUHVHW
287 287 287
9
37& ,1 1 1 ,1 .
%8

7
7
7
7
7

.
Pole-Changing Starter, Category 4

&XUUHQWPHDVXUHPHQW
.
$ < < <

. .

7.&%
$ < < $ <

$
. .
0
$
$
Fig. E-55: "Safety-Oriented Tripping with Emergency STOP" circuit diagram, Pole-Changing Starter,
: :
$
9 0 9
0DLQVFRQWDFWRUIDVW
0DLQVFRQWDFWRUVORZ
8 $& 8 .
3(
3(
$
%DVLFXQLW
0
2SHUDWRUSDQHO
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02

SIMOCODE pro
Example Circuits
Pole-Changing Starter, category 4
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 E-63
13($&+]9
E-64
/ /9'&
352),%86
E.16.8
/
/ $ % $% 0
1
3(

;
3(
21! 21!! 2)) 7(67

; 5(6(7
6<6
Example Circuits
category 4

'(9,&( %86 *(1)$8/7

4
)

! ! !
/9'&

!

. $

$
$
%
$
63(3(
;

3URILEXV'3 'HYLFH
Dahlander, Category 4
%XV
6<6
6,02&2'(SUR9
&7
*HQIDXOW
7HVWUHVHW
/
/
/
37& ,1 1 1 ,1 287 287 287
9
.

7
7
.

7
7
7
&XUUHQWPHDVXUHPHQW
.
$ < < <

. . .

7.&%
< < $ <
Fig. E-57: "Safety-Oriented Tripping with Emergency STOP" circuit diagram, Dahlander,
$
$
$
. . .
$
$
$
0
$
6WDUFRQWDFWRUIDVW
0DLQVFRQWDFWRUVORZ
0DLQVFRQWDFWRUIDVW
: :
.
9 0 9
$
8 $& 8
3(
3(
0
%DVLFXQLW
2SHUDWRUSDQHO
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02

SIMOCODE pro
Example Circuits
Dahlander, category 4
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 E-65
Example Circuits
SIMOCODE pro
E-66 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Safety and Commissioning Information
for EEx Areas F
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find safety and commissioning information for
explosive areas. It is imperative that you observe this information for the
protection of any motors in potentially explosive areas.
Target groups
• Commissioners
Necessary knowledge
• Explosion protection
• IEC 60079-14/EN 60079-14/DIN VDE 0165 - 1 Electrical apparatus for
explosive gas atmospheres - Electrical installations in hazardous areas (other
than mines)
• IEC 60079-17/EN 60079-17/DIN VDE 0165 - 10 - 1 Electrical apparatus for
explosive gas atmospheres - Inspection and maintenance of electrical
installations in hazardous areas (other than mines)
• IEC 61241-14/DIN VDE 0165 - 2 Electrical apparatus for use in the presence
of combustible dust - Selection and installation
• IEC 61241-17/DIN VDE 0165 - 10 - 2 Electrical apparatus for use in the
presence of combustible dust - Inspection and maintenance of electrical
• VDE 0118 Erection of electrical installations in mines
• Betriebssicherheitsverordnung - BetrSichV (Ordinance on Industrial
Safety and Health).
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 F-1
Safety and Commissioning Information for EEx Areas
F.1 General
Information and standards
Increased danger in potentially explosive areas means it is necessary to
carefully observe the following notes and standards:
• IEC 60079-14/EN 60079-14/DIN VDE 0165 - 1 Electrical apparatus for
explosive gas atmospheres - Electrical installations in hazardous areas (other
than mines)
• IEC 60079-17/EN 60079-17/DIN VDE 0165 - 10 - 1 Electrical apparatus for
explosive gas atmospheres - Inspection and maintenance of electrical
• IEC 61241-14/DIN VDE 0165 - 2 Electrical apparatus for use in the presence
of combustible dust - Selection and installation
• IEC 61241-17/DIN VDE 0165 - 10 - 2 Electrical apparatus for use in the
presence of combustible dust - Inspection and maintenance of electrical
• VDE 0118Erection of electrical installations in mines
• Betriebssicherheitsverordnung - BetrSichV (Ordinance on Industrial
Safety and Health).
All 3UF7 devices are approved under Device Group I, Category "M2" (mining)
and Device Group II, Category 2 in the area "GD" (areas in which explosive
gas, steam, fog and air mixtures as well as inflammable dust are present):
BVS 06 ATEX F 001 I (M2) *)
BVS 06 ATEX F 001 II (2) GD *)
*) Note:
This safety and commissioning information is also valid for devices with the
certificate number BVS 04 ATEX F 003.
These devices are suitable for the protection of motors in explosive areas
and comply with the standards listed above.
Tests other than those legally stipulated (Ordinance on Industrial
Safety and Health) are not required.
Warning
All installation, commissioning and maintenance work is to be carried out by
responsible, qualified personnel only. Unprofessional behavior can cause
serious damage to persons and goods.
SIMOCODE pro
F-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
F.2 Set-up and Commissioning
Notice
Please observe the operating instructions (enclosed with the devices)
SIMOCODE pro
Basic Unit Order number: 3ZX1012-0UF70-1AA1
Current Measuring Module Order number: 3ZX1012-0UF71-1AA1
Current/Voltage Measuring Module Order number: 3ZX1012-0UF77-1BA1
Digital Module Order number: 3ZX1012-0UF73-1AA1
F.2.1 Setting the Rated Motor Current
Set the 3UF7 to the Rated Motor Current (according to the type plate or
design test certificate of the motor).
Notice
Note the trip class /tripping characteristic of the 3UF7.
Select the trip class so that the motor is thermally protected, even when the
rotor is stalled.
Motors, cables and contactors must be suitable for the selected trip class.
Notice
Set the response of the overload protection to "Tripping"!
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 F-3
Example
Motor 500 V, 50/60 Hz, 110 kW, 156 A, temperature class T3, time TE = 11 s,
IA/Is = 5.5:
TE = 11 s
IA/Is = 5.5
Fig. F-1: Tripping conditions of the EExe motor, selected: CLASS 10
SIMOCODE pro
F-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
F.2.2 SIMOCODE pro with thermistor input
For the 3UF70, you can use a type A temperature sensor with a
characteristic curve according to IEC 60947-8 (DIN VDE 0660, Part 303),
DIN 44081 and DIN 44082.
Depending on the number of sensors, this will result in the following trip
and restart temperatures:
Fig. F-2: Typical characteristic curve of a Type A sensor (logarithmic scale)
Depending on the number of sensors, the following Trip and Restart

Temperatures will result based on the NFT (Nominal Functioning
Temperature of the sensor):
Tripping Temperature Restart Temperature
3 sensors NFT + 4 K NFT - 7 K

6 sensors NFT - 5 K NFT - 20 K
Table F-1: Tripping and Restart Temperatures
The temperatures listed are Limit Values.
Notice
Set the response for the activated thermistor to "Tripping"!
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 F-5
F.2.3 Sensor Circuit Wiring
Caution
Lay the measuring circuit cables as separate control cables.
The use of motor feeder wires or other main current cables is not permitted.
Shielded control cables must be used if extremely inductive or capacitive
interferences are to be expected because of parallel high-voltage cables.
Maximum Cable Length of the Sensor Circuit Cables:
Cable Cable Lengths at the Thermistor Input

cross section
Without Short-circuit With Short-circuit Detection 1)
Detection
2.5 mm2 2 x 2800 m 2 x 250 m
1.5 mm2 2 x 1500 m 2 x 150 m

0.5 mm2 2 x 500 m 2 x 50 m
1) A short circuit in the sensor circuit will be detected up to this maximum cable length.
Table F-2: Maximum cable length of the sensor circuit cables
We recommend evaluation of the short-circuit detection of the sensor cable.

If the short-circuit detection of the sensor cable is not evaluated, the sensor
resistance must be measured with a suitable measuring device during
commissioning or after modifications/maintenance work has been carried
out (mounting, demounting the system).
F.2.4 Short-Circuit Protection according to IEC 60947-4-1, Type of Coordination 2
Short-circuit protection must be carried out by separately arranged

overcurrent protection devices.
Caution
When combining with other contactors, observe the respective maximum
fuse protection of the contactor for Type of Coordination 2.
SIMOCODE pro
F-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
F.2.5 Cable Protection
Caution
Avoid impermissibly high cable surface temperatures by correctly
dimensioning the cross sections!
Select ample cable cross sections, particularly for heavy starting CLASS 20
to CLASS 40 (see the "Short-Circuit Protection with Fuses for Motor
Feeders" table in the "Technical Data" chapter of the SIMOCODE pro system
manual!
F.2.6 Test
SIMOCODE pro offers users the convenient option of checking the

complete motor protection chain (incl. actuators and sensors such as
contactors, circuit breakers and thermistors. This can, for example, be used
to carry out tests according to IEC 60079-17.
This test includes a complete function test. For this purpose, all three test
phases are to be carried out (Hardware Test, Current Feedback, Motor
Protection Tripping, see below).
The test can be carried out using the "TEST/RESET" buttons provided, or be
done automatically via the bus.
Due to existing self-test routines, Tripping Currents do not need to be
started in order to carry out testing.
Test phases
• Phase 1: Hardware Test/Lamp Test (0 to 2 s):
The hardware (e.g. the thermistor electronics) is tested, all LEDs and displays
are activated, including Lamp Controls. Contactor Controls remain
unchanged.
• Phase 2: Hardware test results (2 to 5 s):
If there is a fault, the "Hardware Fault Basic Unit" fault is triggered.
If there is no fault,
– the "GEN. FAULT" LED flashes when no main current is flowing
– the "GEN. FAULT" LED flickers if main current is flowing in all three
phases (special case: for "1-phase load" in one phase).
• Phase 3: Relay test (> 5 s):
If testing is carried out with tripping, the contactor controls are deactivated.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 F-7
The following table shows the test phases carried out when the "TEST/
RESET" button is pressed for the required length of time:
Test Status Without Main Current With Main Current

phase
O.K. Fault *) O.K. Fault
Hardware Test / Lamp Test
"DEVICE" LED Orange Green Orange Green

<2 s
"GEN.FAULT" LED
Contactor Control Unchanged Unchanged Unchanged Unchanged
Show QL*
Results of the Hardware Test / Lamp Test

2s-5s
"GEN.FAULT" LED
Contactor Control Unchanged Deactivated Unchanged Deactivated
Relay Test

>5s
"GEN.FAULT" LED
Contactor Control Deactivated Deactivated Deactivated Deactivated
LED lit/activated LED flashing LED flickering LED OFF
*) "Fault" only displayed after 2 s
Table F-3: The states of the status LEDs / contactor controls during testing
SIMOCODE pro
F-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
F.2.7 Further Safety Guidelines
Caution
Only the Relay Outputs of the 3UF70 Basic Unit or the 3UF730 Monostable
Digital Module may be used for the Protection Function!
Warning
The 3UF7 is not suitable for installation in potentially explosive areas.
The device may only be used in a switchgear cabinet with at least 4 times
the IP degree of protection.
When setting up the equipment in potentially explosive areas, ensure the
3UF7 is does not present a fire hazard. Appropriate measures must be taken
(e.g. encapsulation).
Notice
The 3UF7 is not suitable for load-side operation on frequency converters.
F.2.8 Ambient conditions
Permissible ambient temperature range:

• Storage/transport: -40 °C to +80 °C
• Operation: -25 °C to +60 °C; OPD: 0 °C to +60 °C
F.3 Maintenance and Repairs

These devices are maintenance-free.
Warning
Repairs may only be carried out by the manufacturer.
F.4 Warranty
For this warranty to be considered valid, the safety and commissioning
information of the following operating instructions must be observed:
SIMOCODE pro
Basic Unit Order number 3ZX1012-0UF70-1AA1
Current Measuring Module Order number 3ZX1012-0UF71-1AA1
Current/Voltage Measuring Module Order number: 3ZX1012-0UF77-1BA1
Digital Module Order number: 3ZX1012-0UF73-1AA1
And the entire manual Order number: 3UF7970-0AA01-0
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 F-9
F.5 Further Information

Further information about the 3UF7 can be found
• in the LV1 or LV1T Siemens catalogs
"Low Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear - SIRIUS - SENTRON - SIVACON"
or
• on the internet at http://www.ad.siemens.de/csi/cd.
SIMOCODE pro
F-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Index
Numerics AM inputs function block 7-13

3UF50 - device-specific diagnosis 9-4 AM output 1-85
3UF50 - operation mode 1-51 AM output function block 6-11
3UF50 basic type 1-52 Ambient conditions F-9
3UF50 compatibility mode 1-14, 9-1, 9-2 Analog input 1, 2 1-41
3UF50 mode 1-51 Analog Module 1-2, 1-12, 1-19, 1-71,
3UF7200 and 3UF7210 Operator 1-73, 5-14, D-9, Glossary-1
Panels C-13 Analog Module - output 6-1
9-pole SUB-D connection 13-39 Analog Module connection example
13-21
A Analog Module inputs 1-55, 7-1, 7-3, 7-13
A/B terminals 13-39 Analog Module open circuit 15-2
Abbreviations A-3, B-4 Analog Module output 6-11
Abbreviations and specifications A-3 Analog Module pin assignment 13-20
About SIMOCODE 1-34 Analog output 1-41
Access to data records in STEP7 12-22 Analog signal 1-16
Accessories 1-20, 1-78, C-15 Analog temperature monitoring 1-9, 5-1,
Acknowledgement of faults 10-6 5-21
Active control stations 4-60, A-2 Analog temperature monitoring with NTC,
Active control stations, contactor/lamp PT100, PT1000 and KTY 83/84 sensor
controls and status information for con- types 1-9
trol functions 4-60 Analog terminal block 1-83
Active power 1-16 Analog value recording 1-85, 8-1, 8-2,
Active power monitoring 1-11, 5-1, 5-12, 8-3
Glossary-1 Antivalence 15-2
Actual analog signal value 1-16 Apparent power 1-16
Acyclic receive 7-3, 7-16 Application selection 4-15
Acyclic receive byte 0 (1, 2/3) 1-86 Assignment of cyclic receive and send data
Acyclic receive function blocks 7-16 for predefined control functions B-41
Acyclic send 6-18 Automatic acknowledgement of
Acyclic send data 6-18, 12-1 faults 10-6
Acyclic services 1-14, 6-18, 7-16 Automatic baud rate recognition 1-14
Acyclic writing and reading of DPV1 Data Auto-reset 10-10
records 12-15
Adapt display settings 1-57 B
Adapter for operator panel 1-20, 1-79 Basic factory settings 2-2
Addressing plug 1-20, 1-24, 1-78, 13-35, Basic Unit 1-10, 1-22, 1-53, 1-64,
Glossary-1 Glossary-1
Adopt address 1-60 Basic Unit connection example 13-13
Alarm, fault and system Events 15-1 Basic Unit inputs 7-3, 7-4
Alarms 12-6 Basic Unit outputs 6-4
Alarms - diagnosis alarm 12-13 Basic Unit pin assignment 13-12
Alarms - process alarm 12-14 Basic Units 1-22, C-2
Alarms according to DPV1 1-14 Baud rate Glossary-2
AM inputs 1-85 Baud rates up to 12 MBit/s 1-14
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 Index-1
Index
Binary inputs for 110... 240 V AC/DC 1-9 Circuit breaker (MCCB) control 1-23
Binary inputs on the basic units and digital Circuit diagram with 3RW 40/44 E-47
modules 7-1 Class 3-8, Glossary-2
Bistable outputs 1-54 Class 1 master 12-2, 12-15, Glossary-2
Bistable relay output 1-9 Class 2 master 12-2, Glossary-2
BU input settings 7-5 Class time 3-14
BU inputs 1-91 Clear 1-60
BU outputs 1-91, 6-5 Clockwise rotation 4-30
BU outputs function block 6-4 Closing the system interface using the
Bus Glossary-2 system interface cover on the door
Bus connection D-6 adapter 13-30
Bus connection system 1-18, 13-23, Closing the system interface using the sy-
13-24 stem interface cover on the Operator
Bus connection system from Panel 13-30
20 A to 630 A 13-23, 13-24 Closing the system interface using the sy-
Bus monitoring 1-50, 10-17, 10-18 stem interface cover on the Operator Pa-
Bus ok 1-50 nel with display 13-30
Bus ok, PLC/PCS in run 1-43 Cold starting 10-8
Bus parameters 12-1 Cold starting function test 10-8
Bus segment Glossary-2 Color coding for the connection cable
Bus termination module 13-40 13-34, 13-36
Bus/PLC-fault - reset 1-50, 10-18 Commands 1-33
Buttons D-12, D-13 Comment 1-63
Buttons on the operator panel with Commissioning 2-9, 14-1, 14-2, 14-3, F-3
display 7-7 Commissioning options 14-2
Communication 1-33, 12-1
C Communication principle 12-4
Cable cross sections 13-10 Compatibility mode 1-51
Cable length of the sensor circuit Conductor cross section 13-23, 13-24
cables F-6 Configuration fault 15-2
Cable lengths D-4 Configuration information for using an
Cable protection F-7 Operator Panel with display and/or
Cables 13-10, D-4, D-7 a decoupling module 1-76
Calculation modules 1-15, 11-2, 11-27 Configuration of the slave diagnosis 12-7
Calculator 1-15, 11-2, 1-88 Configure diagnosis response 12-6
Calculator (calculation module) 1 1-39, Configuring a reversing starter 2-1
1-88 Connecting cable 1-20, 1-78, Glossary-3
Calculator (calculation module) 2 1-39, Connecting cables to the system interface
1-88 of the Operator Panel 13-37
Calculator examples 11-30 Connecting cables to the system interface
Calculator formulae 11-29 of the Operator Panel with display
Calculator logic modules 11-27, 11-28 13-38
Calculator settings 11-29 Connecting plugs with sockets 1-84
Calculators (calculation modules) 1-15, Connecting system components to the
11-2, 11-27 system interface 13-32, 13-36
Catalogs LV1/LV1T F-10 Connecting the PROFIBUS DP to the
Change-over pause 4-16, 4-17, 4-28, 4-29, 9-pole SUB-D socket 13-39
4-31, 4-33, 4-34, 4-36, 4-38, 4-40, 4-41, Connecting the system components
4-43, 4-45, 4-47 13-29
Change-over pause active 1-44 Connection D-4, D-8, D-9, D-11
Channel-related diagnosis 12-6, 12-12 Connection cross sections D-4, D-6, D-7,
Characteristic curve of a type A sensor D-8, D-9, D-10, D-11
F-5 Connection for voltage measurement
Check list for selecting a device series D-6
1-8 Consumed energy 1-47
Circuit breaker (MCCB) 1-13, 4-14, 4-26 Contactor controls 4-12, 4-30, 4-60, A-2
SIMOCODE pro
Index-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6060-22 DS 02
Index
Contrast 1-57 Cyclic data exchange 12-15

Control circuit D-9, D-10 Cyclic data from SIMOCODE pro to the
Control commands 4-1, 4-2, 4-7, 4-22, PROFIBUS DP master 12-5
4-25, 4-27, 4-37, 4-44 Cyclic data from the PROFIBUS DP master
Control data from PROFIBUS DP 1-82, to SIMOCODE pro 12-5
7-1 Cyclic receive 7-3, 7-15, 9-3, 12-5
Control function 4-1, 4-2, 4-10, 4-60, Cyclic receive byte 0 (1, 2/3) 1-101
Glossary-3 Cyclic receive function blocks 7-15
Control of the main contactor in the motor Cyclic send 6-16, 9-3, 12-5
feeder 6-4 Cyclic send byte 0 (1, 2/9) 1-101
Control programs 1-2 Cyclic send data 2-12, 6-17, 12-1
Control station - local control 4-3 Cyclic send function blocks 6-16
Control station - operator panel 4-4 Cyclic services 1-14, 6-17, 7-15
Control station - PC 4-4
Control station - PLC/PCS 4-3 D
Control station - Local Control 2-2 Dahlander 1-8, 1-13, 1-22, 4-14, 4-36,
Control station settings 4-9 B-47
Control stations 1-93, 4-1, 4-2, 4-3, Dahlander circuit diagram E-18
Glossary-3 Dahlander control function 4-34
Cooling down period 1-42, 3-10, Dahlander function circuit diagram E-19
Glossary-2 Dahlander reversing starter 4-14, 4-40,
Cooling down period active 1-45 B-48, E-22
Cooling down period of the motor 1-16 Dahlander reversing starter circuit
Cos phi 1-68, Glossary-4 diagram E-20
Cos phi monitoring 1-11, 1-96, 5-1, 5-10, Dahlander reversing starter control
11-25, Glossary-3 function 4-37
Cos phi, P, S 1-41 Dahlander reversing starter function circuit
Counter 1-15, 11-2 diagram E-21
Counter 1 (2, 3, 4) 1-100 Dahlander, category 4 E-64
Counter actual value 1-49 Data access 12-5
Counter output 1-49 Data formats B-1
Counter settings 11-9 Data record 0/1 - S7 system diagnosis
Counter-clockwise rotation 4-30 B-5
Counters 11-8 Data record 130 - basic device para-
Counters logic modules 11-8 meters 1 B-18
Cover 1-24 Data record 131 - basic device para-
Current flowing, device ok 1-43 meters 2 B-23
Current in phases 1, 2 and 3 1-16 Data record 132 - extended device parame-
Current limit 1-10, 1-94, 3-14 ters 1 B-27
Current limit monitoring 5-5 Data record 133 - extended device parame-
Current limits 1-94 ters 2 B-33
Current measuring 1-54 Data record 139 - marking B-36
Current measuring 1-8 Data record 160 - communication
Current measuring module 1-18, 1-67, parameters B-37
4-29, 5-5, 13-23, C-3, C-4, C-5, C-6, C-7, Data record 165 - comments B-37
D-5, Glossary-4 Data record 202 - acyclic receive B-38
Current measuring module installed 4-33 Data record 203 - acyclic send B-39
Current measuring with an external current Data record 224 - password protection
transformer (interposing transfor- B-40
mer) 13-26 Data record 63 - analog value
Current measuring with current measuring recording B-7
modules 13-23, 13-24 Data record 67 - process image of the
Current/voltage measuring module outputs B-7
1-2, 1-18, 1-68, 5-5, 5-8, 5-12, 13-24, C-8, Data record 69 - process image of the
C-9, C-10, C-11, C-12, D-5, Glossary-4 inputs B-8
Cyclic data 12-5 Data record 72 - error buffer B-9
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 Index-3
Index
Data record 92 - device diagnosis B-10 Direct starter control function 4-20
Data record 94 - measured values B-16 Direct starter function circuit diagram E-7
Data record 95 - service data / statistical Direct starter, category 2 E-50
data B-17 Direct Starter, category 4 E-52
Data records 12-22, B-1, B-3 Direction of rotation 4-22
Data records - overview B-2 Display 1-66, D-3, D-7, D-8, D-9, D-10,
Data transfer 12-4 D-12, D-13
Date 1-63 Display of all pending faults 1-62
Decoupling module 1-19, 1-70, C-14, D-7, Display of all pending status
Glossary-4 information 1-61
Decoupling module connection Display of all pending warnings 1-61
example 13-22 Display of measured values in the measu-
Decoupling module pin assignment red value indicator 1-40
13-22 Display of statistical and maintenance-rele-
Degree of pollution D-5 vant information on the
Degree of protection (according to statistics/maintenance display 1-46
IEC 60529) D-2 Display of the current status of all
Delay x, 1-72 device I/Os 1-53
Delay time 7-10 Display settings 1-33
Device class 1-65 Displays (lamp control) 4-12
Device data 12-2 Displays of the operator panel with
Device data (GSD file) Glossary-4 display 1-30
Device family 1-64 DM inputs 7-10
Device I/Os 1-33 DM inputs function blocks 7-9
Device parameters 12-1 DM outputs 6-9
Device replacement 1-78 DM1(2) inputs 1-89
Device series 1-2 DM1(2) outputs 1-88, 6-10
Device subfamily 1-64 Door adapter 1-20, 1-79, C-15, Glossary-4
Device test active 1-45 Double 0 15-2
Diagnosis alarm - configuration 12-13 Double 1 15-2
Diagnosis alarms 12-6 PLC/PCS 4-9
Diagnosis data 12-6 DP master 9-2, 12-2, Glossary-5
Diagnosis device fault 1-52 DP master connections for
Diagnosis fault 1-52 SIMATIC S7-400 10-19
Diagnosis for device errors 12-6 DP master with DPV1 alarm support
Diagnosis status info 1-52 (DPV1 alarm mode) 12-19
Diagnosis triggered by event 12-6 DP master without DPV1 alarm support
Diagnosis triggered by trips 12-6 (DPV1 alarm mode) 12-19
Diagnosis triggered by warning 12-6 DP masters which are operated
Diagnosis via LED display 14-5 in "DPV1" DP mode 12-20
Diagnosis warning 1-52 DP masters which are operated
Diagnostic data 1-17 in "S7 compatible" DP mode 12-20
Diagram of the diagnosis data 9-4 DP slave Glossary-5
Digital Module 1-19, 1-54, 1-71, 1-72, D-8, DP standard SIMOCODE-DP 9-4
Glossary-4 DP standard slave Glossary-5
Digital Module 1 inputs 7-3 DPV0 1-51
Digital Module 2 inputs 7-3 DPV1 1-51, 9-2
Digital Module connection example DPV1 SIMOCODE-DP 9-4
13-15 DPV1 slave 12-2
Digital Module inputs 7-9 DPV1 slave via GSD 12-15
Digital Module outputs 6-9
Digital Module pin assignment 13-14 E
Dimension drawings C-1 Early warning and fault signals 1-17
Direct starter 1-4, 1-5, 1-8, 1-13, 1-22, Earth fault 5-2
4-14, 4-21, B-42 Earth-fault detection 1-2
Direct starter circuit diagram E-6
SIMOCODE pro
Index-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6060-22 DS 02
Index
Earth-fault module 1-19, 1-71, 1-74, D-10, External fault 1-14, 10-2, 10-9, 10-10, 15-2
Glossary-5 External fault 1 (and 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) 1-90
Earth-fault module connection External fault 1 to 6 B-36
example 13-17 External fault function blocks 10-9
Earth-fault module pin assignment 13-16 External fault response 10-10
Earth-fault monitoring 1-10, 1-19, 1-97, 5- External fault settings 10-10
1, 5-2, Glossary-5
Earth-fault monitoring via the current F
measuring module (internal) 1-8 Factory settings 1-59, 1-60, 14-2,
Earth-fault monitoring with external sum- E- 2, Glossary-6
mation current transformer via the earth- Fault current 5-2
fault module 1-9 Fault memory 1-34
EEx e applications 3-10, 3-15, 5-22 Faults 1-34, 1-58
Electronic overload protection 1-10 FB 62 TIMESTMP function block 10-19
EMC emitted interference according to FB ON 4-16, 4-17
IEC 60947-1 D-2 FC, FO, TC, TO 1-44
EMC stability according to Feedback fault 1-17
IEC 60947-1 D-2 Feedback OFF 15-3
Emergency start 1-14, 1-91, 10-2, 10-16, Feedback ON 4-16, 4-41, 4-44, 15-3
Glossary-5 Feedback time 4-17, 4-18, 4-21, 4-24,
Emergency start executed 1-45 4-26, 4-29, 4-33, 4-36, 4-40, 4-43, 4-47,
Emergency start function block 10-16 4-54, 4-56, 4-59
Enabled control command 4-7 Feeder power consumption 1-16
Enabled control command - OFF 4-49 Flashing 1-15, 11-2, 11-21
4-54, 4-59 Flashing 1 (2, 3) 1-87
Enabled control command - ON 4-49, Flashing logic modules 11-21
4-54 Flashing settings 11-21
Enabled control command - ON > 4-54 Flickering 1-15, 11-2, 11-22
End position 4-49, 15-2 Flickering 1 (2, 3) 1-90
Error buffer / Error protocol read-out Flickering logic modules 11-22
14-13 Flickering settings 11-22
Error message 1-x Frequencies D-2
Error protocolling with timestamp 1-17 Function blocks (alphabetical) 1-85
Error types 12-12 FW version 1-65, 1-66
Evaluating diagnosis data 12-19
Events of the slave diagnostics A-14 G
Example circuits E-1 General fault, general warning 1-43
Exchanging a 3UF52 Operator Panel for a General information about commissioning
3UF720 Operator Panel 13-8 and service 14-2
Execution ON-command 15-2 General representation of the input
Execution STOP-command 15-2 types 7-2
Execution time 4-17, 4-18, 4-21, 4-24 General settings and definitions 4-15
4-26, 4-29, 4-33, 4-36, 4-40, 4-43, 4-47, GSD 12-2
4-49, 4-54, 4-56, 4-59 GSD file 1-81, 12-16
Expansion modules C-14, D-8,
Glossary-5 H
Expansion modules for the Hardware faults 15-3
SIMOCODE pro V device series 1-71 Hardware test 10-5, F-7, F-8
Explosion protection F-1 Heating motor model 1-16, 1-41
Extended control 1-90 HW version 1-65, 1-66
Extended protection 1-89 Hysteresis for 0/4-20 mA 5-16
External current transformer 13-26 Hysteresis for monitoring functions 5-23
External earth fault 15-2 Hysteresis for voltage, cos phi, power
External earth-fault monitoring 1-10, 5-2 5-6, 5-7, 5-9
External earth-fault monitoring (with sum-
mation current transformer) 5-4
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 Index-5
Index
I Is1 transformation ratio - counter 3-6

I max 1-40 Is1 transformation ratio - denominator
I> (upper limit) 5-6 3-6
Identification 1-34 Is2 transformation ratio - denominator
Identification number 1-65 3-6
Identification of the motor feeder and the
SIMOCODE pro components 1-63 J
Identification-related diagnosis 12-10 Just one start possible 15-3
Identification-related diagnosis -
configuration 12-10 K
Ie2 transformation ratio - active 3-6 Key-operated switch operation 4-5
Ie2 Transformation ratio - counter 3-6 KTY83, KTY85 1-56
IL1, IL2, IL3 1-35, 1-40, 1-54
Illumination 1-57 L
Imax 1-36 Labeling software 1-25
Imax, Cos 1-36 Labeling strip 1-25, 1-26, 1-28
Imax, UL1 °C 1-38 Lamp control A-2
Imax, UL1 °F 1-38 Lamp control for displaying operating
Imax, UL1, Cos 1-38 states 6-4
Imax, UL1, Cos, P 1-36 Lamp controls 4-12, 4-60
Imax, UL1, Cos, S 1-36 Lamp test 10-5, F-7, F-8
Imax_A 1-35 Languages 1-57
Important information ix Last trip current 1-42
In1/Output 1-36 LEDs of the Operator Panel with
In1/Output_mA 1-37 Display 6-7
In2/Output_mA 1-37 Limit 1 to 4 B-36
Independent operation 1-3, Glossary-6 Limit monitor 1-15, 11-2, 11-23
Information and standards F-2 Limit monitor 1 (2, 3, 4) 1-91
Input 1 1-55 Limit monitor activity 11-24
Input 2 1-55 Limit monitor logic modules 11-23
Input characteristic D-4 Limit monitor settings 11-25
Inputs 1-37, 1-53, 1-54, 7-1, 7-3, D-9 Limit overshooting 11-23
Inputs (binary) D-4, D-8 Limit temperature 3-15
Installation guidelines for the Limit undershooting 11-23
PROFIBUS DP 13-40 List of abbreviations Abbreviations-1
Integration of SIMOCODE pro as a Load feeder 1-5
DPV1 slave via GSD in the configuration Local 4-5, 4-6
software 12-16 Local control station 1-6, 2-3, 2-9, 4-2, 7-9
Integration of SIMOCODE pro as S7 slave Location designation 1-63
via OM SIMOCODE pro 12-18 Locking the contactor 4-16
Integration of SIMOCODE pro as Logic module 1-15, 11-1, 11-2, Glossary-6
SIMATIC PDM object (DPV1 slave via
GSD) in STEP-7-HW Config 12-17 M
Integration of SIMOCODE pro in Main circuit D-5
SIMATIC S7 with Main display 1-32
OM SIMOCODE ES 12-20 Mains buffering time D-3
Integration of SIMOCODE pro in the Maintenance F-9
DP Master Systems 12-15 Making internal assignments 4-25
Interfaces 13-1 Manual operation 4-5
Interlocking time 4-16, 4-17, 4-22, 4-24, Manufacturer 1-64
4-33, 4-40, 4-47, 4-54, 4-59, 5-20 Manufacturer's identification 12-9
Internal comments 1-16 Marking 1-63
Internal earth fault 15-3 Master Glossary-6
Internal earth-fault monitoring 1-10, 5-2, Master class 2 9-2
5-3 Master PROFIBUS address 12-9
Is1 transformation ratio - active 3-5 Max. Temp. °C 1-37
Max. Temp. °F 1-37
SIMOCODE pro
Index-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6060-22 DS 02
Index
Max. Temperature 1-41, 1-55 Motor temperature 1-10

Measured value display 1-32 Mounting and wiring of current measuring
Measuring, processing and outputting ana- modules 13-23
log values 1-8 Mounting 13-1, 13-3, D-3, D-5, D-7, D-8,
Memory module 1-20, 1-24, 1-78, 13-35, D-9, D-10, D-12
Glossary-6 Mounting and wiring 13-2, 13-23, 13-24
Memory module "park position" 1-26, Mounting and wiring of current/voltage
1-29 measuring modules 13-24
Menu navigation 1-32 Mounting lugs 13-2, 13-3, 13-4, 13-5
Menu of the operator panel with Mounting lugs for screw attachment 13-2
display 1-32 Mounting position D-2
MFLB 1-64, 1-66 Mounting the Basic Units, expansion mo-
Module fault 15-3 dules and decoupling module 13-3
Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) Mounting the current measuring
B-44 modules 13-4
Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) 3VL Mounting the current/voltage measuring
circuit diagram E-10 modules 13-5
Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) 3VL Mounting the Operator Panel and Operator
Function circuit diagram E-11 Panel with Display 13-6
Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) con-
trol function 4-25 N
Monitoring 0/4-20 mA 1-96, 5-1, 5-14, Navigation in SIMOCODE ES 11-1, 12-1
Glossary-6 Network contactor 4-30
Monitoring current limits 1-8, 1-10, 5-1, No start 1-47
5-7 No start possible 15-3
Monitoring current limits I> 5-6 Non-maintained command mode 1-44,
Monitoring for further availability 1-11 4-16, 4-21, 4-24, 4-26, 4-29, 4-33, 4-36,
Monitoring for undervoltage 1-11 4-40, 4-42, 4-47, 4-49, 4-54, 4-56, 4-59
Monitoring functions 1-10, 5-1, Non-volatile element 1 (2, 3, 4) 1-92
Glossary-7 Non-volatile elements 1-15, 11-2, 11-18,
Monitoring of current limits I< 5-7 11-20
Monitoring of earth faults Glossary-7 Non-volatile elements settings 11-20
Monitoring of the motor current 5-5 NOR function 11-17, 11-20
Monitoring PLC/PCS input 10-18 Notes on parameterizing 14-2
Monitoring the current limits Glossary-8 NTC 1-56
Monitoring the number of starts 5-19, Number of motor starts 1-16
Glossary-7 Number of overload trippings 1-16
Monitoring the voltage Glossary-7 Number of overload trippings 1-46
Monostable outputs 1-54 Number of parameterizations 1-48
Motor control 4-1 Number of permissible starts
Motor control functions 1-22 remaining 1-16
Motor feeder 1-4, 2-3 Number of starts 1-12, 5-19
Motor model 10-16 Number of starts - actual value 1-46
Motor operating hours 1-16, 1-46, 5-18 Number of starts - overshoot 5-18
Motor operating hours > 1-46, 15-3 Number of starts - pre-warning 5-18
Motor operating hours monitoring 5-18
Motor protection 3-1, Glossary-8 O
Motor protection and motor control Object Manager (OM) SIMOCODE DP
status 1-43 1-21, 1-80, 9-2
Motor protection functions 3-2 Off command-reset 10-10
Motor stop time 1-12, 1-47 OM SIMOCODE pro 12-2, 12-24
Motor stop time > 1-47, 15-3 ON control command 4-49
Motor stop time monitoring 5-18, ON, ON>>, Start Active 1-43
Glossary-8 One More Start Only 1-47
Motor stop times 1-16, 5-18 OP Buttons 1-87
Motor switching state 1-16 OP Buttons function block 7-8
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 Index-7
Index
Open circuit 1-55 Overload relay control function 4-19

Operating data 1-16 Overload relay function circuit diagram
Operating hours 1-12, 5-17 E-5
Operating hours BU 1-48 Overtemperature 5-22
Operating hours monitoring Glossary-8 Overview of function blocks 1-85
Operating mode selectors 4-5, 4-6, 4-9
Operating modes 4-1, 4-5, 4-6 P
Operating modes for calculator 2 11-28 Panel-reset 10-10
Operating range D-3 Parameter changes not allowed in the cur-
Operating, service and diagnostic data rent operating state 15-4
1-16 Parameter data during startup 12-24
Operation as DPV1 slave downstream Parameter is faulty 15-4
from the Y link 1-14 Parameterization 2-6
Operation monitoring 1-87, 5-1, 5-17, Parameterization during startup 12-15
Glossary-9 Parameterization software 1-80
Operation monitoring response 5-18 Parameterization via PROFIBUS 12-23
Operational controls of the Operator Parameterization with SIMOCODE ES
Module with Display 1-31 2-8, 12-6
Operational Protection OFF 1-14, 1-87, Parameters 4-16
10-2, 10-11, 10-12, 10-13, 15-4, Pause time 3-10, Glossary-9
Glossary-9 Pause time active 1-45
Operational Protection Off (OPO) function PC cable 1-20, 1-78, 13-35, Glossary-9
block 10-11 PC control station 4-2
Operator enable 4-8 Permissible ambient temperature D-2
Operator Panel 1-18, 1-24, D-12, Glossa- Permissible number of starts
ry-8 exceeded 15-4
Operator Panel buttons 7-1, 7-3, 7-6, 7-7 Permissible starts 5-19
Operator Panel adapter C-15 Permissible starts - actual value 1-47
Operator Panel control station 4-2 Phase failure 1-8, 1-10
Operator Panel LEDs 6-1, 6-6 Phase sequence 1-16, 1-68, Glossary-4
Operator Panel with Display 1-18, 1-27, Phase sequence 1-2-3 1-45
10-3, C-13, D-12, Glossary-8 Phase sequence 3-2-1 1-45
Operator Panel, "TEST/RESET" button 7-6 Phase sequence identification 1-12
Operator Panel, buttons 1 to 4 7-6 Phase unbalance 1-10, 1-16, 1-40, 3-13,
OP-LED 1-86 15-5
OPO 1-87 Pin assignment of the removable
OPO, Remote, TPF 1-44 terminals 13-12, 13-14, 13-16, 13-18,
Output 1-55, D-9 13-20, 13-22, 13-25
Output of any analog value from the auto- Plant downtimes 5-17
mation system, cyclically via Plant identifier 1-63
PROFIBUS 6-15 PLC/PCS 4-5
Output of the effective motor current - PLC/PCS conrtol station 4-2
across the entire motor current PLC/PCS in run 1-50
range 6-13 PLC/PCS monitoring 1-14, 1-50, 10-2,
Output of the effective motor current - 10-17, 10-18
only part of the motor current range Plugs (analog) 1-82
(overload range) 6-14 Plugs (binary) 1-82
Output response of the timer 11-12, 11-13 Pole-changing reversing starter 4-14,
Outputs 1-53, 1-54, 6-1, 6-3 4-47, B-50, E-28
Overload 3-10, 15-4 Pole-changing reversing starter circuit
Overload and unbalance 15-4 diagram E-26
Overload protection 1-8, 1-10, 3-1, 3-2, Pole-changing reversing starter control
3-5, 3-14, Glossary-9 function 4-44
Overload relay 1-8, 1-13, 1-22, 4-14, 4-19, Pole-changing reversing starter function
B-41 circuit diagram E-27
Overload relay circuit diagram E-4
SIMOCODE pro
Index-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6060-22 DS 02
Index
Pole-changing starter 1-8, 1-22, 4-14, 4- Process monitoring 1-10

42, B-49 PROFIBUS Glossary-10
Pole-changing starter circuit diagram PROFIBUS address 1-50
E-24 PROFIBUS DP 1-14, 1-21, 1-80, 2-2, 4-4,
Pole-changing starter control function 4-55, 4-57, 6-2, 6-3, 6-5, 6-16, 6-18, 7-16,
4-41 10-6, 10-12, 12-2, Glossary-10
Pole-changing starter function circuit PROFIBUS DP interface 1-14, D-3,
diagram E-25 Glossary-10
Pole-changing starter, category 2 E-60 PROFIBUS DP to a 9-pole SUB-D
Pole-changing starter, category 4 E-62 socket 13-39
Pole-changing starters 1-13 PROFIBUS DPV1 6-18, 7-16, 12-2,
Positioner 1-8, 1-13, 4-14, 4-54, 10-12, Glossary-10
B-52 PROFIBUS User Organization (PUO) instal-
Positioner 1 4-53 lation guidelines 13-40, Glossary-9
Positioner 1 circuit diagram E-32 Profiles 1-58
Positioner 1 function circuit diagram E-33 Program 1-60
Positioner 2 4-53 Programmable logical controller
Positioner 2 circuit diagram E-34 Glossary-10
Positioner 2 function circuit diagram E-35 Programming device Glossary-9
Positioner 3 4-53 Protection functions 1-10
Positioner 3 circuit diagram E-36 Protection/control 1-92
Positioner 3 function circuit diagram E-37 Pt100, PT1000 1-56
Positioner 4 4-53 PTC 3-15
Positioner 4 circuit diagram E-38 PTC high resistance / not present 1-53
Positioner 4 function circuit diagram E-39 PTC ok 1-53
Positioner 5 4-53 PTC short circuit 1-53
Positioner 5 circuit diagram E-40 Pump 1-6, 1-10
Positioner 5 function circuit diagram E-41
Positioner control 1-22, 4-53 R
Positioner control function 4-50, 10-11 Rated control supply voltage Us (according
Positioner runs in close direction 1-44 to DIN EN 61131-2) D-3
Positioner runs in open direction 1-44 Rated frequency D-5
Power considerations 1-8 Rated impulse withstand voltage D-3,
Power consumption D-3 D-5, D-8
Power factor 1-16 Rated insulation voltage D-3, D-5, D-8
Power failure (UVO) 15-5 Rated motor current F-3
Power failure monitoring (UVO) 1-14, Rated operational voltage D-5
10-2, 10-14, 10-15 Read and adapt main display 1-35
Power failure monitoring (UVO) function Reading data 12-3
block 10-14 Reading in 1-60
Power failure monitoring (UVO) Reading out statistical data 14-6
settings 10-15 Reading out the device-internal error
Power failure time 10-15 buffer 1-62
Power management 1-8 Receive data 9-3
Power monitoring 1-8, 1-97 Record 8-3
Power-up behavior 3-5 Relay outputs D-4, D-8
Pre-alarm delay 3-12 Relay outputs on the Basic Unit and the Di-
Prerequisites for commissioning and gital Modules 6-1
servicing 14-2 Relay test 10-5, F-7, F-8
Preventive maintenance 14-6 Releases 4-1, 4-7
Pre-warning - overload (I > 115%) 15-5 Remote operation 4-5
Pre-warning level 3-12 Remote reset 10-10
Process alarm - configuration 12-14 Remote/automatic 4-5, 4-6
Process alarms 12-6 Removable terminals 13-2, 13-25, 14-11
Process and diagnosis alarm 12-15 Repairs F-9
Process in STEP 7 10-19 Replacing a Basic Unit 14-9
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 Index-9
Index
Replacing an expansion module or a de- Safety-oriented tripping with emergency

coupling module 14-10 STOP circuit diagram, Pole-changing
Replacing SIMOCODE pro components starter, category 4 E-62
14-9 Safety-oriented tripping with emergency
Replacing the current measuring module STOP circuit diagram, Reversing starter,
and the current/voltage measuring category 2 E-54
module 14-11 Safety-oriented tripping with emergency
Required function is not supported 15-5 STOP circuit diagram, Reversing starter,
Reset 1-14, 3-12, 10-2 category 4 E-56
Reset 1 (2, 3) 1-94 Safety-oriented tripping with emergency
Reset display settings 1-59 STOP circuit diagram, Star-delta starter,
Reset function 10-3, 10-4 category 4 E-58
Reset settings 10-6 Safety-oriented tripping with emergency
Resetting the basic factory setting with the STOP function circuit diagram, Dahlan-
SIMOCODE ES software 14-12 der, category 4 E-65
Resetting the factory settings 14-12 Safety-oriented tripping with emergency
Resetting, testing and parameterizing via STOP function circuit diagram, Direct
commands 1-60 starter, category 2 E-51
Resistive load 4-17 Safety-oriented tripping with emergency
Response x, 3-4, 3-14 STOP function circuit diagram, Direct
Restart 1-60 starter, category 4 E-53
Restart temperature F-5 Safety-oriented tripping with emergency
Restart time delay 10-14 STOP function circuit diagram, Pole-
Restart time delay (staggered) 10-15 changing starter, category 2 E-61
Return to main display 1-59 Safety-oriented tripping with emergency
Reversal of the direction of rotation 1-13 STOP function circuit diagram, Pole-
Reversing starter 1-8, 1-13, 1-22, 2-1, 2-2, changing starter, category 4 E-63
2-7, 2-9, 4-14, 4-24, B-43 Safety-oriented tripping with emergency
Reversing starter circuit diagram E-8 STOP function circuit diagram, Rever-
Reversing starter control function 4-22 sing starter, category 2 E-55
Reversing starter function circuit Safety-oriented tripping with emergency
diagram E-9 STOP function circuit diagram, Star-delta
Reversing starter, category 2 E-54 starter, category 4 E-59
Reversing starter, category 4 E-56 Safety-oriented tripping with emergency
STOP function circuit diagram, Rever-
S sing starter, category 4 E-57
S7 slave via OM SIMOCODE pro 12-15 Saving change-over command 4-16, 4-24,
Safe isolation according to 4-33, 4-36, 4-40, 4-43, 4-47, 4-59
IEC 60947-1 D-2 Saving parameters from a SIMOCODE ES
Safety and commissioning information for file into the Basic Unit 14-8
EEx areas F-1 Saving parameters from the Basic Unit into
Safety guidelines F-9 a SIMOCODE ES file 14-7
Safety-oriented tripping with emergency Saving parameters from the Basic Unit into
STOP E-49 the memory module 14-7
Safety-oriented tripping with emergency Saving parameters from the memory mo-
STOP circuit diagram, Dahlander, cate- dule into the Basic Unit 14-8
gory 4 E-64 Screw attachment 13-2, 13-3, 13-4, 13-5
Safety-oriented tripping with emergency Screw terminals 1-82
STOP circuit diagram, Direct starter, ca- sdp files 9-2
tegory 2 E-50 Securing and saving parameters 14-7
Safety-oriented tripping with emergency Send and receive data 9-3
STOP circuit diagram, Direct starter, ca- Send data 9-3
tegory 4 E-52 Send data on the PROFIBUS DP 6-1
Safety-oriented tripping with emergency Sensor 1-19
STOP circuit diagram, Pole-changing Sensor circuit D-10
starter, category 2 E-60 Sensor circuit fault 3-16
SIMOCODE pro
Index-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6060-22 DS 02
Index
Sensor circuit wiring F-6 SIMOCODE ES Professional 1-21, 1-80,

Sensor fault 1-56, 3-16 4-4, 12-2, 12-23, 12-24
Sensor measuring circuit 1-11, 1-16 SIMOCODE ES Professional + Service
Sensor out of range 1-56 Pack 1 1-80
Sensor type 1-56, 1-75 SIMOCODE ES Smart 1-21, 1-80
Sequence for connecting cables to the SIMOCODE ES Smart 2004 + Service
system interface 13-33 Pack 1 1-80
Sequence for connecting cables to the sy- SIMOCODE pro integrated with GSD
stem interface of the Operator Panel and 12-19
the Operator Panel with Display 13-36 SIMOCODE pro Object Manager
Sequence for connecting PROFIBUS DP Glossary-11
to the basic unit 13-39 SIMOCODE pro parameterization 1-78
Service 14-1, 14-6 SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 library 1-81,
Service data 1-16 Glossary-11
Set current 3-5 SIMOCODE pro S7 slave 12-3,
Set current Is D-5, 3-6 Glossary-11
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address 2-10, SIMOCODE-DP 9-2
2-11, 14-4 Slave Glossary-11
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via Slave diagnosis 12-9
SIMOCODE ES 2-11, 14-4 Slave operating modes 12-15
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via the Slave operating modes of
addressing plug 2-11, 14-4 SIMOCODE pro 12-15
Setting the rated motor current F-3 Smooth running down time 4-59
Setting up in potentially explosive Snap-on mounting 13-3
areas F-9 Socket assignment table - analog A-12
Set-up F-3 Socket assignment table - digital A-5
Shock resistance (sine pulse) D-2 Sockets (analog) 1-82
Short circuit D-5 Sockets (binary) 1-82
Short code 1-64 Soft starter 1-8, 1-13, 4-14, 4-56, B-53
Short-circuit protection according to Soft starter circuit diagram E-42
IEC 60947-4-1, type of coor- Soft starter control 1-23
dination 2 F-6 Soft starter control function 4-55
Short-circuit protection for auxiliary Soft starter function circuit diagram E-44
contacts D-4 Soft starter with reversing contactor
Short-circuit protection with fuses for mo- 4-14, 4-59, B-54
tor feeders for short-circuit currents up Soft starter with reversing contactor circuit
to 50 kA and 690 V D-14 diagram E-46
Signal conditioner 11-15 Soft starter with reversing contactor con-
Signal conditioner 1 (and 2, 3, 4) 1-93 trol function 4-57
Signal conditioner logic modules 11-15 Soft starter with reversing contactor
Signal conditioner settings 11-17 function circuit diagram E-48
Signal conditioning 1-15, 11-2 Software 1-21, 1-80
Signal types/output responses of non-vola- Software tools 1-80
tile elements 11-19 Solenoid valve 1-8, 1-13, 4-14, 4-49, B-51
SIMATIC Glossary-10 Solenoid valve circuit diagram E-30
SIMATIC PCS 7 1-81 Solenoid valve control 1-22
SIMATIC PDM 4-4, 12-2, 12-3, 12-23, Solenoid valve control function 4-48
Glossary-10 Solenoid valve function circuit diagram
SIMATIC PDM (PCS7) 12-2 E-31
SIMATIC powercontrol 12-2 Specifications A-4, B-4
SIMATIC S7 1-81, 12-16 Stalled positioner 15-5
SIMOCODE ES 1-80, 2-2, 3-1, 4-1, 6-1, Stalled rotor 1-10, 15-5
8-1, 9-1, 10-1, 10-10, 11-1, 12-1, 14-2, Stalled rotor level 3-14
14-7, B-36, Glossary-11 Stalled rotor monitoring 1-8
SIMOCODE ES Graphic 1-21, 1-80 Stalled rotor protection 3-1, 3-2, 3-14,
SIMOCODE ES parameter files 1-81, 9-2 Glossary-11
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 Index-11
Index
Standard diagnosis 12-6, 12-15 Summation current transformer 1-2, 1-19

Standard function 1-14, 10-1, 10-2, Supplying the Digital Module inputs
Glossary-12 13-14
Standard motor feeders 1-8 Supplying the inputs 7-5, 7-10
Standard mounting rail mounting 13-4, Supplying the inputs of the Basic Unit
13-5 13-11
Standards F-2 Switching from star to delta 4-27, 4-30
Star contactor 4-30 Switching the direction of rotation 4-22,
Star time 4-29, 4-33 4-30, 4-37, 4-44, 4-57
Star-delta circuits 4-31, 5-2 Switching the direction of travel 4-51
Star-delta reversing starter B-46 Switching the speed 4-34, 4-37, 4-41,
Star-delta reversing starter 4-14, 4-33 4-44
Star-delta reversing starter circuit System components 1-18, 1-22
diagram E-16 System interface 1-18, 13-33, D-5
Star-delta reversing starter control System interface cover 1-20, 1-79, 13-32,
function 4-30 13-35
Star-delta reversing starter function circuit System interface cover IP54 Glossary-12
diagram E-17 System interfaces 13-29, 13-35, D-3, D-7,
Star-delta starter 1-8, 1-13, 1-22, 4-14, D-8, D-9, D-10, D-12, D-13
4-29, B-45 System interfaces on Basic Units,
Star-delta starter circuit diagram (current expansion modules, decoupling module,
measuring in delta) E-12 current measuring modules and current/
Star-delta starter circuit diagram (current voltage measuring modules 13-32
measuring in incoming cable) E-14 System interfaces on the Operator
Star-delta starter control function 4-27 Panel 13-35
Star-delta starter function circuit diagram System interfaces on the Operator Panel
(current measuring in delta) E-13 and the Operator Panel with Display
Star-delta starter function circuit diagram 13-35
(current measuring in incoming
cable) E-15 T
Star-delta starter, category 4 E-58 T1, T2, T3 1-41, 1-55
Starting parameter lock 1-51 Tables A-1
Start-up override 4-17 Technical data D-1
Start-up override (run+) 5-15 Technical data of the current trans-
Start-up parameter block active 15-6 former 13-27
States of the status LEDs / contactor con- Telegram description 12-5
trols during the test 10-5, F-8 Temperature in the sensor measuring cir-
Station Glossary-12 cuits 1, 2 and 3 1-16
Station status 1 12-8 Temperature module 1-2, 1-11, 1-19, 1-55,
Station status 2 12-9 1-71, 1-75, D-10, Glossary-12
Station status 3 12-9 Temperature Module - warning level 15-6
Statistical data 14-6, Glossary-12 Temperature Module connection
Statistics/maintenance 1-32 example 13-19
Status - cooling down period active 15-6 Temperature Module inputs 7-1, 7-3,
Status - emergency start executed 15-6 7-11, 7-12
Status - test position (TPF) 15-6 Temperature Module out of range 15-6
Status display 1-32 Temperature Module pin assignment
Status display for PROFIBUS 13-18
communication 1-50 Temperature Module sensor fault 15-6
Status information 1-33, 4-12, 4-60, 12-6, Temperature monitoring 1-98,
12-11, 12-15, A-2 Glossary-13
Status information - configuration 12-11 Temperature monitoring 1-11, 1-19, 1-75,
STEP7 12-16, 12-17, 12-18, Glossary-12 1-98, Glossary-13
Stop times 5-17 Temperature monitoring settings 5-21
Stripping lengths 13-10, 13-25 Temperature sensor 1-2, 5-21
Summation current evaluation 5-2 Temperatures °C 1-37
SIMOCODE pro
Index-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6060-22 DS 02
Index
Temperatures °F 1-38 Timestamping/time synchronization

Terminal block 1-83 12-24
Test 1-14, 1-94, 10-2, F-7 TM inputs 1-95
Test function 10-3, 10-4 TM inputs function block 7-11
Test phases 10-5, F-8 TM warning T>/tripping T> B-36
Test position 10-7 TPF 1-92
Test Position Feedback (TPF) 1-14, 10-2, Transferring parameters to the basic
10-7, 15-6, Glossary-12 unit 2-9
Test Position Feedback settings 10-8 Transformation ratio 13-26
Test Position Feedback function block Trip - Bus 15-7
10-7 Trip - PLC/PCS 10-17, 15-7
Test settings 10-5 Trip - power failure UVO 10-15
Test trip 15-6 Trip - Test Position Feedback (TPF) 10-8
Test/Reset 1-60, 10-3 Trip antivalence 15-7
Test/Reset Basic Unit button D-3 Trip Bus/Trip PLC/PCS response 10-18
Test/Reset buttons 10-10 Trip class F-3
Testing 10-4 Trip current 1-17
Thermal motor model 10-4 Trip end position 15-7
Thermal motor model (thermal Trip feedback 4-17
memory) 3-10 Trip temporary components 15-7
Thermistor 1-94 Tripping characteristic F-3
Thermistor motor protection (PTC Tripping class 3-5, 3-8, Glossary-12
binary) 1-8, D-4 Tripping temperature F-5
Thermistor open circuit 15-7 Tripping time 3-5, 3-8
Thermistor protection 1-10, 3-1, 3-2, 3-15, Truth Table 1-15, 11-2, 11-4
Glossary-13 Truth Table for 2I/1O 11-6
Thermistor sensors 1-10 Truth Table for 2I/1O logic modules 11-6
Thermistor short circuit 15-7 Truth Table for 3I/1O 11-3, 11-5
Thermistor trip level 15-7 Truth Table for 3I/1O logic modules 11-3
Thermistors 3-15 Truth Table for 5I/2O 11-7
Through-hole openings 13-23, 13-24, D-6 Truth table for 5I/2O logic modules 11-7
Through-hole technology 1-18, 13-23, Truth Table TT 1 3I/1O
13-24 (TT 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 3I/1O) 1-98
Through-hole technology up to 200 A Truth Table TT 7 2I/1O (TT 8 2I/1O) 1-99
13-23, 13-24 Truth Table TT 9 5I/2O 1-99
Tightening torque 13-10, 13-25, D-4, D-6, Type of consumer load 4-17, 4-21, 4-24,
D-8, D-9, D-10, D-11 4-26, 4-29, 4-33, 4-36, 4-40, 4-43, 4-47,
Time frame for permissible start 4-54, 4-56, 4-59
processes 5-19 Type of current D-5
Time range for starts 5-19 Type of load 3-11
Time synchronization 10-19 Types of positioner control 4-53
Time synchronization via Types of signals/output responses of the
PROFIBUS DP 1-14 signal conditioners 11-16
Time to trip 1-16, 1-42 Typical response times D-15
Timer 1-15, 1-48, 11-2, 11-10
Timer 1 (and 2, 3, 4) 1-95 U
Timer actual value 1-48 UL1, UL2, UL3 1-38, 1-40, 1-54
Timer logic modules 11-10 Unbalance level 3-13
Timer output 1-48 Unbalance monitoring 1-8
Timer settings 11-14 Unbalance protection 3-1, 3-2, 3-13,
Timestamp 1-66 Glossary-13
Timestamp function block 10-20 Using a decoupling module
Timestamping 1-14, 1-100, 10-2, 10-19, (voltage measurement in isolated
10-20 networks) 1-76
Timestamping active 1-51 Using a decoupling module
Timestamping standard function 10-20 (voltage measurement in isolated net-
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 Index-13
Index
works) in connection with an operator

panel with display 1-77
Using an operator panel with display 1-76
UVO 1-98
UVO fault 10-14
V
Voltage in phases 1, 2 and 3 1-16
Voltage measurement 1-8, 1-54
Voltage monitoring 1-11, 1-97, 5-1, 5-8,
Glossary-13
Voltage monitoring for undervoltage 1-8
W
Warning level 0/4 - 20 mA < undershot
15-8
Warning level 0/4 - 20 mA > overshot
15-8
Warning level cos phi 15-7
Warning level I 15-7
Warning level I> overshot 15-7
Warning level P 15-7
Warning level P> overshot 15-7
Warning level U 15-8
Warning/tripping 0/4 - 20 mA B-36
Warnings 1-34, 1-58
Warranty F-9
Watchdog 1-14, 1-100, 10-2, 10-17
Watchdog function block 10-17
Watchdog settings 10-18
Win-SIMOCODE-DP 9-2
Win SIMOCODE DP converter 1-81, 9-2,
Glossary-13
Win SIMOCODE DP parameter files 1-81
Wiring 13-1, 13-10
Wiring the basic units, expansion modules
and decoupling module 13-10
Wiring the removable terminals for
Basic Units 13-12
Wiring the removable terminals of the
Digital Module 13-39
Wiring the removable terminals of the ex-
pansion modules and the decoupling
module 13-22
Writing data 12-3
Writing/reading data records with
STEP7 B-3
Wrong password 15-8
SIMOCODE pro
Index-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6060-22 DS 02
AM Analog Module
AS Alarm Switch
AWG American Wire Gauge
Acycl. Acyclic
OP Operator Panel
OPO Operational Protection OFF
DCM Decoupling Module
DM Digital Module
TO Torque OPEN
TC Torque CLOSED
DP Decentralized Periphery
EMF Electromotive Force
EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility
FMS Fieldbus Message Specification
BU Basic Unit
GSD Device Data
AS Auxiliary Switch
MM Memory Module
NTC Negative Temperature Coefficient (resistance dependent on temperature)
OM Object Manager
PCS Process Control System
PDM Process Device Manager
PD Programming Device
PCS Process Control System
PTC Positive Temperature Coefficient (resistance dependent on temperature)
FB Feedback
FO Feedback OPEN
TPF Test Position Feedback
FC Feedback CLOSE
CF Control Function
PLC Programmable Logical Controller
Th Thermistor
LC Local control
Cycl. Cyclic
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 Abbreviations-1
SIMOCODE pro
Abbreviations-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Glossary
Active Power Monitoring

SIMOCODE pro V offers the option of two-phase active
power monitoring in which not only the current, but also the
power factor (cos phi) is taken into account.
Addressing Plug
The Addressing Plug is necessary to enable the "hardware-
related" allocation of the PROFIBUS DP address to a Basic
Unit without a PC/programming device.
Analog Module (AM)

The Analog Module offers the option of extending BU 2 by
adding optional Analog Inputs and Outputs (0/4 mA - 20 mA).
This makes it possible to measure and monitor any arbitrary
process variables which can be mapped onto a 0/4 mA to 20
mA signal. The automation system has free access to the
measured process variables.
Basic Unit (BU)

The Basic Units are the fundamental components of the
SIMOCODE pro system. Basic Units are always necessary
when using SIMOCODE pro. They have the same enclosure
width of 45 mm and are equipped with removable terminals.
Basic Unit 1 is the fundamental component of the
SIMOCODE pro C device series. It contains the important
Motor Control Functions and Motor Protection Functions.
Basic Unit 2 is the fundamental component of the
SIMOCODE pro V device series. It contains all functions and
fulfils all requirements for Motor Protection, Motor Control,
Diagnosis and Monitoring.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02 Glossary-1
Glossary
Baud Rate
The Baud Rate is the speed with which data is transferred
and indicates the number of transmitted bits per second
(Baud Rate = Bit Rate).
With PROFIBUS DP, Baud Rates from 9.6 kBaud to 12 MBaud
are possible.
Bus
A common transmission path with which all stations are
connected. It has two defined ends.
With PROFIBUS, the bus is a two-wire line (copper
conductor) or a fiber optic cable.
Bus Segment
The PROFIBUS DP consists of at least one bus segment. A
bus segment has at least two stations, one of which must be
a DP master. A maximum of 32 stations can be connected to
a bus segment.
Class
The Class (Tripping Class) indicates the maximum tripping
time in which SIMOCODE must trip a current that is 7.2 times
the value of the Set Current (Is) in a cold state (Motor
Protection according to IEC 60947). If Class 10 is set for
SIMOCODE pro (for example), it is guaranteed that if a
current that is 7.2 times the Set Current occurs, the (cold)
motor will switch off after 10 seconds. The Tripping Class can
be set to 8 different settings ranging from Class 5 to Class
40.
Class 1 Master
Active stations on PROFIBUS DP. The Cyclic Data exchange
with other stations is characteristic for this type of master.
Typical Class 1 Masters are, for example, PLCs with a
PROFIBUS DP connection.
Class 2 Master
Optional stations on PROFIBUS DP.
Typical Class 2 Masters are, for example,
• PC/programming devices with the
"SIMOCODE ES professional" software
• PDM (PCS7)
• PC with "SIMARIS manager" software (power
management).
Cooling Down Period

The Cooling Down Period is the amount of time that must
elapse before an Overload Trip can be reset. This is usually
SIMOCODE pro
Glossary-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Glossary
5 minutes.
Supply voltage failures of SIMOCODE pro during this time
extend the specified time correspondingly.
Connecting cable
Connecting cables are necessary for connecting the
individual Basic Units with their Current Measuring Modules
and, if required, with their Expansion Modules or Operator
Panels. They are available in various versions and lengths
(ribbon cable 0.025 m, 0.1 m, 0.5 m; round cable 2.0 m). The
total length of all connecting cables must not exceed 3 m per
system!
Control Functions
Control functions (e.g. Direct Starters, Reversing Starters)
are used for controlling load feeders. They have the following
important features:
• Monitoring the switch-on/switch-off process (no current
flows in the main circuit without the ON command)
• Monitoring the OFF state (no current flows in the main
circuit without the ON command)
• Monitoring the ON status
• Tripping if a fault occurs.
Control Stations
Control Stations are places from which Control Commands
are issued to the motor. The "Control Stations" function block
is used for administration, switching and prioritization of
these different Control Stations. With this, SIMOCODE pro
allows the parallel administration of up to four different
Control Stations. Dependent on the Control Function, up to 5
different Control Commands can be transmitted from every
Control Station to SIMOCODE pro.
• Local control, in the direct vicinity of the motor. Control
commands via pushbuttons.
• PLC/PCS, switching commands are issued by the
automation system (remote).
• PC, Control Commands are issued via an operator control
station or via PROFIBUS DPV1 with the SIMOCODE ES
software.
• Operator Panel / Operator Panel with Display, Control
Commands are issued via the buttons of the Operator
Panel / Operator Panel with Display in the switchgear
cabinet door.
Cos phi Monitoring

Cos phi Monitoring monitors the load condition of inductive
loads. The main field of application is for asynchronous
motors in 1-phase or 3-phase networks, whose loads vary
greatly. The measuring principle for the power factor (cos phi)
SIMOCODE pro
Glossary
is based on the evaluation of the phase displacement

between voltage and current in one phase.
Current Measuring Module (IM)

Current Measuring Modules are used together with the Basic
Units of the SIMOCODE pro C and SIMOCODE pro V device
series.
The Current Measuring Module must be selected according
to the Set Current to be monitored (Rated Operating Current
of the motor). The Current Measuring Modules cover current
ranges between 0.3 A and 630 A, with intermediate
transformers up to 820 A.
Current/Voltage Measuring Module

The SIMOCODE pro V device allows use of a Current/Voltage
Measuring Module instead of a Current Measuring Module.
In addition to measuring the motor current, Current/Voltage
Measuring Modules also enable
• Monitoring voltages up to 690 V
• Calculation and monitoring of power and cos phi
• Monitoring the Phase Sequence.
Decoupling Module
A module for the upstream (series) connection of a Current/
Voltage Measuring Module to the system interface when
voltage and power measurements are implemented in non-
earthed networks.
Device Data (GSD File)

The Device Data (GSD) contains a description of the
respective device. It is used for integrating the device into
SIMATIC S7 or any DP standard master system (automation
system).
Digital Module (DM)

Digital Modules offer the option of further increasing the
types and number of Binary Inputs and Outputs on Basic Unit
2 as applicable.
A maximum of two digital modules can be connected to
Basic Unit 2. All versions can be combined with each other.
SIMOCODE pro V can thus be extended to a maximum of
twelve Binary Inputs and seven Binary Outputs.
Door Adapter
The door adaptor is necessary for making the system
interface of a Basic Unit available at an easily accessible
location (e.g. front panel), thus enabling fast
parameterization.
SIMOCODE pro
Glossary
DP Master
A master which works with the DP protocol according to the
EN 50 170 standard, Volume 2, PROFIBUS.
Cyclic Send Data is exchanged between the DP master and
the DP slave once in every DP cycle. The DP master sends
the Cyclic Receive Data to SIMOCODE pro. In response,
SIMOCODE pro sends the Cyclic Send Data to the DP
master.
DP Slave/DP Standard Slave

A slave which is operated on the PROFIBUS bus with the
PROFIBUS DP protocol and works according to the EN 50
170 standard, Volume 2, PROFIBUS.
Earth-Fault Module (EM)
The Earth-Fault Module offers the option of implementing

powerful external Earth-Fault Monitoring in connection with
the 3UL22 Summation Current Transformer (making it
possible to evaluate Rated Fault Currents of 0.3 A, 0.5 A and
1 A). In addition to the Internal Earth-Fault Monitoring
function which is supported by both device series,
SIMOCODE pro V can be extended by an additional and more
precise External Earth-Fault Monitoring system.
Earth-Fault Monitoring
See Monitoring Earth Faults.
Emergency Start
The Emergency Start deletes the Thermal Memory from
SIMOCODE pro each time it is activated. This enables
immediate Restarting of the motor after an Overload Trip.
This function can be used to:
• Enable an immediate Restart/Reset after an Overload Trip
• Influence the operation of the Thermal Memory (Motor
Model), if required.
Since the Emergency Start is edge-triggered, this function
cannot permanently affect the Thermal Motor Model.
Expansion Modules
Expansion Modules are intended as optional additions for the
SIMOCODE pro V device series. The following Expansion
Modules are available:
• Digital Module (DM)
• Analog Module (AM)
• Earth-fault Module (EM)
• Temperature Module (TM).
All Expansion Modules have the same design with an
enclosure width of 22.5 mm. They are equipped with
SIMOCODE pro
Glossary
2 system interfaces (incoming/outgoing) and removable

terminals.
Factory Settings
The Factory Settings are used to reset all parameters of a
device to the default settings to which they were set at the
factory.
The Factory Settings can be configured using the "TEST/
RESET" button on the Basic Unit or via the SIMOCODE ES
software.
Function Block
Defined group of functions that can be freely-parameterized
by the user and connected to other Function Blocks in order
to create a complete branched logic system. This means
conventional wired control circuits containing Auxiliary Relays
and Time Relays can be completely replaced.
Independent Operation
SIMOCODE pro C and pro V protect and control the motor
feeder independent of the automation system. Even if the
automation system (PLC) fails, or if communication is
disrupted, the motor feeder remains fully protected and
controllable. SIMOCODE pro can be used without being
connected to PROFIBUS DP. This can easily be connected
later as applicable.
Logic Module
Logical Functions, Time Relay Functions and Counter
Functions are implemented using Logic Modules.
Master
PROFIBUS DP is based on a Master-Slave architecture.
Telegrams are sent from the Master to the actuated station
(Slave) and are answered by it in return.
Memory Module
The Memory Module is plugged into the system interface
and is used for fast reading in or out of the entire
SIMOCODE pro parameterization, e.g. if a unit is exchanged.
Monitoring 0/4-20 mA
SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring of the
Analog Signals of a transducer (standard 0/4 - 20 mA Output
Signal). The Analog Signals are fed to the "0/4 - 20 mA"
Function Block via the Analog Module.
SIMOCODE pro
Glossary
The following Monitoring Functions
• Earth-Fault Monitoring
• Current Limit Monitoring
• Voltage Monitoring
• Power Factor (cos phi) Monitoring
• Active Power Monitoring
• 0/4 A - 20 mA Signal Monitoring
• Operation Monitoring
• Analog Temperature Monitoring
operate "in the background" in the same way as Motor
Protection and Motor Control. They can be active or not,
according to the control function selected.
Monitoring of Earth Faults

SIMOCODE pro measures and monitors all three-phase
currents. By evaluating the summation current of the three
current values, the motor feeder can be monitored for a
possible Fault Current or Earth Fault.
There is a difference between Internal and External Earth-
Fault Monitoring:
Internal Earth-Fault Monitoring
Internal Earth-fault Monitoring via Current Measuring
Modules or Current/Voltage Measuring Modules is only
possible for motors with a 3-phase connection in networks
that are either grounded directly or with low impedance.
The Basic Unit uses the total current to detect a possible
Fault Current / Earth-Fault Current.
External Earth-Fault Monitoring with SIMOCODE pro V:
External Earth-Fault Monitoring via a Summation Current
Transformer and an Earth-Fault Module is normally used for
networks that are grounded with high impedance.
The Earth-Fault Module (EM) evaluates Rated Fault Currents
using an externally connected Summation Current
Transformer (e.g 3UL22).
Monitoring the Number of Starts

Monitoring the Number of Starts can protect system parts
(motor, devices such as soft starters and converters) from too
many start processes within a parameterizable time frame
and, thus, prevent damage. This is particularly useful for
commissioning or manual control.
Monitoring the Voltage

SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase undervoltage
monitoring of either a three-phase network or a one-phase
network for freely selectable limits, direction of rotation (for
AC) or readiness to start.
SIMOCODE pro
Glossary
The response of SIMOCODE pro on reaching a Pre-warning

Level or Trip Level can be freely parameterized and delayed.
Voltage measuring is carried out using Current/Voltage
Measuring Modules.
Monitoring the Current Limits

Monitoring of Current Limits is used for process monitoring.
Thus, impending irregularities in the system can be detected
in good time: Exceeding a Current Limit while it is still below
the Overload Limit can be an indication that there is a dirty
filter on a pump (for example) or that a motor bearing is
running more and more sluggishly. Falling below a Current
Limit can be the first hint that a drive motor belt is worn out.
Motor Protection
The Basic Unit has several protection mechanisms for
current-dependent Motor Protection:
• Overload Protection
• Unbalance Protection
• Stalled Rotor Protection
• Thermistor Protection.
Motor Stop Time Monitoring

SIMOCODE pro can monitor the Stop Times of a motor in
order to avoid plant down times due to failed motors caused
by either running too long (wearing out) or being stopped for
too long.
Operating Hours Monitoring

The Operating Hours Monitoring function offers the option of
recording the Operating Hours (service life) of a motor, and
generating maintenance prompts for the Motor in good time
as applicable.
Operator Panel (OP)

The motor feeder is controlled from the switchgear cabinet
using the Operator Panel. It contains all the status LEDs
which are on the Basic Units, the "TEST/RESET" button and
the external system interface.
It can be used with both the SIMOCODE pro C device series
and the SIMOCODE pro V device series.
Operator Panel with Display (OPD)

The Operator Panel with Display can be used as an alternative
to the standard Operator Panel (OP).
It displays the present measured values, operating and
diagnosis data, status information for the motor feeder at the
switchgear cabinet as well as the device-internal error
SIMOCODE pro
Glossary
protocol. It contains all the status LEDs that are also present
on the Basic Unit and provides a system interface outside the
switchgear cabinet. Its keys can be used to control the motor
and to navigate the display menu.
The Operator Panel with Display can only be used in
combination with Basic Unit 2 (SIMOCODE pro V) from
product version *E03* onwards.
Operation Monitoring
SIMOCODE pro can monitor the Operating Hours and Stop
Times of a motor and restrict the Number of Start-Ups in a
defined time frame in order to avoid plant downtimes due to
failed motors caused by running or being stopped for too
long.
Operational Protection OFF (OPO)

The "Operational Protection OFF (OPO)" function block puts
the Positioner into a safe position and switches the motor off.
Overload Protection
SIMOCODE pro protects three-phase and AC motors
according to IEC 60947-4-1. The tripping class can be set to 8
different settings, ranging from Class 5 to Class 40.
Pause Time
The Pause Time is the specified time for the Cooling
Response of the Motor when tripped under normal operating
conditions (not in the case of an Overload Trip!). After this
interval, the Thermal Memory in SIMOCODE pro is deleted
and a new cold start is possible. This makes frequent start-
ups possible within a short period of time.
PC Cable
A PC can be connected to the system interface of a Basic
Unit for device parameterization using the PC cable and the
serial interface.
Programming Device (PD)

A Programming Device is normally an industry-compatible,
compact and transportable PC. It is characterized by a special
hardware and software configuration for SIMATIC
Programmable Logical Controllers.
PROFIBUS User Organization (PUO) Installation Guidelines

For PROFIBUS networks, the PROFIBUS DP/FMS installation
guidelines from the PROFIBUS user organization must be
adhered to. They contain important information about the
cable routing and commissioning of PROFIBUS networks.
SIMOCODE pro
Glossary
PROFIBUS
Process Fieldbus, European process and fieldbus standard as
defined in the PROFIBUS standard (EN 50 170, Volume 2,
PROFIBUS).
It lays down the functional, electrical and mechanical
properties for a serial bit fieldbus system.
PROFIBUS is a bus system that networks PROFIBUS-
compatible automation systems and field devices at the
cabinet and field level. PROFIBUS is available with the DP
protocols (decentralized periphery), FMS (fieldbus message
specification), PA (process automation) or TF (technological
functions).
PROFIBUS DP
PROFIBUS bus system with the DP protocol (decentralized
periphery).
The main task of PROFIBUS DP is fast Cyclic Data exchange
between the central DP devices and the periphery devices.
PROFIBUS DP Interface
SIMOCODE pro has an integrated PROFIBUS DP interface
(SUB-D socket or terminal connection on the Basic Units).
PROFIBUS DPV1
Expansion of the DP protocol.
This enables Acyclic Data exchange of Parameter, Diagnosis,
Receive and Test Data.
Programmable Logical Controller (PLC)

Control whose function is stored as a program in the control
unit. The PLC consists of CPU, memory, Input/Output
Modules and an internal bus system. The periphery and the
programming language are based on the needs of the control
engineering.
SIMATIC
Term for industrial automation products and systems from
Siemens AG.
SIMATIC PDM
You can also configure SIMOCODE pro via the SIMATIC PDM
(Process Device Manager).
The following options are available:
• SIMATIC PDM as a stand-alone program
• PDM, integrated into STEP7.
SIMOCODE pro
Glossary
SIMOCODE ES
Standard parameterization software for SIMOCODE pro,
which can be run on a PC/programming device under
Windows 2000 or Windows XP.
SIMOCODE pro Object Manager OM

Part of SIMOCODE ES Professional. When SIMOCODE ES
Professional and the SIMOCODE pro Object Manager are
installed on a PC/programming device, SIMOCODE ES
Professional can be called directly from the Step7 HW
configuration. This enables simple and complete SIMATIC S7
configuration.
SIMOCODE pro PCS-7 Library

The SIMOCODE pro PCS-7 library is used to connect
SIMOCODE pro to the SIMATIC PCS 7 Process Control
System. It contains
• The corresponding diagnosis and driver modules
containing the respective diagnosis and driver concept of
SIMATIC PCS 7
• The elements (symbols and faceplate) necessary for
operating and monitoring.
SIMOCODE pro S7 Slave

The SIMOCODE pro S7 slave is a special slave that has the
following characteristics:
• It supports the S7 model (Diagnosis Alarms, Process
Alarms)
• It can be parameterized.
Slave
PROFIBUS DP is based on a Master-Slave architecture.
Telegrams are sent from the Master to the actuated station
(Slave) and are answered by it in return.
Stalled Rotor Protection

After the motor current overshoots an adjustable Blocking
limit (Current Limit), a definable and delayable response can
be parameterized in SIMOCODE pro. For example, the motor
can be set to switch off quickly independently of the Overload
Protection. The Stalled Rotor Protection is only active after
the parameterized class interval has elapsed, e.g. for Class 10
after 10 seconds, and prevents unnecessarily high thermal
and mechanical loads as well as premature deterioration of
the motor.
SIMOCODE pro
Glossary
Standard Function
Standard functions are typical motor functions that can be
activated according to need and, as applicable, individually
set for each motor feeder.
They are already available, work independently of the
selected control function and can be used/activated as
optional additions.
Station
Device which can send, receive or amplify data via the bus,
e.g. Master, Slave.
Statistical Data
SIMOCODE pro makes Statistical Data available which can be
read out with SIMOCODE ES under Target System >
Service Data/Statistical Data (for example).
STEP7
Engineering system. Contains programming languages for
creating user programs for SIMATIC-S7 controls.
System Interface Cover IP54

Cover to protect the system interface on the door adaptor or
on the Operator Panel / Operator Panel with Display from
becoming dirty or to seal it.
Test Position Feedback (TPF)

If the motor feeder is in the Test Position, its main circuit is
isolated from the network. However, the control voltage is
connected.
The "Cold Starting" function test is carried out in this state.
Cold Starting means the motor feeder is tested without a
current flowing in the main circuit.
Tripping Class
See "Class".
Temperature Module (TM)

The Temperature Module offers the option of expanding the
SIMOCODE pro V device series using an Analog Temperature
Monitoring System. With this, up to three Analog Sensor
Measuring Circuits (two-wire or three-wire systems) can be
connected. The temperatures recorded can be fully
integrated into the process, can be monitored and are also
available for a higher-level automation system. You can, for
example, implement analog Temperature Monitoring of the
motor windings, bearings, coolant or gear box oil.
SIMOCODE pro V supports various sensor types (NTC,
SIMOCODE pro
Glossary
KTY83/84, PT100 and PT1000) for use with hard, fluid or

gaseous media.
See Temperature Module (TM).
Thermistor Protection
The Basic Units (BU1 and BU2) also make it possible to
connect thermistor sensors (binary PTC) for monitoring the
motor temperature.
Unbalance Protection
The extent of the Phase Unbalance can be monitored and
transmitted to the Control System. A definable and delayable
response can be tripped when an adjustable limit has been
overshot. If Phase Unbalance is greater than 50 %, a
reduction in the Tripping Time according to the overload
characteristic curve takes place automatically since the heat
development in motors increases under asymmetrical
conditions.
Voltage Monitoring
See Monitoring the Voltage

Software tool for converting "old" Win SIMOCODE DP
parameter files (3UF5 device series) into SIMOCODE ES
parameter files for SIMOCODE pro.
SIMOCODE pro
Glossary
SIMOCODE pro
From (please complete)
Name
Company/Department
To
SIEMENS AG Address
A&D CD MM3
Telephone
92220 Amberg, Germany
Fax
Fax: ++49 9621/ 80-3337
SIMOCODE pro Manual

Did you notice any mistakes while reading this manual?
Please use this reply sheet to inform us about them.
We are grateful for your comments and suggestions.
SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-22 DS 02
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Automation and Drives

Low-Voltage Controls and Distribution
Postfach 4848
D-90327 Nürnberg
w w w . s i e m e n s . com / s i m o c o d e Order-No. 3UF7970-0AA00-0

Simocode Manual 2007 PDF

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Simocode Manual 2007 PDF

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

System Manual Edition 03/2007

Siemens AG Order No.: 3UF7970-0AA00-0 Copyright © Siemens AG

1 System Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

2 Short Instructions for Configuring a Reversing Starter . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.1 Introduction and Objective of the Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

3 Motor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . 3-2

4 Motor Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.1 Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. . 4-2

5 Monitoring Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5.1 Earth-Fault Monitoring . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 5-2

6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . 7-2

8 Analog Value Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

9 3UF50 Compatibility Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

10 Standard Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

10.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . 10-2

11 Logic Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

11.1 Introduction . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 11-2

12.1 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

13 Mounting, Wiring, Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

13.1 General Information about Mounting and Wiring . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . 13-2

14 Commissioning and Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

14.1 General Information about Commissioning and Service .. .. . . .. .. . 14-2

15 Alarm, Fault and System Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1

A.1 Active Control Stations, Contactor/Lamp Controls and Status Information

B Data Formats and Data Records. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

B.1 Handling Data Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . B-3

B.20.3 Reversing Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . B-43

C Dimension Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

C.1 3UF70 Basic Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . C-2

D Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1

D.1 Common Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. . D-2

E Example Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1

E.1 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . E-2

E.9.2 "Dahlander Reversing Starter" Function Circuit Diagram . . . . . . .. .. . E-21

F Safety and Commissioning Information for EEx Areas . . . . . . . . . . F-1

F.1 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-2

F.5 Further Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-10

Purpose of this manual

Required basic knowledge

Topic Target group

SIMOCODE pro response tables

Response Function 1 Function 2 Function 3

Short description of the responses:

SIMOCODE pro is a flexible, modular motor management system

Operator panel (OP)

Digital module (DM)

Operator panel (OP)

Additional optional expansions are possible

Fig. 1-1: Typical SIMOCODE pro hardware configurations

System components: See Chapter 1.7 "Description of System Components".

1.2 Simplifying SIMOCODE pro Configuration

The following figure illustrates the conventional configuration of a direct

3/N/PE ~ 50/60 Hz 400/230 V1L1

Fig. 1-2: Conventional configuration of a motor feeder (direct starter)

Configuration with SIMOCODE pro

3/N/PE ~ 50/60 Hz 400/230 V

Current measuring A2 A1 IN1 IN2 24 V

1.3 Application Example

Controlling the pump

PLC/PCS Control station

1) Only for basic unit 2 from product version E03